Raymarine CP100 CHIRP Γκρι, Waveinn
a Series c Series Release 12 e Series
Installation and operation instructions
English Date: 10-2014 Document number: 81337-12-EN © 2014 Raymarine UK Limited
Document and software changes
The following tables describe the main changes that have been made since the last release of both the product software and this document.
· Applicable software version: LightHouse II -- Release 12.xx
· Applicable documents: 8133712.
· Applicable products: a65 / a65 WiFi / a67 / a67 WiFi / a68 / a68 WiFi / a75 / a75 WiFi / a77 / a77 WiFi / a78 / a78 WiFi / a95 / a97 / a98 / a125 / a127 / a128 / e7 / e7D / c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165.
Document and Software changes
Description
Applicable application
Applicable chapter(s) or section(s)
Added support for up to 2 Radar scanners on the same network.
Radar application · 21.2 Multiple radar scanners
Using the power button to switch operating modes
· 3.1 System integration
Added support for displaying up to 4 camera feeds using Camera
Quad View.
application
· 22.3 Displaying multiple camera feeds using Quad View
Added `Battery Charge' data item and changed `RPM & Data application · 9.7 List of data items Speed' data item to `RPM & SOG' in the Data application.
Increased support for number of batteries to 16.
System
· 9.2 Boat details
Software changes
Description Added support in the Radar application for extreme latitudes up to 82 degrees north.
Applicable application
Applicable chapter(s) or section(s)
Radar application N/A
For a full software version history including a list of applicable MFD variants for each version, refer to: · Appendix F Software release history.
Document changes
Description Updated power consumption figures for a Series.
Applicable application
N/A
Updated PowerSave mode section to include caution that N/A in PowerSave mode power will still be consumed by the unit. The term Standby has also been removed from the title to ensure it is differentiated from gS Series standby mode.
Added internal storage table to Technical Specification, N/A detailing available internal storage for each MFD variant.
Added popular features table to Camera application overview and example recording times for CAM200IP to Record and playback section.
Camera application
Applicable chapter(s) or section(s) · Chapter 31 Technical specification
a6x Power specification a7x Power specification a9x Power specification a12x Power specification · PowerSave mode
· Internal storage
· 22.1 Camera application overview and features
· 22.9 Record and playback Approximate record times
ENGLISH Document number: 81337-12 Date: 10-2014
Description
Applicable application
Added Panoramic photo and 2D shading to list of disabled Chart application overlays / object when Chart detail is set to low.
Updated list of settings which can be backed-up / restored. N/A
Changed IP camera connections section to show the N/A ethernet coupler instead of the cross over coupler and added parts numbers for adaptor cable and ethernet coupler.
Added IP camera guidance to IP Camera connection N/A section.
Added details for Interpreting SideVisionTM images to the N/A Sonar technologies section of the Fishfinder chapter.
Updated Appendix -- NMEA 2000 sentences to reflect N/A LightHouse II V12.xx supported PGN's.
Applicable chapter(s) or section(s) · 18.13 Cartography objects
Chart detail · 8.6 Save and restore items · 4.11 IP Camera connections
· IP camera guidance
· 19.2 Sonar technologies Interpreting SideVisionTM images
· Appendix D NMEA 2000 sentences
Trademark and patents notice Raymarine, Tacktick, Clear Pulse, Truzoom, HSB, SeaTalk, SeaTalkhs, SeaTalkng, Micronet, Raytech, Gear Up, Marine Shield, Seahawk, Autohelm, Automagic, and Visionality are registered or claimed trademarks of Raymarine Belgium. FLIR, DownVision, SideVision, Dragonfly, Instalert, Infrared Everywhere, and The World's Sixth Sense are registered or claimed trademarks of FLIR Systems, Inc. All other trademarks, trade names, or company names referenced herein are used for identification only and are the property of their respective owners. This product is protected by patents, design patents, patents pending, or design patents pending.
Fair Use Statement You may print no more than three copies of this manual for your own use. You may not make any further copies or distribute or use the manual in any other way including without limitation exploiting the manual commercially or giving or selling copies to third parties.
Software updates Check the website www.raymarine.com for the latest software releases for your product.
Product handbooks
The latest versions of all English and translated handbooks are available to download in PDF format from the website www.raymarine.com. Please check the website to ensure you have the latest handbooks.
Copyright ©2014 Raymarine UK Ltd. All rights reserved.
Contents
Chapter 1 Important information.......................... 9 Certified Installation ..................................................... 9 TFT Displays ............................................................. 10 Water ingress ............................................................ 10 Disclaimers ............................................................... 11 Memory cards and chart cards ................................... 11 EMC installation guidelines ........................................ 11 RF exposure ............................................................. 12 FCC.......................................................................... 12 Compliance Statement (Part 15.19) ............................ 12 FCC Interference Statement (Part 15.105 (b)) ............. 12 Industry Canada ........................................................ 12 Industry Canada (Français) ........................................ 12 Japanese approvals................................................... 12 Third party software license agreements ..................... 13 Suppression ferrites ................................................... 13 Connections to other equipment ................................. 13 Declaration of conformity............................................ 13 Product disposal ........................................................ 13 Pixel defect policy...................................................... 13 Warranty registration.................................................. 13 IMO and SOLAS........................................................ 13 Technical accuracy .................................................... 13
Chapter 2 Document and product information........................................................... 15 2.1 Handbook information .......................................... 16 2.2 Handbook conventions ......................................... 17 2.3 Handbook illustrations .......................................... 19 2.4 Product overview ................................................. 19 2.5 System feature highlights...................................... 23
Chapter 3 Planning the installation ................... 29 3.1 System integration ............................................... 30 3.2 Installation checklist ............................................. 36 3.3 Multiple data sources (MDS) overview................... 36 3.4 Identifying your display variant .............................. 37 3.5 Networking constraints ......................................... 37 3.6 Typical systems ................................................... 39 3.7 System protocols ................................................. 42 3.8 Data master......................................................... 43 3.9 a6x and a7x parts supplied ................................... 43 3.10 a9x and a12x parts supplied ............................... 44 3.11 e7 / e7D Parts supplied....................................... 44 3.12 c Series and e Series parts supplied .................. 45 3.13 Tools required for installation............................... 45 3.14 Selecting a location ............................................ 46
Chapter 4 Cables and connections.................... 49 4.1 General cabling guidance ..................................... 50 4.2 Connections overview .......................................... 51 4.3 a9x and a12x connections overview ...................... 52 4.4 Power connection -- a6x and a7x ......................... 52
4.5 Power and data connection................................... 54 4.6 Network connections ............................................ 57 4.7 Keypad connection............................................... 57 4.8 Radar connection................................................. 58 4.9 Sonar connection ................................................. 60 4.10 Thermal camera connection................................ 63 4.11 IP Camera connections....................................... 64 4.12 Weather receiver connection............................... 65 4.13 Fusion link connection ........................................ 66 4.14 GPS connection ................................................. 67 4.15 GA150 connection.............................................. 67 4.16 AIS connection................................................... 68 4.17 Fastheading connection...................................... 69 4.18 SeaTalkng connections ........................................ 69 4.19 NMEA 2000 connection ...................................... 70 4.20 SeaTalk connection ............................................ 71 4.21 NMEA 0183 connection ...................................... 71 4.22 a6x and a7x to NMEA 0183 DSC VHF radio connection ................................................................ 72 4.23 Camera / Video connection ................................. 73 4.24 Camera / video in-out connection ........................ 73 4.25 Media player connection ..................................... 74 4.26 Bluetooth remote control connection.................... 76 4.27 Remote control functions .................................... 77 4.28 WiFi connections................................................ 79
Chapter 5 Mounting............................................. 81 5.1 Mounting - a Series .............................................. 82 5.2 Mounting - c Series and e Series........................... 84
Chapter 6 Getting started ................................... 87 6.1 Display power ...................................................... 88 6.2 a Series Controls ................................................. 89 6.3 e7 / e7D Controls ................................................. 89 6.4 c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165 Controls............................................................ 90 6.5 Homescreen overview -- Touch only displays .................................................................... 91 6.6 Homescreen overview -- c Series / e Series ........... 92 6.7 Pages ................................................................. 94 6.8 Applications ......................................................... 95 6.9 Splitscreen controls .............................................. 96 6.10 Screen overview ................................................ 97 6.11 Basic touchscreen operations............................ 100 6.12 Multi-Touch gestures ........................................ 101 6.13 Initial set up procedures.................................... 102 6.14 GPS Status...................................................... 104 6.15 Enabling autopilot control.................................. 107 6.16 Engine identification ......................................... 108 6.17 Enabling AIS functions.......................................110 6.18 Shared preferences...........................................110 6.19 Software updates .............................................. 111 6.20 Learning resources............................................112
5
Chapter 7 System checks ................................. 113 7.1 GPS Check.........................................................114 7.2 Radar check .......................................................114 7.3 Sonar check .......................................................115 7.4 Thermal camera setup and checks.......................117
Chapter 8 Managing display data .................... 119 8.1 Memory cards and chart cards ............................ 120 8.2 a6x and a7x....................................................... 120 8.3 a9x and a12x ..................................................... 121 8.4 c and e Series.................................................... 122 8.5 Saving user data and user settings...................... 123 8.6 Save and restore items....................................... 126 8.7 Screenshots ...................................................... 128 8.8 Resetting your system ........................................ 128
Chapter 9 Customizing your display ............... 129 9.1 Language selection ............................................ 130 9.2 Boat details........................................................ 131 9.3 Units set-up ....................................................... 132 9.4 Time and Date set-up ......................................... 133 9.5 Display preferences ........................................... 134 9.6 Databar and databox overview............................ 137 9.7 List of data items................................................ 139 9.8 System set-up menus......................................... 146
Chapter 10 Document viewer application ...................................................................... 157 10.1 Document viewer overview ............................... 158
Chapter 11 Autopilot control ............................ 161 11.1 Autopilot Control overview and features ............. 162 11.2 Enabling autopilot control .................................. 162 11.3 Engaging the autopilot ...................................... 163 11.4 Adjusting the current locked heading ................. 163 11.5 Disengaging the autopilot.................................. 164 11.6 Manually displaying the pilot control dialog box ......................................................................... 165 11.7 Pilot Control dialog ........................................... 165 11.8 Pilot Bar........................................................... 166 11.9 Pilot Set-up ...................................................... 167 11.10 Pilot settings................................................... 167 11.11 Commissioning ............................................... 170 11.12 Autopilot status symbols.................................. 174 11.13 Autopilot alarms.............................................. 174
Chapter 12 Alarm management........................ 175 12.1 Alarms overview............................................... 176 12.2 Alarm Manager overview .................................. 176 12.3 Alarm options................................................... 179
Chapter 13 Man Overboard (MOB)................... 185 13.1 Man overboard................................................. 186
Chapter 14 DSC VHF radio integration............ 189 14.1 DSC VHF radio integration................................ 190
14.2 Enabling DSC VHF radio integration.................. 190
Chapter 15 Fuel manager.................................. 191 15.1 Fuel manager overview .................................... 192
Chapter 16 AIS function.................................... 195 16.1 AIS overview.................................................... 196 16.2 AIS prerequisites.............................................. 197 16.3 AIS context menu............................................. 197 16.4 Enabling AIS.................................................... 198 16.5 Displaying AIS vectors...................................... 198 16.6 AIS status symbols........................................... 199 16.7 AIS silent mode................................................ 199 16.8 AIS target symbols ........................................... 200 16.9 Displaying detailed AIS target information........... 201 16.10 Viewing all AIS targets .................................... 201 16.11 Using AIS to avoid collisions............................ 202 16.12 Target options ................................................ 203 16.13 AIS alarms ..................................................... 204 16.14 Buddy tracking ............................................... 204
Chapter 17 Waypoints, Routes and Tracks ................................................................. 207 17.1 Waypoints overview.......................................... 208 17.2 Routes............................................................. 217 17.3 Tracks ............................................................. 225 17.4 Import and Export............................................. 227 17.5 Waypoints, routes and tracks storage capacity .................................................................. 227
Chapter 18 Chart application............................ 229 18.1 Chart application overview and features............. 230 18.2 Electronic charts overview ................................ 232 18.3 Navigation options............................................ 235 18.4 Chart ranging and panning................................ 237 18.5 Chart selection ................................................. 238 18.6 Vessel position on the chart display ................... 238 18.7 Chart Orientation.............................................. 239 18.8 Chart motion mode........................................... 240 18.9 Chart views...................................................... 241 18.10 Chart display.................................................. 243 18.11 Overlays ........................................................ 243 18.12 Chart vectors ................................................. 250 18.13 Cartography objects ....................................... 251 18.14 Object information .......................................... 253 18.15 Depth & Contour options................................. 257 18.16 My Data options ............................................. 259 18.17 Multiple chart synchronization ......................... 259 18.18 Measuring distances and bearings .................. 260
Chapter 19 Fishfinder application.................... 261 19.1 Fishfinder overview and features ....................... 262 19.2 Sonar technologies........................................... 264 19.3 Raymarine sonar modules ................................ 267 19.4 Multiple sonar module support .......................... 267 19.5 Sonar crosstalk interference.............................. 269
6
a Series / c Series / e Series
19.6 Custom channels ............................................. 271 19.7 The sonar image .............................................. 272 19.8 Depth Range ................................................... 273 19.9 SideVisionTM Range ........................................ 274 19.10 Fishfinder scrolling ......................................... 274 19.11 Fishfinder display modes................................. 275 19.12 SideVisionTM Views ....................................... 277 19.13 Presentation menu options.............................. 278 19.14 Depth and distance......................................... 279 19.15 Waypoints in the Fishfinder application ............ 280 19.16 Sensitivity settings.......................................... 280 19.17 Fishfinder alarms............................................ 285 19.18 Frequency tuning ........................................... 286 19.19 Sounder set-up menu options.......................... 287 19.20 Transducer set-up menu options ..................... 288 19.21 Resetting the sonar ........................................ 289
Chapter 20 Data application ............................. 291 20.1 Data application overview ................................. 292
20.2 Selecting datapages using touch ................ 294
20.3 Selecting datapages .................................. 295 20.4 Customizing the data application ....................... 295 20.5 List of data items .............................................. 297 20.6 Engine identification ......................................... 304 20.7 Setting boat details........................................... 306 20.8 Setting maximum engine RPM .......................... 306 20.9 Color theme ..................................................... 307 20.10 Units set-up ................................................... 308 20.11 Resetting minimum and maximum readings.................................................................. 309 20.12 Resetting all datapages .................................. 309
Chapter 21 Radar application........................... 311 21.1 Radar application overview and features............ 312 21.2 Multiple radar scanners .................................... 314 21.3 Radar scanner status symbols .......................... 314 21.4 Radar context menu ......................................... 316 21.5 Radar range and image quality.......................... 316 21.6 Target tracking ................................................. 319 21.7 Distances, range, and bearing........................... 322 21.8 Radar mode and orientation.............................. 325 21.9 Radar presentation menu options...................... 327
21.10 Radar tuning: On-screen gain controls................................................................... 330 21.11 HD and SuperHD radar adjustments ................ 331 21.12 Non-HD digital radomes adjustments............... 333 21.13 Dual range radar operation ............................. 335 21.14 Radar scan speed .......................................... 336 21.15 Radar Set-up menu ........................................ 337 21.16 Resetting the radar ......................................... 339
Chapter 22 Camera application........................ 341
22.1 Camera application overview and features .................................................................. 342 22.2 Changing the camera feed................................ 343 22.3 Displaying multiple camera feeds using Quad View ....................................................................... 343 22.4 Camera cycling ................................................ 344 22.5 Naming camera / video feeds............................ 345 22.6 Adjusting the video image ................................. 346 22.7 Selecting the aspect ratio.................................. 346 22.8 Selecting a location to store recordings.............. 347 22.9 Record and playback........................................ 347 22.10 Taking photos................................................. 349 22.11 Viewing photos ............................................... 350
Chapter 23 Thermal camera application -- Pan and tilt cameras.......................................... 351 23.1 Thermal camera application overview ................ 352 23.2 Thermal camera image..................................... 352 23.3 Controls overview............................................. 353 23.4 Camera control ................................................ 354 23.5 Image adjustments ........................................... 356 23.6 Pan and tilt camera -- new camera interface.................................................................. 359 23.7 High power and high torque modes ................... 362 23.8 Pan and tilt camera -- old camera interface.................................................................. 363
Chapter 24 Thermal camera application -- fixed mount cameras......................................... 367 24.1 Thermal camera application overview ................ 368 24.2 Thermal camera image..................................... 368 24.3 Controls overview............................................. 369 24.4 Camera control ................................................ 370 24.5 Image adjustments ........................................... 370 24.6 Fixed mount camera menu ............................... 372
Chapter 25 Fusion link application .................. 375 25.1 Fusion link overview ......................................... 376 25.2 Media sources ................................................. 377 25.3 Browsing music................................................ 379 25.4 Selecting shuffle and repeat functions................ 379 25.5 Adjusting volume levels for each zone .............. 380 25.6 Selecting the zone to control ............................. 380 25.7 Adjusting the tone controls................................ 381 25.8 Selecting the system to control.......................... 381 25.9 Menu options ................................................... 382
Chapter 26 Weather application (North America only)..................................................... 383 26.1 Weather application overview............................ 384 26.2 Weather application set up................................ 384 26.3 Weather application display overview ................ 385 26.4 Weather map navigation ................................... 388 26.5 Weather context menu...................................... 388 26.6 Weather information ......................................... 389 26.7 Weather reports ............................................... 390
7
26.8 Animated weather graphics............................... 391 26.9 Weather application menu options..................... 391 26.10 Glossary of weather terms .............................. 393
33.10 e9 and e12 Video cables................................. 445 33.11 a Series spares .............................................. 446 33.12 c Series and e Series spares........................... 446
Chapter 27 Sirius audio application (North
Appendix A Connectors and pinouts .............. 447
America only)..................................................... 395
27.1 Sirius audio overview........................................ 396 Appendix B NMEA 0183 sentences ................. 449
Chapter 28 Mobile applications........................ 397 28.1 Raymarine mobile apps .................................... 398 28.2 Enabling Wi-Fi ................................................. 399 28.3 Enabling mobile apps ....................................... 399 28.4 Setting up Wi-Fi security ................................... 400 28.5 Selecting a Wi-Fi channel ................................. 400
Chapter 29 Maintaining your display............... 401 29.1 Service and maintenance ................................. 402 29.2 Product cleaning .............................................. 402
Appendix C NMEA data bridging ..................... 450 Appendix D NMEA 2000 sentences ................. 451 Appendix E Switch panel application.............. 454 Appendix F Software releases ......................... 456 Appendix G Multifunction display compatibility ...................................................... 461
Chapter 30 Troubleshooting............................. 403 30.1 Troubleshooting ............................................... 404 30.2 Power up troubleshooting ................................. 405 30.3 Radar troubleshooting ...................................... 406 30.4 GPS troubleshooting ........................................ 407 30.5 Troubleshooting Autorouting ........................... 408 30.6 Sonar troubleshooting ...................................... 410 30.7 Sonar crosstalk interference...............................411 30.8 Thermal camera troubleshooting ....................... 413 30.9 System data troubleshooting ............................. 415 30.10 Video troubleshooting ..................................... 416 30.11 Wi-Fi troubleshooting ...................................... 417 30.12 Bluetooth troubleshooting ............................... 418 30.13 Touchscreen troubleshooting........................... 419 30.14 Touchscreen alignment ................................... 420 30.15 Miscellaneous troubleshooting ........................ 421
Chapter 31 Technical specification.................. 423 31.1 a Series ........................................................... 424 31.2 c and e Series.................................................. 428
Chapter 32 Technical support .......................... 433 32.1 Raymarine customer support ............................ 434 32.2 Learning resources........................................... 434 32.3 Third-party support ........................................... 435
Chapter 33 Spares and accessories ................ 437
33.1 Digital ClearPulse Transducers and accessories ............................................................. 438 33.2 DownVisionTM transducers and accessories ............................................................. 439 33.3 Network hardware ............................................ 439 33.4 Network cable connector types.......................... 440 33.5 RayNet to RayNet cables and connectors........... 442 33.6 Network cable types ......................................... 443 33.7 SeaTalkng cabling components .......................... 443 33.8 SeaTalkng cables and accessories ..................... 444 33.9 SeaTalk accessories......................................... 445
8
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 1: Important information
Certified Installation
Raymarine recommends certified installation by a Raymarine approved installer. A certified installation qualifies for enhanced product warranty benefits. Contact your Raymarine dealer for further details, and refer to the separate warranty document packed with your product.
Warning: Ensure safe navigation
This product is intended only as an aid to navigation and must never be used in preference to sound navigational judgment. Only official government charts and notices to mariners contain all the current information needed for safe navigation, and the captain is responsible for their prudent use. It is the user's responsibility to use official government charts, notices to mariners, caution and proper navigational skill when operating this or any other Raymarine product.
Warning: Product installation and operation
This product must be installed and operated in accordance with the instructions provided. Failure to do so could result in personal injury, damage to your vessel and/or poor product performance.
Warning: Minimum Safe Depth
The Minimum Safe Depth setting is used during Autorouting to restrict the created route from entering water that is to shallow for the vessel.
Bottom depth is taken from compatible electronic navigational charts and Minimum Safe Depth is a user calculation. As both of these factors are outside of Raymarine's control, Raymarine will not be held liable for any damage, physical or otherwise, resulting from the use of the Autorouting feature or the Minimum Safe Depth setting.
Warning: Autorouting
Routes created using the Autorouting feature rely on Bottom Depth information taken from compatible electronic cartography and a user defined Minimum Safe Depth value. As both of these values are subjective the generated route MUST be carefully checked and if necessary edited BEFORE starting to follow the route in the Chart application.
Important information
Warning: Autorouting -- Traffic separation The Autorouting feature does not adhere to the Traffic Separation Schemes identified in Rule 10 of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea 1972 as amended. Raymarine® therefore recommends that you do NOT use Autorouting to create any part of a route which will cross traffic lanes or pass near to traffic separation lines. In these situations Autorouting MUST be switched Off and the route or route leg MUST be built manually, ensuring compliance to the rules laid out in the above regulations.
Warning: Potential ignition source This product is NOT approved for use in hazardous/flammable atmospheres. Do NOT install in a hazardous/flammable atmosphere (such as in an engine room or near fuel tanks).
Warning: High voltages This product may contain high voltages. Do NOT remove any covers or otherwise attempt to access internal components, unless specifically instructed in the documentation provided.
Warning: Product grounding Before applying power to this product, ensure it has been correctly grounded, in accordance with the instructions provided.
Warning: Switch off power supply Ensure the vessel's power supply is switched OFF before starting to install this product. Do NOT connect or disconnect equipment with the power switched on, unless instructed in this document.
Warning: FCC Warning (Part 15.21) Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved in writing by Raymarine Incorporated could violate compliance with FCC rules and void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Warning: Radar scanner safety Before rotating the radar scanner, ensure all personnel are clear.
9
Warning: Radar transmission safety
The radar scanner transmits electromagnetic energy. Ensure all personnel are clear of the scanner when the radar is transmitting.
Warning: Sonar operation
· NEVER operate the sonar with the vessel out of the water.
· NEVER touch the transducer face when the sonar is powered on.
· SWITCH OFF the sonar if divers are likely to be within 7.6 m (25 ft) of the transducer.
Warning: Touchscreen display temperature
If the display is mounted where it will be exposed to prolonged periods of direct sunlight, the touchscreen may get very hot due to the absorbed solar energy.
In such conditions Raymarine highly recommends that you avoid using the touchscreen:
· For HybridTouch displays, use the integrated keypad to operate the display.
· For touch-only systems it is recommended that an external keypad is fitted to the system (for example, the RMK-9 accessory).
Warning: Touchscreen display
Exposure to prolonged rain may cause erroneous touch performance, in these situations keep touch activity to a minimum and wipe the screen with a dry non-abrasive cloth before using the touchscreen.
Caution: Transducer cable
· Do NOT cut, shorten, or splice the transducer cable.
· Do NOT remove the connector.
If the cable is cut, it cannot be repaired. Cutting the cable will also void the warranty.
Caution: Care of chart and memory cards
To avoid irreparable damage to and / or loss of data from chart and memory cards:
· DO NOT save data or files to a card containing cartography as the charts may be overwritten.
· Ensure that chart and memory cards are fitted the correct way around. DO NOT try to force a card into position.
· DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a screwdriver or pliers to insert or remove a chart or memory card.
Caution: Ensure card reader door is securely closed
To prevent water ingress and consequent damage to the product, ensure that the card reader door is firmly closed.
Caution: Sun covers
· If your product is supplied with a sun cover, to protect against the damaging effects of ultraviolet (UV) light, always fit the sun cover when the product is not in use.
· Sun covers must be removed when travelling at high speed, whether in water or when the vessel is being towed.
Caution: Product cleaning
When cleaning products:
· If your product includes a display screen, do NOT wipe the screen with a dry cloth, as this could scratch the screen coating.
· Do NOT use abrasive, or acid or ammonia based products.
· Do NOT use a jet wash.
TFT Displays
The colors of the display may seem to vary when viewed against a colored background or in colored light. This is a perfectly normal effect that can be seen with all color Thin Film Transistor (TFT) displays.
Caution: Power supply protection
When installing this product ensure the power source is adequately protected by means of a suitably-rated fuse or automatic circuit breaker.
Water ingress
Water ingress disclaimer
Although the waterproof rating capacity of this product meets the stated IPX standard (refer to the product's Technical Specification), water intrusion and subsequent equipment failure may occur if the
10
a Series / c Series / e Series
product is subjected to commercial high-pressure washing. Raymarine will not warrant products subjected to high-pressure washing.
Note:
· The maximum supported memory card capacity is 32 GB.
Disclaimers
This product (including the electronic charts) is intended to be used only as an aid to navigation. It is designed to facilitate use of official government charts, not replace them. Only official government charts and notices to mariners contain all the current information needed for safe navigation, and the captain is responsible for their prudent use. It is the user's responsibility to use official government charts, notices to mariners, caution and proper navigational skill when operating this or any other Raymarine product. This product supports electronic charts provided by third party data suppliers which may be embedded or stored on memory card. Use of such charts is subject to the supplier's End-User Licence Agreement included in the documentation for this product or supplied with the memory card (as applicable).
Raymarine does not warrant that this product is error-free or that it is compatible with products manufactured by any person or entity other than Raymarine.
This product uses digital chart data, and electronic information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) which may contain errors. Raymarine does not warrant the accuracy of such information and you are advised that errors in such information may cause the product to malfunction. Raymarine is not responsible for damages or injuries caused by your use or inability to use the product, by the interaction of the product with products manufactured by others, or by errors in chart data or information utilized by the product and supplied by third parties.
Memory cards and chart cards
MicroSD memory cards can be used to back up / archive data (e.g. Waypoint, and Tracks). Once data is backed up to a memory card old data can be deleted from the system, creating capacity for new data. The archived data can be retrieved at any time. Chart cards provide additional or upgraded cartography.
It is recommended that your data is backed up to a memory card on a regular basis. Do NOT save data to a memory card containing cartography.
· MicroSD cards must be formatted to use either the FAT or FAT 32 file system format to enable use with your MFD.
Speed class rating
For best performance it is recommended that you use Class 10 or UHS (Ultra High Speed) class memory cards.
Chart cards
Your product is pre-loaded with electronic charts (worldwide base map). If you wish to use different chart data, you can insert compatible chart cards into the unit's memory card reader.
Use branded chart cards and memory cards
When archiving data or creating an electronic chart card, Raymarine recommends the use of quality branded memory cards. Some brands of memory card may not work in your unit. Please contact customer support for a list of recommended cards.
EMC installation guidelines
Raymarine equipment and accessories conform to the appropriate Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations, to minimize electromagnetic interference between equipment and minimize the effect such interference could have on the performance of your system
Correct installation is required to ensure that EMC performance is not compromised.
Note: In areas of extreme EMC interference, some slight interference may be noticed on the product. Where this occurs the product and the source of the interference should be separated by a greater distance.
For optimum EMC performance we recommend that wherever possible:
· Raymarine equipment and cables connected to it are:
At least 1 m (3 ft) from any equipment transmitting or cables carrying radio signals e.g. VHF radios, cables and antennas. In the case of SSB radios, the distance should be increased to 7 ft (2 m).
Compatible cards
The following types of MicroSD cards are compatible with your display:
· Micro Secure Digital Standard-Capacity (MicroSDSC)
· Micro Secure Digital High-Capacity (MicroSDHC)
More than 2 m (7 ft) from the path of a radar beam. A radar beam can normally be assumed to spread 20 degrees above and below the radiating element.
· The product is supplied from a separate battery from that used for engine start. This is important to prevent erratic behavior and data loss which can occur if the engine start does not have a separate battery.
Important information
· Raymarine specified cables are used.
11
· Cables are not cut or extended, unless doing so is 4. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV
detailed in the installation manual.
technician for help.
Note: Where constraints on the installation prevent any of the above recommendations, always ensure the maximum possible separation between different items of electrical equipment, to provide the best conditions for EMC performance throughout the installation
Industry Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada License-exempt RSS standard(s).
RF exposure
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference; and
This equipment complies with FCC / IC RF exposure limits for general population / uncontrolled exposure. The wireless LAN / Bluetooth antenna is mounted behind the front facia of the display. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 1 cm (0.39 in) between the device and the body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures.
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Industry Canada (Français)
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes d'exemption de licence RSS d'Industry Canada.
FCC
Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:
Compliance Statement (Part 15.19)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1. cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférence, et 2. cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence,
notamment les interférences qui peuvent affecter son fonctionnement. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Japanese approvals
FCC Interference Statement (Part 15.105 (b))
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
1. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
3. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
12
In the frequency band used for this device, campus radio stations (radios stations that require a license) and specified low power radio stations (radio stations that do not require license) for mobile identification and amateur radio stations (radio stations that require license) used in industries such as microwave ovens, scientific, medical equipment devices and production line of other factories are also being operated.
1. Before using this device, please make sure that campus radio stations and specified low power radio stations for mobile identification and amateur radio stations are not being operated nearby.
2. In case there is any case of harmful interference to campus radio stations for mobile identification caused by this device, please immediately change the frequency used or stop the transmission of radio waves and then consult about the measures to avoid interference (for example, the installation of partitions) through the contact information below.
3. Besides, when in trouble, such as when there is any case of harmful interference to specified low power radio stations for mobile identification or amateur radio stations caused by this device, please consult through the following contact information.
Contact information: Please contact your local authorized Raymarine dealer.
a Series / c Series / e Series
Third party software license agreements
This product is subject to certain third party software license agreements as listed below:
· GNU -- LGPL/GPL
· JPEG libraries
· OpenSSL
· FreeType
The license agreements for the above can be found on the website www.raymarine.com and on the accompanying documentation CD if supplied.
Pixel defect policy
In common with all TFT units, the screen may exhibit a few wrongly-illuminated ("dead") pixels. These may appear as black pixels in a light area of the screen or as colored pixels in black areas.
If your display exhibits MORE than the number of wrongly-illuminated pixels allowed (refer to the product technical specification for details), please contact your local Raymarine service center for further advice.
Warranty registration
Suppression ferrites
Raymarine cables may be fitted with suppression ferrites. These are important for correct EMC performance. If a ferrite has to be removed for any purpose (e.g. installation or maintenance), it must be replaced in the original position before the product is used.
Use only ferrites of the correct type, supplied by Raymarine authorized dealers.
Where an installation requires multiple ferrites to be added to a cable, additional cable clips should be used to prevent stress on the connectors due to the extra weight of the cable.
To register your Raymarine product ownership, please visit www.raymarine.com and register online.
It is important that you register your product to receive full warranty benefits. Your unit package includes a bar code label indicating the serial number of the unit. You will need this serial number when registering your product online. You should retain the label for future reference.
IMO and SOLAS
The equipment described within this document is intended for use on leisure marine boats and workboats NOT covered by International Maritime Organization (IMO) and Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) Carriage Regulations.
Connections to other equipment
Requirement for ferrites on non-Raymarine cables If your Raymarine equipment is to be connected to other equipment using a cable not supplied by Raymarine, a suppression ferrite MUST always be attached to the cable near the Raymarine unit.
Declaration of conformity
Raymarine UK Ltd. declares that this product is compliant with the essential requirements of R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC. The original Declaration of Conformity certificate may be viewed on the relevant product page at www.raymarine.com.
Technical accuracy
To the best of our knowledge, the information in this document was correct at the time it was produced. However, Raymarine cannot accept liability for any inaccuracies or omissions it may contain. In addition, our policy of continuous product improvement may change specifications without notice. As a result, Raymarine cannot accept liability for any differences between the product and this document. Please check the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com) to ensure you have the most up-to-date version(s) of the documentation for your product.
Product disposal
Dispose of this product in accordance with the WEEE Directive.
The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive requires the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. Whilst the WEEE Directive does not apply to some Raymarine products, we support its policy and ask you to be aware of how to dispose of this product.
Important information
13
14
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 2: Document and product information
Chapter contents · 2.1 Handbook information on page 16 · 2.2 Handbook conventions on page 17 · 2.3 Handbook illustrations on page 19 · 2.4 Product overview on page 19 · 2.5 System feature highlights on page 23
Document and product information
15
2.1 Handbook information
This handbook contains important information regarding your multifunction display. The handbook is applicable to the following 3rd generation Raymarine multifunction displays: · a Series · c Series · e Series
About this handbook
This handbook describes how to operate your multifunction display in conjunction with compatible electronic cartography and peripheral equipment.
It assumes that all peripheral equipment to be operated with it is compatible and has been correctly installed. This handbook is intended for users of varying marine abilities, but assumes a general level of knowledge of display use, nautical terminology and practices.
Software revision
Raymarine regularly updates product software to add new features and improve existing functionality.
Release 12
This handbook covers multifunction display software version -- LightHouse II Release 12. Please refer to the Software Releases section for details on software releases. Check the Raymarine® website to ensure you have the latest software and user manuals. www.raymarine.com.
Description
Part number
e95 / e97 / c95 / c97 Mounting 87144 template
e125 / e127 / c125 / c127 Mounting template
87145
e Series documentation
Description
Part number
e7 / e7D Mounting and getting 88011 started guide
c Series / e Series Mounting 88001 and getting started guide
a Series / c Series / e Series 81337 Installation and operation handbook
e7 / e7D Mounting template 87137
e95 / e97 / c95 / c97 Mounting 87144 template
e125 / e127 / c125 / c127 Mounting template
87145
e165 Mounting template
87166
Additional documentation
Description
Part number
SeaTalkng reference manual 81300
Product documentation
The following documentation is applicable to your product:
All documents are available to download as PDFs from www.raymarine.com
a Series documentation
Description
Part number
a Series Mounting and getting 88012 started guide
a Series / c Series / e Series 81337 Installation and operation handbook
a6x Mounting template
87165
a7x Mounting template
87191
a9x Mounting template
87205
a12x Mounting template
87217
c Series documentation
Description
c Series / e Series Mounting and getting started guide
a Series / c Series / e Series Installation and operation handbook
Part number 88001
81337
User manuals Print Shop
Raymarine provides a Print Shop service, enabling you to purchase a high-quality, professionally-printed manual for your Raymarine product.
Printed manuals are ideal for keeping onboard your vessel, as a useful source of reference whenever you need assistance with your Raymarine product.
Visit http://www.raymarine.co.uk/view/?id=5175 to order a printed manual, delivered directly to your door.
For further information about the Print Shop, please visit the Print Shop FAQ pages: http://www.raymarine.co.uk/view/?id=5751.
Note:
· Accepted methods of payment for printed manuals are credit cards and PayPal.
· Printed manuals can be shipped worldwide.
· Further manuals will be added to the Print Shop over the coming months for both new and legacy products.
· Raymarine user manuals are also available to download free-of-charge from the Raymarine website, in the popular PDF format. These PDF files can be viewed on a PC / laptop, tablet, smartphone, or on the latest generation of Raymarine multifunction displays.
16
a Series / c Series / e Series
2.2 Handbook conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this handbook when referring to:
Type
Example
Convention
Icons
The term "select" is used in procedures involving icons to refer to the action of selecting an on-screen icon, either using touch or physical buttons:
· Touch -- Press your finger on the icon to select.
· Physical buttons -- Use the Joystick to highlight the icon and press the Ok button.
Menus
The term "select" is used in procedures involving menus to refer to the action of selecting a menu item, either using touch or physical buttons:
· Touch -- Press your finger on the icon to select.
· Physical buttons -- Use the Joystick to highlight the icon and press the Ok button.
Applications
Numeric adjust controls
The term "scroll" is used in procedures involving menus and dialogs to refer to the action of scrolling a list or menu, either by touch or physical buttons:
· Touch -- Press your finger on the menu and slide up or down to scroll.
· Physical buttons -- Turn the Rotary control clockwise or anti--clockwise to scroll.
.
The term "select" is used in procedures involving applications to refer to the action of selecting a location, object or target on-screen using touch or physical buttons:
· Touch -- Press and hold your finger on a location to select, or
· Touch -- Press and release your finger on an object or target.
· Physical buttons -- Use the Joystick to highlight the location, object or target and press the Ok button.
The term "adjust" is used in procedures involving numerical adjust controls to refer to the action of changing the numeric value using touch or physical buttons:
· Touch -- Press your finger on the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the numeric value.
· Physical buttons -- Use the Rotary control to increase or decrease the numeric value.
Document and product information
17
Type
Example
Slider bar controls
Convention
With the Numeric adjust control displayed you can also select on the keypad icon or press and hold the Ok button to open a numeric keypad to enter a new value for the setting.
The term "adjust" is used in procedures involving slider bar controls to refer to the action of changing the associated numeric value using touch or physical buttons:
· Touch -- Press your finger on the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the numeric value.
· Physical buttons -- Use the Rotary control to increase or decrease the numeric value.
Waypoint (MOB) button / icon
Depending on the multifunction display variant there will be either a Waypoint (MOB) button or an on-screen icon.
WPT button
· c Series · e Series
· RMK-9 keypad
WPT
· a Series
icons
· gS Series
Throughout this manual the term: Select WPT, refers to pressing the physical WPT button or pressing the on-screen WPT icon.
Touch and non-touch operations
This handbook applies to both touch and non-touch operations.
This handbook uses icons to identify whether a particular task is specifically a touch or a non-touch operation. Where a task does not have a touch or non-touch icon then the task can be performed using either.
Touch (Touchscreen operation) -- Touch operations apply to multifunction displays which have a touchscreen.
Non-touch (physical button operation) -- Non-touch operations apply to multifunction displays with physical buttons or multifunction displays that have a remote keypad connected and paired to it.
18
a Series / c Series / e Series
2.3 Handbook illustrations
2.4 Product overview
The illustrations and screenshots used in this handbook may differ slightly from your display model.
The illustration of the multifunction display below is used throughout this manual and unless otherwise stated can apply to all 3rd generation variant of Raymarine multifunction displays (i.e. a Series, c Series and e Series).
a6x Display variants
a6x multifunction displays are available in the following variants:
D12596-1 Non-sonar variant Sonar variant DownVision variant
Features
Controls
a65 (E70162) a67 (E70163) a68 (E70201) -- display only (E70207) -- (with CPT-100 transducer) · Bluetooth
· Internal GPS
· Wi-Fi
Multi-Touch touchscreen (HybridTouch when paired with a remote keypad.)
a7x Display variants
a7x multifunction displays are available in the following variants:
Document and product information
Non-sonar variant Sonar variant DownVision variant
a75 (E70166)
a77 (E70167)
a78 (E70203) -- display only (E70209) -- (with CPT-100 transducer)
19
Features Controls
· Bluetooth · Internal GPS · Wi-Fi
Multi-Touch touchscreen (HybridTouch when paired with a remote keypad.)
a9x Display variants
a9x multifunction displays (MFDs) are available in the following variants:
Features Controls
· NMEA 0183 · Bluetooth · Wi-Fi · Internal GNSS (GPS /
GLONASS) receiver · GA150 external antenna
connection
Multi-Touch touchscreen (HybridTouch when paired with a remote keypad.)
Non-sonar variant Sonar variant DownVision variant Features
Controls
a95 -- (E70232) a97 -- (E70233) a98 -- (E70234) · NMEA 0183 · Bluetooth · Wi-Fi · Internal GNSS (GPS /
GLONASS) receiver · GA150 external antenna
connection
Multi-Touch touchscreen (HybridTouch when paired with a remote keypad.)
a12x Display variants
a12x multifunction displays (MFDs) are available in the following variants:
Non-sonar variant Sonar variant DownVision variant
a125 -- (E70235) a127 -- (E70236) a128 -- (E70237)
20
a Series / c Series / e Series
c Series sand e Series display variants The following c Series and e Series multifunction display variants are available
Nonsonar
Sonar
Series
Controls
e7
e7D
e Series
(E62354) (E62355)
HybridTouch (Touchscreen and physical buttons)
c95
c97
c Series
(E70011) (E70012)
Physical buttons only
e95
e97
e Series
(E70021) (E70022)
HybridTouch (Touchscreen and physical buttons)
c125
c127
c Series
(E70013) (E70014)
Physical buttons only
e125
e127
e Series
(E70023) (E70024)
HybridTouch (Touchscreen and physical buttons)
Features · Bluetooth. · Wi-Fi · NMEA 0183 · NMEA 2000 (via
SeaTalkng) · Internal GPS. · Video input. · Bluetooth. · Wi-Fi · NMEA 0183 · NMEA 2000 (via
SeaTalkng) · Internal GPS. · Video input. · Bluetooth. · Wi-Fi · NMEA 0183 · NMEA 2000 (via
SeaTalkng) · Internal GPS. · Video input x2. · Video output. · Bluetooth. · Wi-Fi · NMEA 0183 · NMEA 2000 (via
SeaTalkng) · Internal GPS. · Video input. · Bluetooth. · Wi-Fi · NMEA 0183 · NMEA 2000 (via
SeaTalkng) · Internal GPS. · Video input x2.
Document and product information
21
Nonsonar
Sonar
Series
e165
n/a
(E70025)
e Series
HybridTouch overview
If your multifunction display features HybridTouch, this enables you to operate the unit using the touchscreen and the physical buttons.
A HybridTouch display has physical buttons which can be used in addition to the touchscreen. Touchscreen only multifunction displays (which do not have physical buttons) can be connected to a remote keypad which allows HybridTouch functionality.
All functions can be accessed using the touchscreen. However, there may be situations (such as rough sea conditions) when it is not appropriate to use the touchscreen. In these situations, Raymarine strongly recommends that you activate the touch lock and use the physical buttons to operate your multifunction display.
Touchscreen overview
The touchscreen provides an alternative to using physical buttons to control your multifunction display.
All functions can be accessed using the touchscreen
Note: Raymarine strongly recommends that you familiarize yourself with touch operations while your vessel is anchored or moored. You may find it helpful to use the simulator mode (accessible from Homescreen > Set-up > System Settings) in these situations.
Controls
HybridTouch (Touchscreen and physical buttons)
Features
· Video output. · Bluetooth. · Wi-Fi · NMEA 0183 · NMEA 2000 (via
SeaTalkng) · Video input x2. · Video output.
22
a Series / c Series / e Series
2.5 System feature highlights
Features that enable you to connect and control a complete marine electronics system.
Feature
Benefits
What it is
How to use it
Control your entire marine electronics system from one display. Alternatively, create a network of several displays to control your system from multiple locations on your vessel. Easily connect all your devices together in a powerful, unified and expandable system using SeaTalkhs, SeaTalkng, NMEA 0183, and NMEA 2000 connections.
Note: For NMEA 0183 connections, a65, a67, a68, a75, a77, and a78 only support the connection of a VHF radio and require an additional NMEA 0183 to SeaTalkng converter.
These data connections enable you to connect an extensive range of external equipment to your MFD, enabling you to make the most of your time on the water. Examples of popular devices include:
· Sonar module ("Fishfinder").
· Radar scanner.
· Thermal camera.
· Data sensors (wind, speed, depth etc).
· IP video camera.
· Autopilot system.
· AIS receiver / transceiver.
· Fusion media player.
· Sirius audio & weather receiver.
· Satellite TV.
· 3.7 System protocols
Chapter 4 Cables and connections
· 3.1 System integration(a Series, c Series, e Series)
· System integration (gS Series)
· 3.6 Typical systems(a Series, c Series, e Series)
· Typical systems (gS Series)
· 33.3 Network hardware
· System Limits
· DSC VHF radio.
· Smartphones and tablets.
· Digital switching modules.
Note: Refer to `System Integration' for a list of suitable devices.
Support for multiple data sensors. Support for multiple sonar modules.
Document and product information
Connect to a wide range of external data sensors (such as wind, speed, depth) to receive critical information about the environment around your vessel. Use the Data application and configurable databar to customize the data to suit your needs.
· 9.7 List of data items
· 3.1 System integration(a Series, c Series, e Series)
· System integration (gS Series)
· 20.1 Data application overview
· 9.6 Databar and databox overview
· 9.3 Units set-up
· 3.6 Typical systems(a Series, c Series, e Series)
· Typical systems (gS Series)
· Support for multiple active sonar modules on the network; ability to use multiple sonar modules simultaneously and display the returns from both on the screen at the same time -- for example, CP100 and CP300, in a splitscreen configuration.
· Take advantage of Raymarine's VisionalityTM technology -- View the world beneath your vessel with photo-like clarity.
· 19.1 Fishfinder overview and features
· 19.2 Sonar technologies
· 19.3 Raymarine sonar modules
19.4 Multiple sonar module support
· Setup the Fishfinder application in a way that reflects how you fish; create
23
Feature
Benefits
custom "application panes", each one representing a different combination of "channels" (frequencies) to suit different user scenarios.
What it is
Note: Not all MFDs include an internal sonar module. An external sonar module may be required for Fishfinder operation. Refer to your dealer.
How to use it
Support for 2 radar scanners.
· Support up to 2 radar scanners on the · 21.1 Radar
same network.
application
· Set-up custom page to show more than 1 radar scanner onscreen at the
overview and features
same time.
· 21.2 Multiple radar scanners
Wireless video streaming and wireless With the optional mobile apps and an Chapter 28 Mobile MFD control via tablet or smartphone. Android or Apple iOS compatible mobile applications
device you can:
· Stream an MFD video feed to your mobile device. Anything that is displayed on your MFD screen can also be displayed on your mobile device.
· 28.2 Enabling Wi-Fi
· 28.3 Enabling mobile apps
· 28.4 Setting up Wi-Fi security
· Control your MFD from anywhere on your vessel. You mobile device acts as a repeat display and intuitive control surface for your MFD. Graphical representations of the MFD controls on your mobile display give you total remote control of your MFD.
LightHouse user interface -- universal networking and operation.
· Take the Easy RouteTM -- Raymarine's intuitive touch-based user experience makes it easy to find and use the features you need.
· Raymarine LightHouse MFDs give you the powerful ability to "mix and match" any combination of LightHouse MFD products in a single networked system. This includes all MFD variants in the a Series, c Series, e Series, and gS Series ranges.
2.4 Product overview
· Chapter 6 Getting started
· 6.13 Initial set up procedures
· The LightHouse universal software platform ensures that all user operations are identical across all MFDs in the system. Once you've learned how to use one LightHouse MFD variant, you've learned how to use them all.
Note: Ensure that all your MFDs are running the same software version.
24
a Series / c Series / e Series
Feature
Benefits
What it is
How to use it
Control an autopilot system.
· With a suitable connected Evolution autopilot system, you can control an autopilot directly from your MFD, without a separate dedicated pilot control head.
11.1 Autopilot Control overview and features
· 11.9 Pilot Set-up · 11.8 Pilot Bar
· Make the most of Raymarine's AutomagicTM technology. Evolution autopilots use a range of advanced technologies to eliminate the need for complicated setup and calibration. With its intelligent sensor capabilities, the autopilot automatically adapts to your vessel's steering characteristics without any user adjustments. Only a basic set up procedure is required, using a simple Dockside Wizard.
· Vessels with hydraulic steering systems benefit from Raymarine's Hydro-BalanceTM technology, which automatically detects and compensates for common steering system problems.
View and control multiple thermal video cameras.
· Your "Sixth Sense" at sea. View the world around your vessel -- even in total darkness. Thermal technology sees temperature, not visible light. This means that it sees things that the human eye can't.
24.1 Thermal camera application overview
23.4 Camera control
· Enhance your situational awareness -- a thermal camera can help you to navigate the seas at night or in poor visibility.
· Enhance the safety of you and your crew -- a thermal camera can quickly identify a person in the water in man-overboard situations.
· Control the camera directly from your MFD or, optionally, via a Joystick Control Unit (JCU) -- or both.
View multiple analog visible-light video Video cameras have many monitoring
cameras.
uses:
Note: Not all MFD variants support the connection of analog video devices. Refer to the Chapter 31 Technical Specification section for more information.
· Security. · Engine room. · Rear of boat. · Docking.
22.1 Camera application overview and features
·
Changing
the camera /
video feed
· 22.4 Camera cycling
· Any regular surveillance.
· Mast-top camera.
· The MFD can be set up to continuously and automatically cycle through the available video inputs.
Document and product information
25
Feature View and record IP cameras.
View a video source such as a DVD player. Note: Not all MFD variants support the connection of analog video devices. Refer to the Chapter 31 Technical Specification section for more information. Note: To hear the audio feed from a connected video device, a suitable external third-party audio system is required. MFDs do not have internal audio speakers.
Benefits
What it is
IP video cameras provide powerful
22.1 Camera
networking capabilities and have many application overview
monitoring uses:
and features
· Security.
· Engine room.
· Rear of boat.
· Docking.
· Any regular surveillance.
· Mast-top camera.
· The MFD can be set up to continuously and automatically cycle through the available video inputs.
· The MFD can be set up to display up to 4 camera feeds simultaneously.
· You can record the video feed from an IP camera to a MicroSD memory card inserted in your MFD.
· Watch movies.
· Watch television broadcasts, such as the latest sporting event (requires an external Satellite TV receiver).
22.1 Camera application overview and features
· Play videogames.
· Playback video footage or view photos from an external digital camera or video camera.
· View the video output from a suitable smartphone, tablet, or laptop.
· The display can be set up to continuously and automatically cycle through the available video inputs.
Note: These activities require suitable additional third-party external equipment such as DVD players, TV / satellite receivers, cables, video converters, and / or software. Refer to your dealer for more information.
How to use it
·
Changing
the camera /
video feed
· 22.4 Camera cycling
· 22.3 Displaying multiple camera feeds using Quad View
· 22.9 Record and playback
·
Changing
the camera /
video feed
·
Display engine data.
With the Engine page in the Data
Engine page
application, you can view important data
from connected engines:
· Oil pressure.
· Coolant temperature.
· Engine RPM.
· Total fuel available (estimated).
· and more...
Note: Depending on the type of engine installed on your vessel, this feature may require an engine interface unit (such as the ECI-100) to connect the engine's CAN data bus to the network. Refer to your local dealer.
· 6.16 Engine identification
· Engine setup with an ECI interface
· Using the engine identification wizard
26
a Series / c Series / e Series
Feature
Benefits
Control your vessel's electrical systems
The Digital Switching ("Switch Panel") application and optional EmpirBusTM digital switching modules allow you to take control of your vessel's electrical systems:
· Control lighting.
· Monitor ac and dc electrical systems.
· Remotely monitor fluid tanks and battery levels.
· and more...
Note: EmpirBusTM is a trademark of Trigentic AG.
What it is
Switch panel overview
How to use it
Switch panel configuration
Fuel management.
Allows you to more accurately plan and 15.1 Fuel manager
manage your time on the water:
overview
· Display the estimated remaining fuel available for your vessel. Based on this figure, the estimated remaining distance and time is automatically calculated.
· Display "remaining distance" information visually on the chart by setting up a "fuel range ring" overlay in the Chart application.
· Set a "low fuel" alarm to alert you when your vessel's fuel level falls to a specified amount.
Note: Fuel manager estimates are based on: you logging the amount each time you fill the vessel with fuel; the total fuel capacity of your vessel's tanks; and how much fuel is burned by the engine(s).
· Enabling the fuel manager
· Setting up fuel manager
· Setting the low fuel alarm
· Enabling the fuel range ring
Simulator Mode. Free regular software updates. Customizable homescreen and applications.
Document and product information
Simulator Mode enables you to practice using your display and familiarize yourself with its operation, even when you are not out on the water.
Simulator mode
Enabling and disabling simulator mode
Raymarine regularly updates its product software to bring you new features and fix existing issues. Check the Raymarine website on a regular basis to ensure that you're using the latest software.
· 6.19 Software updates
· http://www.raymarine.com/software/
Updating the software
· The homescreen acts as a central hub for your entire marine electronics system, providing access to all your devices via a large range of applications.
· You can access the homescreen quickly at any time using the on-screen Home icon or the physical Home button (if available).
· The homescreen can be customized to include only the applications you need.
· 6.5 Homescreen overview -- Touch only displays
· 6.6 Homescreen overview -- c Series / e Series
· 6.8 Applications
· 6.7 Pages
· 6.9 Splitscreen controls
·
Accessing
the homescreen
·
Accessing
the homescreen
· Changing an existing page on the homescreen
· Menus
· Dialogs
· Split-screen views -- Display multiple applications at the same time. Create
27
Feature Configurable databar.
System diagnostics. Shared brightness. PDF document viewer.
Benefits
you own custom pages to suit your exact needs. Choose any combination of applications for each page -- chart / sonar, chart / radar, chart / thermal camera and so on.
What it is
How to use it
· Each application can be customized to suit you with comprehensive "Setup" options.
· The databar is displayed at all times, giving you a persistent view of important data (such as LAT / LON position and COG / SOG). You can customize the databar to display the data that's important to you.
· 9.6 Databar and databox overview
· Customizing the databar
·
Auto-hide
the databar
· When selected, the databar expands to provide a "databox", which provides additional data. You can choose the data that will be displayed.
· Auto-hide: To free-up screen space, you can configure your MFD to auto-hide the databar after 10 seconds. Re-display the databar at any time by selecting the status bar.
· Display a comprehensive list of
· Maintenance
Viewing product
information for the MFD and all
menu
information
connected devices, along with software versions and serial numbers.
·
Diagnostics menu
· Record live data streams from the data busses (SeaTalkng, NMEA 0183 etc), for advanced diagnostics and for sending system information to Raymarine product support in the event of a technical issue.
If you have multiple MFDs and instruments in your system you can configure the system to use the same display brightness setting across all networked displays. When you change the brightness on one display, all other displays are changed simultaneously and automatically.
Shared brightness
Setting up shared brightness
View the instruction manuals for all your Raymarine products directly on your MFD. Also view any PDF document stored on a memory card.
10.1 Document viewer overview
Note: Password-protected PDFs or PDFs containing security certificates are not supported.
· Opening a PDF document
·
Searching
for text
More help
Access Raymarine's learning resources on the Internet to obtain more information and help on some of the features described below: 6.20 Learning resources.
28
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 3: Planning the installation
Chapter contents · 3.1 System integration on page 30 · 3.2 Installation checklist on page 36 · 3.3 Multiple data sources (MDS) overview on page 36 · 3.4 Identifying your display variant on page 37 · 3.5 Networking constraints on page 37 · 3.6 Typical systems on page 39 · 3.7 System protocols on page 42 · 3.8 Data master on page 43 · 3.9 a6x and a7x parts supplied on page 43 · 3.10 a9x and a12x parts supplied on page 44 · 3.11 e7 / e7D Parts supplied on page 44 · 3.12 c Series and e Series parts supplied on page 45 · 3.13 Tools required for installation on page 45 · 3.14 Selecting a location on page 46
Planning the installation
29
3.1 System integration
Your multifunction display is compatible with a wide range of marine electronics devices.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Display
True/App VMG
Tack
0
000
000
17
0AUDIO
0ANTENNA
0NETWORK
0P O WE R
9
0
INTCM
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
D12244-4
The display uses a number of protocols to transfer data between the various devices in your system. The following table details which devices may be connected to your display, and the type of connections (in terms of protocols and physical interfaces):
Item Device Type
Maximum quantity Suitable Devices
Connections
1 Remote control
1 per multifunction Raymarine®® RCU-3 display.
Bluetooth
2 Smartphone / Tablet 1 per multifunction For Raymarine®® wireless video · Chartplotter sync with
device
display.
streaming and remote control
Navionics Marine app: Wi-Fi
apps:
· Video streaming and remote
· Apple iPhone 4 (or later) or iPad control: Wi-Fi
2 (or later)
· Media player control: Bluetooth
· Android device with minimum
2.1+ EDR power class 1.5
1GHz processor and running
(supported profile: AVRCP 1.0)
android 2.2.2 (or later)
or later
· Amazon Kindle Fire
For chartplotter sync with Navionics Marine app:
· Apple iPhone or iPad
· Android-compatible smartphone or tablet
For media player control (a, e and gS Series only):
· Any Bluetooth-enabled device that supports Bluetooth 2.1+ EDR power class 1.5 (supported profile: AVRCP 1.0)
30
a Series / c Series / e Series
Item Device Type
Maximum quantity Suitable Devices
Connections
3 Vessel tank sensors · Up to 5 x fuel.
Third-party NMEA 2000 interfaces NMEA 2000 (via optional
-- third-party
· 1 x fresh water.
DeviceNet adaptor cables)
· 1 x waste water.
· 1 x sewage.
· 1 x bait / fish.
4 GPS / GNSS
1
Receiver (external)
-- Raymarine®
Any combination of the following: · RS130 · Raystar125 GPS
SeaTalk, SeaTalkng®, or NMEA 0183
· Raystar125+GPS (via optional SeaTalk to SeaTalkng® converter)
4 GPS / GNSS Antenna 1 (external)
· GA150
Direct connection to a9x and a12x MFDs only.
5 Instruments -- Raymarine®
As determined by SeaTalkng® bus bandwidth and power loading.
SeaTalkng®: · i50 Depth, Speed, or Tridata · i60 Wind, CH Wind
SeaTalk, SeaTalkng®
· i70
· ST70+
· ST70
SeaTalk (via optional SeaTalk to SeaTalkng® converter):
· i40 Wind, Speed, Depth, or Bidata
· ST60+ Wind, Speed, Depth, Rudder, or Compass
· ST40 Wind, Speed, Depth, Rudder, or Compass
6 Pilot control heads -- As determined
SeaTalkng®:
Raymarine®
by SeaTalk or SeaTalkng® bus
· p70
bandwidth and
· p70R
power loading, as appropriate.
· ST70 (SeaTalkng® course computer only.)
SeaTalk, SeaTalkng®
· ST70+ (SeaTalkng® course computer only.)
SeaTalk (via optional SeaTalk to SeaTalkng® converter):
· ST6002
· ST7002
· ST8002
Planning the installation
31
Item Device Type
Maximum quantity Suitable Devices
Connections
7 Autopilots --
1
Raymarine®
SeaTalkng®: · Evolution autopilots
SeaTalk, SeaTalkng®, or NMEA 0183
· All SPX course computers
SeaTalk (via optional SeaTalk to SeaTalkng® converter):
· ST1000
· ST2000
· S1000
· S1
· S2
· S3
8 AIS -- Raymarine® 1
· AIS350
SeaTalkng®, or NMEA 0183
· AIS650
· AIS950
· AIS250
· AIS500
8 AIS -- third-party
1
Third-party NMEA
NMEA 0183
0183compatible AIS Class
A or Class B receiver / transceiver
9 Vessel trim tabs -- 1 pair third-party
Third-party NMEA 2000 interfaces NMEA 2000(via optional DeviceNet adaptor cables)
10 Analog video / camera · a6x and a7x = 0 Composite PAL or NTSC video BNC connectors · a9x, a12x, e7, e7D source and c Series = 1
· e Series (excluding e7 and e7D) = 2
10 IP camera
Multiple
· CAM200IP
Via SeaTalkhs network
Note: Whilst third-party ONVIF compatible IP cameras may work, Raymarine® cannot guarantee their compatibility.
11 Lifetag (Man overboard alert)
1 basestation
All Raymarine® Lifetag basestations
SeaTalk (via optional SeaTalk to SeaTalkng® converter)
12 Engine interface -- 1 unit for each engine · ECI-100
Raymarine®
CAN bus
SeaTalkng®
12 Engine interface -- 1 third-party
Third-party NMEA 2000 interfaces NMEA 2000 (via optional DeviceNet adaptor cables)
13 Transducers
1
and sensors --
Raymarine®
Analog transducers: · Wind · Speed
SeaTalkng® (via optional iTC-5 converter)
· Depth
· Rudder reference
· Fluxgate compass
32
a Series / c Series / e Series
Item Device Type 13 Transducers and
sensors -- Airmar 14 External display
15 Sonar transducer
15 DownVisionTM transducers
16 DSC VHF radio -- Raymarine®
Maximum quantity Suitable Devices
Connections
1
· DT800 Smart Sensor
SeaTalkng® (via optional iTC-5
· DST800 Smart Sensor
converter)
· PB200 weather station
· e Series
External display
(excluding e7 and
e7D) = 1
15 pin D-Type connector (VGA Style)
·
a Series (excluding a6x and a7x variants) =1
1
Direct connection to sonar variant Raymarine® transducer
displays
connection, OR Minn Kota
· P48
transducer connection
· P58
· P74
· B60 20º
· B60 12º
· B744V
; OR:
· Any 600 watt / 1Kw compatible transducer (via optional E66066 adaptor cable)
; OR:
· Any Minn Kota transducer (via optional A62363 adaptor cable)
Connection via external Raymarine® Sonar Module:
· Any sonar module-compatible transducer
a68 / a78 / a98 / a128 · CPT-100 -- Transom mount
=1
· CPT-110 -- Thru-hull plastic
Direct connection to DownVisionTM variant MFDs
· CPT-120 -- Thru-hull bronze
1
SeaTalkng®:
· Ray260
· Ray260 AIS
NMEA 0183:
· Ray49
Note: a6x and a7x variant a Series MFDs require an SeaTalkng® to NMEA 0183 converter to convert the SeaTalkng® messages to NMEA 0183 messages.
· Ray55
· Ray218
· Ray240
Planning the installation
33
Item Device Type
Maximum quantity
17 Raymarine® Sirius 1 marine weather / satellite radio receiver (North America only)
18 Additional
9
multifunction
display(s) --
Raymarine®
Suitable Devices SeaTalkhs:
· SR150
· SR100
· SR6
SeaTalkng®:
· SR50 3rd generation Raymarine® multifunction displays SeaTalkhs (recommended):
· a Series
· c Series
· e Series
· gS Series
Note: You can connect Raymarine® multifunction displays using NMEA 0183 or SeaTalkng® but not all functions are supported.
Connections SeaTalkhs, SeaTalkng®
SeaTalkhs
Note: Visit www.raymarine.com to download the latest software version for your display.
18 Additional multifunction display(s) -- third-party
· Connections to multifunction display NMEA outputs: 4
· Connections to multifunction display NMEA inputs: 2
Note: a6x and a7x a Series variant MFDs do not support direct connection of NMEA 0183 devices.
NMEA 0183compatible chartplotters and multifunction displays
NMEA 0183
19 Sonar Modules (Fishfinder) -- Raymarine®
Multiple
20 Radar -- Raymarine® 2
· CP100 -- DownVisionTM
· CP200 -- SideVisionTM
· CP300 -- Traditional sonar
· CP450C -- CHIRP sonar
· Sonar and DownVisionTM variant MFDs
All Raymarine® Non-HD Digital Radomes and HD or SuperHD radar scanners.
Note: Please ensure your radar scanner is using the latest software version.
SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs
34
a Series / c Series / e Series
Item Device Type 21 Thermal camera --
Raymarine®
22 Remote keypad 23 Fusion entertainment
systems
24 PC / laptop
Maximum quantity 1 Note: a6x and a7x a Series variant MFDs do not support thermal cameras. Multiple Multiple
1
Suitable Devices
Connections
· T200 Series · T300 Series
SeaTalkhs (for control), BNC connector (for video)
· T400 Series
· T800 Series
· T900 Series
· RMK-9
SeaTalkhs
Fusion 700 series entertainment SeaTalkhs systems:
· MS-IP700
· MS-AV700
Windows-compatible PC or laptop SeaTalkhs running Raymarine® Voyager planning software.
Note: Raymarine® cannot guarantee the compatibility of any third-party devices listed above.
Planning the installation
35
3.2 Installation checklist
Installation includes the following activities: Installation Task
1 Plan your system. 2 Obtain all required equipment and tools. 3 Site all equipment. 4 Route all cables. 5 Drill cable and mounting holes. 6 Make all connections into equipment. 7 Secure all equipment in place. 8 Power on and test the system.
3.3 Multiple data sources (MDS) overview
Installations that include multiple instances of data sources can cause data conflicts. An example is an installation featuring more than one source of GPS data.
MDS enables you to manage conflicts involving the following types of data:
· GPS Position.
· Heading.
· Depth.
· Speed.
· Wind.
Typically this exercise is completed as part of the initial installation, or when new equipment is added.
If this exercise is NOT completed the system will automatically attempt to resolve data conflicts. However, this may result in the system choosing a source of data that you do not want to use.
If MDS is available the system can list the available data sources and allow you to select your preferred data source. For MDS to be available all products in the system that use the data sources listed above must be MDS-compliant. The system can list any products that are NOT compliant. It may be necessary to upgrade the software for these non-compliant products to make them compliant. Visit the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com) to obtain the latest software for your products. If MDS-compliant software is not available and you do NOT want the system to automatically attempt to resolve data conflicts, any non-compliant product(s) can be removed or replaced to ensure the entire system is MDS-compliant.
36
a Series / c Series / e Series
3.4 Identifying your display variant
3.5 Networking constraints
To discover which model display you have follow the Raymarine's 3rd generation LightHouse powered
steps below:
MFDs (a Series, c Series, e Series and gS Series)
can be networked together.
From the homescreen: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select Maintenance. 3. Select Diagnostics. 4. Select Select Device. 5. Search the Network column for the 'This Device'
entry. 6. The Device column for this record will list the
model of your display.
General
· Up to 10 LightHouse powered MFDs can be connected together using SeaTalkhs.
· MFDs can also be connected via SeaTalkng® or NMEA 0183, but not all functions are supported.
· All networked aa Series, c Series and e Series displays must contain LightHouse software release V4.32 or later.
· All networked gS Series displays must contain LightHouse software release V7.43 or later.
Note: The a6x and a7x variant a Series MFDs cannot be networked using NMEA 0183.
Master / repeater operation
· Any network featuring more than 1 MFD must have 1 of the displays designated as the data master.
· The data master display will receive data through NMEA 0183 and / or SeaTalkng®, and bridge the data over SeaTalkhs to other networked displays.
Homescreen sharing · When networked, MFDs can share a homescreen.
Cartography sharing
· The cartography contained on chart cards is always used in preference to the embedded world base map when a chart card is inserted into a card slot.
· Chart card cartography can be shared between MFDs.
Radar operation
· MFDs support the use of up to 2 Radar scanners simultaneously.
· The data supplied by a connected Radar scanner(s) is repeated to any networked displays.
Note: All MFDs must have LightHouse II Release V12.xx software or later to enable multiple radar support.
Planning the installation
Sonar / DownVisionTM / SideVisionTM operation
· You can connect an external sonar module unit to the MFD via the SeaTalkhs network.
· Sonar and DownVisionTM variant MFDs include an internal sonar module which enables direct connection to a compatible transducer.
· You can have multiple active sonar modules (internal and external) on a network. You must select the sonar module / channel you want to use from the Fishfinder application menu.
· The data supplied by the sonar module is repeated to all networked displays.
37
Note:
· All MFDs must have LightHouse II Release V10.41 software or later to enable multiple sonar support.
· Sonar modules should be updated to the latest available software version to ensure compatibility.
Incompatible displays
If you connect a multifunction display to your system that is not compatible a warning message will be displayed until you disconnected the incompatible device from your network.
3rd generation multifunction displays are not compatible with the following Raymarine displays:
Multifunction Product Image display
Generation
G-Series
2nd generation
E-Series Widescreen
2nd generation
C-Series Widescreen
2nd generation
E-Series Classic
PAGE
ACTIVE WPTS MOB
DATA
MENU
OUT RANGE
IN
OK
CANCEL
C-Series Classic
PAGE
ACTIVE WPTS MOB
DATA
MENU
OUT RANGE
IN
OK
CANCEL
1st generation 1st generation
38
a Series / c Series / e Series
3.6 Typical systems
The illustrations below show examples of possible system configurations, for more details on compatible Raymarine devices please refer to the System integration section.
Note: In the examples below the multifunction display(s) could be any variant of Raymarine's 3rd generation multifunction displays e.g. a Series, c Series, e Series or gS Series.
Example: Basic system
1
2
3
4
5
0
SeaTalkhs / RayNet 6
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
SeaTalkng
D12245-3
1. Multifunction display 2. Network switch 3. Radar scanner 4. Actuator Control Unit (ACU) 5. Evolution autopilot 6. SeaTalkng pilot controller (optional) Note: A network switch is only required if multiple devices are connected using SeaTalkhs / RayNet.
Example: Basic system with sonar variant display
1
2
3
4
5
0
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
SeaTalkng
D12589-2
1. Multifunction display
2. Sonar transducer
3. Radar scanner
4. Evolution autopilot
5. SeaTalkng pilot controller (optional)
Planning the installation
39
Example: Basic system with non-sonar variant display
1
2
3
4
0
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
1. Multifunction display 2. Sonar module 3. Sonar transducer 4. Evolution autopilot 5. SeaTalkng pilot controller
Example: Expanded system
1
2
3
SeaTalkng 4
5
6
5
D12590-2
7
SeaTalkhs / RayNet SeaTalkng SeaTalkng SeaTalkng
12
8
9
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
12
11
15 12
SeaTalkng
10 DeviceNet
14 13
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
1. Radar scanner 2. Weather sensor 3. Sirius weather receiver 4. Sonar module 5. SeaTalkng Pilot controller 6. SeaTalkng Instrument display 7. AIS receiver / transceiver 8. Audio system 9. Smartphone / tablet 10. DeviceNet spur (for NMEA 2000 devices) 11. Network switch 12. Multifunction displays
40
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
D12247-2
a Series / c Series / e Series
13. GPS receiver 14. Thermal camera 15. Wireless connection
Planning the installation
41
3.7 System protocols
Your Multifunction Display can connect to various instruments and displays to share information and so improve the functionality of the system. These connections may be made using a number of different protocols. Fast and accurate data collection and transfer is achieved by using a combination of the following data protocols:
· SeaTalkhs
· SeaTalkng
· NMEA 2000
· SeaTalk
· NMEA 0183
Note: You may find that your system does not use all of the connection types or instrumentation described in this section.
SeaTalkhs
SeaTalkhs is an ethernet based marine network. This high speed protocol allows compatible equipment to communicate rapidly and share large amounts of data.
Information shared using the SeaTalkhs network includes:
· Shared cartography (between compatible displays).
· Digital radar data.
· Sonar data.
Seatalkng
SeaTalkng (Next Generation) is an enhanced protocol for connection of compatible marine instruments and equipment. It replaces the older SeaTalk and SeaTalk2 protocols.
SeaTalkng utilizes a single backbone to which compatible instruments connect using a spur. Data and power are carried within the backbone. Devices that have a low draw can be powered from the network, although high current equipment will need to have a separate power connection.
SeaTalkng is a proprietary extension to NMEA 2000 and the proven CAN bus technology. Compatible NMEA 2000 and SeaTalk / SeaTalk2 devices can also be connected using the appropriate interfaces or adaptor cables as required.
NMEA 2000
NMEA 2000 offers significant improvements over NMEA 0183, most notably in speed and connectivity. Up to 50 units can simultaneously transmit and receive on a single physical bus at any one time, with each node being physically addressable. The standard was specifically intended to allow for
a whole network of marine electronics from any manufacturer to communicate on a common bus via standardized message types and formats.
SeaTalk
SeaTalk is a protocol which enables compatible instruments to connect to each other and share data.
The SeaTalk cable system is used to connect compatible instruments and equipment. The cable carries power and data and enables connection without the need for a central processor.
Additional instruments and functions can be added to a SeaTalk system, simply by plugging them into the network. SeaTalk equipment can also communicate with other non-SeaTalk equipment via the NMEA 0183 standard, provided a suitable interface is used.
NMEA 0183
The NMEA 0183 Data Interface Standard was developed by the National Marine Electronics Association of America. It is an international standard to enable equipment from many different manufacturers to be connected together and share information.
The NMEA 0183 standard carries similar information to SeaTalk. However it has the important difference that one cable will only carry information in one direction. For this reason NMEA 0183 is generally used to connect a data receiver and a transmitter together, e.g. a compass sensor transmitting heading to a radar display. This information is passed in `sentences', each of which has a three letter sentence identifier. It is therefore important when checking compatibility between items that the same sentence identifiers are used some examples of which are:
· VTG - carries Course and Speed Over Ground data.
· GLL - carries latitude and longitude.
· DBT - carries water depth.
· MWV - carries relative wind angle and wind speed data.
NMEA Baud rates
The NMEA 0183 standard operates at a number of different speeds, depending upon the particular requirement or equipment capabilities. Typical examples are:
· 4800 baud rate. Used for general purpose communications, including FastHeading data.
· 38400 baud rate. Used for AIS and other high speed applications.
42
a Series / c Series / e Series
3.8 Data master
3.9 a6x and a7x parts supplied
Any system containing more than one networked multifunction display must have a designated data master.
The data master is the display which serves as a primary source of data for all displays, it also handles all external sources of information. For example the displays may require heading information from the autopilot and GPS systems, usually received through a SeaTalkng or NMEA connection. The data master is the display to which the SeaTalk, NMEA and any other data connections are made, it then bridges the data to the SeaTalkhs network and any compatible repeat displays. Information shared by the data master includes:
The following items are supplied with your a6x and a7x variant MFD.
1
2
3
4
5
6
· Cartography
· Routes and waypoints
· Radar
7
· Sonar
· Data received from the autopilot, instruments, the
engine and other external sources.
1
Front bezel
x4
8
D12583-2
Your system may be wired for redundancy with data 2
connections made to repeat displays. However these connections will only become active in the event of a
3
fault and/or reassignment of the data master.
4
Multifunction display Mounting gasket Sun cover
In an autopilot system which does not contain a
5
dedicated pilot control head the Data master also acts as the control for the autopilot.
6
7
Trunnion bracket kit Documentation pack Power cable
8
4x Nuts, bolts, spring washers and washers (can
be used for either surface or bracket mounting.)
Planning the installation
43
3.10 a9x and a12x parts supplied
The following items are supplied with your a9x and a12x variant MFD.
1
2
3
3.11 e7 / e7D Parts supplied
The parts shown below are supplied with the e7 / e7D multifunction display.
4
5
7 9 10
6
x4
8
5 4
3
2 1
9
x4 x4
6
x4
7
11 8
D12170-4
1
Front bezel
2
Multifunction display (MFD)
3
Mounting gasket
4
Sun cover
D13066-1
1. Sun cover.
2. Front bezel.
3. Multifunction display.
4. Rear bezel (required for trunnion bracket mounting).
5
Trunnion bracket kit
5. Gasket (required for flush mounting).
6
Documentation pack
6. Screw pack, includes:
7
SeaTalkng to DeviceNet adaptor cable
· 4 x rear bezel fixing screws.
8
4x Nuts, bolts, spring washers and washers (can
· 4 x sets of fixings (for surface mounting).
be used for either surface or bracket mounting.)
· 4 x sets of fixings (for trunnion bracket
9
3 m (9.8 ft.) SeaTalkng spur cable
mounting).
10
2 m (6.6 ft.) RayNet cable
7. Documentation pack, includes:
11
1.5 m (4.9 ft.) Power and data cable
(Power/NMEA/Video)
· Multilingual CD. · Mounting and getting started multilingual guide
· Mounting template.
· Warranty policy
8. Power and data cable.
9. Trunnion bracket kit.
44
a Series / c Series / e Series
3.12 c Series and e Series parts supplied
The parts shown below are supplied with the c Series and e Series(Excluding e7 and e7D) multifunction displays.
3.13 Tools required for installation
1
2
3
4
5
4
6
7
8
3
D12171-2
2
1. Power drill.
5 1
6
2. Jigsaw.
3. Pozidrive screwdriver.
4. Adhesive tape.
7
1. Sun cover 2. Front bezel
5. Spanner for surface mounting or bracket
mounting fixings.
D12248-2
6. File.
7. Hole saw for flush mounting (For hole saw size refer to your product's mounting template).
3. Multifunction display (MFD)
8. Drill bit for surface mounting or bracket mounting.
4. Gasket (required for surface mounting)
5. 4 x sets of fixings (for surface mounting)
6. Documentation pack, includes:
· Multilingual CD
· Mounting and getting started multilingual guide
· Mounting template
· Warranty policy
7. Power and data cable
Planning the installation
45
3.14 Selecting a location
Compass safe distance
Warning: Potential ignition source
This product is NOT approved for use in hazardous/flammable atmospheres. Do NOT install in a hazardous/flammable atmosphere (such as in an engine room or near fuel tanks).
General location requirements
When selecting a location for your product it is important to consider a number of factors.
Key factors which can affect product performance are:
· Ventilation To ensure adequate airflow:
Ensure that product is mounted in a compartment of suitable size.
Ensure that ventilation holes are not obstructed. Allow adequate separation of all equipment.
To prevent potential interference with the vessel's magnetic compasses, ensure an adequate distance is maintained from the display.
When choosing a suitable location for the multifunction display you should aim to maintain the maximum possible distance between the display and any compasses. Typically this distance should be at least 1 m (3 ft) in all directions. However for some smaller vessels it may not be possible to locate the display this far away from a compass. In this situation, the following figures provide the minimum safe distance that should be maintained between the display and any compasses.
1
2
6
(295.084minm)
(270.087minm)
(51090.7minm)
Any specific requirements for each system component are provided later in this chapter.
· Mounting surface
Ensure product is adequately supported on a secure surface. Do not mount units or cut holes in places which may damage the structure of the vessel.
· Cabling
Ensure the product is mounted in a location which allows proper routing, support and connection of cables:
Minimum bend radius of 100 mm (3.94 in) unless otherwise stated.
Use cable clips to prevent stress on connectors.
If your installation requires multiple ferrites to be added to a cable then additional cable clips should be used to ensure the extra weight of the cable is supported.
· Water ingress
The product is suitable for mounting both above and below decks. Although the unit is waterproof, it is good practice to locate it in a protected area away from prolonged and direct exposure to rain and salt spray.
· Electrical interference
Select a location that is far enough away from devices that may cause interference, such as motors, generators and radio transmitters / receivers.
· Power supply
Select a location that is as close as possible to the vessel's DC power source. This will help to keep cable runs to a minimum.
(72070.5minm)
3(1010.8minm)
(31530.8minm)
3
5
4
D12203-1
Compass
position in
Minimum safe
relation to
distance from
Item
display
display
1
Top
200 mm (7.87 in.)
2
Rear
500 mm (19.7 in.)
3
Right-hand side 350 mm (13.8 in.)
4
Underside
300 mm (11.8 in.)
5
Front
700 mm (27.5 in.)
6
Left-hand side 250 mm (9.84 in.)
GPS location requirements
In addition to general guidelines concerning the location of marine electronics, there are a number of environmental factors to consider when installing equipment with an internal GPS antenna.
Mounting location
· Above Decks mounting: Provides optimal GPS performance. (For equipment with appropriate waterproof rating.)
· Below Decks mounting: GPS performance may be less effective and may require an external GPS antenna mounted above decks.
46
a Series / c Series / e Series
a Series product dimensions
CD 1 2 3
B B
E E
1
2
3
D11537-2
1.
This location provides optimal GPS
performance (above decks).
2.
In this location, GPS performance may be less
effective.
3.
This location is NOT recommended for GPS
antenna.
Vessel construction
The construction of your vessel can have an impact on GPS performance. For example, the proximity of heavy structure such as a structural bulkhead, or the interior of larger vessels may result in a reduced GPS signal. Before locating equipment with an internal GPS antenna below decks, seek professional assistance and consider use of an external GPS antenna mounted above decks.
A
F
D12579-2
a6x
a7x
a9x
a12x
A 163.6 mm 205.1 mm 250.1 mm 318 mm
(6.4 in.) (8 in.)
(9.8 in.) (12.5 in.)
B 143.5 mm 147.1 mm 189.5 mm 238.3 mm (5.6 in.) (5.8 in.) (7.5 in.) (9.4 in.)
C 17.5 mm 14.5 mm 14.5 mm 14.5 mm (0.7 in.) (0.57 in.) (0.57 in.) (0.57 in.)
D 56.6 mm 59.1 mm 68.1 mm 69.6 mm (2.2 in.) (2.3 in.) (2.7 in.) (2.7 in.)
E 162.4 mm 163.3 mm 198.26 mm 248.14 mm (6.4 in.) (6.4 in.) (7.8 in.) (9.8 in.)
F 150 mm 150 mm 150 mm 150 mm (5.9 in.) (5.9 in.) (5.9 in.) (5.9 in.)
c Series and e Series product dimensions
CD
Prevailing conditions The weather and location of the vessel can affect the GPS performance. Typically calm clear conditions provide for a more accurate GPS fix. Vessels at extreme northerly or southerly latitudes may also receive a weaker GPS signal. GPS antenna mounted below decks will be more susceptible to performance issues related to the prevailing conditions.
Viewing angle considerations As display contrast, color and night mode performance are all affected by the viewing angle, Raymarine recommends you temporarily power up A the display when planning the installation, to enable you to best judge which location gives the optimum B viewing angle.
C
D
E
F
A
F
D12269-3
e7 / e7D
e95 / e97 / c95 / c97
e125 / e127 / c125 / e165 c127
233 mm 289.6 mm 353.6 mm 426 mm (9.17 in.) (11.4 in.) (13.92 in.) (16.8 in.)
144 mm (5.67 in.)
30 mm 1.18 in.)
173.1 mm (6.81 in.)
31.4 mm (1.24 in.)
222 mm (8.74 in.)
31.9 mm (1.26 in.)
281.4 mm (11.1 in.)
31.4 mm (1.24 in.)
63.5 mm 63.9 mm 68.9 mm 69.8 mm (2.5 in.) (2.5 in.) (2.71 in.) (2.75 in.)
177 mm 212 mm 256.5 mm 292 mm (6.97 in.) (8.35 in.) (10.1 in.) (11.5 in.)
160 mm 160 mm 160 mm 160 mm (6.29 in.) (6.29 in.) (6.29 in.) (6.29 in.)
Planning the installation
47
48
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 4: Cables and connections
Chapter contents · 4.1 General cabling guidance on page 50 · 4.2 Connections overview on page 51 · 4.3 a9x and a12x connections overview on page 52 · 4.4 Power connection -- a6x and a7x on page 52 · 4.5 Power and data connection on page 54 · 4.6 Network connections on page 57 · 4.7 Keypad connection on page 57 · 4.8 Radar connection on page 58 · 4.9 Sonar connection on page 60 · 4.10 Thermal camera connection on page 63 · 4.11 IP Camera connections on page 64 · 4.12 Weather receiver connection on page 65 · 4.13 Fusion link connection on page 66 · 4.14 GPS connection on page 67 · 4.15 GA150 connection on page 67 · 4.16 AIS connection on page 68 · 4.17 Fastheading connection on page 69 · 4.18 SeaTalkng connections on page 69 · 4.19 NMEA 2000 connection on page 70 · 4.20 SeaTalk connection on page 71 · 4.21 NMEA 0183 connection on page 71 · 4.22 a6x and a7x to NMEA 0183 DSC VHF radio connection on page 72 · 4.23 Camera / Video connection on page 73 · 4.24 Camera / video in-out connection on page 73 · 4.25 Media player connection on page 74 · 4.26 Bluetooth remote control connection on page 76 · 4.27 Remote control functions on page 77 · 4.28 WiFi connections on page 79
Cables and connections
49
4.1 General cabling guidance
Cable types and length
It is important to use cables of the appropriate type and length
· Unless otherwise stated use only standard cables of the correct type, supplied by Raymarine.
· Ensure that any non-Raymarine cables are of the correct quality and gauge. For example, longer power cable runs may require larger wire gauges to minimize voltage drop along the run.
· Always use an RS232/NMEA converter with optical isolation on the signal lines.
· Always make sure that PC's or other sensitive electronic devices have a dedicated power circuit.
Cable shielding
Ensure that all data cables are properly shielded that the cable shielding is intact (e.g. hasn't been scraped off by being squeezed through a tight area).
Routing cables
Cables must be routed correctly, to maximize performance and prolong cable life.
· Do NOT bend cables excessively. Wherever possible, ensure a minimum bend diameter of 200 mm (8 in) / minimum bend radius of 100 mm (4 in).
200 mm (8 in)
100 mm (4 in)
· Protect all cables from physical damage and exposure to heat. Use trunking or conduit where possible. Do NOT run cables through bilges or doorways, or close to moving or hot objects.
· Secure cables in place using tie-wraps or lacing twine. Coil any extra cable and tie it out of the way.
· Where a cable passes through an exposed bulkhead or deckhead, use a suitable watertight feed-through.
· Do NOT run cables near to engines or fluorescent lights.
Always route data cables as far away as possible from:
· other equipment and cables,
· high current carrying ac and dc power lines,
· antennae.
Strain relief
Ensure adequate strain relief is provided. Protect connectors from strain and ensure they will not pull out under extreme sea conditions.
Circuit isolation
Appropriate circuit isolation is required for installations using both AC and DC current:
· Always use isolating transformers or a separate power-inverter to run PC's, processors, displays and other sensitive electronic instruments or devices.
· Always use an isolating transformer with Weather FAX audio cables.
· Always use an isolated power supply when using a 3rd party audio amplifier.
50
a Series / c Series / e Series
4.2 Connections overview
0 0 Details of the connections available on Raymarine multifunction displays are shown below.
a65 / a75
a67 / a68 / a7 7 / a78
00 0
00 0
0
0
e7
e7D
e95 / e125 / e165
e97 / e127
c95 / c125
c97 / c127
a65 a65 Wi-Fi a67 a67 Wi-Fi a68 a68 Wi-Fi a75 a75 Wi-Fi a77 a77 Wi-Fi a78 a78 Wi-Fi e7
e7D
e95
e97
e125
e127
e165
c95
c97
c125
c127
Transducer
DownVi-
sion trans-
ducer
SeaTalkng
SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs / RayNet / RayNet Video in / Network 1 Network 2 out
D12249-7
Power / Data
Video /
NMEA
Power
0183
Cables and connections
51
4.3 a9x and a12x connections overview
The a9x and a12x variant MFDs include the following connections.
0 4.4 Power connection -- a6x and a7x 00 0 0
4
1
2
3
12
3
4
5
6
D13068-1
5
6
1. Sonar transducer (a97 and a127) / DownVisionTM
transducer (a98 and a128)
D12581-2
2. SeaTalkng
1. Multifunction display rear panel connections.
3. Network 1 (RayNet)
2. Power cable.
4. Network 2 (RayNet)
3. Connection to 12 V power supply
5. Power and data
4. Red cable (positive).
6. GA150 antenna
5. Shield (drain) wire (thin black wire; must be connected to RF ground point).
6. Black cable (negative).
Power distribution
Raymarine recommends that all power connections are made via a distribution panel.
· All equipment must be powered from a breaker or switch, with appropriate circuit protection.
· All equipment should be wired to individual breakers if possible.
Warning: Product grounding
Before applying power to this product, ensure it has been correctly grounded, in accordance with the instructions provided.
Grounding -- Dedicated drain wire
The power cable supplied with this product includes a dedicated shield (drain) wire for connection to a vessel's RF ground point.
It is important that an effective RF ground is connected to the system. A single ground point should be used for all equipment. The unit can be grounded by connecting the shield (drain) wire of the power cable to the vessel's RF ground point. On vessels without an RF ground system the shield (drain) wire should be connected directly to the negative battery terminal.
The dc power system should be either:
· Negative grounded, with the negative battery terminal connected to the vessel's ground.
· Floating, with neither battery terminal connected to the vessel's ground
Warning: Positive ground systems
Do not connect this unit to a system which has positive grounding.
52
a Series / c Series / e Series
Breakers, fuses and circuit protection
The information below is provided as guidance
to help protect your product. The example
illustrations provided are for common vessel power
arrangements, if you are unsure how to provide the
correct level of protection then please consult a
Raymarine authorized dealer for support.
6
12 3 4
5
D13019-1
1. Vessel power supply positive (+) Distribution panel connection It is recommended that your product is wired through 2. Vessel power supply negative (-)
your vessel's distribution panel via a thermal breaker 3. In-line fuse (If your products power cable does
or fuse.
not have a built in fuse then an in-line fuse
should be fitted.)
12
3
4. Drain wire connected to vessel negative power
supply.
5. Product power cable
4
5
6
7
D13017-1
1. Vessel power supply positive (+)
2. In-line fuse. (If your products power cable does not have an in-line fuse then an one fuse should be fitted.)
3. Product power cable
4. Vessel power supply negative (-)
5. * Drain wire
6. Vessel distribution panel
7. Vessel RF ground point connection
Battery connection with RF ground
If your vessel does not have a distribution panel then your product may be wired directly to the battery with the drain wire connected to the vessel's RF ground point.
6. Vessel battery
In-line fuse and thermal breaker ratings
The following in-line fuse and thermal breaker ratings apply to your product:
In-line fuse rating
Thermal breaker rating
5A
3 A (if only connecting one
device)
Note:
· The suitable fuse rating for the thermal breaker is dependent on the number of devices you are connecting. If in doubt consult an authorized Raymarine dealer.
· Your product's power cable may have fitted in-line fuse, if not then you can add an in-line fuse to the positive wire of your products power connection.
12 3
4
5
6
7
D13018-1
1. Vessel power supply positive (+)
2. Vessel power supply negative (-)
3. In-line fuse (If your products power cable does not have a built in fuse then an in-line fuse should be fitted.)
4. * Drain wire 5. Product power cable
6. Vessel battery 7. Vessel RF ground point connection
Battery connection with no RF ground
If your vessel does not have a distribution panel or an RF ground point then your product may be wired directly to the battery with the drain wire also connected to the battery's negative terminal.
Cables and connections
Power cable
Depending on Multifunction display variant, the display is either supplied with a power cable or a combined power and data cable.
Power cables available
For flush mount installations a right angled power cable is available.
Cable
Part number
MFD variant
Straight power R70157 cable (supplied with a6x and a7x)
a6x and a7x
Right angled power cable
A80221
a6x and a7x
Straight power and data cable (supplied with a9x and a12x)
R62379
All variants excluding a6x and a7x
Right angled power and data cable
R70029
All variants excluding a6x and a7x
53
Cable extension
4.5 Power and data connection
Power cables can be extended if required. The following restrictions apply to any extension to the power cable:
The details below apply to MFDs which have a combined power and data cable.
· Cable must be of a suitable gauge for the circuit
load.
1
· Each unit should have its own dedicated power
cable wired back to the distribution panel.
Total length
Cable gauge
4
5
(max)
Supply voltage (AWG)
2
3
05 m (016.4 ft) 12 V
18
24 V
20
7
6
510 m
12 V
14
(16.432.8 ft)
24 V
18
1015 m
12 V
12
(32.849.2 ft)
24 V
16
1520 m
12 V
12
(49.265.5 ft)
24 V
14
Note: a6x and a7x MFDs are 12 V only products. NEVER connect a 12 V only product to a 24 V system.
8 9
D12250-2
1. Power and data connection 2. Power and data cable 3. Connection to vessel's 12 V / 24 V dc power
supply 4. Red cable (positive) 5. Fuse
Sharing a breaker
6. Black cable (negative)
Where more than 1 piece of equipment shares a
7. Video input cable
breaker you must provide protection for the individual 8. NMEA 0183 data cables
circuits. E.g. by connecting an in-line fuse for each 9. Shield (drain) wire (thin black wire; must be
power circuit.
connected to RF ground point)
+
1
-
2
Power distribution
Raymarine recommends that all power connections are made via a distribution panel.
· All equipment must be powered from a breaker or
3
switch, with appropriate circuit protection.
· All equipment should be wired to individual
breakers if possible.
4
4
Warning: Product grounding
Before applying power to this product, ensure it has been correctly grounded, in accordance with the instructions provided.
D11637-2
1
Positive (+) bar
2
Negative (-) bar
3
Circuit breaker
4
Fuse
Where possible, connect individual items of equipment to individual circuit breakers. Where this is not possible, use individual in-line fuses to provide the necessary protection.
54
Grounding -- Dedicated drain wire
The power cable supplied with this product includes a dedicated shield (drain) wire for connection to a vessel's RF ground point.
It is important that an effective RF ground is connected to the system. A single ground point should be used for all equipment. The unit can be grounded by connecting the shield (drain) wire of the power cable to the vessel's RF ground point. On vessels without an RF ground system the shield (drain) wire should be connected directly to the negative battery terminal.
The dc power system should be either:
· Negative grounded, with the negative battery terminal connected to the vessel's ground.
a Series / c Series / e Series
· Floating, with neither battery terminal connected to the vessel's ground
Warning: Positive ground systems
Do not connect this unit to a system which has positive grounding.
Breakers, fuses and circuit protection The information below is provided as guidance to help protect your product. The example illustrations provided are for common vessel power arrangements, if you are unsure how to provide the correct level of protection then please consult a Raymarine authorized dealer for support.
7. Vessel RF ground point connection
Battery connection with no RF ground
If your vessel does not have a distribution panel or an RF ground point then your product may be wired directly to the battery with the drain wire also connected to the battery's negative terminal.
12 3 4 6
5
D13019-1
Distribution panel connection
1. Vessel power supply positive (+)
It is recommended that your product is wired through 2. Vessel power supply negative (-)
your vessel's distribution panel via a thermal breaker 3. In-line fuse (If your products power cable does
or fuse.
not have a built in fuse then an in-line fuse
should be fitted.)
12
3
4. Drain wire connected to vessel negative power
supply.
5. Product power cable
4
5
6. Vessel battery
6
7
D13017-1 In-line fuse and thermal breaker ratings
1. Vessel power supply positive (+)
2. In-line fuse. (If your products power cable does not have an in-line fuse then an one fuse should be fitted.)
3. Product power cable
4. Vessel power supply negative (-)
5. * Drain wire
6. Vessel distribution panel
7. Vessel RF ground point connection
Battery connection with RF ground If your vessel does not have a distribution panel then your product may be wired directly to the battery with the drain wire connected to the vessel's RF ground point.
The following in-line fuse and thermal breaker ratings apply to your product:
In-line fuse rating
Thermal breaker rating
7A
5 A (if only connecting one
device)
Note:
· The suitable fuse rating for the thermal breaker is dependent on the number of devices you are connecting. If in doubt consult an authorized Raymarine dealer.
· Your product's power cable may have fitted in-line fuse, if not then you can add an in-line fuse to the positive wire of your products power connection.
12 3
4
5
6
7
D13018-1
1. Vessel power supply positive (+)
2. Vessel power supply negative (-)
3. In-line fuse (If your products power cable does not have a built in fuse then an in-line fuse should be fitted.)
4. * Drain wire
5. Product power cable
6. Vessel battery
Cables and connections
Power cable
Depending on Multifunction display variant, the display is either supplied with a power cable or a combined power and data cable.
Power cables available
For flush mount installations a right angled power cable is available.
Cable
Part number
MFD variant
Straight power R70157 cable (supplied with a6x and a7x)
a6x and a7x
Right angled power cable
A80221
a6x and a7x
55
Cable
Straight power and data cable (supplied with a9x and a12x)
Right angled power and data cable
Part number R62379
R70029
MFD variant
All variants excluding a6x and a7x
All variants excluding a6x and a7x
3
Circuit breaker
4
Fuse
Where possible, connect individual items of equipment to individual circuit breakers. Where this is not possible, use individual in-line fuses to provide the necessary protection.
Cable extension
Power cables can be extended if required. The following restrictions apply to any extension to the power cable:
· Cable must be of a suitable gauge for the circuit load.
· Each unit should have its own dedicated power cable wired back to the distribution panel.
Total length (max)
Cable gauge Supply voltage (AWG)
05 m (016.4 ft) 12 V
18
24 V
20
510 m
12 V
14
(16.432.8 ft)
24 V
18
1015 m
12 V
12
(32.849.2 ft)
24 V
16
1520 m
12 V
12
(49.265.5 ft)
24 V
14
Note: a6x and a7x MFDs are 12 V only products. NEVER connect a 12 V only product to a 24 V system.
Sharing a breaker
Where more than 1 piece of equipment shares a breaker you must provide protection for the individual circuits. E.g. by connecting an in-line fuse for each power circuit.
+
1
-
2
3
4
4
D11637-2
1
Positive (+) bar
2
Negative (-) bar
56
a Series / c Series / e Series
4.6 Network connections
4.7 Keypad connection
You can connect compatible devices to your multifunction display using the Network connector(s) at the rear of the unit.
A typical network of digital devices may include:
· Up to 6 Raymarine multifunction displays.
· RayNet or SeaTalkhs digital devices such as a sonar module and radar scanner.
A remote keypad such as the RMK-9 can be connected directly to the multifunction display's network connector or via a network switch. Multiple keypads can be connected to a system. Each keypad can be used to control up to 4 multifunction displays.
Direct connection
· Thermal or IP cameras.
1
2
Note: Your multifunction display includes the following network connectors:
· e7, e7D and a Series = 1 x RayNet network
3
connector.
· c Series and e Series (excluding the e7 and
e7D) = 2 x RayNet network connectors.
D12694-2
Networks requiring additional network connections 1. Multifunction display.
will require a Raymarine network switch.
2. Keypad.
Please refer to Chapter 33 Spares and accessories for details of available network cables and hardware.
Network cable connector types
There are 2 types of network cable connector -- SeaTalkhs and RayNet.
SeaTalkhs connector -- used for connecting SeaTalkhs devices to a Raymarine network switch via SeaTalkhs cables.
3. Right angled power cable.
When connecting the keypad directly to a New a Series, New c Series or New e Series multifunction display the keypad must be powered separately, using the alternate power connector.
Network connection
1
2
RayNet connector -- used for
connecting Raymarine network
3
switches and SeaTalkhs devices to
the multifunction display via RayNet
cables. Also required for connecting a
4
crossover coupler if only one device
is being connected to the display's
Network connector.
Cables and connections
4
D12697-3
1. Network switch. 2. Keypad. 3. Right angled power cable. 4. Networked multifunction displays. When connecting the keypad via a network switch the keypad must be powered separately, using the alternate power connector. Once connected the keypad must be paired with the each multifunction display you want to control using the keypad.
57
4.8 Radar connection
Radar connected directly to the display
The multifunction display is compatible with Raymarine Non-HD digital radomes and HD / SuperHD radar scanners. The scanner is connected using over SeaTalkhs.
Note:
1
· New c Series and New e Series displays (excluding the e7 and e7D) can connect 2 SeaTalkhs / RayNet devices directly to the display.
· New a Series and the e7 / e7D displays can connect 1 SeaTalkhs / RayNet device directly to the display.
The radar is usually connected via a Raymarine
2
network switch. On smaller systems (with only one
display and no other digital devices) the radar may
be connected to the display directly.
3
Radar connected using Raymarine network
switch
4
1
2
D12253-2
1. Radar scanner
2. Multifunction display rear connector panel.
3. RayNet Radar cable.
4. Connection to power supply -- Open array scanners require a VCM (Voltage Converter Module).
3
RJ45 SeaTalkhs Radar cable connection To connect a Radar using an RJ45 SeaTalkhs radar cable additional accessories are required.
4
1
6
5
2
1. Radar scanner.
Dxxxxx-x
3
2. Raymarine network switch.
3. RayNet cable.
4. RayNet radar cable.
5. VCM (Voltage Converter Module) -- required for Open Arrays.
6. Power connection.
D12884-1
1. RJ45 SeaTalkhs Radar cable. 2. RayNet to RJ45 SeaTalkhs adaptor cable.
3. SeaTalkhs crossover coupler.
Radar cable extension For longer cable runs a radar power and data digital cable extension is required.
58
a Series / c Series / e Series
1
2
3
4
D12254-1
1. Radar extension cable. 2. Radar power and data digital cable. 3. Raymarine network switch (or crossover coupler if connecting radar directly to display). 4. RayNet cable (or RayNet to SeaTalkhs cable if connecting via crossover coupler). Note: The extension cable connects to the radar scanner.
Note: The power connection is NOT shown in the diagram. If using an Open Array scanner a VCM (Voltage Converter Module) must be connected between the scanner and the power supply.
Digital radar cables
RayNet Radar power and data digital cables
You will need a dedicated radar power and data digital cable and appropriate network cables to connect your scanner to your system.
Connection
Required cable
Radar scanner to power supply and Raymarine network switch.
Power and data digital cable. For longer cable runs, extensions are available in a variety of lengths.
Raymarine network switch to Network cables, available in
multifunction display.
a variety of cable lengths.
SeaTalkhs Radar power and data digital cables
These cables contain the wires for a scanner's power and data connections.
These cables contain the wires for a scanner's power and data connections.
Cable
Part number
RayNet 5 m (16.4 ft) Power A80227 and data digital cable
RayNet 10 m (32.8 ft) Power A80228 and data digital cable
RayNet 15 m (49.2 ft) Power A80229 and data digital cable
RayNet 25 m (82.0 ft) Power A80230 and data digital cable
Note: The maximum length for the radar power and data digital cable (including any extensions) is 25 m (82 ft).
Cable
Part number
RJ45 SeaTalkhs 5 m (16.4 ft) A55076D Power and data digital cable
RJ45 SeaTalkhs 10 m (32.8 ft) A55077D Power and data digital cable
RJ45 SeaTalkhs 15 m (49.2 ft) A55078D Power and data digital cable
RJ45 SeaTalkhs 25 m (82.0 ft) A55079D Power and data digital cable
Note: The maximum length for the radar power and data digital cable (including any extensions) is 25 m (82 ft).
Radar power and data digital extension cables
These cables extend the power and data digital cables for a scanner's power and data connections.
Cable
Part number
2.5 m (8.2 ft) Power and data A92141D digital cable
5 m (16.4 ft) Power and data A55080D digital cable
10 m (32.8 ft) Power and data A55081D digital cable
Cables and connections
59
Note: The maximum length for the radar power and data digital cable (including any extensions) is 25 m (82 ft).
4.9 Sonar connection
A sonar connection is required to enable use of the Fishfinder application.
The MFD can be used with the following Raymarine sonar modules:
· CP450C
· CP300
· CP200
· CP100
There are 2 types of connection required for Fishfinder applications:
· Sonar module connection -- converts the sonar signals provided by the sonar transducer into data suitable for a marine electronics system. The sonar variant multifunction displays feature a built-in sonar, enabling you to connect the display directly to a compatible sonar transducer. Non-sonar variants require a connection to an external Raymarine sonar module. Internal and external sonars require a connection to a compatible sonar transducer.
· Sonar transducer connection -- provides sonar signals to the sonar module.
Sonar module connection
1
4
2
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
3
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
D12255-1
1. Rear connector panel of multifunction display (Non-sonar variant).
2. Raymarine network switch.
3. Raymarine sonar module.
4. RayNet cable.
If a spare network connection is available on your multifunction display then a sonar module may be connected directly to the display, without using a Raymarine network switch.
Note: You can also connect a sonar variant MFD to a Raymarine® sonar module. This is useful in circumstances where you need a higher powered sonar module for example.
Multiple active sonar modules
Multiple active sonar modules can be present on the same network, you must select which sonar module / channel you want to use in the Fishfinder application.
60
a Series / c Series / e Series
600 watt sonar-compatible sonar transducer
connection via optional adaptor -- Sonar variant
1
multifunction displays
3
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
2
4
1
2 3
3
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
5
3
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
D12975-1
1. Rear connector panel of multifunction display (Sonar variant).
2. Raymarine® network switch.
3. RayNet network cables.
4. CP450C CHIRP sonar module
5. CP100 DownVisionTM or CP200 SideVisionTM sonar module
D12257-1
1. Rear connector panel of multifunction display (Sonar variant).
2. E66066 adaptor cable. 3. Sonar transducer.
Transducer adaptor cable
Cable
Part number
0.5 m (1.64 ft) transducer adaptor cable
E66066
Sonar transducer connection -- Non-Sonar variant multifunction displays
Compatible sonar transducers The multifunction display is compatible with the following sonar transducers:
· Raymarine® P48
· Raymarine® P58
· Minn Kota transducers Sonar variant Raymarine displays only), via optional A62363 adaptor cable.
· Any 600 watt sonar-compatible transducer, via optional E66066 adaptor cable.
Sonar transducer connection -- Sonar variant multifunction displays
1
3
2
D12256-1
1. Rear connector panel of multifunction display (Sonar variant).
2. Sonar transducer cable. 3. Sonar transducer.
1
4
2
SeaTalkhs/
5
RayNet
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
6
3
D12258-1
1. Rear connector panel of MFD (Non-sonar variant).
2. Raymarine® network switch (only required if connecting more than one device usingSeaTalkhs / RayNet).
3. RayNet cable. 4. Raymarine® sonar module. 5. Sonar transducer cable. 6. Sonar transducer.
Cables and connections
61
Minn Kota sonar transducer connection via optional adaptor cable (Sonar variant multifunction displays only)
4
1
2
3
· No MFD(s) with an internal sonar module, but more than one CP300 or CP450C sonar module.
This does NOT apply to any systems that do NOT include a CP300 or CP450C sonar module.
Note: For software downloads and instructions on how to update the software for your product(s), visit www.raymarine.com/software.
D12259-1
1. Rear connector panel of MFD (Sonar variant). 2. Minn Kota transducer adaptor cable. 3. Minn Kota transducer cable. 4. Minn Kota transducer.
Sonar variant multifunction displays
The table below details which multifunction display variants feature a built-in sonar module and can be connected directly to compatible sonar transducers.
Non-sonar variants
Sonar variants
DownVisionTM variants
a65
a67
a68
a65 Wi-Fi
a67 Wi-Fi
a68 Wi-Fi
a75
a77
a78
a75 Wi-Fi
a77 Wi-Fi
a78 Wi-Fi
a95
a97
a98
a125
a127
a128
e7
e7D
c95
c97
c125
c127
e95
e97
e125
e127
e165
Minn Kota transducer adaptor cable
Connects a Minn Kota sonar transducer to a compatible Raymarine multifunction display.
Cable
Part number
1 m (3.28 ft) Minn Kota transducer adaptor cable
A62363
Important software requirements for multiple sonar systems
If your system includes more than one source of sonar data you must ensure that any CP300 or CP450C sonar modules are running software version v4.04 or later.
This applies to systems which include:
· Any number of MFD(s) with an internal sonar module plus a CP300 and / or CP450C sonar module; or
62
a Series / c Series / e Series
4.10 Thermal camera connection
You can connect a thermal camera to your New c Series or New e Series multifunction displays.
Note: New a Series does not support thermal cameras.
The camera is usually connected via a Raymarine network switch. If you want to use the optional Joystick Control Unit (JCU) with the camera this must also be connected to the network switch. A composite video connection is required between the camera and the multifunction display.
T200 Series thermal camera connection
1
2
3
4
5
D12839-1
1. T200 Series fixed mount thermal camera. 2. Multifunction display. 3. Power over Ethernet (PoE) Injector.
4. RayNet to RJ45 SeaTalkhs adaptor cable. 5. Video cable.
T300 / T400 Series thermal camera connection.
(JCU) is optional, but can be used in conjunction with the multifunctional display to control the thermal camera if required.
· "Dual payload" thermal cameras include 2 independent lenses; 1 for thermal (infrared) and 1 for visible light. If you only have 1 display you should only connect the video cable labelled "VIS / IR" (visible light / infrared) to the display. If you have 2 or more displays you should connect 1 cable to each display.
· You can only view the thermal camera image on the multifunction display to which the camera is physically connected. If you want to view the thermal camera image on more than 1 display you must obtain a suitable third-party video distribution unit.
· For further information regarding the camera's installation (including connections and mounting), refer to the installation instructions that accompany the camera.
Thermal camera cables
Cabling requirements for thermal cameras.
Camera to network switch
A network patch cable is required to connect the camera to the network switch. The connection is made between the camera cable tail and the network switch via the coupler (supplied with the camera). Network patch cables are available in a variety of lengths.
1
2
SeaTalkhs / RayNet SeaTalkhs / RayNet 8
3
7
6
5
4
SeaTalkhs / RayNet
1. Multifunction display 2. Raymarine network switch 3. Joystick Control Unit (JCU), optional 4. SeaTalkhs to RayNet cable 5. Ethernet cable coupler. 6. PoE (Power over Ethernet) injector (only
required if using the optional JCU). 7. Thermal camera 8. Video connection
Joystick Control Unit (JCU)
An Ethernet (with power) cable is used to connect the JCU. The JCU is supplied with a 7.62 m (25 ft) Ethernet cable for this connection. If you require a different length contact your dealer for suitable cables.
Power over Ethernet (PoE) injector to network switch
A network patch cable is required for connecting the PoE injector to the network switch. Network patch cables are available in a variety of lengths.
Video cables
D12260-1
Video cables are not supplied with the product. Please contact your dealer for suitable cables and adaptors.
Raymarine recommends the use of a BNC terminated RG59 75ohm (or better) coaxial cable.
Important notes
· You can control the thermal camera using your multifunctional display. The Joystick Control Unit
Cables and connections
63
4.11 IP Camera connections
You can connect IP cameras to your multifunction display.
Compatible IP cameras must be able to be configured to:
· automatically assign an IP address via DHCP prior to connecting to your multifunction display or network.
· allow unauthenticated, anonymous ONVIF access.
Please refer to the instructions supplied with your IP camera for configuration details.
Note: The connection panel on your product may look slightly different from that shown, depending on variant. The network connection method remains the same for all products featuring RayNet connectors.
IP camera(s) can be connected to the SeaTalkhs RayNet connector on your multifunction display.
1
2
3
4
1
5
5
Item 1 2 3 4 5
2
3
4
3
3
3 4
5
4 4
5
D12593-4
Description Multifunction display Raymarine network switch RayNet to RJ45 adaptor cables (A62360 / A80151 / A80159) Ethernet couplers (R32142) CAM200IPs
D12592-4
Item
Description
1
Multifunction display rear connector panel
2
CAM200IP
3
RayNet to RJ45 adaptor cable (A62360 / A80151
/ A80159)
4
Ethernet coupler (R32142)
You can also connect multiple IP cameras via the SeaTalkhs network
64
Note: a, c and e Series multifunction displays do not provide power over ethernet (PoE); Connected cameras must have their own power supply.
Tip If your IP camera(s) are not detected by your multifunction display, try power cycling the IP camera(s) whilst leaving your multifunction display powered up.
IP camera guidance
Raymarine® MFDs are capable of displaying IP camera feeds. Whilst third-party IP cameras may work, Raymarine® highly recommends only using Raymarine® IP cameras such as the CAM200IP.
As guidance any third-party IP camera must conform to the following:
· The camera must support H.264 compression and RTSP (Real time Streaming Protocol).
· The camera must be ONVIF compliant
· The camera must be capable of and be setup to allow unauthenticated anonymous access
· The camera must be capable of and be setup to assign an IP address automatically via DHCP
· The camera resolution must be set to no higher than 720p
The camera settings must be checked and if necessary adjusted using a PC and the software supplied with the camera, prior to adding the camera to the SeaTalkhs network.
a Series / c Series / e Series
Important: Raymarine® does not guarantee compatibility with third-party IP cameras.
4.12 Weather receiver connection
You can connect a Sirius XM weather receiver to your multifunction display.
1
2
000
000
0AUDIO
0ANTENNA
0NETWORK
0POWER
RayNet
D12902-2
1. Raymarine weather receiver.
2. Multifunction display.
The weather receiver can also be connected to a Raymarine network switch.
For information on connecting an SR50 using SeaTalkng please refer to 82257 SR50 operation which can be downloaded from the Raymarine website: www.raymarine.com.
Cables and connections
65
4.13 Fusion link connection
Network connection
You can connect a Fusion 700 series marine entertainment system to your multifunction display.
1
2
Direct connection
34
34
5
1
2
D12741-1
6
1. Multifunction display.
2. Fusion system.
3. RayNet to SeaTalkhs cable.
4. Fusion ethernet connector.
Direct connection with networked multifunction displays
1 32
4
5
D12742-1
1. Fusion system. 2. Fusion ethernet connector. 3. RayNet to SeaTalkhs cable. 4. Directly connected multifunction display. 5. Networked multifunction displays. Note: The Fusion entertainment system can be controlled by a directly connected multifunction display or by a networked multifunction display.
6
D12740-1
1. Network switch. 2. Fusion system. 3. RayNet to SeaTalkhs cable. 4. Fusion ethernet connector. 5. Second Fusion system (the multifunction
display can be connected to multiple Fusion entertainment systems). 6. Networked multifunction displays. Note: The Fusion entertainment system can be controlled by any compatible networked multifunction display when connected using a network switch.
66
a Series / c Series / e Series
4.14 GPS connection
Depending on display variant, your multifunction display may include an internal GPS receiver. If required the multifunction display can also be connected to an external GPS receiver, using SeaTalkng or NMEA 0183.
GPS connection -- SeaTalkng
4.15 GA150 connection
a9x and a12x MFDs include an internal GNSS (GPS / GLONASS) receiver. The GA150 antenna can be used to improve the GNSS (GPS / GLONASS) receiver's reception.
1
2
1
SeaTalkng
1. Multifunction display. 2. SeaTalkng GPS receiver. GPS connection -- NMEA 0183
1
NMEA 0183
1. Multifunction display. 2. NMEA 0183 GPS receiver.
2
D13069-1
1. GA150 antenna
2. a9x or a12x variant MFD
For installation details for your external antenna, refer to the documentation that accompanied the antenna.
D12261-1
Note:
· The Beidou GNSS is supported but not currently available.
· A GA150 must be connected in order to receive the Beidou system when it becomes available.
· A software update will be required to add
support for Beidou once the system is available.
2
Please check with your Raymarine dealer for
further details.
Antenna cable length
The GA150 is supplied with a fitted 10 m (33 ft.) cable. The length of the antenna cable can be extended if required.
D12262-1
The antenna cable length can be extended by up to 10 m (33 ft.) giving a total maximum cable length of 20 m (66 ft.)
50 ohm coaxial cable and reliable connectors (offering protection against water ingress) must be used when extending the antenna cable.
Note: Extending the cable length by more than the recommended maximum length will result in signal degradation.
Connecting an external antenna
Follow the steps below to connect the GA150 external antenna to your a9x or a12x variant MFD.
Cables and connections
67
4.16 AIS connection
1
2
A compatible AIS can be connected using SeaTalkng
or NMEA 0183.
Connection using SeaTalkng
3
4
1
2
D13074-1
1. Fully insert the antenna's cable connector into the GA150 connector on the rear of your display.
2. Turn the locking collar clockwise until TIGHT.
3. Push to protective boot over the connection on the back of the display.
SeaTalkng
D12263-1
4. Use the supplied cable tie to secure the protective 1. Multifunction display.
boot over the connection.
2. SeaTalkng AIS receiver / transceiver.
Connection using NMEA 0183
1
2
NMEA0183 (4800)
3
NMEA0183 (38400)
D12264-1
1. VHF radio.
2. AIS unit.
3. Multifunction display.
68
a Series / c Series / e Series
4.17 Fastheading connection
4.18 SeaTalkng connections
If you wish to use MARPA (radar target acquisition) functions on your multifunction display you need either:
· An autopilot connected to the multifunction display via SeaTalkng or NMEA 0183. The compass is connected to the course computer and calibrated via the pilot control head; or:
· A Raymarine or third-party fastheading sensor connected to the multifunction display via NMEA 0183.
Note: Please contact your dealer or Raymarine technical support for more information.
The display can connect to a SeaTalkng network. The display can use SeaTalkng to communicate with: · SeaTalkng instruments · SeaTalkng autopilots · SeaTalk equipment via the optional SeaTalk to
SeaTalkng converter · NMEA 2000 equipment via optional DeviceNet
adaptor cables
Typical SeaTalkng system
1
2
4 3
5
Cables and connections
0 7 6 12 V / 24 V dc 8
9
10
D12176-4
1. SeaTalkng instrument 2. SeaTalkng pilot control head 3. iTC-5 converter 4. Wind transducer 5. SeaTalkng multifunction display 6. Power supply 7. SeaTalkng autopilot 8. iTC-5 converter 9. Depth transducer 10. Speed transducer For details of SeaTalkng cabling please refer to Chapter 33 Spares and accessories.
SeaTalkng power requirements The SeaTalkng bus requires a 12 V power supply. Power may be provided from: · Raymarine equipment with a regulated 12 V power
supply (for example, a SmartPilot SPX course computer); or:
69
· Other suitable 12 V power supply.
Note: SeaTalkng does NOT supply power to multifunction displays and other equipment with a dedicated power supply input.
4.19 NMEA 2000 connection
The display can receive data from NMEA 2000 devices (e.g. data from compatible engines). The NMEA 2000 connection is made using SeaTalkng and appropriate adaptor cables.
You can EITHER:
· Use your SeaTalkng backbone and connect each NMEA 2000 device on a spur, OR
· connect the display on a spur into an existing NMEA 2000 backbone.
Important: You cannot have 2 backbones connected together.
Connecting NMEA 2000 equipment to the SeaTalkng backbone
1
4
12V
NMEA 2000
2
3
SeaTalkng
D12174-2
1. 12 V supply into backbone.
2. SeaTalkng backbone.
3. SeaTalkng to DeviceNet adaptor cable.
4. NMEA 2000 equipment.
Connecting the display to an existing NMEA 2000 (DeviceNet) backbone
1
4
2
3
D12175-2
1. Multifunction display. 2. SeaTalkng to DeviceNet adaptor cable. 3. DeviceNet backbone. 4. NMEA 2000 equipment.
70
a Series / c Series / e Series
4.20 SeaTalk connection
You can connect SeaTalk devices to your multifunction display using the optional SeaTalk to SeaTalkng converter.
1
3
4.21 NMEA 0183 connection
NMEA 0183 devices can be connected to compatible multifunction displays (MFDs) using the power and data cable.
Note: To connect an NMEA 0183 device to an a6x or a7x MFD a SeaTalkng to NMEA 1083 converter must be used to convert the SeaTalkng messages to NMEA 0183 messages.
SeaTalkng SeaTalk
2
1. SeaTalk device. 2. SeaTalk to SeaTalkng converter. 3. Multifunction display.
SeaTalkng
D12265-1
Cables and connections
1234
56
7 8 9 10
11 12
NMEADEVICE 4800 / 38400 baud
NMEADEVICE 4800 / 38400 baud
D12266-3
NMEA 0183 devices are connected using the power and data cable supplied with compatible MFDs.
2 NMEA 0183 ports are available:
· Port 1: Input and output, 4800 or 38400 baud rate.
· Port 2: Input only, 4800 or 38400 baud rate.
Note: The baud rate you want to use for each port input must be specified in the System Settings menu (Homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > NMEA Set-up > NMEA Input Port).
Note: For Port 1, both the input and output communicate at the same baud rate. For example, if you have one NMEA 0183 device connected to the display's Port 1 INPUT, and another NMEA 0183 device connected to the display's Port 1 OUTPUT, both NMEA devices must be using the same baud rate.
You can connect up to 4 NMEA 0183 devices to the display's NMEA 0183 OUTPUT (Port 1). You can connect a total of 2 NMEA 0183 devices to the display's NMEA 0183 INPUT ports.
71
Item Device
1 Multi-
2
function display
3
4
5
6
7 NMEA 8 device
9
10
11 NMEA 12 device
Cable color Port
White 1
Green 1
Yellow 1
Brown 1
Orange / 2 white
Orange / 2 green
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Input / output Input Input Output Output Input
Positive (+) / negative (-) Positive Negative
Positive
Negative
Positive
Input Negative
Output Output Input Input Output Output
Positive Negative Positive Negative Positive Negative
Note: *Refer to instructions provided with the NMEA 0183 device.
NMEA 0183 cable
You can extend the NMEA 0183 wires within the supplied power and data cable.
Data cable extension Total length (max) Up to 5 m
Cable
High quality data cable:
· 2 x twisted pair with overall shield.
· 50 to 75 pF/m capacitance core to core.
4.22 a6x and a7x to NMEA 0183 DSC VHF radio connection
To connect an a6x and a7x variant MFDs to an NMEA 0183 DSC radio a SeaTalkng to NMEA 0183 converter must be used to convert the SeaTalkng messages to NMEA 0183 messages.
The MFD and converter must be connected to the same SeaTalkng backbone.
1
3
4
5
----
2
12 V dc 8
SeaTalkng
12 V dc 10
++
6
7
9
12 V dc* 11
NMEA0183 **
D12833-1
1 a6x / a7x MFD
2 SeaTalkng spur cable
3 SeaTalkng to NMEA 0183 bare wires spur cable
4 Converter NMEA 0183 negative connection (yellow wire)
5 NMEA 0183 device input negative connection (purple wire)
6 Converter NMEA 0183 positive connection (red wire)
7 NMEA 0183 device input positive connection (grey wire)
8 NMEA 0183 DSC VHF Radio
9 SeaTalkng power cable (only required if not connecting to an existing powered SeaTalkng backbone.
10 Converter
11 NMEA 0183 connection (use cable supplied with VHF radio)
Note: The connection at the VHF radio must be to the NMEA 0183 input only. It is a uni-directional (one-way) connection.
72
a Series / c Series / e Series
4.23 Camera / Video connection
4.24 Camera / video in-out connection
A camera or a video device can be connected directly to New c Series and New e Series multifunction displays using the video connector on the power and data cable.
Note: Video devices cannot be directly connected to New a Series multifunction displays. For camera connections to a New a Series display please refer to the IP camera connection section.
Examples of video sources that you can connect to the display include:
· Video camera.
· Thermal camera.
· DVD player.
· Portable digital video player.
A camera / video device or external display can be connected to New e Series multifunction displays (excluding the e7 / e7D) using the dedicated video in/out connector.
Note: New a Series and New c Series multifunction displays do not have a dedicated video in/out connector.
Video In Examples of video input sources that you can connect to the display include:
· Video camera.
· Thermal camera.
· DVD player.
· Portable digital video player.
1
2
1
2
4
4
3
3
D12178-2
1. Rear connector panel of multifunction display. 2. Power and data cable. 3. BNC video connector (input 1). 4. Video source -- for example, video camera. Note: To listen to a movie's audio track, any connected DVD or digital video player will require speakers to be connected to the players audio output.
D12328-1
1. Rear connector panel of multifunction display. 2. Video accessory cable. 3. BNC video connector (input 2). 4. Thermal camera.
Note: To listen to a movie's audio track, any connected DVD or digital video player will require speakers to be connected to the players audio output.
Video out Examples of video output devices that you can connect to the display include: · HDTV with VGA input. · VGA monitor.
Cables and connections
31
2
4
D12329-1
1. Rear connector panel of multifunction display. 2. Video accessory cable. 3. VGA cable to external display.
73
4. External display.
4.25 Media player connection
Video specification Signal type Format Connector type Output resolution
Composite PAL or NTSC BNC (female) 720p
You can use your multifunction display to wirelessly control a Bluetooth-compatible media player (such as a smartphone).
The media player must be compatible with the Bluetooth 2.1+ EDR power class 1.5 (supported profile: AVRCP 1.0) or higher.
1
2
3
e9 and e12 Video cables
The following video cable is required for the video in / out connector on the e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 variant multifunction displays.
Part number R70003
Description
Notes
5 m (16.4 ft.) Video cable for e9 and e12 (1 x video in and 1 x video out VGA)
D12164-2
1. Multifunction display. 2. Bluetooth connection. 3. Bluetooth-compatible media player. To use this feature you must first:
· Enable Bluetooth in the System Settings on the multifunction display.
· Enable Bluetooth on the media player device.
· Pair the media player device with the multifunction display.
· Enable Audio Control in the System Settings on the multifunction display.
· Connect an RCU-3 remote and assign the shortcut key to Start/Stop audio playback (Only required on a New c Series display).
Note: If your media player does not include built-in speakers it may be necessary to connect the media player's audio output to an external audio system or a pair of headphones. For more information refer to the instructions that accompany the media player device.
Enabling Bluetooth
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select Wireless Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth > On.
Pairing a Bluetooth media player
With the homescreen displayed and Bluetooth turned on:
1. Select Set-up.
2. Select System Settings.
3. Select Wireless Connections.
4. Select New Bluetooth Connection.
A message is displayed prompting you to put your media player device into discovery mode.
5. Ensure Bluetooth is enabled on your external media player device and ensure it is ready to be paired. For more information, consult the instructions that accompany the device.
74
a Series / c Series / e Series
6. On the multifunction display, select OK in the message dialog. The multifunction display will search for active Bluetooth devices.
7. Select Stop Discovery when your device appears in the list.
8. Select the media player device in the list. A pairing request message is displayed on the external media device.
9. On the external media device, select Pair (or equivalent) to accept the pairing request message. The multifunction display shows a message asking you to confirm the Pairing code.
10. If the pairing code displayed on the multifunction display matches the code displayed on the external media device, select Ok on the multifunction display. If the code does NOT match, repeat steps 4 to 8.
11. If the pairing was successful the multifunction display will confirm the pairing. The external media device is now paired with the multifunction display.
Enabling audio control
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select Wireless Connections. 4. Select Connection Manager. 5. Select the media player device in the list. 6. Select Audio Control > On.
Media player controls
Touchscreen multifunction displays enable you to use the on-screen media player controls to control the audio playing on your external media player.
Selecting Back will hide the audio controls.
Media player controls using a remote control
You can control audio wirelessly using a Raymarine RCU-3 remote control unit.
The Shortcut key on the RCU-3 must be set to Start/Stop audio playback, refer to the Using a Remote control section for further details.
1. Press UP arrow for next track.
2. Press DOWN arrow for previous track.
3. Press SHORTCUT button to play/pause audio.
Note: On New c Series multifunction displays, whilst the audio controls appear on the screen you cannot interact with them. To control audio you must use a connected RCU-3.
Unpairing a Bluetooth device
If you are experiencing problems when attempting to use a Bluetooth device with the multifunction display it may be necessary to unpair the device (and any other paired Bluetooth devices) and then retry the pairing procedure.
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select Wireless Connections. 4. Select Connection Manager. 5. Select the media player device in the list. 6. Select Unpair / Forget this device.
1
2 3 45
D12293-1
1. Touch this icon to display the audio controls.
2. Previous track.
3. Play track.
4. Pause track.
5. Next track.
Cables and connections
75
4.26 Bluetooth remote control connection
You can control the multifunction display wirelessly using a Raymarine remote control unit.
The remote control uses a Bluetooth wireless connection.
1
2
3
D12163-2
1. Multifunction display.
2. Bluetooth connection.
3. Raymarine Bluetooth remote control (for example, RCU-3).
To use the remote control you must first:
· Enable Bluetooth in the System Settings on the multifunction display.
· Pair the remote control unit with the multifunction display.
Operating principles
Remote control operating principles.
· Only 1 multifunction display may be operated by a remote control unit at any one time. You cannot pair a multifunction display to more than 1 remote control at the same time.
· The 3 buttons on the remote control unit have different functions depending on the CONTEXT in which you are using it. For example, in the chart application the buttons control different functions than they do in the homescreen.
· All functions are accessed using a combination of the 3 buttons. For some functions you must press a button MOMENTARILY. You can also HOLD a button for continuous response (for example, continuous ranging in the chart application).
· The main methods of operation involve the use of the UP and DOWN "arrow" buttons to highlight different on-screen options. The SHORTCUT button is used to select (execute) them.
· During the pairing process you must define which of the arrow buttons you want to be the "UP" button.
· The SHORTCUT button is customizable and can be configured to operate one of a number of functions, using the System Settings menu on your multifunction display.
your multifunction display, with the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select Wireless Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth > On. 5. Select New Bluetooth Connection.
A pop-up message will be displayed to confirm that the device you are connecting to is discoverable. 6. Select Ok to confirm. A list of discovered devices is displayed. 7. On your remote control unit, hold down the UP and DOWN buttons together for 10 seconds. 8. Select the remote control unit in the list of devices. 9. When prompted, press the arrow button on your remote that you wish to be configured as the UP button. The other arrow button will automatically be configured as the DOWN button. If the pairing was successful a "Pairing Success" message will be displayed. If a "Pairing Failure" or "Pairing Timeout" message is displayed, repeat steps 1 to 8.
Customizing the SHORTCUT button
On your multifunction display, with the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select External Devices. 4. Select Remote Control. 5. Select Customize shortcut key. 6. Select the function that you want to assign to the
SHORTCUT key.
Pairing the remote and configuring the UP and DOWN buttons
The remote control unit must be "paired" with the multifunction display that you want to control. On
76
a Series / c Series / e Series
4.27 Remote control functions
Buttons Arrow buttons
Range
Shortcut button
or
P a ir
S e le c t
Default functions:
Button
Application where function available:
Chart
Radar
Fishfinder Weather
Range / zoom. Open homescreen.
· Press UP or DOWN arrow for momentary response.
· Hold UP or DOWN arrow for continuous response.
Shortcut: Hold
Select application in homescreen (in left-to-right, top-to-bottom order).
· Press UP or DOWN arrow for momentary response.
· Hold UP or DOWN arrow for continuous response.
Toggle menu items and options in dialogs and prompts (in left-to-right, top-to-bottom order).
· Press UP or DOWN arrow for momentary response.
· Hold UP or DOWN arrow for continuous response.
Place waypoint at vessel position.
Shortcut
Media player control (requires a Bluetooth media player paired to the multifunction display).
· Press UP / DOWN arrow for next / previous track.
· Press SHORTCUT button for play / pause.
D12051-2
Homescreen
Cables and connections
77
Button Customizable functions: Open homescreen. SHORTCUT
Switch active application (only available when multiple applications are displayed).
SHORTCUT
Application where function available:
Reconnecting the RCU
1. When you pair the RCU-3 with a multifunction display a wireless connection is established.
2. When you power off the multifunction display it loses its connection with the RCU-3 after 10 minutes.
55 60 5
50 45
10
= 15
40 Minutes 20
35 30 25
> 10 Minutes
3. To restore the connection between the 2 units, press and hold any button on the RCU-3 for at least 3 seconds.
55 60 5
50
10
45
= 15
40 Seconds 20
35 30 25
3 Seconds
Note: You will also need to reconnect the RCU-3 as described above if you disable and then re-enable the Bluetooth connection on the multifunction display at any time.
78
a Series / c Series / e Series
4.28 WiFi connections
Raymarine mobile app connection
You can use compatible tablet and smartphone devices as a wireless repeat display or remote control for your multifunction display.
Raymarine apps allow you to stream and / or control, remotely what you see on your multifunction display to a compatible device, using a Wi-Fi connection.
To use this feature you must first:
· Ensure your device is compatible with the app you wish to use.
· Download and install the relevant Raymarine app, available from the relevant market store.
· Enable Wi-Fi in the System Settings on the multifunction display.
· Enable Wi-Fi on your compatible device.
· Select the Raymarine Wi-Fi connection from the list of available Wi-Fi networks on your compatible device.
· Enable the relevant Mobile app in the System Settings menu on the multifunction display.
Note: The multifunction display acts as a Wi-Fi access point. If your device already connects to an access point for e-mail and internet you must revert your access point back to regain access to e-mails and internet.
6
* Upload Sonar Logs and Community edits to
mobile device (Wi-Fi connection to MFD required)
7
** Upload Sonar Logs and Community edits
anonymously to Navionics servers (internet
connection required)
Note:
* To participate in Navionics Sonar Charts, Sonar logging must be enabled on your MFD. Sonar Logs can be enabled from the Chart application menu: Menu > Depth & Contour > Sonar Logs.
** The Sonar logs shall be uploaded to Navionics servers anonymously.
To use this feature you must first:
1. Download and install the Navionics Mobile Marine app, available from the relevant app store.
2. Subscribe to Navionics Freshest Data.
3. Download Freshest data to your mobile device.
4. Enable Wi-Fi in the System Settings on the MFD.
5. Enable Wi-Fi on your mobile device.
6. Select the MFD Wi-Fi connection from the list of available Wi-Fi networks on your mobile device.
Navionics mobile marine app
You can wirelessly synchronize data between your multifunction display (MFD) and a mobile device that is running the Navionics mobile marine app.
The synchronization downloads Navionics Freshest Data from your mobile device to your MFD and uploads sonar logs from your MFD to your mobile device. Waypoints and routes can also be synchronized between your mobile device and MFD.
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
D12166-3
1
Navionics servers
2
Download Navionics Freshest Data to mobile
device (internet connection required)
3
Mobile device running Navionics mobile app
4
Download Navionics Freshest Data to MFD (Wi-Fi
connection to MFD required)
5
MFD
Cables and connections
79
80
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 5: Mounting
Chapter contents · 5.1 Mounting - a Series on page 82 · 5.2 Mounting - c Series and e Series on page 84
Mounting
81
5.1 Mounting - a Series
Mounting the display can be surface mounted. Before mounting the unit, ensure that you have: · Selected a suitable location. · Identified the cable connections and route that the
cables will take. · Detached the front bezel.
0
10. Slide the unit into place and secure using the provided fixings.
Note: The supplied gasket provides a seal between the unit and a suitably flat and stiff mounting surface or binnacle. The gasket should be used in all installations. It may also be necessary to use a marine-grade sealant if the mounting surface or binnacle is not entirely flat and stiff or has a rough surface finish.
Bracket (trunnion) mounting The display can be mounted on a trunnion bracket. Before mounting the unit ensure that you have:
· Selected a suitable location.
· Identified the cable connections and route that the cables will take.
· Attached the front bezel.
D12585-2
1. Check the selected location for the unit. A clear, flat area with suitable clearance behind the panel is required.
2. Drill or knock out the 4 mounting holes on the unit
000
0
0
0
D12588-1
3. Fix the appropriate cutting template supplied with the product, to the selected location, using masking or self-adhesive tape.
4. Using a suitable hole saw (the size is indicated on the template), make a hole in each corner of the cut-out area.
5. Using a suitable saw, cut along the inside edge of the cut-out line.
6. Ensure that the unit fits into the removed area and then file around the rough edge until smooth.
7. Drill 4 holes as indicated on the template to accept the securing screws.
8. Place the gasket onto the display unit and press firmly onto the flange.
9. Connect the power, data and other cables to the unit.
82
D12578-2
1. Mark the location of the mounting bracket screw holes on the chosen mounting surface.
2. Drill holes for the screws using a suitable drill, ensuring there is nothing behind the surface that may be damaged.
3. Use the fixings supplied with the mounting bracket to attach securely.
4. Attach the display to the mounting bracket.
Attaching the front bezel
The following procedure assumes that the unit has already been mounted in position. 1. Carefully lift one edge of the screen protection
film, so that it is accessible for removing when unit installation is complete.
a Series / c Series / e Series
2. Ensure the memory card slot door is in the open position.
3. Orientate the bottom-right side of the bezel under the lip of the chart card door and place the bezel over the front of the display, ensuring that the clips along the bottom edge of the bezel latch into position.
Important: Use care when removing the bezel. Do not use any tools to lever the bezel; doing so may cause damage.
1. Place both your thumbs on the upper left edge of the display, at the positions indicated in the diagram above.
2. Place your fingers underneath the bezel, at the positions indicated in the diagram above.
3. In a single firm motion, apply pressure to the outer edge of the display with your thumbs and pull the bezel towards you using your fingers.
The bezel should now come away from the display easily.
D12586-1
4. Ensure the bezel is correctly aligned with the display, as shown.
5. Apply firm but even pressure to the bezel along the: i. Outer edges - work from the sides upwards and then along the top edge, to ensure that it clips securely into position. ii. Inner edges - particularly along the chart card door edge, to ensure that the bezel sits flat.
6. Check that the Power button and chart card door are free to operate.
Removing the front bezel Before proceeding ensure the memory card slot door is open.
02
2
1 1
D12584-1
Mounting
83
5.2 Mounting - c Series and e Series
Removing the rear bezel You must remove the rear bezel before surface mounting the display.
Note: These steps do not apply to the e165 as it does not require a rear bezel.
1. Remove the front bezel. Refer to the separate instructions provided for that procedure.
3
D12271-2
1
e7 / e7D
2
D12184-3
2. Remove the screws that secure the bezel to the display (only required for e7 and e7D).
3. Carefully remove the bezel from the rear of the display, pulling the bezel gently along the: i. Outer edges - work from the sides upwards and then along the top edge, ensuring that the clips are fully released from the display. ii. Inner edges - ensure that the bezel is completely removed from the display.
Note: Only the e7 and e7D have fixing screws for the rear bezel, other multifunction display variants have clips which hold the rear bezel in place.
Surface mounting The display can be surface mounted. Before mounting the unit, ensure that you have: · Selected a suitable location.
1. Check the selected location for the unit. A clear, flat area with suitable clearance behind the panel is required.
2. Fix the appropriate cutting template supplied with the product, to the selected location, using masking or self-adhesive tape.
3. Using a suitable hole saw (the size is indicated on the template), make a hole in each corner of the cut-out area.
4. Using a suitable saw, cut along the inside edge of the cut-out line.
5. Ensure that the unit fits into the removed area and then file around the rough edge until smooth.
6. Drill 4 holes as indicated on the template to accept the fixings.
7. Place the gasket onto the display unit and press firmly onto the flange.
8. Connect the power, data and other cables to the unit.
9. Slide the unit into place and secure using the fixings provided.
Note: The supplied gasket provides a seal between the unit and a suitably flat and stiff mounting surface or binnacle. The gasket should be used in all installations. It may also be necessary to use a marine-grade sealant if the mounting surface or binnacle is not entirely flat and stiff or has a rough surface finish.
· Identified the cable connections and route that the
cables will take.
Attaching the rear bezel
· Detached the front bezel.
The rear bezel must be fitted if you wish to use a mounting bracket to mount the unit.
Note: These steps do not apply to the e165 as it does not require a rear bezel.
1. Remove the front bezel. Refer to the separate instructions provided for that procedure.
2. Place the bezel over the rear of the display, ensuring that it is correctly aligned with the display. Apply firm but even pressure to the bezel along the:
84
a Series / c Series / e Series
i. Outer edges - work from the sides upwards and then along the top edge, to ensure that it clips securely into position.
ii. Inner edges - ensure that the bezel sits flat against the unit.
2
1
e7 / e7D
3
D12183-3
3. Use the supplied screws to secure the bezel to the display (e7 and e7D only).
Bracket (trunnion) mounting
The display can be mounted on a trunnion bracket.
Note: The mounting bracket is supplied with the e7 and e7D display variants, for all other display variants the mounting bracket is an optional accessory See the Spares and Accessories section of this manual for details.
Before mounting the unit ensure that you have:
· Selected a suitable location.
· Identified the cable connections and route that the cables will take.
· Attach the front bezel.
D12273-2
1. Mark the location of the mounting bracket screw holes on the chosen mounting surface.
2. Drill holes for the fixings using a suitable drill, ensuring there is nothing behind the surface that may be damaged.
3. Use the fixings supplied with the mounting bracket to attach securely.
4. Attach the display unit to the mounting bracket.
Attaching the front bezel
The following procedure assumes that the unit has already been mounted in position. 1. Carefully lift one edge of the screen protection
film, so that it is accessible for removing when unit installation is complete. 2. Ensure the memory card slot door is in the open position. 3. Orientate the bottom-right side of the bezel under the lip of the chart card door and place the bezel over the front of the display, ensuring that the clips along the bottom edge of the bezel latch into position.
Mounting
85
2. Place your fingers underneath the bezel, at the positions indicated in the diagram above.
3. In a single firm motion, apply pressure to the outer edge of the display with your thumbs and pull the bezel towards you using your fingers.
The bezel should now come away from the display easily.
D12274-1
4. Ensure the bezel is correctly aligned with the display, as shown.
5. Apply firm but even pressure to the bezel along the: i. Outer edges - work from the sides upwards and then along the top edge, to ensure that it clips securely into position. ii. Inner edges - particularly along the chart card door edge, to ensure that the bezel sits flat.
6. Check that all control buttons are free to operate. Removing the front bezel Before proceeding ensure the memory card slot door is open.
2
2 1
1
D12275-1
Important: Use care when removing the bezel. Do not use any tools to lever the bezel; doing so may cause damage.
1. Place both your thumbs on the upper left edge of the display, at the positions indicated in the diagram above.
86
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 6: Getting started
Chapter contents · 6.1 Display power on page 88 · 6.2 a Series Controls on page 89 · 6.3 e7 / e7D Controls on page 89 · 6.4 c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165 Controls on page 90 · 6.5 Homescreen overview -- Touch only displays on page 91 · 6.6 Homescreen overview -- c Series / e Series on page 92 · 6.7 Pages on page 94 · 6.8 Applications on page 95 · 6.9 Splitscreen controls on page 96 · 6.10 Screen overview on page 97 · 6.11 Basic touchscreen operations on page 100 · 6.12 Multi-Touch gestures on page 101 · 6.13 Initial set up procedures on page 102 · 6.14 GPS Status on page 104 · 6.15 Enabling autopilot control on page 107 · 6.16 Engine identification on page 108 · 6.17 Enabling AIS functions on page 110 · 6.18 Shared preferences on page 110 · 6.19 Software updates on page 111 · 6.20 Learning resources on page 112
Getting started
87
6.1 Display power
Powering the display on 1. Press the POWER button on the display. 2. Select Accept to acknowledge the disclaimer
message.
4. You can wake the unit from PowerSave mode at anytime by pressing a physical button on the multifunction display.
Note: PowerSave mode is automatically cancelled if an alarm event occurs.
Powering the display on 1. Press the POWER button. 2. Press the OK button to accept the disclaimer
message.
Powering the display off 1. Press and hold the POWER button until the
countdown reaches zero.
Note: If the POWER button is released before the countdown reaches zero, the power off is cancelled.
PowerSave mode
In PowerSave mode all functions of the multifunction display remain active, but the unit is placed into a low power state. The LED lights around the Rotary controller will blink once every 1.5 seconds to indicate that the unit is in PowerSave mode. PowerSave mode is cancelled by pressing a physical button or when an alarm event occurs.
D12367-1
Note: To ensure user safety the PowerSave feature will not be available if:
· any connected radars are switched on
· the multifunction display is providing autopilot control in a system without a dedicated pilot head and the autopilot is engaged.
Attention Leaving an MFD in PowerSave mode will continue to consume some power from your vessel's batteries. The unit could drain your batteries if left in PowerSave mode for prolonged periods of time. When switching off the power to your vessel, ensure that the unit is powered off using the power button. For more information on the amount of power consumed by the unit in PowerSave mode, refer to Chapter 31 Technical specification.
Enabling PowerSave mode To enable PowerSave mode follow the steps below. 1. Ensure any radars connected to the system are
switched off. 2. Press the POWER button.
The shortcuts menu is displayed. 3. Select PowerSave Mode.
The multifunction displays is now in PowerSave mode.
88
a Series / c Series / e Series
6.2 a Series Controls
6.3 e7 / e7D Controls
1
2
3
D12577-1
Description
1 Touchscreen
2 Power
Functions
Touch the screen to operate functions, including all menu operations.
· Press once to switch the unit ON.
· Once powered on, press the Power button again to open the shortcuts page where you can adjust the brightness, perform a screen capture, access Powersave mode or access the power controls of external devices.
· Press and hold to switch the unit OFF.
· If an integrated pilot is engaged, press and hold to put the autopilot into STANDBY mode.
3 Card
MicroSD card reader
reader slot · a6x and a7x = 1 x MicroSD card slot
· a9x and a12x = 2 x MicroSD card slots
1 2
3 4 5 6 7
D12179-1
Description Functions
1 Touchscreen
you can touch the screen to operate many common functions, including all menu operations.
2 Menu
Accesses menus. Press again to close menus.
3 UniControl Provides a joystick, rotary control and an OK push button for using menus and applications.
4 Back
Press to return to a previous menu or dialog level.
5 WPT / MOB · Press and release to access the waypoint options. Press again to place a waypoint.
6 Power
· Press and hold to place a Man Overboard (MOB) marker at your current position.
· Press once to switch the unit ON.
· Once powered on, press the Power button again to adjust the brightness, perform a screen capture, access Powersave mode or access the power controls for external devices.
· Press and hold to switch the unit OFF.
· If an integrated pilot is engaged, press and hold put the autopilot into STANDBY mode.
7 Card reader Open the card door to insert or remove
slot
a MicroSD card. There are 2 card slots
(labelled 1 and 2), used for electronic
charts and archiving waypoint, route,
track and settings data.
Getting started
89
6.4 c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165 Controls
1
23
UniControl
Non-touch, HybridTouch and the remote keypad include a UniControl which consists of Rotary, Joystick and a push button control.
4 1
5 6 7
8
11 10
9
D12276-1
Description Functions
1 Touchscreen
you can touch the screen to operate many common functions, including all menu operations.
2 Home
Press to return to the homescreen.
3 Menu
Accesses menus. Press again to close menus.
4 UniControl Provides a joystick, rotary control and an OK push button for using menus and applications.
5 Back
Press to return to a previous menu or dialog level.
6 Range In/Out
Press minus (-) to range out and plus (+) to range in
7 WPT / MOB · Press and release to access the waypoint options. Press again to place a waypoint.
8 Power
· Press and hold to place a Man Overboard (MOB) marker at your current position.
· Press once to switch the unit ON.
· Once powered on, press the Power button again to adjust the brightness, perform a screen capture, access Powersave mode or access the power controls for external devices.
· Press and hold to switch the unit OFF.
9 Card reader Open the card door to insert or remove
slot
a MicroSD card. There are 2 card slots
(labelled 1 and 2), used for electronic
charts and archiving waypoint, route,
track and settings data.
10 Pilot
· Press to disengage integrated autopilot.
· Press and hold to activate Auto mode on integrated autopilot.
2
3
D12180-1
1. Rotary -- use this to select menu items, move the on-screen cursor, and adjust the range in the chart and radar applications.
2. Joystick -- use this to move the cursor position in applications, pan up, down, left and right in the chart, weather and fishfinder applications or to cycle through datapages in the data application.
3. OK button -- push the end of the joystick to confirm a selection or entry.
Touch icons Touchscreen multifunction displays can use the BACK and CLOSE icons to move between the different levels of menus available in each application.
Back -- go back one level (same effect as pressing the BACK button).
Close -- close all open menus (same effect as pressing the MENU button).
11 Switch
Press to switch the active pane (in
Active Pane splitscreen pages).
90
a Series / c Series / e Series
Using the cursor The cursor is used to move around the screen.
The cursor appears on the screen as a white cross.
D7366_3
If the cursor has not been moved for a short period of time, it changes to a circle with a cross in it, to make it easier to locate on the screen.
D7368_2
D7369-2
The cursor is context-sensitive. When it is placed over an object such as a waypoint or WPT chart feature, it changes color and a label or information associated with the object is displayed.
List of cursor labels
Label
Feature
Application
A/B
Ruler line
Chart
AIS
AIS target
Chart
COG
Course Over
Chart
Ground vector
CTR
Center of radar Radar
FLT
Floating EBL/VRM Radar
GRD
Guard zone
Radar
HDG
Heading vector Chart
MARPA
MARPA target Radar
MOB
Man Over Board Chart, Radar
marker
POS
Vessel's position Chart
RTE
Route leg
Chart
SHM
Ship's Heading Radar
Marker
TIDE
Tide indicator
Chart
TRACK
Track line
Chart
VRM/EBL
VRM and EBL, 1 Radar or 2
WIND
Wind indicator Chart
WPT
Waypoint
Chart, Radar
6.5 Homescreen overview -- Touch only displays
The Homescreen provides a central point of access for your display's applications, data and settings.
· The Homescreen provides quick access to your data (waypoints, routes, tracks, images and videos) and backup settings.
· The Homescreen consists of a number of Homescreen pages. Swipe the screen left or right with your finger to scroll through the available Homescreen pages.
· Each Homescreen page consists of a number of icons. Applications are started by selecting the relevant icon.
1
2
3
4
5
6
D12580-3
Screen item 1
2
3 4 5
6
Description
Waypoint -- select the icon to access the waypoint list. Select and hold on the icon to place a Man Overboard (MOB) marker at your vessel's current position.
My Data -- this icon enables you to centrally manage your data including route, track, and waypoint lists. You can also access saved pictures and videos and backup settings.
Customize -- select this icon to configure application pages and display preferences.
Set-up -- select this icon to access the system set-up menus.
Icon -- each icon represents an application page. A page can display multiple applications simultaneously.
Status bar -- the status icons confirm the status of externally-connected equipment, including GPS, AIS, radar, sonar and autopilot units.
Getting started
91
6.6 Homescreen overview -- c Series / e Series
The Homescreen provides a central point of access for your display's applications, data and settings.
· The Homescreen provides quick access to your data (waypoints, routes, tracks, images and videos) and backup settings.
· The Homescreen consists of a number of Homescreen pages. Swipe the screen left or right with your finger to scroll through the available Homescreen pages.
· Each Homescreen page consists of a number of icons. Applications are started by selecting the relevant icon.
1
2
3
4
Accessing the homescreen The homescreen can be accessed from any application. To access the homescreen follow the steps below: 1. Press the Home button.
Note: The e7 and e7D have a combined Menu and Home button, to access the homescreen press and hold the Menu / Home button for 3 seconds.
Databar status symbols The status symbols on the databar confirm whether the appropriate connections to your system have been made. The symbols show the status for the following: · Radar scanner. · AIS receiver / transceiver. · Sonar module. · GPS receiver. · Autopilot.
Autopilot status symbols The autopilot status is indicated in the databar.
Symbol
Description
6
5
D12195-3
Autopilot is in Standby mode.
Screen item Description
1
Touch Lock -- (HybridTouch displays only) select
this icon to lock the touchscreen, preventing
accidental use. To unlock, use the UniControl to
deselect the Touch Lock icon.
2
My Data -- this icon enables you to centrally
manage your data including route, track, and
waypoint lists. You can also access saved pictures
and videos and backup settings.
Autopilot is in Track mode. Autopilot is in Auto mode. No autopilot detected. Autopilot alarm active.
3
Customize -- select this icon to configure
application pages and display preferences.
Dodge mode is active.
4
Set-up -- select this icon to access the system
set-up menus.
5
Icon -- each icon represents an application
page. A page can display multiple applications
simultaneously.
6
Status bar -- the status icons confirm the status
of externally-connected equipment, including GPS,
AIS, radar, sonar and autopilot units.
Fish mode is active. Autopilot calibration. Power steering active.
Accessing the homescreen
The homescreen can be accessed from any application.
To access the homescreen follow the steps below: 1. Select the homescreen icon on-screen.
92
Wind Vane mode is active.
a Series / c Series / e Series
Radar scanner status symbols
The radar scanner power mode status is indicated in the databar.
Symbol
Radar power mode
Description
Transmit (TX)
Rotating icon, signifying that the scanner is on and transmitting. When SCANNER is set to ON, select this mode to activate the scanner. This is the usual mode of operation.
Standby (STBY)
Static icon, indicating that the scanner is on but not transmitting, and the antenna is not rotating. The scanner does not transmit and the radar data is removed from the screen. This is a power-save mode used when the radar is not needed for short time periods. When you return to transmit mode, the magnetron does not need to warm up again. This is the default mode.
Off
Scanner powered off when radar
not required, but display is in use
for other applications, such as the
chart. When selected, the system
counts down. During this time you
cannot re-power the scanner.
Timed Transmit
Scanner switches between on/transmitting, and standby mode. Scanner goes into power save mode when constant use of radar is not required.
Symbol
Description
AIS unit is connected and switched on, but has active alarms.
AIS unit is connected and switched on, but the dangerous and lost alarm is disabled.
Sonar status symbols
The sonar status is indicated in the databar.
Symbol
Description
Symbol animated: the sonar module is connected and transmitting.
Symbol static: the sonar module is connected but not transmitting.
Symbol greyed-out: the sonar module is not connected, or is not detected.
GPS status symbols
The GPS receiver status is indicated in the databar.
Symbol
Description
A GPS receiver is connected and has obtained a fix.
A GPS receiver is not connected, or cannot obtain a fix.
AIS status symbols
AIS status is indicated by a symbol in the databar.
Symbol
Description
AIS unit is switched on and operating.
AIS currently unavailable.
AIS unit is switched off, or not connected.
AIS unit is in Silent Mode.
AIS unit is in Silent Mode, with active alarms.
Getting started
93
6.7 Pages
Pages are made up of 1 to 4 panes that are used to display applications on your multifunction display (MFD).
4. If selecting Choose page the Homescreen is displayed.
Pages are accessed using the icons on the Homescreen.
· You can create up to 2 application panes per page using an MFD that has a screen size of 7 inches or less.
· You can create up to 4 application panes per page using an MFD that has a screen size of greater than 7 inches.
· MFDs with a screen size of 7 inches or less can view pages with more than 2 application panes but only if they are sharing the Homescreen of an MFD which is capable of creating those pages.
Pages can be customized, enabling you to group your applications into different pages, each designed for a specific purpose. For example, you could have a page that includes the chart and fishfinder applications, suitable for fishing, and another page that includes the chart and data applications, which would be suitable for general sailing.
Icon for a page featuring a single application.
Icon for a page featuring multiple applications.
You can also define the layout for each page, which determines how the applications are arranged on the screen.
Setting the Power-up page You can setup your multifunction display to show a page instead of the Homescreen at power up. Form the Homescreen: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Display Preferences. 3. Select Starting page.
A list of options is displayed · Homescreen -- Homescreen is displayed after
power-up. · Last page -- The page last viewed is displayed
after power-up
5. Select the icon for the page you want displayed when the display is turned on.
The starting page setting applies to each individual display and is not automatically shared on networked displays.
Changing an existing page on the homescreen
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Homescreen. 3. Select Edit Page. 4. Select the page icon that you want to change.
The Customize menu options are displayed. 5. Select the appropriate page layout (for example,
"Splitscreen"). 6. Select the application(s) you want to display on
the page, either by selecting the relevant menu item or dragging it over to the displayed page. 7. Select Finish. The Rename Page dialog is displayed. 8. Use the on-screen keyboard to name the page, then select Save.
Changing an empty page
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Homescreen. 3. Select Edit Page. 4. Select an empty page icon (labelled "Customize").
The Customize menu options are displayed. 5. Select the appropriate page layout (for example,
"Splitscreen"). 6. Select the application(s) you want to display on
the page, either by selecting the relevant menu item or dragging it over to the displayed page. 7. Select Finish. The Rename Page dialog is displayed. 8. Use the on-screen keyboard to name the page, then select Save.
· Choose page -- The page you select will be displayed after power-up
Moving a page on the homescreen With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select the Customize icon. 2. Select Homescreen. 3. Select Swap Page.
94
a Series / c Series / e Series
4. Select the page icon that you want to move. 5. Select the page icon that you want to swap
positions with. The page icon is moved to the new position.
Renaming a page on the homescreen
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select the Customize icon. 2. Select Homescreen. 3. Select Rename Page. 4. Select the page that you want to rename.
The on-screen keyboard is displayed. 5. Using the on-screen keyboard, enter the new
name for the page. 6. Select SAVE.
Deleting a page from the homescreen
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select the Customize icon. 2. Select Homescreen. 3. Select Delete Page. 4. Select the page that you want to delete.
The page is deleted.
Resetting the homescreen to default settings
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select the Customize icon. 2. Select Homescreen. 3. Select Reset.
A warning message is displayed asking for confirmation. 4. Select Yes to reset the homescreen to the default range of pages, or No to cancel the operation.
6.8 Applications
Chart application -- provides a 2D or 3D graphical view of your charts to help you navigate. Waypoint, route, and track functions enable you to navigate to a specific location, build and navigate routes, or record where you've been. Chart cards provide higher levels of detail and 3D views.
Fishfinder application -- with a transducer and a sonar variant multifunction display or compatible Sonar Module, you can use the fishfinder application to help you accurately distinguish between different sizes of fish, bottom structure, and underwater obstacles. You can also view sea depth and temperature data and mark points of interest such as fishing spots or wrecks.
Radar application -- with a suitable radar scanner, you can use the radar application to track targets and measure distances and bearings. A number of automatic gain presets and color modes are provided to help you get the best performance from your radar scanner.
Data application -- view system and instrument data on your multifunction display, for a range of compatible instruments. Use the joystick or touchscreen to scroll through the available data pages.
Weather application -- (North America only). With a suitable weather receiver connected to your system, the weather application overlays historical, live, and forecasted weather graphics on a world map.
Thermal cam application -- view and control a thermal camera using a compatible multifunction display.
Note: The thermal camera application is not available on a6x and a7x variant MFDs.
Camera application -- view a video or camera source on your multifunction display.
Doc Viewer -- view pdf documents stored on a MicroSD card.
Getting started
95
FUSION Link application -- link to and control a compatible Fusion entertainment system from your multifunction display.
Sirius Audio application -- control Sirius radio from your multifunction display.
6.9 Splitscreen controls
When viewing a page with more than 1 application displayed you can switch applications from the splitscreen view to fullscreen view. Example 1 -- Splitscreen page
User Manual -- Opens the English version of the product user manual stored on the display. To open translated user manuals stored on memory card use the Doc Viewer.
Example 2 -- Fishfinder application expanded to Fullscreen
Selecting the active window
When viewing a splitscreen page you can select the active application and view it fullscreen by following the steps below.
With a page featuring multiple applications displayed:
1. Touch anywhere inside the application you want to make active.
A border appears around the application, indicating that it is active.
2. Select Menu.
3. Select Fullscreen to view the active application in fullscreen, or
4. Select Splitscreen to return to the splitscreen view.
Selecting the active window using Non-touch controls
When viewing a splitscreen page you can select the active application and view it fullscreen using the MFD's physical buttons or a remote keypad.
With a page featuring multiple applications displayed:
1. Press the
Switch Active button.
The active pane pop up is displayed:
2. Press the Switch Active Pane button or use the Rotary control to cycle the active application.
96
a Series / c Series / e Series
3. Use the Range in or Range out controls to
6.10 Screen overview
switch the active application between splitscreen
and fullscreen views.
1
2
3
Selecting the active window -- e7 / e7D
4
When viewing a splitscreen page you can select the
active application and view it fullscreen on an e7 /
5
6
e7D with the touch lock enabled by following the
steps below.
With a page featuring multiple applications displayed:
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Select Cycle application.
Selecting cycle application cycles through the available applications.
3. Select Fullscreen to view the active application in fullscreen, or
4. Select Splitscreen to return to the splitscreen view.
7
D12196-2
Screen item Description
1
Home
· Displays with a touchscreen -- Select the onscreen Home icon to access the Homescreen.
Switching the active pane or display using the keypad
The Switch Active button is used to switch the active pane on a multi application page and / or to switch 2 the active display.
With multiple displays connected and / or multiple application page(s) displayed:
· Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays -- Use the physical Home button to access the Homescreen.
Databar -- provides information about your vessel and its environment. The type of information in the databar can be customized from the Homescreen > Customize > Databar Set-up menu, if required.
Cycle sequence
1
2
3
5
3
Menu -- menu options are specific to the
application that you are currently using.
4
Status bar -- provides information specific
to each application. This information cannot
be edited or moved.
5
Context menu -- provides information and
options specific to each application.
6
Menu options -- menu options are displayed
4
when the Menu is selected.
D12880-1
1. Press the Switch Active button to enter switch mode.
2. Use the Rotary control to cycle through the available panes and / or displays.
The keypad will cycle through displays in the order in which they were paired. On multi application pages the Range buttons can be used to switch the active application between full and splitscreen.
3. Press the Back button or the Switch Active button to exit switch mode.
7
Pop-up messages -- alert you to a situation
(such as an alarm), or unavailable function.
Pop-up messages may require a response
from you -- for example, select OK to silence
alarms.
Menus
Menus enable you configure settings and preferences.
Menus are used in the:
· Homescreen -- to configure your multifunction display and externally-connected equipment.
· Applications -- to configure the settings for that particular application.
Getting started
97
Screen item 1
2
3 4
5
1
2
3 4
5
D12281- 4
Description
Back -- On displays with a touchscreen you can press the onscreen << (back) icon to go back to a previous menu. On non-touchscreen displays or HybridTouch displays use the Back button.
Close -- On displays with a touchscreen you can press the onscreen X (close) icon to go back to a previous menu. On non-touchscreen displays or HybridTouch displays use the Back button to back out of the menu structure.
Selected menu option -- the menu option currently selected will be highlighted.
Scroll bar -- indicates that further menu items are available by scrolling the menu. On displays with a touchscreen to scroll through the available menu items, press and hold your finger on the menu and drag it up or down. On non-touchscreen displays or HybridTouch displays use the Rotary control.
On / Off switch -- On displays with a touchscreen you can select onscreen menu items to switch features On or Off to enable or disable the function. On non-touchscreen displays or HybridTouch displays use the OK button to switch the function On or Off.
Screen item 1
2 3
4 5
Description
Back
· Displays with a touchscreen -- Select the onscreen Back icon to go back to the previous menu.
· Nontouchscreen or HybridTouch displays -- Use the Back button to go back to the previous menu.
Function icons -- Some dialogs include icons which can be selected to access additional functions. For example, in the Waypoint List dialog, the Sort by icon can be used to change how the waypoints list is sorted.
Menu / List item
· Displays with a touchscreen -- Momentarily touching an item automatically selects the item and displays the item options menu.
· Nontouchscreen or HybridTouch displays -- Use the Rotary control to highlight an item, and the Ok button to select it and display the item options menu.
Close
· Displays with a touchscreen -- Select the onscreen Close icon to close the dialog.
· Nontouchscreen or HybridTouch displays -- Use the Back button to close the dialog.
Scroll bar
· Displays with a touchscreen -- To scroll through the available items, press and hold your finger on the scroll bar and drag it up or down.
· Nontouchscreen or HybridTouch displays -- To scroll through the available menu items, use the Rotary control.
Dialogs
Dialogs are fullscreen menus that enable you to manage data items such as waypoints and routes.
Shortcuts page
A number of useful functions can be accessed from the Shortcuts page.
1
2
3
4
1
2
5
3
4
5
7
D12277-2
8
6
D13004-1
98
a Series / c Series / e Series
1 Decrease display brightness 2 Increase display brightness 3 Power up / Power down Radar 4 Radar standby / Radar transmit 5 Autopilot standby (during active navigation) 6 Display pilot control dialog 7 PowerSave mode 8 Screenshot / Screen capture
4. Select the àèò key to enter the character.
Numeric menu items Numeric menu items display numeric data and enables you to either select a predefined value or to increase and decrease the value as required.
Edit dialogs
Edit dialogs enable you to edit the details of data items stored on your multifunction display, such as waypoints, routes, and tracks.
Editing numerical settings
To edit numerical values you can use either the onscreen numeric adjust control, onscreen numeric keypad or the Rotary Control on a non-touch or HybridTouch display to increase or decrease numeric values.
1
2
3
4
Selecting a text field displays the onscreen keyboard, which can be used to edit the details.
Editing information in dialogs
With the dialog displayed: 1. Select the field you want to edit.
The onscreen keyboard is displayed:
D12567-2
1. Select the numeric data field you want to edit. The numeric adjust control is displayed.
2. Adjust the setting to the required value using: i. The Rotary control -- Non-touchscreen or HybridTouch displays, or ii. The onscreen Up and Down arrows -- Touchscreen displays.
3. To access the on-screen numeric keypad:
· Touch operation -- Select the onscreen keypad icon from the numeric adjust control.
2. Use the onscreen keyboard to make the changes. 3. Select SAVE to save the changes.
Entering special or accented characters
With the onscreen keyboard displayed: 1. Select the onscreen keyboard's àèò key. 2. Select the character you want to accent.
The available accented characters are displayed above the text entry field. 3. For characters that have multiple available accents, use the character key to toggle between them.
· Non-Touch operation -- Press and hold the Ok button.
The onscreen numeric keypad is displayed. 4. Enter the required value. 5. Select Ok to exit the numeric keypad and return
to the menu.
Getting started
99
Using slider bar controls
6.11 Basic touchscreen operations
Slider bar controls provide a graphical representation
of numeric data and enables you to quickly change
Placing and moving the cursor using
setting values.
touch
1 2
To place or move the cursor around the screen on a touchscreen multifunction display follow the steps below.
1. Touch the screen at any position on the screen to place the cursor there.
3
D12570-1
Descrip- Non--Touch
Item tion
operation
Touch operation
1
Current N/A
N/A
value
2
Slider Use the Rotary Slide the slider Up
control control to adjust or Down to adjust
value
value.
3
Auto
Press Ok button Select to switch
to switch between between Auto
Auto and manual and manual
adjustment.
adjustment.
Using control dialogs Control dialogs enable you to control externally connected equipment, such as an autopilot unit. The following diagram shows the main features of a typical control dialog:
3
Touchscreen lock
On a multifunction display with HybridTouch you can lock the touchscreen to prevent accidental use.
For example, locking the touchscreen is particularly useful in rough water or weather conditions.
The touchscreen can be locked and unlocked from the homescreen. The touchscreen can only be unlocked using physical buttons.
Locking the touchscreen New e Series
On new e Series multifunction displays the Homescreen contains a dedicated Touch Lock icon.
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select the Touch Lock icon.
It changes color to indicate that the touchscreen is disabled. All functions are still available using the physical buttons.
Touchscreen is locked. All functions remain available using physical buttons.
1
Screen item 1 2 3
2
D12279-2
Description
Status -- provides status information for the connected equipment. For example, the Pilot Control dialog displays the locked heading and current navigation mode for a connected autopilot unit.
Control icons -- provide direct control of the connected equipment. For example, the Pilot Control dialog Standby and Track icons enable you to instruct a connected autopilot unit to perform specific functions.
Close -- Closes the control dialog.
Locking the touchscreen - touch only displays
When a touch only display is paired with an optional remote keypad the touchscreen can be locked.
From the Homescreen: 1. Select the Set-up icon. 2. Select Touch-Lock so that On is highlighted.
The touchscreen is now locked.
Unlocking the touchscreen New e Series
You can unlock the touchscreen by following the steps below.
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Use the UniControl to highlight the Touch Lock
icon. 2. Press the OK button.
The Touchscreen is enabled.
Touchscreen is unlocked.
100
a Series / c Series / e Series
Unlocking the touchscreen - touch only displays
To unlock the touchscreen of a touch only display when paired with a remote keypad follow the steps below.
From the Homescreen: 1. Select the Set-up icon. 2. Select Touch-Lock so that Off is highlighted.
The touchscreen is now unlocked.
6.12 Multi-Touch gestures
Raymarine a Series and gS Series multifunction displays support multi-touch.
Multi-touch means that the display is capable of recognizing multiple simultaneous touch inputs. This means that you can use 2 or more fingers on the screen at the same time to perform multi-touch gestures.
Pinch to Zoom
The pinch to zoom gestures can be performed on multifunction displays that support multi-touch.
Pinch to zoom consists of 2 actions:
· Move 2 fingers apart to zoom in.
· Move 2 fingers together to zoom out.
00 00
00 00
D12920-2
Pinch to Zoom can be used in the following applications: · Chart application. · Weather application.
Getting started
101
6.13 Initial set up procedures
Once your display has been installed and commissioned, Raymarine recommends that you perform an initial set up procedure.
Startup wizard When you power-up the display for the first time or after a system reset a Startup Wizard is displayed. The wizard guides you through the following basic configuration settings: 1. Language 2. Boat type 3. Configure Units (Units of measure) 4. Boat Details
· Minimum Safe Depth · Number of engines · Total fuel capacity (TFC) · Number of fuel tanks · Number of batteries
Note: These settings can also be set at any time using the menus accessible from Homescreen > Customize.
Additional settings In addition to the settings covered by the Wizard, it is also recommended that the following initial set up tasks are completed: · Set your date and time preferences. · Adjust the display brightness (and set up a shared
brightness scheme if appropriate). · Designate the data master. · Select the GPS data source. · Familiarize yourself with the product using
Simulator Mode.
1. Press the POWER button once. The Shortcuts menu is displayed.
2. Adjust the brightness to the required level using the on-screen brightness slider bar control, or
3. Touch the Sun icon to increase the brightness level or the Moon icon to decrease the brightness level.
Note: The brightness level can also be increased by pressing the Power button multiple times.
Adjusting the display brightness 1. Press the POWER button once.
The Shortcuts menu is displayed. 2. Adjust the brightness to the required level using
the Rotary control.
Note: The brightness level can also be increased by pressing the Power button multiple times.
Minimum safe vessel depth As part of the Initial startup wizard the Minimum Safe Depth value can be set. Minimum Safe Depth can be established by adding together: · Maximum Vessel Draft (i.e. the distance from the
waterline to the lowest point of a vessel's keel.) · Safety Margin (an adequate clearance below the
keel to allow for draft variation and changes in water or bottom conditions.)
i.e.: Minimum Safe Depth = Maximum Vessel Draft + Safety Margin.
1
2
4
3
Adjusting the display brightness
D13159-1
1. Waterline
2. Maximum Vessel Draft
3. Safety Margin
4. Minimum Safe Depth
Important: The information below is provided for guidance only and is not exhaustive. Some influencing factors can be unique to certain vessels and / or areas of water and may not be listed below. You should ensure you account for ALL factors that apply to your current situation when making calculations.
Some of the factors that can influence how much a vessel draws are shown below:
· Vessel displacement (weight) -- A vessel's draft will increase when it is fully laden when compared with its unladen displacement.
· Water type -- A vessel's draft will increase by approximately 2% to 3% in fresh water compared to seawater.
102
a Series / c Series / e Series
Some of the factors that should be taken into account when calculating a Safety Margin are:
· Vessel maneuvering characteristics -- A vessel's draft increases due to squat, trim, roll, pitch and heave.
· Chart accuracy -- The electronic chart depth may not be accurate or the true depth may have changed since the last survey.
· Weather conditions -- High air pressure, and prevailing wind strength and direction can affect wave height.
Warning: Minimum Safe Depth
The Minimum Safe Depth setting is used during Autorouting to restrict the created route from entering water that is to shallow for the vessel.
Bottom depth is taken from compatible electronic navigational charts and Minimum Safe Depth is a user calculation. As both of these factors are outside of Raymarine's control, Raymarine will not be held liable for any damage, physical or otherwise, resulting from the use of the Autorouting feature or the Minimum Safe Depth setting.
· Cartography
· Routes and waypoints
· Radar
· Sonar
· Data received from the autopilot, instruments, the engine and other external sources.
Your system may be wired for redundancy with data connections made to repeat displays. However these connections will only become active in the event of a fault and/or reassignment of the data master.
In an autopilot system which does not contain a dedicated pilot control head the Data master also acts as the control for the autopilot.
Designating the data master
For systems with 2 or more displays the following task must be performed on the multifunction display that you want to designate as the data master.
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up . 2. Select Maintenance. 3. Select Data Master. 4. Select the display that you want to designate as
the data master.
Setting the vessel Minimum Safe Depth
Follow the steps below to enter your vessel's Minimum Safe Depth.
From the Homescreen: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Boat Details. 3. Select Min. Safe Depth. 4. Enter your calculated Minimum Safe Depth.
Simulator mode
The Simulator mode enables you to practice operating your display without data from a GPS antenna, radar scanner, AIS unit, or fishfinder.
The simulator mode is switched on / off in the System Setup Menu.
Note: Raymarine recommends that you do NOT use the simulator mode whilst navigating.
Setting time and date preferences
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Time and Date Set-up. 3. Use the Date Format, Time Format, and Local
Time: UTC menu items to set your time and date preferences.
Note: The simulator will NOT display any real data, including any safety messages (such as those received from AIS units).
Note: Any system settings made whilst in Simulator mode are NOT transmitted to other equipment.
Enabling and disabling simulator mode
Data master
Any system containing more than one networked multifunction display must have a designated data master.
The data master is the display which serves as a primary source of data for all displays, it also handles all external sources of information. For example the displays may require heading information from the autopilot and GPS systems, usually received through a SeaTalkng or NMEA connection. The data master is the display to which the SeaTalk, NMEA and any other data connections are made, it then bridges the data to the SeaTalkhs network and any compatible repeat displays. Information shared by the data master includes:
You can enable and disable simulator mode by following the steps below.
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-Up . 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select Simulator:. 4. Select On to turn simulator mode on, or 5. Select Off to turn simulator mode off.
Note: The Demo movie option is for retail demonstration purposes only.
Getting started
103
Pairing the keypad
6.14 GPS Status
The keypad can control 1 or more multifunction displays. Multiple keypads can be connected to a system. Each keypad can be paired with up to 4 multifunction displays.
With the keypad connected to the multifunction display:
1. Select External Keypad from the External Devices menu: homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > External Devices > External Keypad.
2. Select Pair Keypad.
3. Press any button on the external keypad.
4. From the pop-up message select the orientation of the keypad.
The GPS status page enables you to view the status of the available satellites that are compatible with your receiver. The satellite constellations are used to position your vessel in the Chart and Weather applications. You can set up your receiver and check its status from the GPS Set-up menu: Homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > GPS Set-up. For each satellite, the screen provides the following information:
2
1
Either landscape or portrait orientations are
available.
3
The keypad is now paired.
Unpairing the keypad
The keypad can be unpaired from an individual display.
1. Select External Keypad from the External Devices menu: homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > External Devices > External Keypad.
2. Select Clear Pairings.
3. Select Yes to unpair the keypad with the display.
D13122-1
1. Sky view
2. Satellite status
3. Position and fix information
Sky view Sky view is a visual representation that shows the position of navigation satellites and their type. Satellite types are:
· Circle -- A circle identifies a satellite from the GPS constellation.
· * Diamond -- A diamond identifies a satellite from the GLONASS constellation.
· Square -- A square identifies an (SBAS) differential satellite.
Note: GLONASS satellites are only available when connected to a compatible receiver such as the built-in receiver of an a9x or a12x MFD.
Satellite status area
The Satellite status area displays the following information about each satellite:
· Type -- Identifies which constellation the satellite belongs to.
· ID -- Displays the satellites identification number.
· CNO (Carrier-to-noise ratio) -- Displays the signal strength of each satellite shown in the Sky view:
Grey = searching for satellite
Green = satellite in use
Orange = tracking satellite
· Azimuth and Elevation -- Provides the angle of elevation and azimuth between the location of the receiver and the satellite.
Position and fix information
The following positional and fix information is provided:
· Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) -- HDOP is a measure of satellite navigation accuracy, calculated from a number of factors
104
a Series / c Series / e Series
including satellite geometry, system errors in the data transmission and system errors in the receiver. A higher figure signifies a greater positional error. A typical receiver has an accuracy of between 5 and 15 m. As an example, assuming a receiver error of 5 m, an HDOP of 2 would represent an error of approximately 15 m. Please remember that even a very low HDOP figure is NO guarantee that your receiver is providing an accurate position. If in doubt, check the displayed vessel position in the Chart application against your actual proximity to a known charted object.
· Estimated Horizontal Position Error (EHPE) -- EHPE is a measure of the estimated error of a position fix in the horizontal plane. The value displayed indicates that your position is within a circle radius of the stated size 50% of the time.
· Fix status -- indicates the actual mode the receiver is reporting:
Fix -- Satellite fix has been acquired.
No Fix -- No satellite fix can be acquired.
D Fix -- A differential beacon fix has been acquired.
SD Fix -- A differential satellite fix has been acquired.
· Position -- Displays the latitude and longitude position of your receiver.
· Date / Time -- Displays the current date and time generated by the position fix in UTC format .
· Mode -- Identifies wether the receiver is working in differential mode or non-differential mode.
· Datum -- The receiver's datum setting affects the accuracy of the vessel position information displayed in the Chart application. In order for your receiver and MFD to correlate accurately with your paper charts, they must be using the same datum.
Chinese Regional Navigation Satellite System (Beidou) is currently being expanded for global coverage (COMPASS or Beidou-2) by 2020.
Satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS)
Satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS) are systems that are used to compliment existing GNSS by providing differential corrections that improve a GNSS's attributes such as accuracy, availability and reliability.
The image below shows SBAS regional coverage.
WAAS
EGNOS
MSAS GAGAN
D13121-1
· WAAS -- Wide Area Augmentation System (Operated by the Federal Aviation Authority (FAA) in the USA.)
· EGNOS -- European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (Operated by the European Space Agency.)
· GAGAN -- GPS Aided Geo Augmented Navigation (Operated by India.)
· MSAS -- Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (Operated by Japan's Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport and Japan Civil Aviation Bureau (JCAB)
· QZSS -- Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (Proposed by Japan)
Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS)
A GNSS is a system of satellites that provides autonomous geo-spatial positioning that allows electronic devices with compatible receivers to determine their location (longitude, latitude and altitude).
Operational GNSS
· GPS (NAVSTAR) Global Positioning System US owned constellation of satellites that became fully operational in 1995.
· GLONASS acronym for "GLObalnaya NAavigatsionnaya Sputnikovaya Sistema" or "Global Navigation Satellite Systems" Russian owned constellation of satellites that offered global coverage in 2010.
Planned GNSS
· Galileo European satellite constellation in initial deployment phase due to become operational in 2020.
· COMPASS / Beidou-2
Getting started
Raymarine GPS / GNSS receiver compatibility
Raymarine GPS receivers and GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) receivers are compatible with the following GNSS and SBAS.
Status /
Type
Name
Compatible receivers
Oper-
GPS
ational
GNSS
All internal and external Raymarine GPS receivers and GNSS receivers
Operational GNSS
GLONASS
a9x and a12x internal GNSS receiver
Planned GNSS
COM- * a9x and a12x internal GNSS PASS / receiver Beidou2
Planned Galileo GNSS
* a9x and a12x internal GNSS receiver
Operational SBAS
WAAS
All internal and external Raymarine GPS receivers and GNSS receivers
105
Status / Type
Operational SBAS
Operational SBAS
Name EGNOS
MSAS
Compatible receivers All internal and external Raymarine GPS receivers and GNSS receivers
All internal and external Raymarine GPS receivers and GNSS receivers
· EGNOS
· MSAS
· GAGAN
· All Others
2. Select the relevant differential system from the menu to switch reception for that system On (default) and Off.
Operational SBAS
Planned SBAS
GAGAN QZSS
All internal and external Raymarine GPS receivers and GNSS receivers
* a9x and a12x internal GNSS receiver
COG/SOG Filter
The COG/SOG filter averages the velocity vectors to compensate for the oscillating motion of the vessel, giving a clearer indication of the vessel's course and speed.
Note: * Not currently operational but will be supported via software update in the future.
GPS selection
You can use an internal (if available) or external GPS receiver or GNSS receiver.
· Your multifunction display may feature an internal GPS or GNSS receiver.
· You can also connect an external receiver using SeaTalkng or NMEA 0183.
· Where appropriate use the System Settings menu to enable or disable the internal receiver.
The filter does not affect the calculation of your receiver's reported position. The velocity vectors calculated from the signal provide an instantaneous measure of speed and direction of the receiver. The COG and SOG can therefor seem erratic under certain conditions. For example, when a vessel is moving slowly through rough seas, the receiver moves from side to side as well as in the direction of travel.
Slow moving vessels, or vessels sailing in rough seas will benefit from a high setting, whereas a power boat that can quickly change speed and direction will benefit from a low setting.
Selecting COG/SOG filter
Enabling or disabling the internal receiver
If your multifunction display features an internal GPS receiver or GNSS receiver then this can be enabled and disabled by following the steps below.
With the Homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-Up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. To enable the internal receiver, select Internal
GPS so that On is highlighted. 4. To disable the internal receiver, select Internal
GPS so that Off is highlighted.
You can change the level of filter applied to COG/SOG.
From the GPS Set-up menu: Homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > GPS Set-up: 1. Select COG/SOG Filter.
A list of available filter levels is displayed:
· Low
· Medium (default)
· High
2. Select the require filter level from the list.
Enabling and disabling differential satellites
You can choose wether or not your receiver uses differential data provided by SBAS constellations.
From the GPS Set-up menu: Homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > GPS Set-up: 1. Select Differential GPS.
Selecting Differential GPS will switch differential satellite (SBAS) reception On (default) and Off.
Restarting the GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) receiver
To restart the GNSS (GPS/GLONASS) receiver follow the steps below:
From the GPS Set-up menu: Homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > GPS Set-up: 1. Select Restart GPS.
The receiver will be restarted.
Choosing differential satellites
You can select which constellations of SBAS your receiver will use.
From the GPS Set-up menu: Homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > GPS Set-up: 1. Select Differential System
The following differential systems are available:
· WAAS
106
a Series / c Series / e Series
6.15 Enabling autopilot control
Enabling the autopilot control function -- SeaTalk and SPX SeaTalkng autopilots
To enable control of your SeaTalk or SPX SeaTalkng autopilot using your multifunction display follow the steps below.
From the Homescreen: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select Autopilot Control so that On is
highlighted. Selecting Autopilot Control will switch the control between On and Off.
On a system containing multiple displays the pilot control is enabled on all displays at the same time.
Enabling the autopilot control function -- Evolution autopilots
To enable control of your Evolution autopilot using your multifunction display follow the steps below.
From the Homescreen. 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select External Devices. 4. Select Pilot Set-up. 5. Select Pilot control so that On is highlighted.
Selecting Pilot control will switch the Autopilot control function on and off.
Getting started
107
6.16 Engine identification
Engine data can be displayed on your MFD using the Data application, which provides some preset Engine pages for displaying some of the most common types of engine data.
Important: Before you can display Engine data on your MFD, you must:
· Ensure that your MFD is running LightHouse software version 8 or later.
· Refer to the important "Engine setup with an ECI interface" and "Using the engine identification wizard" information.
· Make the data connections, according to the instructions provided in the 87202 ECI Installation instructions.
· Ensure all data buses are powered up (including engine data CAN buses, gateways, and also the SeaTalkng bus).
· Start the engine. It is important that only one engine is running at a time, to ensure that the system can isolate the correct engine data message.
· Run the Engine identification wizard to ensure that your engines are displayed in the correct order in the Data application.
108
a Series / c Series / e Series
Engine setup with an ECI interface
Before you can display engine data on your MFD, you may need to use the "Engine Identification wizard" on the MFD to setup the engines.
Important: When setting up on a multiple engine system, engines should always be turned on in sequence from port to starboard.
The following table details the different types of engine supported by the ECI interface unit, and the setup requirements for each:
Engine CAN bus protocol
Engine CAN bus Number of engines configuration
Setup via wizard on Number of ECI units MFD required
NMEA 2000
1
Single CAN bus
1
NMEA 2000
2+
Single shared CAN bus 1
NMEA 2000
2+
J1939
1
Separate CAN bus for each engine
Single CAN bus
1 for each CAN bus 1
J1939
2+
Single shared CAN bus 1
J1939
2+
Separate CAN bus for 1 for each CAN bus each engine
Engine interfacing without an ECI unit
For engines with a NMEA 2000 CAN bus it may be possible to connect to a Raymarine MFD via a SeaTalkng system without the use of a Raymarine ECI unit.
Refer to your engine dealer and also your local Raymarine dealer for advice on any engine instancing requirements and suitable connection cables.
Using the engine identification wizard
If your engine data appears in the wrong order on the engine data pages you can correct this by running the engine identification wizard.
From the Homescreen: 1. Select Set-up > System Settings > External
Devices > Engines Set-up. 2. If required change the number of engines your
vessel has by selecting Num. of Engines: and entering the correct number of engines.
ii. Turn On the port engine and select OK.
The wizard will now listen for data and assign the engine instance as the port engine. iii. Turn On the center port engine and select OK.
The wizard will now listen for data and assign the engine instance as the center port engine. iv. Turn On the center engine and select OK.
The wizard will now listen for data and assign the engine instance as the center engine. v. Turn On the center starboard engine and select OK.
The wizard will now listen for data and assign the engine instance as the center starboard engine. vi. Turn On the starboard engine and select OK.
The wizard will now listen for data and assign the engine instance as the starboard engine.
5. Select OK on the Identify Engines confirmation dialog.
You can select up to 5 engines. 3. Select Identify engines.
The engines will now appear in the correct location on the engine data page.
Important: It is important that only one engine is running at a time, to ensure that the system can isolate the correct engine data message.
4. Follow the onscreen prompts to complete the engine identification wizard.
The engines that will be included in the identification wizard are determined by the Number of engines set during step 2 above.
i. Switch Off ALL vessel engines and select Next.
The wizard will run through all engines (max of 5 as defined in step 2 above) from port to starboard in sequence.
Getting started
109
6.17 Enabling AIS functions
6.18 Shared preferences
Before proceeding ensure your AIS unit is connected to NMEA Port 1.
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-Up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select NMEA Set-Up. 4. Select NMEA Input Port 1. 5. Select the AIS 38400 option. 6. Select Back to return to the System Settings
menu. 7. Select External Devices. 8. Select AIS Unit Set-up.
The AIS Unit Set-up menu is displayed. 9. Adjust the AIS options as appropriate.
The Shared preferences scheme allows all compatible networked MFDs and instrument displays to share user preference settings. When a user preference is changed on 1 display device all compatible networked display devices are automatically updated to use the changed preference.
Shared preferences are applicable to the following devices:
· MFDs networked using SeaTalkhs
· MFDs networked using SeaTalkng
· SeaTalkng instruments displays networked using SeaTalkng
· SeaTalk instruments displays networked via a SeaTalk to SeaTalkng converter.
Note: To ensure compatibility check that all devices are running the latest software versions. Check the Raymarine® website www.raymarine.com for the latest software for your products.
List of shared preferences
The table below shows the settings that are shared as part of the Shared preference scheme.
Units
· Speed units
· Distance units
· Depth units
· Wind units
· Temperature units
· Flow Rate units
· Volume Units
· Pressure units
Boat Details
· Boat Type
· Number of engines
· Number of fuel tanks
· Number of batteries
Time and Date
· Date Format
· Time Format
· Local Time (UTC) offset
System Preferences
· Bearing mode
· Variation (manual)
· Language
Data application
· Max RPM range
· RPM red zone
· RPM red zone value
110
a Series / c Series / e Series
6.19 Software updates
Raymarine's multifunction display software is updated regularly to provide new and enhanced features and improved performance and usability. You should ensure you have the latest software by regularly checking the Raymarine website for new software. You can identify your multifunction display's current software version from the Limitations on Use (LoU) splash screen:
The software version can also be identified from the Maintenance menu. The software update process can be used to update all multifunction displays and remote keypads that are connected to the same network.
4. Select the relevant product.
5. Compare the latest available software against the software version on your multifunction display.
6. If the software on the website is newer than the software on your multifunction display select the option to download the software.
7. Place the MicroSD card into an SD card adaptor.
8. Place the SD card adaptor into the card reader of your PC or Mac.
9. Unzip the downloaded software update zip file to the MicroSD card.
10. Remove the MicroSD card from the SD card adaptor.
11. Backup your user data and settings by following the procedure described in section 8.5 Saving user data and user settings.
12. Insert the MicroSD card into the card reader of your multifunction display.
After a few seconds your multifunction display will alert you that a software update is available and which multifunction displays and remote keypads require the update.
Caution: Downloading software updates
The software update process is carried out at your own risk. Before initiating the update process ensure you have backed up any important files.
Ensure that the unit has a reliable power supply and that the update process is not interrupted.
Damage caused by incomplete updates are not covered by Raymarine warranty.
By downloading the software update package, you agree to these terms.
Updating the software
Software updates can be downloaded from the Raymarine website.
To perform a software update you will need:
· A PC or Apple Mac with an internet connection and a card reader.
· A FAT 32 formatted MicroSD card with SD card adaptor.
The software alert is only displayed once per power cycle.
13. Select Yes to begin the software update.
The following steps will now take place:
1. All networked multifunction displays will reboot and commence a simultaneous software update (During the software update the display with the software update memory card inserted will display a progress indicator.
2. Once the networked displays have been updated the display containing the software update memory card will reboot and commence the software update.
3. Once all displays have been updated the system will check to see if any connected remote keypads require a software update.
Note: Do not use a cartography chart card to save software update or user data / settings files.
1. Go to the Raymarine website www.raymarine.com
2. Click the Service and Support from the top banner.
3. Select Software Updates from the drop down list.
Getting started
111
14. If you have a remote keypad connected then select Yes to update the keypad software update.
6.20 Learning resources
Raymarine has produced a range of learning resources to help you get the most out of your products.
Video tutorials
Raymarine official channel on YouTube:
· http://www.youtube.com/user/RaymarineInc
Video Gallery:
· http://www.raymarine.co.uk/view/?id=2679
When the software update process has been completed a confirmation pop-up is displayed.
15. Select OK to confirm.
16. Remove the MicroSD card from the card reader.
17. Perform a factory reset of your multifunction displays following the procedure described in section 8.8 Resetting your system.
18. Restore any saved user data and settings by following the procedure described in section 8.5 Saving user data and user settings
Note: Turning on a display whilst it has a software update memory card inserted will start a standalone software update on that display only.
Product Support videos: · http://www.rayma-
rine.co.uk/view/?id=4952
Note: · Viewing the videos requires a device with an
Internet connection. · Some videos are only available in English.
Training courses Raymarine regularly runs a range of in-depth training courses to help you make the most of your products. Visit the Training section of the Raymarine website for more information: · http://www.raymarine.co.uk/view/?id=2372
FAQs and Knowledge Base
Raymarine has produced an extensive set of FAQs and a Knowledge Base to help you find more information and troubleshoot any issues.
· http://www.raymarine.co.uk/knowledgebase/
Technical support forum
You can use the Technical support forum to ask a technical question about a Raymarine product or to find out how other customers are using their Raymarine equipment. The resource is regularly updated with contributions from Raymarine customers and staff:
· http://raymarine.ning.com/
112
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 7: System checks
Chapter contents · 7.1 GPS Check on page 114 · 7.2 Radar check on page 114 · 7.3 Sonar check on page 115 · 7.4 Thermal camera setup and checks on page 117
System checks
113
7.1 GPS Check
7.2 Radar check
Checking GPS operation
You can check that the GPS is functioning correctly using the chart application. 1. Select the Chart page.
Warning: Radar scanner safety
Before rotating the radar scanner, ensure all personnel are clear.
Warning: Radar transmission safety
The radar scanner transmits electromagnetic energy. Ensure all personnel are clear of the scanner when the radar is transmitting.
2. Check the screen.
With the chart displayed, you should see:
Your boat position (indicates a GPS fix). Your current position is represented by a boat symbol or solid circle. Your position is also displayed in the data bar under VES POS.
A solid circle on the chart indicates that neither heading nor Course Over Ground (COG) data is available.
Note: Raymarine recommends that you check the displayed vessel position in the chart application against your actual proximity to a known charted object. GPS receivers typically have an accuracy of between 5 and 15 m.
Checking the radar
From the Radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Power so that On is highlighted.
The Radar scanner will now initialize in standby mode. This process will take approximately 70 seconds. 3. Select Radar so that Transmit is highlighted. The radar scanner should now be transmitting and receiving. 4. Check that the radar screen is operating correctly.
Typical HD radar screen
Note: A GPS Status screen is available within the Setup menu of Raymarine multifunction displays. This provides satellite signal strength and other relevant information.
Note: The example above is representative of the enhanced output provided by a HD radar scanner.
Points to check:
· Radar sweep with echo responses are shown on screen.
· Radar status icon rotating in top right hand corner of the status bar.
Check and adjust bearing alignment
Bearing alignment The radar bearing alignment ensures that radar objects appear at the correct bearing relative to your boat's bow. You should check the bearing alignment for any new installation.
114
a Series / c Series / e Series
Example misaligned radar
7.3 Sonar check
1
2 Sonar transducer and sonar module
selection
You must select the sonar transducer and Sonar module that you want to use in the displayed Fishfinder application pane.
Sonar module selection
· Sonar and DownVisionTM variant displays are fitted with an internal sonar module.
· All variants allow you to connect a compatible external sonar module or use an internal sonar module from a networked display.
· The sonar channel you want to use must be selected from the Fishfinder menu.
D11590-2
Item
Description
1
Target object (such as a buoy) dead ahead.
2
Target displayed on the radar display is not
aligned with the Ship's Heading Marker (SHM).
Bearing alignment is required.
Checking the bearing alignment
1. With your vessel under way: Align the bow with a stationary object identified on the radar display An object between 1 & 2 NM distant is ideal.
2. Note the position of the object on the radar display. If the target is not under the ships heading marker (SHM), there is an alignment error and you will need to carry out bearing alignment adjustment.
Adjusting the bearing alignment
Once you have checked the bearing alignment you can proceed and make any required adjustments.
With the radar application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Radar Set-up . 3. Select Advanced. 4. Select Bearing Alignment.
Selecting Bearing Alignment displays the numeric adjust control. 5. Adjust the setting so that the selected target is under the Ship's Heading Marker. 6. Select Back or Ok when complete.
Transducer selection
· Sonar variant displays allow direct connection of a Raymarine OR a Minn Kota sonar transducer.
· DownVisionTM variant displays allow direct connection of Raymarine DownVisionTM transducers.
· All variants allow the connection of a Raymarine sonar transducer via a compatible external sonar module.
· For all variants use the Transducer Set-Up menu in the Fishfinder application to specify the transducer you want to use.
Selecting the sonar channel
To select the channel you want to display follow the steps below.
From the Fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Channel.
The Channel selection page is displayed. 3. Select the tab for the sonar module you want to
use. A list of available channels for the selected sonar module is displayed. 4. Select a channel from the list.
The Channel selection page will close and the Fishfinder application will now show the selected channel.
Selecting the sonar transducer
With the fishfinder application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Set-Up. 3. Select Transducer Set-Up. 4. Select Transducer.
A list of transducers is displayed. 5. Select the transducer you want to use.
System checks
Selecting the speed transducer With the fishfinder application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Set-Up. 3. Select Transducer Set-Up.
115
4. Select Speed Transducer. A list of transducers is displayed.
5. Select your speed transducer from the list.
Checking the sonar Sonar checks are made using the fishfinder application. 1. Select a fishfinder page from the Homescreen.
1
2
3
D9343--2
1
Waterline offset
2
Transducer / Zero offset
3
Keel offset
If an offset is not applied, displayed depth readings represent the distance from the transducer to the sea bed.
2. Check the fishfinder display.
With the fishfinder active you should see:
· Depth reading (indicates the transducer is working). The depth is shown in a databox in the bottom left of the screen.
If the databox is not present it can be turned on from the Presentation menu: Menu > Presentation > Databoxes Set-up.
Setting the depth offset
From the fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Set-up. 3. Select Transducer Set-up. 4. Select Depth Offset.
The depth offset numeric adjust control is displayed. 5. Adjust the offset to the required value.
Fishfinder Transducer Calibration
Your fishfinder transducer must be calibrated correctly to achieve accurate depth readings.
The multifunction display receives the image from a sonar module which processes sonar signals from a transducer mounted in the water. If the transducer is equipped with a speed paddle wheel and temperature-sensing thermistor, the sonar module calculates speed and temperature. To ensure accurate readings, it may be necessary to calibrate the transducer(s) by applying offsets to depth, speed and temperature. As these settings are held in the sonar module and relate to the transducer, they are applied system-wide.
Depth Offset
Depths are measured from the transducer to the sea bed, but you can apply an offset value to the depth data, so that the displayed depth reading represents the depth to the sea bed from either the keel or the waterline.
Before attempting to set a waterline or keel offset, find out the vertical separation between the transducer and either the waterline or the bottom of the keel on your vessel, as appropriate. Then set the appropriate depth offset value.
Setting the speed offset
From the fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Set-up. 3. Select Transducer Set-up. 4. Select Speed Offset.
The speed offset numeric adjust control is displayed. 5. Adjust the offset to the required value.
Setting the Temperature offset
1. Select Menu. 2. Select Set-up. 3. Select Transducer Set-up. 4. Select Temperature Offset.
The temperature offset numeric adjust control is displayed. 5. Adjust the offset to the required value.
116
a Series / c Series / e Series
7.4 Thermal camera setup and checks
To ensure correct operation of the thermal camera you should setup and check the camera's main functions.
Before proceeding ensure that the camera is connected correctly, according to the instructions provided. If your system includes the optional Joystick Control Unit (JCU) and PoE (Power over Ethernet) injector, ensure these units are also connected correctly.
Set up the camera
You will need to:
· Adjust the image (contrast, brightness, and so on).
· Check camera movement (pan, tilt and home functions) (if applicable).
Adjusting the thermal camera image
With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Adjust Contrast. 3. Select the Contrast, Brightness, or Color option
as appropriate. The relevant numeric adjust control is displayed. 4. Adjust the value as required. 5. Select Back or Ok to confirm the new value.
UniControl joystick -- is used for rotating the camera left or right (panning), or tilting the camera up or down.
UniControl rotary -- is used to zoom in and out.
Resetting the thermal camera to the home position When connected to a pan, tilt thermal camera the home position of the camera can be set. In the thermal camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera Home.
The camera returns to its currently defined home position, and the "Home" icon appears on-screen momentarily.
Pan, Tilt, Zoom (PTZ) cameras
Panning and tilting, and the thermal image
On a touchscreen multifunction display you can pan and tilt the thermal camera image using the touchscreen.
Move your finger up and down the screen to tilt the camera up or down.
Move your finger left and right on the screen to rotate the camera left or right (panning).
Panning, Tilting and zooming the thermal image
On a multifunction display with physical buttons or when using a remote keypad you can pan, tilt and zoom the thermal camera image using the UniControl.
In some circumstances it may be better to use just the UniControl's rotary and joystick controls to manipulate the thermal camera view. For example, this method is ideal for finer control over the camera and is particularly useful in rough sea conditions.
System checks
117
118
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 8: Managing display data
Chapter contents · 8.1 Memory cards and chart cards on page 120 · 8.2 a6x and a7x on page 120 · 8.3 a9x and a12x on page 121 · 8.4 c and e Series on page 122 · 8.5 Saving user data and user settings on page 123 · 8.6 Save and restore items on page 126 · 8.7 Screenshots on page 128 · 8.8 Resetting your system on page 128
Managing display data
119
8.1 Memory cards and chart cards
8.2 a6x and a7x
MicroSD memory cards can be used to back up / archive data (e.g. Waypoint, and Tracks). Once data is backed up to a memory card old data can be deleted from the system, creating capacity for new data. The archived data can be retrieved at any time. Chart cards provide additional or upgraded cartography.
It is recommended that your data is backed up to a memory card on a regular basis. Do NOT save data to a memory card containing cartography.
Inserting a memory card or chart card
1. Open the card reader door, located on the front right of the display.
2. Insert the card, as shown in the diagram below, the card contacts should be facing UP. Do NOT force the card. If the card does not fit easily into the slot, check the orientation.
Compatible cards
The following types of MicroSD cards are compatible with your display:
· Micro Secure Digital Standard-Capacity (MicroSDSC)
· Micro Secure Digital High-Capacity (MicroSDHC)
Note:
· The maximum supported memory card capacity is 32 GB.
· MicroSD cards must be formatted to use either the FAT or FAT 32 file system format to enable use with your MFD.
D12828-1
3. Gently press the card all the way in to the card slot, as shown in the diagram below. The card is secure when an audible click is heard.
Speed class rating
For best performance it is recommended that you use Class 10 or UHS (Ultra High Speed) class memory cards.
Chart cards
Your product is pre-loaded with electronic charts (worldwide base map). If you wish to use different chart data, you can insert compatible chart cards into the unit's memory card reader.
Use branded chart cards and memory cards
When archiving data or creating an electronic chart card, Raymarine recommends the use of quality branded memory cards. Some brands of memory card may not work in your unit. Please contact customer support for a list of recommended cards.
D12829-1
4. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close the card reader door.
Removing a memory card or chart card
From the homescreen: 1. Select My Data. 2. Select Eject Card. 3. Open the card reader door, located on the front
right of the display. 4. Push the edge of the card towards the unit, until
an audible click is heard. The card is released from the card slot mechanism, as shown in the following diagram:
120
a Series / c Series / e Series
8.3 a9x and a12x
Inserting a memory card or chart card
1. Open the card reader door.
2. Insert the card, as shown in the diagram below. For slot 1, the card contacts should be facing DOWN. For slot 2, the card contacts should be facing UP. Do NOT force the card. If the card does not fit easily into the slot, check the orientation.
1
2
D13070-1
3. Gently press the card all the way in to the card slot, as shown in the diagram below. The card is secure when an audible click is heard.
1
2
D12830-1
5. Use your fingers to pull the card clear of the card slot, using the edge of the card.
6. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close the card reader door.
Note: You can also power off the multifunction display and follow steps 4 to 7 above.
D13071-1
4. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close the card reader door.
Removing a memory card or chart card
From the homescreen: 1. Select My Data. 2. Select Eject Card.
A message is displayed prompting you to select the memory device you want to eject. 3. Select SD1 for a memory card in the top card slot, or SD2 for a memory card in the bottom card slot. 4. Open the card reader door. 5. Push the edge of the card towards the unit, until an audible click is heard. The card is released from the card slot mechanism, as shown in the following diagram:
1
2
D13072-1
Managing display data
121
6. Use your fingers to pull the card clear of the card slot, using the edge of the card.
1
2
D13073-1
7. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close the chart card door.
8.4 c and e Series
Inserting a memory card or chart card
1. Open the chart card door, located on the front right of the display.
2. Insert the card, as shown in the diagram below. For slot 1, the card contacts should be facing DOWN. For slot 2, the card contacts should be facing UP. Do NOT force the card. If the card does not fit easily into the slot, check the orientation.
Note: You can also power off the multifunction display and follow steps 4 to 7 above.
D12290-1
3. Gently press the card all the way in to the card slot, as shown in the diagram below. The card is secure when an audible click is heard.
D12292-1
4. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close the chart card door.
Removing a memory card or chart card
From the homescreen: 1. Select My Data. 2. Select Eject Card.
A message is displayed prompting you to select the memory device you want to eject. 3. Select SD1 for a memory card in the top card slot, or SD2 for a memory card in the bottom card slot. 4. Open the chart card door, located on the front right of the display. 5. Push the edge of the card towards the unit, until an audible click is heard. The card is released from the card slot mechanism, as shown in the following diagram:
122
a Series / c Series / e Series
8.5 Saving user data and user settings
You can save your waypoints, routes, tracks and user settings to a memory card. Waypoints, routes and tracks are saved as gpx data files. The gpx file format is a device-independent data format making it easy to exchange data between your display and other GPS devices / software that support the gpx file format.
Type of data
Description
Notes
Waypoints (user data)
Each waypoint group can be saved separately
Routes (user data) Each route can be saved separately
Tracks (user data) Each track can be saved separately
User settings
Saves the settings Only 1 user you've made in the settings archive set-up menus to a file can be saved single archive file. per memory card.
D12291-1
6. Use your fingers to pull the card clear of the card slot, using the edge of the card.
7. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close the chart card door.
Note: You can also power off the multifunction display and follow steps 4 to 7 above.
Note: It is recommended that you save your user data and user settings to a memory card on a regular basis.
Note: Do NOT save user data or settings to a chart card containing cartography.
Saving all user data to a memory card
You can save all user data to one archive file.
With the Homescreen displayed: 1. Ensure you have a memory card (NOT a chart
card) inserted into a card slot. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Import/Export. 4. Select Save Data to Card. 5. Select Save All.
The on-screen keyboard is displayed. 6. Using the on-screen keyboard enter the filename
you want to save the file as. 7. Select SAVE.
If your display has more than 1 card slot then a message is displayed prompting you to select the slot you want to save data to, if your display only has 1 card slot then you will not be prompted. 8. Select SD1 for a memory card in the top card slot, or SD2 for a memory card in the bottom card slot. A confirmation dialog is displayed. 9. Select OK.
Managing display data
Saving waypoints to a memory card
With the Homescreen displayed: 1. Ensure you have a memory card (NOT a chart
card) inserted into a card slot. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Import/Export. 4. Select Save Data to Card.
123
5. Select Save Waypoints to Card. The Waypoint Group list is displayed.
slot you want to save data to, if your display only has 1 card slot then you will not be prompted.
10. Select SD1 for a memory card in the top card slot, or SD2 for a memory card in the bottom card slot.
A confirmation dialog is displayed.
11. Select OK.
Saving tracks to a memory card
6. Select the group or groups you want to save, or select Select All.
7. Select Save. The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
8. Using the on-screen keyboard enter the filename you want to save the file as.
9. Select SAVE. If your display has more than 1 card slot then a message is displayed prompting you to select the slot you want to save data to, if your display only has 1 card slot then you will not be prompted.
10. Select SD1 for a memory card in the top card slot, or SD2 for a memory card in the bottom card slot. A confirmation dialog is displayed.
11. Select OK.
Saving routes to a memory card
With the Homescreen displayed: 1. Ensure you have a memory card (NOT a chart
card) inserted into a card slot. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Import/Export. 4. Select Save Data to Card. 5. Select Save Routes to Card.
The Routes list is displayed.
With the Homescreen displayed: 1. Ensure you have a memory card (NOT a chart
card) inserted into a card slot. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Import/Export. 4. Select Save Data to Card. 5. Select Save Tracks to Card.
The Tracks list is displayed.
6. Select the track or tracks you want to save, or select Select All.
7. Select Save. The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
8. Using the on-screen keyboard enter the filename you want to save the file as.
9. Select SAVE. If your display has more than 1 card slot then a message is displayed prompting you to select the slot you want to save data to, if your display only has 1 card slot then you will not be prompted.
10. Select SD1 for a memory card in the top card slot, or SD2 for a memory card in the bottom card slot. A confirmation dialog is displayed.
11. Select OK.
Importing waypoints, routes, or tracks from a memory card
6. Select the route or routes you want to save, or select Select All.
7. Select Save.
The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
8. Using the on-screen keyboard enter the filename you want to save the file as.
9. Select SAVE.
If your display has more than 1 card slot then a message is displayed prompting you to select the
With the Homescreen displayed: 1. Ensure you have a memory card containing the
user data in gpx format in one of the card slots. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Import/Export. 4. Select Retrieve from Card.
The file browser is opened.
124
a Series / c Series / e Series
5. Select the specific data items you want to erase, or select Erase All.
A message is displayed prompting you for confirmation.
6. Select Yes to proceed with the deletion, or No to cancel the operation.
Backing up user settings to a memory card
5. Browse to and select the file you want to import. A confirmation dialog is displayed.
6. Select OK. Note: When Routes and Tracks are imported they will be hidden by default, to display the imported routes and tracks please refer to the Showing or hiding routes and tracks section.
Erasing user data files from a memory card With the Homescreen displayed: 1. Ensure you have the memory card containing the
data in one of the card slots. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Import/Export. 4. Select Erase from Card.
The file browser is opened.
5. Browse to and select the file you want to erase. A confirmation dialog is displayed.
6. Select Yes.
With the Homescreen displayed: 1. Ensure you have a memory card (NOT a chart
card) in one of the card slots. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Import/Export. 4. Select Backup Settings.
If your display has more than 1 card slot then a message is displayed prompting you to select the memory device you want to save the settings to, if your display only has 1 card slot then you will not be prompted. 5. Select SD1 for a memory card in the top card slot, or SD2 for a memory card in the bottom card slot. A confirmation dialog is displayed. 6. Select OK.
Restoring user settings from a memory card
With the Homescreen displayed: 1. Ensure you have the memory card containing the
user data in one of the card slots. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Import/Export. 4. Select Restore Settings.
If your display has more than 1 card slot then a message is displayed prompting you to select the memory device you want to retrieve settings from, if your display only has 1 card slot then you will not be prompted. 5. Select SD1 for a memory card in the top card slot, or SD2 for a memory card in the bottom card slot. A confirmation dialog is displayed. 6. Select OK.
Erasing waypoints, routes, and tracks from the system
Note: The following procedure permanently erases selected or ALL waypoints, routes, or tracks stored on the display. BEFORE proceeding, ensure that you backup any data that you want to keep on to a memory card.
With the Homescreen displayed:
1. Select My Data.
2. Select Import/Export.
3. Select Erase from System.
4. Select Erase Waypoints from System, Erase Routes from System, or Erase Tracks from System, as appropriate.
Managing display data
125
8.6 Save and restore items
The table below details the data items and settings which will be saved to and restored from a memory card on your multifunction display.
Homescreen and settings
Menu Homescreen Set-up > System settings
Setting Default page configuration Autopilot control
DSC alerts
Set-up > System settings > GPS screen GPS Set-up
Set-up > System settings > Silent mode External Devices > AIS Unit Set-up
AIS safety messages
Set-up > System settings > Shortcut key External Devices > Remote control
Set-up > System settings > Source External Devices > Weather Set-up
Set-up > System settings > Number of engines External Devices > Engines Set-up
Set-up > System settings > Bearing mode System preferences
Variation source
Manual variation
System Datum
Set-up > System settings Simulator
Customize
Language
Customize > Boat Details Boat Type
Number of Engines
Number of Fuel Tanks
Number of Batteries
Customize > Units Set-up Distance units
Speed Units
Depth Units
Temperature Units
Pressure Units
Volume Units
Economy Units
Wind Speed Units
Customize > Time and Date Date format Set-up
Time format
Local time offset
126
Menu
Setting
Customize > Databar Set-up Databar content (cell 1 to 6)
Compass in titlebar
Status Icon Bar
Databar Autohide
Customize > Display Preferences
Starting Page
Key Beep
Color Theme
Cursor Autohide
Range Controls
Chart Ctxt Menu
Pilot Control Bar
Screenshot File
Alarm Manager Menu Safety Alarms
General Alarms
General Alarms > Fish alarm
Setting Waypoint arrival Offtrack alarm Anchor alarm
Low fuel remaining MOB Data type Safezone (AIS targets) Alarm clock Countdown timer Water temperature Enable
Fish alarm depth limits Fish alarm shallow limit Fish alarm deep limit
Chart application Menu Presentation
Presentation > Overlays
Setting Chart Display
Aerial overlay Chart grid 2D shading Community edits Chart text Chart boundaries Boat size
Databox 1 Databox 1 content Databox 2
a Series / c Series / e Series
Menu Presentation > Vectors Presentation > Objects
Presentation > Depth & Contours
Setting Databox 2 content Vector length Vector width Show rocks Nav marks Nav marks symbols Light sectors Routing systems Caution areas Marine features Land features Business services Panoramic photos Roads Additional wrecks Colored seabed areas Vessel icon Show soundings
Show contours Shallow contour Safety contour Depth contour Deep water color
Radar application Menu Presentation Presentation > Databoxes
Setting Range rings Databox 1 Databox 1 content Databox 2 Databox 2 content
Fishfinder application Menu
Channel
Presentation > Databoxes Set-up
Setting Channels Databox 1
Databox 1 content Databox 2 Databox 2 content
Data application Menu
Presentation
Managing display data
Setting Datapages and content Color theme
Menu
Weather application Menu Databoxes Set-up
Setting Dial color Number of engines Maximum RPM range
Setting Databox 1 Databox 1 content Databox 2 Databox 2 content
127
8.7 Screenshots
8.8 Resetting your system
You can take a screenshot of what is currently displayed on the screen.
Screenshots are saved to a MicroSD card in .bmp (bitmap) format. The saved image can be viewed from any device capable of viewing bitmap images.
Taking a screenshot
You can take a screenshot by following the steps below. 1. Insert a MicroSD card with suitable free space
available into the card reader. 2. Press the Power button.
The Shortcuts page is displayed: 3. Select the Camera icon.
A confirmation message is displayed. 4. Select Ok.
The screenshot is now saved to the MicroSD card.
Tip If your multifunction display has a Back button you can also take a screenshot by pressing and holding the Back button until the confirmation message appears.
Selecting the SD card slot for screenshots
If your multifunction display has 2 card reader slots, you must select which card slot to save the screenshot to.
From the homescreen. 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Display Preferences. 3. Select Screenshot File:. 4. Select either MicroSD 1 or MicroSD 2.
Viewing a screenshot on the multifunction display
You can view images on the multifunction display. 1. Insert a MicroSD card containing the screenshot
or image into the MicroSD card slot of your multifunction display. 2. From the homescreen, select My Data. 3. Select Images and Video. The file browser dialog is displayed. 4. Use the file browser to locate the file on the MicroSD card. 5. Select the file you want to view. The file will now open. 6. Select Back or Close to close the image.
Your system may be reset to its factory default settings if required.
There are 2 types of reset operation, both of which affect the current display you are using, AND any networked displays.
· Settings reset.
· Settings and data reset.
Settings reset
This option resets your setup menus, page sets, and databar settings to factory default. It will NOT affect your waypoints, routes, or tracks data.
Settings and data reset
In addition to the settings reset detailed above, performing a settings and data reset will also remove ALL waypoints, routes, and tracks data.
Resetting system settings
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select Maintenance. 3. Select System Settings Reset.
A message is displayed prompting you to confirm the action. 4. Select Yes to proceed with the settings reset, or No to cancel.
Resetting system settings and data
Note: Performing a settings and data reset erases ALL waypoints, routes, and track data from your system. BEFORE proceeding with a settings and data reset, ensure that you backup any data that you want to keep on to a memory card.
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select Maintenance. 3. Select System Settings and Data Reset.
A message is displayed prompting you to confirm the action. 4. Select Yes to proceed with the settings and data reset, or No to cancel.
128
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 9: Customizing your display
Chapter contents · 9.1 Language selection on page 130 · 9.2 Boat details on page 131 · 9.3 Units set-up on page 132 · 9.4 Time and Date set-up on page 133 · 9.5 Display preferences on page 134 · 9.6 Databar and databox overview on page 137 · 9.7 List of data items on page 139 · 9.8 System set-up menus on page 146
Customizing your display
129
9.1 Language selection
The system can operate in the following languages:
English (US)
English (UK)
Arabic
Bulgarian
Chinese
Croatian
Czech
Danish
Dutch
Finnish
French
German
Greek
Hebrew
Icelandic
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Norwegian
Polish
Portuguese (Brazilian)
Russian
Slovenian
Spanish
Swedish
Turkish
With the Homescreen displayed:
1. Select Customize.
2. Select Language.
3. Select your language from the list of languages.
Language is part of the Shared Preferences scheme. Once a new language is selected the User interface language will change on all MFDs networked using SeaTalkhs or SeaTalkng and any instrument displays networked using SeaTalkng .
130
a Series / c Series / e Series
9.2 Boat details
You can customize various settings to make them specific to your vessel.
Menu item
Description
Options
Boat Type
You can change the appearance of the vessel in the chart application. Select the option that most closely resembles the type and size of your vessel.
· Power Cruiser 1 (default) · Power Cruiser 2 · Power Cruiser 3
Note: When boat type is selected during the initial set up of the multifunction display the boat type shall determine the datapage configuration in the data application.
· Inboard Speed Boat · Outboard Speed Boat · Workboat · RIB
· Sail Cruiser
· Race Sail
· Catamaran
· Sport Fishing
· Pro Fishing
Min. Safe Depth
The Minimum Safe Depth setting is required when · 1.0 to 50.0. building routes using the Autorouting feature.
Num. of Engines
Allows you to specify the number of engines your · 1 to 5 vessel has. This setting determines the number of engines shown in the engine data application.
Num. of Fuel Tanks
Allows you to specify the number of fuel tanks your · 1 to 5 vessel has. This setting determines the number of fuel tanks available in the Data application.
Num. of Batteries
Allows you to specify the number of batteries your · 1 to 16 vessel has. This setting determines the number of batteries available in the Data application.
Total Fuel Capacity
Allows you to specify the total fuel capacity of · 0 to 9999 units. your vessel, this is required in order to enable the fuel manager function.
Customizing the vessel icon
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Boat Details. 3. Select Boat Type. 4. Select the icon that most closely resembles your
vessel type and size.
Customizing your display
131
9.3 Units set-up
You can specify your preference for the units of measurement that will be used in all applications.
Menu item
Description
Options
Distance Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to distance.
· Nautical Miles
· NM & m (major units = Nautical Miles, minor units = meters)
· Statute Miles
· Kilometers
Speed Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to speed.
· Knots · MPH (Miles Per Hour) · KPH (Kilometers Per Hour)
Depth Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to depth.
· Feet · Meters · Fathoms
Temperature Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to temperature.
· Fahrenheit · Celsius
Pressure Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to pressure.
· Bar · PSI · Kilopascals
Volume Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to volume.
· US Gallons · Imperial Gallons · Liters
Economy Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to fuel usage.
· Distance per Volume · Volume per Distance · Liters per 100 km
Wind Speed Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to wind speed.
· Knots · Metres per second
Specifying preferred units of measurement
1. Select Customize. 2. Select Units Set-up. 3. Select the type of measurement you want to
change (for example, Distance Units). 4. Select the preferred type of unit (for example,
Statute Miles).
132
a Series / c Series / e Series
9.4 Time and Date set-up
You can specify your preference for the way that time and date will appear in all applications.
Menu item
Description
Options
Date Format
Allows you to specify the preferred format for the · MM:DD:YY (Month, Day, Year)
display of date information in all applications.
· DD:MM:YY (Day, Month, Year)
Time Format
Allows you to specify the preferred format for the · 12hr
display of time information in all applications.
· 24hr
Local Time: UTC
Allows you to specify the local time zone that will · 13 to +13 hours (in 0.5 hour be used, in terms of an offset from UTC (Universal increments) Coordinated Time), in 0.5 hour increments.
Customizing your display
133
9.5 Display preferences
You can specify your preference for general display behavior.
Menu item
Description
Options
Starting page
Allows you to select what page the display opens · Homescreen (default)
at start up.
· Last page -- After power up the last
used page is displayed.
· Choose page -- After power up the page selected is displayed.
Key Beep
An audible sound can be made each time a button · ON (default)
is pressed or the touchscreen is used.
· OFF
Cursor Autohide
If set to On, the cursor will be automatically hidden · ON
after a period of no movement. If set to Off, the cursor will persist on the screen until moved.
· OFF (default)
Range Controls
On New e Series and gS Series displays you can specify whether the Chart, Radar and Weather application display the onscreen range in and range out icons.
· Show (default) · Hide
Note:
· Onscreen range controls are not available on non-touchscreen displays.
· Onscreen range controls cannot be hidden on touch only displays.
Context Menu Pilot Control Bar
(Touchscreen displays only) Determines how the context menu is accessed using touch
Allows you to enable and disable the pilot bar on each display individually, when connected to an SPX or SeaTalk autopilot. Note: For evolution autopilots the Pilot Bar option is in the Pilot Set-up page.
· Touch (default) -- touching a chart object opens the context menu.
· Hold -- Touch and holding on a chart object opens the context menu.
· Shown
· Hidden
Shared Brightness Screenshot File
You can set up shared brightness groups (or "zones") to adjust the brightness on multiple units simultaneously.
Share Brightness · ON (default) · OFF
Brightness Group
· Helm 1 (default)
· Helm 2
· Cockpit
· Flybridge
· Mast
· Group 1
· Group 2
· Group 3
· Group 4
· Group 5
Enables you to specify the default memory card · MicroSD 1 slot for screen capture images.
134
a Series / c Series / e Series
Menu item
Description
Options
Note: This option is only available on displays · MicroSD 2 with multiple card reader slots.
Onscreen range controls
You can enable and disable onscreen range controls on New e Series and gS Series displays by following the steps below.
From the homescreen: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Display Preferences. 3. Select Range Controls.
Selecting Range Controls will switch between showing and hiding the onscreen range controls.
Shared brightness
You can set up shared brightness groups to adjust the brightness on multiple units simultaneously.
The following units are compatible with shared brightness groups:
· a Series
· c Series
· e Series
· gS Series
· i50
· i60
· i70
· p70 / p70R pilot controllers
· ST70
· ST70+
Once compatible units are added to a shared brightness group, any brightness adjustment made to any of the units in the group is also reflected in all other units in that group. An on-screen single brightness control is available for controlling any units in the brightness group:
Multiple brightness groups can be configured. This can reflect the physical location of the units on your vessel if required. For example, the units at your helm can be set to one group, and the units on the flybridge can be set to a different group. In this example, any brightness adjustments made to a unit at the helm would be automatically reflected in the other units at the helm but not on the flybridge.
The shared brightness function requires the following:
· All units must be compatible with the shared brightness function (see list of compatible units above).
· Before a unit can respond to a shared brightness adjustment it must be assigned to the relevant Brightness Group.
· A single unit can only belong to one brightness group at any one time.
· The Share brightness setting must be set to On for all units in the brightness group.
· When setting up a brightness group an initial Sync brightness operation must be performed, with all the displays in that group powered on, to configure the display brightness of all units in the group.
Customizing your display
Setting up shared brightness
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Display Preferences. 3. Select Shared Brightness. 4. Select the On option for the Shared brightness
menu item. 5. Select Brightness Group.
135
6. Select an appropriate brightness group.
7. Repeat the process for the other displays you want in the brightness group. If the display is not a multifunction display, refer to the documentation that accompanies the unit for instructions on setting-up shared brightness.
8. Once all required displays have been added to the same brightness group, select Sync Brightness on the multifunction display.
A shared brightness message is displayed.
9. Ensure all displays in the brightness group are powered on.
10. Select Sync.
When completed a message is displayed confirming that shared brightness has been configured.
Once shared brightness has been successfully configured, changing the brightness of any display in that brightness group will automatically change the brightness of all displays in that group.
136
a Series / c Series / e Series
9.6 Databar and databox overview
You can customize the data displayed in the databar and onscreen databoxes.
Customizable data is displayed in the databar, extended databar (HybridTouch displays only) or databoxes. The databar, extended databar and databoxes are available in all applications.
These areas of the screen are illustrated and described below:
Auto-hide the databar
On multifunction displays that have a touchscreen, the databar that is displayed at the top of all applications pages can be set to auto-hide. This provides a larger screen area for the application pages.
1
2
1
2
3
4
D13003-1
From the Homescreen:
1. Select Customize.
2. Select Databar Set-up.
3. Select Auto-Hide so that On is selected.
When viewing application pages the databar will
now auto-hide after 10 seconds. You can view the
5
databar again by touching the databar with your
finger. D12296-3
1. Databar -- displayed at the top of the screen in all applications. The databar contains cells that can be customized to display data from a wide range of categories. The databar can also be hidden to provide
2. Expanded Databar -- (Touchscreen displays only) displayed when you touch the databar. The extended databar can be displayed. The expanded databar is displayed until the screen is touched again.
3. Status icons -- You can display the status icons below the expanded databar. This provides status information for externally connected equipment:
4. Status Bar -- Permanently displayed in all applications. The status bar contains information on the currently selected settings of the application displayed onscreen.
5. Databoxes -- up to 2 databoxes can be displayed. Each box can display one item of data from the available data categories. Data is permanently displayed onscreen.
The databar can be set to auto-hide so that only the Status bar is visible onscreen.
Customizing your display
Customizing databoxes in the chart application
To switch databoxes on and off and to select data to display follow the steps below.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlay. 3. Select Databoxes. 4. Select Databox 1 > On. 5. Select Databox 2 > On. 6. Choose the Select Data option for the relevant
databox. 7. Select the category that reflects the type of data
you want to display in the databox. For example, Depth data. 8. Select the data item. The data you selected is displayed onscreen in the appropriate databox.
Customizing Databoxes
In the Radar, Fishfinder, or Weather application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Databoxes. 4. Select Databox 1 > ON. 5. Select Databox 2 > ON. 6. Choose the Select Databox 1 or Select Databox
2 menu item, as appropriate. 7. Select the category that reflects the type of data
you want to display in the databox. For example, Depth data. 8. Select the data item. The data you selected is displayed onscreen in the appropriate databox.
137
Customizing the databar
From the homescreen: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Databar Set-up. 3. Select Edit Databar. 4. In the databar, select the cell that you want to
change. The Select Data Category menu will be displayed. 5. Select the category that reflects the type of data you want to display in the cell. For example, Depth data. 6. Select the data item. The data you selected is displayed on-screen in the appropriate cell. 7. Select Home or Back when completed.
Displaying status icons in the databar
Touchscreen multifunction displays enable you to display status icons in the databar.
From the homescreen: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Databar Set-up. 3. Select Status Icon Bar so that On is highlighted.
The status icons are now displayed below the expanded databar.
138
a Series / c Series / e Series
9.7 List of data items
Categories of data available to display in the data application, databoxes, databar, and expanded databar are shown below. Dial graphics are not available in databoxes or databars.
The following table shows the data items available by category.
Data Category Description Data Item
Data application Graphics
Battery**
Battery status Battery Amps
Battery Temperature
Battery Voltage
Boat Depth Distance
Battery Charge
Types of data generated by your vessel. For example, tank levels.
Rate of Turn
Heel Angle
Trim Tabs (Data application only.)
Depth data. Depth
Maximum Depth
Minimum Depth
Types of data related to distance travelled by your vessel. For example, trip distance.
Log & Trip
Log
Trip
Ground Log and Trip Ground Log
Ground Trip 1
Ground Trip 2
Ground Trip 3
Ground Trip 4
Customizing your display
139
Data Category Engine**
Description
Types of data generated by engines. For example, oil pressure.
Data Item RPM
RPM & SOG
Coolant Temperature
Coolant Pressure
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Oil Pressure & Coolant Temperature Transmission Oil Temperature
Transmission Oil Pressure
Transmission Gear Boost Pressure
Fuel Pressure
Fuel Flow Rate
Fuel Flow (Inst)
Fuel Flow (Avg)
Engine Hours Engine Trim Alternator Engine Load
Data application Graphics
140
a Series / c Series / e Series
Data Category Fuel**
Description Data Item
Types of data related to the fuel system. For example, fuel levels.
Fuel Level (%) Total Fuel (%) Total Fuel (vol)
Fuel Flow Total
Economy
Estimated Fuel Remaining
Distance to Empty
Time to Empty
Fuel Used (Trip)
Environment
Fuel Used (Season)
Environmentalrelated data. For example, air temperature.
Pressure Air Temperature
Minimum Air Temperature
Maximum Air Temperature
Drift
Set
Set & Drift
Apparent Wind Chill True Wind Chill
Humidity
Dew Point
Sunset / Sunrise
Water Temperature
Customizing your display
Data application Graphics
141
Data Category GPS
Description Data Item
Minimum Water Temperature
Maximum Water Temperature
GPS-related Vessel Position
data. For
example, vessel position.
COG & SOG
COG
SOG
Heading Navigation
142
Maximum SOG
Average SOG
Heading-related data. For example, locked heading.
Heading
Heading and Speed (Data application only.)
Locked Heading
Locked Heading Error
LH Error and LH (Data application only.)
Tack Heading
Types of data related to navigation. For example, bearing to waypoint.
Compass (Data application only.)
Cursor Position (Only available in the Databar and data overlay.)
Cursor info (Only available in the Databar and data overlay.)
Cross Track Error
Rolling Road (Data application only.)
Data application Graphics
a Series / c Series / e Series
Data Category Description
Data Item Waypoint Info
Active Waypoint Name Target Position
Bearing to Waypoint
BTW & DTW (Data application only.) Course Made Good CMG & DMG
Pilot Speed
CMG & VMG (Data application only.)
Distance to Waypoint
Distance Made Good
Waypoint ETA
Waypoint TTG
Route ETA
Route TTG
Pilot-related data. For example, rudder.
Speed-related data. For example, VMG (Velocity Made Good) to Waypoint.
Rudder Angle
Speed
Maximum Speed Average Speed
Speed and SOG
VMG to Windward
VMG to Waypoint
Customizing your display
Data application Graphics
143
Data Category Tanks**
Description
Data related to water tanks
Data Item Fresh Water (%)
Grey Water (%)
Black Water (%)
Live Well (%)
Time Wind
Time-related data. For example, local time.
Local Time Local Date
Wind-related data. For example, VMG (Velocity Made Good) to Windward.
AWA Maximum AWA Minimum AWA
AWS
Maximum AWS Minimum AWS TWA Maximum TWA Minimum TWA TWS
Maximum TWS Minimum TWS TWD
Cardinal Wind
Ground Wind
Beaufort AWA and TWA
144
Data application Graphics
a Series / c Series / e Series
Data Category Description
Data Item AWA & AWS
Data application Graphics
AWA (CH) and AWS
AWA and VMG
TWA & TWS
TWA (CH) and TWS
TWA and VMG
GWD and Beaufort
GWD & GWS
None
Note: *Dials and graphical representations are only available from the Data application. Databar and data cell overlays can only display digital items.
Note: **The Battery, Engine, Fuel and Tanks menus will display 1 set of data items per configured device (e.g. if the system has been configured with 3 engines then 3 sets of engine data items will be displayed).
Customizing your display
145
9.8 System set-up menus
The system set-up menus enable you to configure your display and connected external devices. The following menus are available:
Menu item
Description
Notes
Touch-Lock
Enables you to lock the touchscreen of a · ON
touch only display when the display is paired with a remote keypad.
· OFF (default)
Note: This option is not available on touch-only displays which do not have a remote keypad connected.
Note: This option is not available on displays which have physical buttons.
Alarms Fuel Manager Pilot Controls
Pilot Response
Display the Alarm Manager. Refer to Chapter 12 Alarm management
Displays the Fuel manager page
Displays the Pilot Control dialog.
Only available when a Raymarine autopilot is detected on the system and Autopilot Control is set to On.
Enables selection of the pilot response level when connected to an Evolution autopilot.
Note: Pilot Response is not available on SPX and SeaTalk autopilots.
· Leisure · Cruise · Performance
Audio Controls
Displays the audio controls pop-up.
Note: Not available on non-touch displays.
Only available when connected to an audio device via bluetooth.
Ground Trip Resets System Settings Maintenance
Resets the chosen ground trip distance counter to zero.
Enables you to configure the settings for external devices connected to the display.
Provides diagnostic information. Also enables you to designate the data master and reset the display to factory settings.
146
a Series / c Series / e Series
Ground trip resets menu
This menu enables you to resets the chosen ground trip distance counter to zero.
Menu item
Description
Ground Trip 1 Reset
Resets the ground trip 1 distance counter to zero.
Ground Trip 2 Reset
Resets the ground trip 2 distance counter to zero.
Ground Trip 3 Reset
Resets the ground trip 3 distance counter to zero.
Ground Trip 4 Reset
Resets the ground trip 4 distance counter to zero.
System settings menu
Menu item
Description
Autopilot Control
Enables and disables autopilot controls from your multifunction display.
DSC Alerts
Enables and disables DSC radio alerts on your multifunction display.
GPS Set-up
Provides GPS setting options.
Internal GPS
Switches the multifunction displays internal GPS On or Off.
Note: The Internal GPS option is not available on the e165 multifunction display.
Options · On · Off
· On · Off
· View Satellite Status
· Differential GPS · COG/SOG Filter · Restart GPS · On · Off
Data Sources
External Devices Wireless Connections
Enables selection of · GPS
preferred sources of data for connected
· GPS Datum
equipment.
· Time and Date
Note: The Data Sources menu is only available on displays set as Data Master.
· Heading · Depth · Speed · Wind
Enables set-up of compatible externally connected devices.
Refer to the External devices menu section of the manual.
Provides access to the Wi-Fi and bluetooth connection options.
Refer to the Wireless connections menu section of the manual.
Customizing your display
Menu item NMEA Set-up
System Preferences
Simulator
Description
Enables you to configure settings for NMEA devices.
Enables you to configure system settings
Switches simulator mode On or Off.
Options
Refer to the NMEA set-up menu section of the manual.
Refer to the System preferences menu section of the manual.
· Off
· On
· On (Demo movie)
GPS Status
The GPS status page enables you to view the status of the available satellites that are compatible with your receiver.
The satellite constellations are used to position your vessel in the Chart and Weather applications. You can set up your receiver and check its status from the GPS Set-up menu: Homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > GPS Set-up. For each satellite, the screen provides the following information:
2 1
3
D13122-1
1. Sky view 2. Satellite status 3. Position and fix information Sky view Sky view is a visual representation that shows the position of navigation satellites and their type. Satellite types are: · Circle -- A circle identifies a satellite from the
GPS constellation. · * Diamond -- A diamond identifies a satellite from
the GLONASS constellation. · Square -- A square identifies an (SBAS)
differential satellite.
147
Note: GLONASS satellites are only available when connected to a compatible receiver such as the built-in receiver of an a9x or a12x MFD.
displayed in the Chart application. In order for your receiver and MFD to correlate accurately with your paper charts, they must be using the same datum.
Satellite status area
The Satellite status area displays the following information about each satellite:
· Type -- Identifies which constellation the satellite belongs to.
· ID -- Displays the satellites identification number.
· CNO (Carrier-to-noise ratio) -- Displays the signal strength of each satellite shown in the Sky view:
Grey = searching for satellite
Green = satellite in use
Orange = tracking satellite
· Azimuth and Elevation -- Provides the angle of elevation and azimuth between the location of the receiver and the satellite.
Position and fix information
The following positional and fix information is provided:
· Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) -- HDOP is a measure of satellite navigation accuracy, calculated from a number of factors including satellite geometry, system errors in the data transmission and system errors in the receiver. A higher figure signifies a greater positional error. A typical receiver has an accuracy of between 5 and 15 m. As an example, assuming a receiver error of 5 m, an HDOP of 2 would represent an error of approximately 15 m. Please remember that even a very low HDOP figure is NO guarantee that your receiver is providing an accurate position. If in doubt, check the displayed vessel position in the Chart application against your actual proximity to a known charted object.
· Estimated Horizontal Position Error (EHPE) -- EHPE is a measure of the estimated error of a position fix in the horizontal plane. The value displayed indicates that your position is within a circle radius of the stated size 50% of the time.
· Fix status -- indicates the actual mode the receiver is reporting:
Fix -- Satellite fix has been acquired.
No Fix -- No satellite fix can be acquired.
D Fix -- A differential beacon fix has been acquired.
SD Fix -- A differential satellite fix has been acquired.
· Position -- Displays the latitude and longitude position of your receiver.
· Date / Time -- Displays the current date and time generated by the position fix in UTC format .
· Mode -- Identifies wether the receiver is working in differential mode or non-differential mode.
· Datum -- The receiver's datum setting affects the accuracy of the vessel position information
148
Multiple data sources (MDS) overview Installations that include multiple instances of data sources can cause data conflicts. An example is an installation featuring more than one source of GPS data. MDS enables you to manage conflicts involving the following types of data: · GPS Position. · Heading. · Depth. · Speed. · Wind. Typically this exercise is completed as part of the initial installation, or when new equipment is added. If this exercise is NOT completed the system will automatically attempt to resolve data conflicts. However, this may result in the system choosing a source of data that you do not want to use. If MDS is available the system can list the available data sources and allow you to select your preferred data source. For MDS to be available all products in the system that use the data sources listed above must be MDS-compliant. The system can list any products that are NOT compliant. It may be necessary to upgrade the software for these non-compliant products to make them compliant. Visit the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com) to obtain the latest software for your products. If MDS-compliant software is not available and you do NOT want the system to automatically attempt to resolve data conflicts, any non-compliant product(s) can be removed or replaced to ensure the entire system is MDS-compliant.
a Series / c Series / e Series
Data sources menu
This menu enables you to select the external sensors and devices that will provide data to the display.
Auto / manual selection
Each dialog enables you to view and select your preferred data source. selection of data source can be manual or set to automatic:
· Auto -- the display will automatically select a device and attempt to resolve any data conflicts that may occur where there is more than one source of data for that particular data source (for example, multiple GPS receivers).
· Manual -- once the display has performed a search for connected devices you can manually select the preferred device from the list.
Note: Selecting the Auto option may result in the system choosing a source of data that you do not want to use.
Device selection Menu item GPS
GPS Datum
Time and Date
Heading Depth Speed Wind
Description
Enables you to search for any externally-connected GPS devices, and select the one you want to use.
In order for your GPS receiver and multifunction display to correlate accurately with your paper charts, they must be using the same datum. This option enables you to choose the data source for this datum.
Enables you to select the device you want to use for the time and date information used by the display.
Enables you to select the device you want to use for heading data.
Enables you to select the device you want to use for depth data.
Enables you to select the device you want to use for speed data.
Enables you to select the device you want to use for wind data.
Customizing your display
149
External devices menu
This menu enables you to configure the external devices connected to the display.
Menu item
Description
Notes
Pilot Set-up
When connected to an Evolution autopilot this option allows you to enable and disable pilot control and the pilot bar. You can also access certain pilot settings and modes.
Fishfinder Set-up
Enables you to select an external transducer and configure the options for the unit, such as depth offset. Also enables you to configure the options for an internal or external sonar module.
For an explanation of these options refer to the Transducer set-up menu options described in the Fishfinder section of this document.
AIS Unit Set-up
Enables you to configure additional functions for AIS units, such as Silent Mode. This menu item is only available when an AIS unit is detected or when Simulator mode is On.
For an explanation of these options refer to the AIS menu options described in the AIS section of this document.
Remote Control
Enables you to customize certain controls For an explanation of these options refer
for Raymarine Bluetooth remote control to the Remote Control section of this
units (for example, RCU-3).
document.
Transducers Set-up
Displays a list of connected transducers which you can select and calibrate.
Weather Set-up
Enables you to select the bus your weather receiver is connected to:
· SeaTalkhs
· SeaTalkng
Switch Panel Set-up
Enables you to install and uninstall Switch Panel configuration files.
External Keypad
Enables you to pair and unpair remote keypads.
Engines Set-up
Enables you to run the engine identification wizard
For an explanation of these options refer to Engine identification wizard section of this document.
150
a Series / c Series / e Series
Connections menu
This menu enables you to connect wireless Bluetooth and Wi-Fi devices to the display.
Menu item
Description
Options
Bluetooth
Enable or disable Bluetooth on the display.
· On
· Off (default)
Wi-Fi
Enable or disable Wi-Fi on the display.
· On
· Off (default)
Connection Manager
Provides a list of Bluetooth devices in range. When you highlight a connection in the list and press OK, the following options are available:
· Unpair / Forget this device · Audio control On / Off.
· Unpair / Forget this device -- Disconnect the device and remove it from the connection list. If you unpair a device in this way you must re-pair the device if you want to connection it again to the multifunction display.
· Audio Control -- If this option is set to On, you can control the audio for a compatible wireless media player, from the multifunction display.
New Bluetooth Connection
Selecting this menu item initiates the Bluetooth pairing process. This is necessary for connecting a wireless remote control unit or media player device to the multifunction display.
Wi-Fi Name
Enables you to specify an SSID (WiFi Name) for connecting WiFi devices using an encrypted connection. If you want to prevent unauthorized devices from connecting to your display you must specify the same SSID for both the multifunction display and the wireless device you want to connect to the display.
Wi-Fi Security
You can encrypt the WiFi connection on the multifunction display to prevent unauthorized devices from accessing the connection. This menu item enables you to select the type of WPA (WiFi Protected Access) encryption you want to use. WPA2 provides stronger security than WPA.
· None · WPA Only · WPA 2 Only. (default) · WPA / WPA2.
Wi-Fi Passphrase
Enables you to specify a password for the WiFi connection. If you want to prevent unauthorized devices from connecting to your display you must specify the same password for both the multifunction display and the wireless device you want to connect to the display.
Wi-Fi Channel
By default the multifunction display automatically selects an available WiFi channel. If you're experiencing difficulties with wireless video streaming it may be necessary to manually specify a WiFi channel for both the multifunction display and the device you want to stream video to.
· 1 (default) ·2 ·3 ·4 ·5
·6
·7
·8
·9
· 10
· 11
Mobile apps
Enables you to select the type of mobile app in · Off (default)
Customizing your display
use:
· Viewing only
151
Menu item
Description
Options
· Viewing only -- RayView
· Remote Control
· Remote Control -- RayRemote or RayControl
152
a Series / c Series / e Series
NMEA Set-up menu
This menu enables you to configure settings for NMEA devices.
Menu item
Description
Options
Bridge NMEA Heading
If set to ON, NMEA heading data will be bridged onto the SeaTalk data bus, and will be sent to all NMEA-connected devices. If set to OFF, NMEA heading data will NOT be bridged onto the SeaTalk bus. An example of a use for this setting is when using MARPA with an external fast heading sensor, in which case you should set this option to OFF to ensure that all NMEA-connected units receive heading data from the external heading sensor.
· On · Off (default)
NMEA Output Settings
Allows you to enable or disable the individual NMEA "sentences" that are sent by the multifunction display to any devices connected the NMEA output port.
· APB · BWC · BWR
· DBT
· DPT
· GGA
· GLL
· GSA
· GSV
· MTW
· MWV
· RMA
· RMB
· RMC
· RSD
· RTE
· TTM
· VHW
· VLW
· VTG
· WPL
· ZDA
NMEA Input Port 1
Enables you to specify the appropriate port speed · NMEA 4800
for the equipment connected to NMEA Input port 1. Use the AIS 38400 option for AIS receivers.
· AIS 38400
NMEA Input Port 2
Enables you to specify the appropriate port speed · NMEA 4800
for the equipment connected to NMEA Input port 2. Use the AIS 38400 option for AIS receivers.
· AIS 38400
Customizing your display
153
System preferences menu
Menu item
Description
Options
Bearing mode
Determines how all bearing and heading data is · True (default)
displayed in. This does not affect how the chart or radar displays are drawn.
· Magnetic
Variation Source
This setting compensates for the naturally occurring offset of the earth's magnetic field. When set to Auto, the system automatically compensates, and displays the compensation value in brackets. To enter your own compensation value, use the Manual option, then specify the value using the Manual Variation setting (see below). This value is also transmitted to any other connected Raymarine instruments.
· Auto (compensation value displayed) (default)
· Manual
Manual Variation
When the Variation Source menu item is set to · Range: 0 to 30 degrees, East or West
Manual (see above), you use the Manual Variation setting to specify the compensation value that you
·
want to use.
System Datum
In order for your GPS receiver and multifunction display to correlate accurately with your paper charts, they must be using the same datum. The default datum for your multifunction display is WGS1984. If this is not the datum used by your paper charts, you can change the datum used by your multifunction display. When you change the datum for your multifunction display, the chart grid will subsequently move according to the new datum, and the latitude / longitude of the cartographic features will also change accordingly. Your multifunction display will attempt to set up any GPS receiver to the new datum, as follows:
· The internal GPS receiver will automatically correlate each time you change the datum.
· If you have a Raymarine GPS receiver using SeaTalk or SeaTalkng, it will automatically correlate each time you change the datum on the multifunction display.
· If you have a Raymarine GPS receiver using NMEA 0183, or a third-party GPS receiver, you must correlate it separately.
It may be possible to use your multifunction display to correlate an NMEA 0183 GPS receiver. From the homescreen go to Set-up > System settings > GPS Set-up > View Satellite Status. If the datum version is displayed, it may be possible to change it. From the homescreen go to Set-up > System settings > Data Sources > GPS Datum.
Note: Raymarine recommends that you check the displayed vessel position in the chart application against your actual proximity to a known charted object. A typical GPS has an accuracy of between 5 and 15 m.
154
a Series / c Series / e Series
Maintenance menu
This menu provides access to systems settings reset and diagnostics.
Menu item
Description
Options
Touchscreen Alignment
If the touchscreen is misaligned to your touch, you can realign it to improve the accuracy. Realignment involves a simple exercise to align an on-screen object with your touch. For best results, perform this exercise when your vessel is anchored or moored.
Note: The Touchscreen alignment option is not required on New c Series displays.
Data Master
System Settings Reset System Settings and Data Reset Diagnostics
Any system containing more than one networked multifunction display must have a designated data master. The data master is the display which serves as a primary source of data for all displays, it also handles all external sources of information.
This option resets your menu options, datapages, · Yes
and databar settings to factory default. It will NOT affect your waypoints, routes, or tracks data.
· No
In addition to the settings reset detailed above, performing a settings and data reset will also remove ALL waypoints, routes, and tracks data.
· Yes · No
Diagnostics provides detailed information on the multifunction display and connected devices. The range of information available includes product serial number, software version, and network status. When you select the Diagnostics menu item the multifunction display scans for any connected equipment and enables you to select the product you want to view. You can also save the diagnostics information to a memory card. This is particularly useful for sending detailed information to Raymarine Customer Support in the event of a technical issue. The Interfaces option allows you to view statistics and buffer information for NMEA 0183 ports 1 and 2 and SeaTalkng. The Sirius options allows you to view received messages, memory and errors.
· Select Device · Sirius · Save Logs · Erase Logs · Interfaces
Customizing your display
155
Diagnostics menu
If you encounter problems with your multifunction display or peripheral devices you can use the Diagnostics menu to view information about your device and connected equipment.
Select Device
Enables you to view a list of all devices · Device
connected to the SeaTalkhs network. You can also select an item in the list to view
·
Serial No.
further details for that device.
· Network
· Software
Sirius
If connected to a Sirius weather receiver this option enables you to view Sirius weather statistics.
Save Logs
Allows you to save error logs to a MicroSD card for troubleshooting purposes.
Erase Logs
Selecting this option will erase any crash logs on the device.
Interfaces
Enables viewing of statistics and viewing and recording of buffers on NMEA inputs and the SeaTalkng bus. On multifunction displays with multiple MicroSD card slots you can also choose which MicroSD card slot the buffer will be recorded to.
· NMEA 1 · NMEA 2 · SeaTalkng · Record File
156
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 10: Document viewer application
Chapter contents · 10.1 Document viewer overview on page 158
Document viewer application
157
10.1 Document viewer overview
You can view PDF documents on your multifunction display. The document viewer is available from the homescreen and is used to view and search PDF documents (such as product handbooks).
1
2
· Open File -- Allows you to browse a MicroSD card or the MFD's internal storage for a PDF document to open.
· Go to page: -- Allows you to jump to a specific page number.
· Find -- Allows you to search the document for specific words.
· Fit to Height -- Scales the open document to fit the height of the application window.
· Fit to Width -- Scales the open document to fit the width of the application window.
· Close File -- Closes the open document.
3
Opening the user manual
The product user manual is stored on the internal memory.
From the homescreen:
D12755-1 1. Select Doc Viewer.
1
Opens the MicroSD card file browser.
2. Select User Manual.
2
Opens the user manual stored on the
The product user manual is opened.
multifunction display.
Note: The User manual can also be opened
3
Opens the relevant license agreement
by selecting the User Manual icon from the
information.
Homescreen.
Note: The document viewer does not support password protected documents or documents containing security certificates. An error message will be displayed if you try to open such documents.
2
3
4
1 5
7
6
D12597-1
1
Current page number (page x of y).
2
Find (search) tool bar (only displayed when
searching a document).
Note: The Previous, Next and Cancel buttons are only shown on touch-only products. For non-touch and Hybridtouch products the physical buttons are used.
3
Filename of the current PDF.
4
Document viewer menu.
5
Scroll bar.
6
On-screen zoom controls (Touchscreen
displays only).
7
PDF document content.
The following options are available from the document viewer menu:
158
Opening a PDF document
You can open PDF documents stored on a MicroSD card by following the steps below.
Note: When saving PDF documents to MicroSD cards, ensure you do not overwrite important data.
1. Save the required PDF document to a MicroSD card.
2. Insert the MicroSD card into the multifunction display's MicroSD card slot.
3. Select Menu. 4. Select Open File.
The file browser dialog is displayed. 5. Browse the MicroSD card containing the
document you want to view. 6. Select the document you want to view.
The document will now open. 7. If the `Cannot Open File' error message is
displayed, select Ok to confirm and then try opening the document again. Check that the PDF is not corrupted. Also ensure that the PDF does not include password protection or a security certificate. These PDF file security features are not supported by the document viewer application.
Note: Large filesize PDF documents may take a while to open.
Closing an open document
Each Doc viewer instance is separate, the last document opened will automatically open next time you select that instance of the Doc viewer unless it its closed using the Close File menu option.
With a document open
a Series / c Series / e Series
1. Select Menu. 2. Select Close file.
The document is close and the main Doc viewer page is displayed.
Browsing an open document On touchscreen displays you can browse pdf documents as detailed below. With a pdf document open:
· Move your finger up to scroll down the document.
· Move your finger down to scroll up the document.
When the document width is greater than the width of the application window, move your finger left or right to pan the width of the document.
Selecting a page You can skip to the page you want to view by entering the page number. With a pdf document open: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Go to page:.
The numeric keypad is displayed. 3. Enter the page number of the page you want to
view. 4. Select Ok to view the page.
Using document hyperlinks On touchscreen displays you can use internal document hyperlinks. With a pdf document opened on a page containing a hyperlink: 1. Momentarily touch your finger on the hyperlink.
You will be taken to the hyperlinked page.
Note: Document hyperlinks cannot be activated on a New c Series display.
Note: You can also use the scroll bars to navigate through the document.
Browsing an open document On HybridTouch and non-touch displays you can browse pdf documents by following the steps below. With a pdf document open: 1. Move the Joystick Up or Down to move up and
down through the document. 2. Move the Joystick Left or Right to pan left and
right.
Changing the zoom factor On touchscreen displays you can change the zoom factor of the open document by following the steps below. With a pdf document open: 1. Select the on-screen Zoom in icon to zoom in, or 2. Select the on-screen Zoom out icon to zoom out.
Searching for text
To use the find function to search for text on touch only display follow the steps below.
With a pdf document open: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Find.
The on-screen keyboard is displayed. 3. Enter the keyword you want to find. 4. Select SAVE.
The document viewer will enter find mode and:
· You may see a `Searching' icon while all occurrences are found.
· The find tool bar is displayed.
· The first occurrence of the keyword is highlighted.
5. Select Next to find the next occurrence of the keyword, or
6. Select Previous to go back to the last occurrence of the keyword.
7. You can select Cancel at any time to close the find tool bar and return to the normal viewing.
Changing the zoom factor On HybridTouch and non-touch displays (excluding the e7 and e7D) you can change the zoom factor of the open document by following the steps below. With a pdf document open: 1. Use the Range out button to zoom out, or 2. Use the Range in button to zoom in.
Note: New a Series and e7 / e7D multifunction displays do not have Range in and Range out button.
Note: On a New c Series display only the Rotary control can be used to change the zoom factor.
Document viewer application
Searching for text On HybridTouch and non-touch displays you can use the find function to search for text in an open pdf document by following the steps below. With a pdf document open: 1. Press the Menu button. 2. Select Find.
The on-screen keyboard is displayed. 3. Enter the keyword you want to find. 4. Select SAVE.
The document viewer will enter find mode and:
· You may see a `Searching' icon while all occurrences are found.
159
· The find tool bar is displayed. · The first occurrence of the keyword is
highlighted. 5. Move the Joystick Down to go to the next
occurrence of the keyword, or 6. Move the Joystick Up to go to the previous
occurrence of the keyword. 7. You can press the Back button at any time to
close the find tool bar and return to the normal viewing.
Keyword not found The document viewer will let you know if the keyword you have searched for does not appear in the document. If the keyword is not found then the find tool bar will display an exclamation mark and a pop-up message is displayed on-screen.
Selecting New Search will take you back to the on-screen keyboard so that you can try a different keyword. Selecting Cancel will close the find tool bar and resume normal operation.
160
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 11: Autopilot control
Chapter contents · 11.1 Autopilot Control overview and features on page 162 · 11.2 Enabling autopilot control on page 162 · 11.3 Engaging the autopilot on page 163 · 11.4 Adjusting the current locked heading on page 163 · 11.5 Disengaging the autopilot on page 164 · 11.6 Manually displaying the pilot control dialog box on page 165 · 11.7 Pilot Control dialog on page 165 · 11.8 Pilot Bar on page 166 · 11.9 Pilot Set-up on page 167 · 11.10 Pilot settings on page 167 · 11.11 Commissioning on page 170 · 11.12 Autopilot status symbols on page 174 · 11.13 Autopilot alarms on page 174
Autopilot control
161
11.1 Autopilot Control overview and features
Raymarine® autopilots can be controlled directly from a compatible LightHouse powered MFD, with or without a dedicated Pilot control head.
Note: For information on connecting a Raymarine® autopilot to a compatible MFD, refer to the documentation that accompanied your autopilot.
The MFD can be used to:
Control a connected Autopilot.
· 6.15 Enabling autopilot control
Engage the autopilot in Track mode (Goto a specified position or follow a route) or Auto mode (Remain on the current heading).
· 11.3 Engaging the autopilot
Adjust the current locked · 11.4 Adjusting the current heading when in Auto mode. locked heading
Disengage the autopilot.
· 11.5 Disengaging the autopilot
Provide close integration · 18.3 Navigation options with the Chart application for seamless navigation.
Select different performance · 11.9 Pilot Set-up modes, when connected to an Evolution autopilot.
Adjust the Pilot Settings, when connected to an Evolution autopilot.
· 11.10 Pilot settings
11.2 Enabling autopilot control
Enabling the autopilot control function -- SeaTalk and SPX SeaTalkng autopilots
To enable control of your SeaTalk or SPX SeaTalkng autopilot using your multifunction display follow the steps below.
From the Homescreen: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select Autopilot Control so that On is
highlighted. Selecting Autopilot Control will switch the control between On and Off.
On a system containing multiple displays the pilot control is enabled on all displays at the same time.
Enabling the autopilot control function -- Evolution autopilots
To enable control of your Evolution autopilot using your multifunction display follow the steps below.
From the Homescreen. 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select External Devices. 4. Select Pilot Set-up. 5. Select Pilot control so that On is highlighted.
Selecting Pilot control will switch the Autopilot control function on and off.
Manage autopilot alarms. · 11.13 Autopilot alarms
Note: In a system that does not include a dedicated Pilot control head the Data Master MFD cannot be switched Off or put into PowerSave mode whilst the autopilot is engaged.
162
a Series / c Series / e Series
11.3 Engaging the autopilot
Engaging the autopilot using the pilot button
On multifunction displays which have a dedicated pilot button or when using a remote keypad you can engage the autopilot using the Pilot button.
With the autopilot disengaged: 1. Press the Pilot button.
The pilot control dialog is displayed. 2. Select Auto.
The autopilot is engaged and will maintain the current heading.
Note: You can also automatically engage the autopilot by pressing and holding the Pilot button.
11.4 Adjusting the current locked heading
When the autopilot is in Auto mode the current locked heading can be adjusted from the Pilot Control dialog and from the Pilot Bar.
With the Pilot Bar or Pilot Control dialog displayed: 1. Use the Left Arrow icon to decrease the current
locked heading, or 2. Use the Right Arrow icon to increase the current
locked heading.
Engaging the autopilot from the chart application menu
You can engage the autopilot in track mode using the application menu.
In the chart application: 1. Select Menu > Navigate > Goto Cursor, Goto
Waypoint, or Follow Route as appropriate. The Pilot Control dialog is displayed. 2. Select Yes (Track).
Engaging the autopilot using the context menu
You can engage the autopilot in track mode using the context menu.
From the chart application context menu. 1. Select any of the following options from the Chart
context menu:
· Goto Waypoint
· Goto Cursor
· Follow Route
· Follow from Here
· Follow Route in Reverse
The pilot control dialog is displayed. 2. Select Yes (Track).
Autopilot control
163
11.5 Disengaging the autopilot
Caution: Disengaging the autopilot
On integrated multifunction displays that do not have a dedicated pilot button, in an emergency the autopilot can be disengaged by pressing and holding the Power button.
2. Select STANDBY. The Pilot Status change confirmation pop-up is displayed.
3. Select Yes to disengage the autopilot.
The autopilot is disengaged (put into standby).
Disengaging the autopilot from the homescreen
Disengaging the autopilot using the Power button
On Touchscreen displays the autopilot can be disengaged from the Homescreen.
On integrated multifunction displays that do not have a dedicated pilot button, when the autopilot is engaged it can be disengaged using the power button. This is useful in emergency situations, especially on touch only displays in the event the touchscreen becomes unresponsive due to adverse weather conditions e.g. rain.
With the autopilot engaged: 1. Press and hold the Power button.
A `Setting pilot to STANDBY' warning is displayed and an audible alarm is sounded. 2. Continue to hold the Power button and the pilot will be placed into standby mode then the Pilot control dialog is displayed.
Disengaging the autopilot using the shortcuts page
You can disengage the autopilot from the Shortcuts page.
With the autopilot engaged: 1. Press and release the POWER button. 2. Select Standby.
The Pilot Status change confirmation pop-up is displayed. 3. Select Yes to disengage the autopilot.
From the Homescreen: 1. Select Standby.
The Pilot Status change confirmation pop-up is displayed. 2. Select Yes to disengage the autopilot. The autopilot is disengaged (put into standby).
Disengage the autopilot from the pilot bar The autopilot can be disengaged from the Pilot bar.
With the Pilot Bar displayed. 1. Select Standby.
The autopilot is disengaged (put into standby) and Refer to 11.8 Pilot Bar for further information on the
the Pilot Control dialog is displayed.
Pilot Bar.
Disengaging the autopilot using the pilot button
On multifunction displays which have a dedicated pilot button or when using a remote keypad you can disengage the autopilot using the Pilot button.
With the autopilot engaged: 1. Press the Pilot button.
The autopilot is disengaged (put into standby) and the Pilot Control dialog is displayed.
Disengaging the autopilot from the chart application
On all multifunction display variants the autopilot can be disengaged from the chart application's menu.
In the chart application with the autopilot engaged: 1. Select Menu > Navigate > Stop Goto or Stop
Follow. The Pilot Control dialog is displayed.
164
a Series / c Series / e Series
11.6 Manually displaying the pilot control dialog box
You can also open the Pilot Control dialog at any time from the homescreen or chart application. 1. From the homescreen:
i. Select Set-up. ii. Select Pilot Controls. 2. From the chart application: i. Select Menu. ii. Select Navigate. iii. Select Pilots Controls.
11.7 Pilot Control dialog
The Pilot Control dialog can be used to control autopilot functions.
Pilot Control dialog (standby) The example below shows the Pilot Control dialog options when the dialog is opened from a menu or using a dedicated physical Pilot button.
Autopilot control
Selecting Auto will engage the autopilot and maintain the current heading.
Pilot Control dialog (Auto) The example below shows the Pilot Control dialog options when Auto (locked heading) has been engaged.
8
1
2
7
3
4
5
6
D12882-1
Description
1 Pilot Status -- Current pilot mode.
2 Left Arrow -- Decrease locked heading angle.
3 Rudder bar -- Indicates the position of the rudder.
4 STANDBY -- Disengages the autopilot and returns to manual vessel control.
5 Current locked heading.
6 Track -- Engages the autopilot in Track mode and automatically steers your vessel to a target waypoint or along a route plotted on your chartplotter.
7 Right Arrow -- Increase locked heading angle.
8 Close -- Closes the Pilot Control dialog.
Pilot Control dialog (Starting navigation) The example below shows the Pilot Control dialog options when Goto Cursor, Goto Waypoint or Follow Route has been selected.
9 8 1 7 2
3
4
5
6
D12206-2
165
Description
11.8 Pilot Bar
1 Pilot Status -- Current pilot mode.
The Pilot Bar provides autopilot status information.
2 Current Heading.
For touchscreen displays you can disengage the autopilot using the Pilot Bar.
3
No (Standby) -- Disengages the autopilot and returns to manual vessel control.
Pilot Bar -- Track mode
4 Rudder bar -- Indicates the position of the rudder.
5 Turn angle -- The turn angle is only available for SeaTalkng autopilots. This indicates the direction and severity of turn.
6 Yes (Track) -- Engages the autopilot in Track mode and automatically steers your vessel to a target waypoint or along a route plotted on your MFD.
7 Distance to next waypoint (DTW) and Bearing to next waypoint (BTW).
8 Next Waypoint name.
9 Close -- Closes the Pilot Control dialog.
Pilot Bar -- Auto mode
The Pilot Bar is displayed when autopilot control is enabled, the Pilot Bar is switched on and the autopilot is engaged. When the autopilot is disengaged the Pilot Bar is hidden. On a system containing multiple displays the Pilot Bar can be disabled or enabled on each display.
Enabling the Pilot Bar
Pilot Control dialog (Track) The example below shows the Pilot Control dialog options when in track mode.
Displaying the Pilot Control dialog The Pilot Control dialog is displayed under the following conditions: 1. When the physical Pilot button is pressed. 2. When Pilot Controls selected from the shortcuts
page. 3. When you select Menu > Navigate > Goto
Waypoint , Goto Cursor or Follow Route option in the Chart application. 4. When you select Goto Waypoint or Goto Cursor using the Chart context menu. 5. When you place the cursor over an active route or waypoint in the Chart application and select Stop Goto, Stop Follow or Advance Waypoint from the context menu. 6. When you are following a route or going to a waypoint or cursor position, and select Menu > Navigate > Stop Goto, Stop Follow, or Advance Waypoint. 7. When you arrive at a target waypoint.
When connected to a SeaTalk or SeaTalkng SPX autopilot the Pilot Bar can be enabled by following the steps below.
From the Homescreen, with autopilots controls enabled: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Display Preferences. 3. Select Pilot Control Bar so that Shown is
highlighted. Selecting Pilot Control Bar will switch the Pilot Bar between Shown and Hidden. 4. Engage the autopilot.
The Pilot Bar is now displayed at the bottom of the screen in all applications whilst the autopilot is engaged.
Note: When connected to an Evolution autopilot the Pilot Bar is enabled from the Pilot Set-up page.
Note: When arriving at a waypoint, the dialog title bar turns red to indicate waypoint arrival.
166
a Series / c Series / e Series
11.9 Pilot Set-up
When connected to an Evolution autopilot the Pilot Set-up page is available.
12
3
4
5
6
7
8
11.10 Pilot settings
The Pilot settings option is available on a data master multifunction display when it is integrated with an Evolution autopilot. The Pilot settings enable the setup and commissioning of an Evolution autopilot using a multifunction display. The Pilot settings include the following options:
· Vessel Settings
· Drive Settings
· Sail Boat Settings
· Commissioning
9
10
D12883-1
1 Back -- Go back to the previous menu.
2 Pilot Status -- Current pilot mode.
3 Close -- Closes the pilot set-up page and displays the homescreen.
4 Pilot control -- Switches autopilot control via the multifunction display on and off.
5 Pilot bar -- Switches the Pilot bar on and off.
6 Pilot settings -- Displays available pilot settings that can be configured from the multifunction display.
Note: The Pilot settings menu is only available on the data master multifunction display.
7 Leisure -- Places the autopilot in Leisure mode. Leisure mode is suitable for long passages where tight heading control is not critical.
8 Performance -- Places the autopilot in Performance mode. Performance mode provides good course keeping without overworking the autopilot.
9 Cruise -- Places the autopilot in Cruise mode. Cruise mode provides tight heading control.
10 Rudder bar -- Indicates the position of the rudder.
Accessing the Pilot Set-up page.
When connected to an Evolution autopilot you can access the Pilot Set-up page by following the steps below.
From the Homescreen: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select External Devices. 4. Select Pilot Set-up.
Autopilot control
Initial setup and commissioning
Vessel settings
The vessel settings are designed to provide optimum steering performance for typical vessels.
It is important to complete the vessel hull type selection as part of the initial set-up, as it forms a key part of the autopilot calibration process. You can also access the options at any time by selecting Pilot Settings > Vessel settings from the Pilot Set-up page.
Vessel setting include the following options:
· Vessel Hull Type
· Drive Type
· Compass Offset
· Calibration Lock
Vessel hull type selection
The vessel hull type options are designed to provide optimum steering performance for typical vessels.
It is important to complete the vessel hull type selection as part of the initial set-up, as it forms a key part of the commissioning process. You can also access the options at any time with the pilot in Standby from the Pilot Set-up page by selecting: Pilot Settings > Vessel Settings > Vessel Hull Type.
As a general guide, select the option that most closely matches your vessel type and steering characteristics. The options are:
· Sail.
· Sail (slow turn).
· Sail Catamaran.
· Power
· Power (slow turn).
· Power (fast turn).
It is important to be aware that steering forces (and therefore rate-of-turn) vary significantly depending on the combination of vessel type, steering system, and drive type. Therefore, the available vessel hull type options are provided for guidance only. You may wish to experiment with the different vessel hull type options, as it might be possible to improve the steering performance of your vessel by selecting a different vessel type.
167
When choosing a suitable vessel type, the emphasis should be on safe and dependable steering response.
Important: If you change the vessel type after completing the Dockside wizard, all commissioning settings will be reset to default settings, and you will need to complete the Dockside wizard again.
2. Check the autopilot heading on your multifunction display.
3. From the Pilot Set-up page select Pilot Settings. 4. Select Vessel Settings. 5. Select Compass Offset. 6. Adjust the Compass Offset so that the autopilot
heading will match the steering compass heading.
Selecting a vessel hull type
The Vessel hull type can be accessed from the Pilot Set-up page. 1. Select Pilot Settings. 2. Select Vessel Settings. 3. Select Vessel Hull Type. 4. Select the option that most closely matches your
vessel type. The new selection is applied.
Selecting a drive type
Drive type selection is available from the dockside wizard, and also from the Vessel settings menu: Pilot Set-up > Pilot Settings > Vessel Type > Drive type.
With the Drive Type menu displayed: 1. Select your drive type from the list.
Note: The drive types available are dependant on the ACU type. If your drive type is not listed contact your Raymarine dealer for advice.
2. Select OK to save your setting and display the next set-up page.
Note: You can cancel the Dockside wizard at any time by selecting STANDBY.
Aligning heading
The autopilot heading can be aligned to the ship's compass using the Compass offset setting.
Note: To perform this procedure you will need a networked device such as an instrument, pilot control head or multifunction display to have the current autopilot heading shown onscreen.
Many factors can cause a difference between heading and course over ground (COG), you must align the heading so it matches the vessel's steering compass (or a known transit bearing).
150o
1
2
5
e.g. If the steering compass heading was 155° and autopilot heading was 150° applying a compass offset of 5° would mean that the steering compass and autopilot heading are aligned.
The compass offset will be changed automatically if required when the align compass to GPS procedure is carried out.
Drive settings
The drive settings are designed to provide optimum drive performance.
It is important to check and where necessary adjust the drive settings to suit your drive setup.
Drive settings include the following settings:
· *Rudder Damping.
· Auto Turn.
· Power Steer.
· Reverse rudder ref.
· Rudder Offset.
· Rudder Limit.
· Hard Over Time.
Note: *The rudder damping setting should not be adjusted without first seeking advice from Raymarine technical support.
Setting the auto turn angle
You can specify the angle at which the vessel will turn when performing an Auto Turn using a connected Pilot control Head.
From the Pilot Set-up page: 1. Select Pilot Settings. 2. Select Drive Settings. 3. Select Auto Turn. 4. Adjust the auto turn setting to the required value. 5. Select Back or Ok to confirm the setting.
Power Steer
If you have a joystick or a p70R pilot control head connected to your autopilot you can select its mode of operation. For detailed information refer to the documentation that accompanied your joystick or your p70R.
The modes of operation are as follows:
155o
D12928-1
1. Set your vessel on a known heading and check the steering compass.
· Off -- Joystick control is turned off.
· Proportional -- Proportional mode applies rudder in proportion to joystick movement -- the further the joystick is held over, the greater the applied rudder.
168
a Series / c Series / e Series
· Bang-Bang -- Bang-bang modes applies continuous rudder in the direction of the joystick movement, to improve control, the speed of rudder movement changes with the angle of the joystick. For maximum speed, push the joystick hard over. If you return the joystick to the center position, the rudder will remain in its current position.
Reversing the rudder reference phase
On vessels fitted with a rudder reference transducer, if the rudder bar moves in the wrong direction you can correct this by reversing the phase of the rudder reference.
Note: This procedure is not required on vessels without a rudder reference transducer.
From the Pilot Set-up page: 1. Select Pilot Settings. 2. Select Drive Settings. 3. Select Reverse Rudder Ref.
Selecting Reverse Rudder ref will switch between On and Off.
Setting the rudder offset
On vessels fitted with a rudder reference transducer, you can set an offset to the rudder's center position if required.
Note: This procedure is not required on vessels without a rudder reference transducer.
Note: To perform this procedure it is desirable to have a networked device such as an instrument, pilot control head or multifunction display that can display the current rudder position onscreen whilst making this adjustment.
1. Use the steering wheel to center the rudder. 2. From the Pilot Set-up page select Pilot Settings. 3. Select Drive Settings. 4. Select Rudder Offset. 5. Adjust the Rudder Offset value until the rudder
bar shows the rudder in the central position.
The rudder adjustment is limited to ± 9° if the adjustment required to center the rudder bar position is beyond these limits then the alignment of the rudder reference sensor will need to be physically adjusted.
Setting the rudder limits
On vessels fitted with a rudder reference transducer the rudder limits must be set. The rudder limit is used to set the rudder control. The rudder limits should be set to just inside the mechanical end stops to prevent unnecessary load on the steering system.
Note: This procedure is not required on vessels without a rudder reference transducer.
Note: To perform this procedure it is desirable to have a networked device such as an instrument, pilot control head or multifunction display that can display the current rudder position onscreen whilst making this adjustment.
The limits should be set to approximately 5° less than the maximum rudder angle. 1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to port and
note the angle on the rudder bar. 2. Turn the steering wheel all the way to starboard
and note the angle on the rudder bar. 3. From the Pilot Set-up page select Pilot Settings. 4. Select Drive Settings. 5. Select Rudder Limit. 6. Adjust the rudder limit to be 5° less than the
lowest angle noted in steps 1 and 2 above. 7. Select Back or OK to confirm the settings.
Setting the hard over time
Once the hard over time has been established it can be set following the steps below.
From the Pilot Set-up page: 1. Select Pilot Settings. 2. Select Drive Settings. 3. Select Hard Over Time. 4. Enter your hard over time in seconds.
Sail boat Settings
When the vessel type has been set to a sail boat the Sail Boat settings menu will be available.
Sail boar settings consist of the following options:
· Wind Trim Response -- Wind trim response controls how quickly the autopilot system responds to changes in the wind direction. A higher wind trim setting will result in a system that is more responsive to wind changes.
· Gybe Inhibit -- With gybe inhibit turned on, to prevent accidental gybes, the autopilot will prevent the vessel from performing a turn away from the wind. With gybe inhibit turned off, you can perform an AutoTack into or away from the wind. Gybe inhibit does not effect Auto Turn.
· Wind Trim -- This option determines whether the vessel steers to Apparent or True wind in when in Wind Vane mode.
Aligning compass to GPS
You can align the autopilot compass to your COG heading.
Aligning the compass must be performed whilst heading into the tide or in slack water.
From the Pilot Set-up page: 1. Select Pilot Settings. 2. Select Commissioning. 3. Select Align Compass to GPS. 4. Steer your vessel on a steady course and then
select Start. 5. Ensure sufficient vessel speed, if you are going
too slow a `Go Faster' message is displayed. 6. If the alignment is successful select OK to
complete the procedure.
Autopilot control
169
If required this procedure will automatically correct the compass offset value accessible from the Vessel Settings menu.
Note: If the alignment fails it means that the pilot sensor is more than a 10° deviation between your COG heading and the pilot sensor, in this situation the pilot sensor position must be checked.
11.11 Commissioning
You can commission an Evolution autopilot using the Pilot settings menu on your multifunction display. All set-up and commissioning procedures must be carried out before using the autopilot. Commissioning the autopilot system consists of the following procedures:
· Vessel Hull Type selection.
· Drive Type selection.
· Rudder check
· Motor check
Commissioning pre-requisites
Before commissioning your system for the first time, check that the following processes have been carried out correctly:
· Autopilot system installation completed in accordance with the Installation instructions.
· SeaTalkng network installed in accordance with the SeaTalkng Reference Manual.
· Where fitted, the GPS receiver has been installed and connected in accordance with the associated Installation instructions.
Check also that the commissioning engineer is familiar with the installation and components of the autopilot system including:
· Vessel type.
· Vessel steering system information.
· What the autopilot will be used for.
· System layout: components and connections (you should have a schematic of the vessel's autopilot system).
Vessel hull type selection
The vessel hull type options are designed to provide optimum steering performance for typical vessels.
It is important to complete the vessel hull type selection as part of the initial set-up, as it forms a key part of the commissioning process. You can also access the options at any time with the pilot in Standby from the Pilot Set-up page by selecting: Pilot Settings > Vessel Settings > Vessel Hull Type.
As a general guide, select the option that most closely matches your vessel type and steering characteristics. The options are:
· Sail.
· Sail (slow turn).
· Sail Catamaran.
· Power
· Power (slow turn).
· Power (fast turn).
It is important to be aware that steering forces (and therefore rate-of-turn) vary significantly depending on the combination of vessel type, steering system, and drive type. Therefore, the available vessel hull
170
a Series / c Series / e Series
type options are provided for guidance only. You may wish to experiment with the different vessel hull type options, as it might be possible to improve the steering performance of your vessel by selecting a different vessel type.
When choosing a suitable vessel type, the emphasis should be on safe and dependable steering response.
Important: If you change the vessel type after completing the Dockside wizard, all commissioning settings will be reset to default settings, and you will need to complete the Dockside wizard again.
Selecting a vessel hull type
The Vessel hull type can be accessed from the Pilot Set-up page. 1. Select Pilot Settings. 2. Select Vessel Settings. 3. Select Vessel Hull Type. 4. Select the option that most closely matches your
vessel type. The new selection is applied.
Performing the Dockside wizard
The dockside wizard must be completed before the Evolution autopilot system can be used for the first time. The Dockside wizard guides you through the steps required for commissioning.
The Dockside wizard contains different steps depending on whether you have a rudder reference transducer fitted to your vessel:
Selecting a drive type Drive type selection is available from the dockside wizard, and also from the Vessel settings menu: Pilot Set-up > Pilot Settings > Vessel Type > Drive type. With the Drive Type menu displayed: 1. Select your drive type from the list.
Note: The drive types available are dependant on the ACU type. If your drive type is not listed contact your Raymarine dealer for advice.
2. Select OK to save your setting and display the next set-up page.
Note: You can cancel the Dockside wizard at any time by selecting STANDBY.
Checking the rudder alignment This procedure establishes port and starboard rudder limits for systems using a rudder reference transducer. The rudder check forms part of the dockside wizard.
The following procedure only applies to vessels with a rudder reference transducer.
1. Center the rudder and select OK. 2. When prompted, turn the rudder hard to port and
select OK. 3. When prompted, turn the rudder hard to starboard
and select OK. 4. When prompted, turn the rudder back to centre
and select OK.
The following Dockside wizard procedures only apply to vessels without a rudder reference transducer:
The following Dockside wizard procedures only apply to vessels with a rudder reference transducer:
· Drive Type selection.
· Drive Type selection.
· Rudder Limit setting.
· Hard-over time setting (Raymarine recommends that this information is specified once the dockside wizard and Rudder Drive check is complete, using the Hard Over Time menu option).
· Align Rudder (rudder alignment).
· Rudder Limit setting.
· Rudder Drive check.
· Rudder Drive check.
To access the wizard, ensure the pilot is in standby mode and then from the Pilot Set-up page: 1. Select Pilot Settings. 2. Select Commissioning. 3. Select Dockside Wizard.
Note: You can cancel Dockside wizard at any time by selecting STANDBY.
Rudder limit setting
As part of the Dockside wizard, the system will set-up the rudder limits.
· For vessels with a rudder reference transducer -- This procedure establishes the rudder limit. The rudder limit will be displayed with a message confirming that the rudder limit has been updated. This value can be changed if required.
· For vessels without a rudder reference transducer -- A default of 30 degrees is displayed, and can be changed as required.
Hard over time
The hard over time setting can be specified as part of the Dockside wizard.
The following information only applies to vessels without a rudder reference transducer.
Autopilot control
171
· If you already know the hard-over time for your vessel's steering system: enter this time during the Dockside wizard procedure.
· If you do NOT know the hard-over time for your vessel's steering system: skip this step during the Dockside wizard by selecting SAVE, complete the Dockside wizard procedure. Once the wizard is complete, calculate and adjust the hard-over time.
Checking the rudder drive
As part of the Dockside wizard, the system will check the drive connection. Once it has completed the check successfully, a message will appear asking if it is safe for the system to take the helm.
During this procedure the autopilot will move the rudder. Ensure it is safe to proceed before selecting OK.
When in the Dockside wizard, with the Motor Check page displayed: 1. Center and let go of the rudder. 2. Disengage any rudder drive clutch. 3. Select CONTINUE. 4. Check it is safe to proceed before selecting OK.
For vessels with a rudder reference transducer, the autopilot will now automatically move the rudder to port and then starboard. 5. For vessels without a rudder reference transducer, you will be asked to confirm the rudder turned to port by selecting YES or NO. 6. Select OK if it is safe to engage the rudder in the opposite direction. 7. You will be asked to confirm the rudder turned to starboard by selecting YES or NO. 8. Dockside wizard is now complete, select CONTINUE.
Note: If you confirmed a "NO" response for the rudder movement to both port and starboard, the wizard will exit. It is possible that the steering system did not move the rudder in any direction, and it will be necessary to check the steering system before completing the Dockside wizard procedure again.
Note: If the rudder moves in the opposite direction than expected you may need to reverse the phase of the rudder reference unit. This can be achieved by accessing: Pilot Set-up > Pilot Settings > Drive Settings > Reverse Rudder Ref.
You can cancel Dockside wizard at any time by pressing STANDBY.
Warning: Rudder check
If no rudder reference has been fitted you MUST ensure that adequate provision is made to prevent the steering mechanism from impacting the end stops.
172
Adjusting the hard-over time
On vessels without a rudder reference transducer, it is important to set the hard-over time limits correctly, to ensure accurate autopilot operation. Hard-over time is the time it takes the vessel's steering system to drive the rudder from full port to full starboard.
Before attempting the following procedure, ensure that you've observed and understood the Rudder check warning provided in this document.
The following information only applies to vessels without a rudder reference transducer.
1. With the autopilot in `Standby' mode, manually turn the helm full to port.
2. Place the autopilot in `Auto' mode. 3. Using a stopwatch, start the timer, and then
immediately: 4. Turn 180 degrees from your current heading. 5. Once the rudder has reached the rudder limit that
was specified as part of the Dockside wizard, stop the timer. 6. To calculate your hard-over time, take the measured time and double it. 7. Now access the Hard Over Time menu to specify this hard-over time.
Setting the hard over time
Once the hard over time has been established it can be set following the steps below.
From the Pilot Set-up page: 1. Select Pilot Settings. 2. Select Drive Settings. 3. Select Hard Over Time. 4. Enter your hard over time in seconds.
Compass linearization
With Evolution autopilot systems, when the EV unit is first installed and powered-up, its internal compass needs to compensate for local magnetic variations and the earth's magnetic field. This is achieved using an automatic process known as linearization, which forms an important part of the autopilot installation, commissioning and set-up process.
Linearization
In Evolution systems, the linearization process is performed automatically by the EV unit as a background task when the vessel's speed is between 3 and 15 knots, no user intervention is required however at least a 270 degree turn is required. The process will occur during your first voyage with the autopilot system, and will typically take no more than 30 minutes, but this does vary according to the characteristics of the vessel, the installation environment of the EV unit, and the levels of magnetic interference at the time of conducting the process. Sources of significant magnetic interference may increase the time required to complete the linearization process. Examples of such sources include:
a Series / c Series / e Series
· Marine pontoons.
· Metal-hulled vessels.
· Undersea cables.
Note: You can speed-up the linearization process by completing a 360 degree turn (at a speed of 3 15 knots). You can also restart the linearization process at any time by selecting the Restart Compass menu item.
Use the compass deviation indicator
The use of the compass deviation indicator on the pilot control head may be useful in this process, particularly if the EV unit has been installed in a location on the vessel where the levels of magnetic interference are too high for the EV unit to compensate appropriately. If this is the case, the deviation display will indicate a value of 25 degrees or higher. In this scenario, Raymarine highly recommends that the EV unit is moved and re-installed in a location which is subject to less magnetic interference. If "- -" is displayed as the Deviation value, it means that linearization has not been successfully completed yet.
Compass lock
Once you are satisfied with the compass accuracy, you can lock the setting to prevent the autopilot system from completing a further automatic linearization in the future.
This feature is particularly useful for vessels in environments that are exposed to strong magnetic disturbances on a regular basis (such as offshore wind farms or very busy rivers, for example). In these situations it may be desirable to use the Compass lock feature to disable the continuous linearization process, as the magnetic interference may build a heading error over time.
Note: The compass lock may be released at any time, to allow the compass continuous linearization to restart. This is particularly useful if planning a long voyage. The earth's magnetic field will change significantly from one geographical location to another, and the compass can continuously compensate for the changes, ensuring you maintain accurate heading data throughout the voyage.
Check the compass heading data
As part of the autopilot system commissioning process, Raymarine recommends that you check the compass heading value displayed on your autopilot control head or multifunction display, against a good known heading source on various headings. This will help you to determine when the EV unit has completed its linearization process.
Note: Once the linearization process has completed, it is possible that the heading value may have a slight offset of 2 to 3 degrees. This is common where installation space is limited, and the EV unit cannot be properly aligned to the vessel's longitudinal axis. In this case, it is possible to manually adjust the compass offset value using the pilot control head or multifunction display, and fine-tune the heading to an accurate value.
Note: Do NOT rely on the heading accuracy until you are satisfied that compass linearization and alignment is complete.
System monitoring and adaptation
To ensure optimum performance, after the initial linearization process is complete the EV continues to monitor and adapt the compass linearization to suit current conditions.
If the conditions for linearization are less than ideal, the automatic linearization process temporarily pauses until conditions improve again. The following conditions can cause the linearization process to temporarily pause:
· Boat speed is less than 3 knots.
· Boat speed is greater than 15 knots.
· Rate-of-turn is too slow.
· Significant external magnetic interference is present.
Autopilot control
173
11.12 Autopilot status symbols
The autopilot status is indicated in the databar.
Symbol
Description
Autopilot is in Standby mode.
Autopilot is in Track mode.
Autopilot is in Auto mode.
No autopilot detected.
Autopilot alarm active.
Dodge mode is active.
Fish mode is active.
Autopilot calibration.
Power steering active.
Wind Vane mode is active.
11.13 Autopilot alarms
The autopilot function provides alarms to alert you to situations that require action.
Your multifunction display shows autopilot alarms, regardless of whether there is active navigation on the system. If autopilot control is enabled, and an alarm is raised by the autopilot, the multifunction display provides an audible alarm sound (providing that the alarm has not already been silenced). The Pilot Control dialog is displayed, indicating a new alarm. Additionally, the autopilot status icon is displayed in red, and remains red until the alarm is cleared.
Silencing autopilot alarms
1. Select Dismiss. The alarm is silenced and the autopilot remains engaged in auto mode, continuing on the current locked heading.
2. Select Auto. The alarm is silenced and the autopilot remains engaged in auto mode, continuing on the current locked heading.
3. Select Track. The alarm is silenced and the autopilot 'tracks' to the next waypoint.
Silencing autopilot alarms and disengaging autopilot
1. Select STANDBY.
The alarm is silenced, and the autopilot is disengaged and put in standby mode.
174
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 12: Alarm management
Chapter contents · 12.1 Alarms overview on page 176 · 12.2 Alarm Manager overview on page 176 · 12.3 Alarm options on page 179
Alarm management
175
12.1 Alarms overview
12.2 Alarm Manager overview
Alarms alert you to a situation or hazard requiring your attention, such as shallow depth or a change in water temperature.
Alarms are triggered by system functions, and external devices connected to the Multifunction display (MFD).
The Alarm Manager is used to configure the behavior of alarms and to manage alarm activity. The Alarm Manager can be used to:
· Enable and disable alarms
· Adjust alarm thresholds
Audible and visual warnings are displayed on all networked MFD screens when an alarm is triggered. The alarm message provides details of the reason for the alarm.
· View alarm history · View list of currently active alarms
Alarm messages are color coded to signify their severity as follows:
· Red Alerts -- immediate attention required due to potential or immediate danger to life or vessel. Red Alerts continue to sound until acknowledged or the conditions that triggered the alarm are no longer present. Red Alerts are accompanied by an urgent audible tone.
· Orange Warnings -- used to warn a user about a change in situation that they need to be aware of. Orange Warnings are accompanied by a normal audible tone.
· Blue Cautions -- used to inform a user of any other information. Blue Alerts are also used for user acknowledgments and disclaimers. Blue Alerts are not accompanied by an audible tone.
Acknowledging an active alarm
When an alarm event occurs it can be acknowledged by selecting Ok, this will dismiss the alarm message and stop the alarm tone.
During an active alarm event (i.e. an alarm message is displayed): 1. Select Ok.
The message is dismissed and the alarm tone is stopped.
Tip If an alarm message includes an Edit button then the alarm's settings can be accessed directly from the alarm message.
In the Settings tab alarms are displayed in the following categories:
· Safety Alarms
· General Alarms
· * Switch Panel Alarms
· ** Engine Alarms
Note:
· * The Switch Panel Alarms category is only displayed when you have a correctly configured Raymarine Digital Switching system installed on your vessel.
· ** Engine alarms will only be triggered when the relevant engine data is available on the network and transmitting appropriate NMEA messages.
Alarm Settings
Most alarms will remain active until the conditions that triggered the alarm are no longer present e.g. a Shallow Depth alarm will automatically dismiss when the depth becomes deeper. Whilst active the alarm will be triggered at a set time interval.
From the Settings tab you can enable and disable alarms and change alarm thresholds.
Alarms with Black text are currently enabled, alarms with Gray text are currently disabled. The currently highlighted alarm's text will also be Black.
Alarm History
176
a Series / c Series / e Series
The Alarm History tab provides details of alarms and the date and time that they were triggered and cleared / acknowledged. The Alarm history can display up to 1,000 alarm events and displays them sorted by time.
When the Alarm history has reached its capacity of 1,000 entries, the oldest events in the list will be automatically deleted when subsequent new alarm events occur.
Alarm events will only be removed from the list if:
· Clear alarm history is selected.
· a Systems and Data Reset is performed.
· it is automatically deleted due to the list reaching its capacity of 1,000 events.
Active Alarms
1. Select the Settings tab. 2. Select the alarm category for the alarm you want
to enable / disable.
Alarms are displayed in the Alarm Manager in the following categories:
· Safety Alarms
· General Alarms
· * Switch Panel Alarms
· Engine Alarms
Note: * The Switch Panel Alarms category is only displayed when you have a correctly configured Raymarine Digital Switching system installed on your vessel.
3. Select on the relevant alarm.
Alarms with Black text are currently enabled and alarms with Gray text are currently disabled. The alarm will be expanded to show the alarm settings.
If the Enable box is ticked then the alarm is currently enabled.
4. To disable the alarm, select the Enable tick box so that the tick is removed.
5. To enable the alarm, select the Enable tick box so that a tick is displayed.
The Active Alarm tab lists all currently active alarms. Alarms are removed from the list when: · the conditions that triggered the alarm are no
longer present. · the alarm has been disabled.
Accessing the Alarm Manager From the Homescreen: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select Alarms.
The Alarm Manager is displayed.
Changing alarm thresholds
Alarm thresholds are the attributes associated with each alarm which dictates when the alarm event is triggered.
With the Alarm Manager displayed: 1. Select the Settings tab. 2. Select the alarm category for the alarm you want
to change the thresholds of. 3. Select on the relevant alarm.
The alarm will be expanded to show the alarm settings. 4. Select the relevant threshold. The numeric adjustment control is displayed.
Enabling and disabling an alarm
You can enable and disable alarms using the Alarm Manager.
From the Alarm Manager Homescreen > Set-up > Alarms:
Alarm management
177
5. Select Yes. The alarm history is deleted.
The alarm history is also cleared if a Systems and Data Reset is performed.
5. With the numeric adjust control displayed, select the on-screen Up and Down arrows to adjust the alarm threshold value, or
6. To use the numeric keypad: i. Select on the actual value or the keypad icon. The numeric keypad is displayed.
ii. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the desired value for the alarm threshold.
iii. Select OK to save the new value for the alarm threshold.
iv. You can also change the unit of measure for the alarm threshold you are currently changing by selecting on the relevant unit of measure from the numeric keypad.
Clearing the alarm history You can view the history of alarm events from the Alarm Manager. From the Homescreen: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select Alarms.
The Alarm Manager is displayed. 3. Select History.
The alarm history is displayed.
4. Select Clear alarm history. A confirmation message is displayed.
178
a Series / c Series / e Series
12.3 Alarm options
Safety Alarms
Menu item
Description
Options
Waypoint arrival
If enabled, when you arrive at a waypoint, an alarm is triggered. This setting allows you to specify the radius of the waypoint arrival circle. The waypoint arrival circle is an imaginary circle around the destination waypoint. When your vessel crosses this circle the Waypoint Arrival alarm is triggered.
Note: The waypoint arrival alarm is always enabled if your system includes a Raymarine autopilot.
Enable:
· Enabled (Ticked) (default) · Disabled (Un-ticked) Waypoint arrival radius Default values:
· 19 m -- applies to km and nm & m units of measure.
· 61 ft -- applies to Nautical Miles and Statue Miles units of measure.
Radius / distance range:
· 19 to 18,520 m
· 61 to 60,761 ft
· 0.01 to 10 nm
· 0.012 to 11.508 sm
· 0.019 to 18.52 km
Off track
When enabled, during active navigation an alarm is triggered when your vessel steers off-track more than the value you specify for the Off Track XTE setting.
Enable: · Enabled (Ticked) · Disabled (Un-ticked) (default)
Off Track XTE Default values:
· 556 m -- applies to km units of measure.
· 0.300 nm -- applies to nm and nm & m units of measure.
· 0.345 sm -- applies to sm units of measure.
Radius / distance range:
· 19 to 18,520 m
· 61 to 60,761 ft
· 0.01 to 10 nm
· 0.012 to 11.508 sm
· 0.019 to 18.52 km
Safezone (MARPA & AIS targets)
Alarms are triggered when targets become dangerous. AIS and MARPA targets are deemed dangerous when they are within the specified:
· Distance / Radius -- Closest Point of Approach (CPA), or
Safezone radius · 0.1 nm / 0.1 sm / 0.2 km · 0.2 nm / 0.2 sm / 0.5 km · 0.5 nm / 0.5 sm / 1 km (default)
· Time -- Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA) · 1 nm / 1 sm / 2 km
to the Safezone MARPA target alarms cannot be disabled. See below for disabling and enabling AIS target alarms.
· 2 nm / 2 sm / 5 km Time to Safezone · 3 min (default)
· 6 min
· 12 min
· 24 min
Alarm management
179
Menu item Safezone (AIS targets alarm) Anchor alarm (drift)
Low fuel remaining
DSC AIS MOB
Description
Options
AIS target alarms can be enabled and disabled. With the AIS target alarm disabled AIS targets will not trigger the Safezone alarm. Triggering of MARPA target alarms cannot be disabled.
Safezone (AIS targets): · Enabled (Ticked) (default) · Disabled (Un-ticked)
When enabled, the Anchor Drift alarm is triggered when your vessel drifts from your anchor position by more than the distance specified in the Drift range setting.
Enable: · Enabled (Ticked) · Disabled (Un-ticked) (default)
Drift range Default values:
· 185 m / 608 ft
Distance range:
· 19 to 3,047 m
· 61 to 9,999 ft
· 0.01 to 1.646 nm
· 0.012 to 1.894 sm
· 0.019 to 3.048 km
If the Fuel Manager is not currently enabled then selecting the Low fuel remaining (LFR) alarm will result in a message being displayed asking if you want to enable the Fuel Manager. The LFR alarm can be enabled and the threshold can be set without the Fuel Manager being enabled, however the alarm will not be triggered until the Fuel Manager is enabled.
Note: You cannot set LFR to be more than the current TFC value.
Enable:
· Enabled (Ticked)
· Disabled (Un-ticked) (default)
Fuel level Default value:
· If Total Fuel Capacity (TFC) has been set in the Fuel Manager then the default shall be 20% of the TFC value.
Volume range:
· 0 to 99,999 ltr / 0 to TFC
· 0 to 99,999 Gal / 0 to TFC
With the DSC alarm enabled, DSC distress calls will be DSC Alerts:
displayed on the screen of all networked MFDs.
· Enabled (Ticked) (default)
· Disabled (Un-ticked)
With the AIS alarm enabled, AIS safety messages will AIS safety messages:
be displayed on the screen of all networked MFDs.
· Enabled (Ticked) (default)
· Disabled (Un-ticked)
Determines whether Position or Dead Reckoning (DR) data is displayed. Assuming that your vessel and the MOB are subject to the same tide and wind effects, the Dead Reckoning setting normally gives a more accurate course.
MOB data type · Dead Reckoning · Position (default)
General Alarms Menu item Alarm Clock
Description
When enabled, an alarm is triggered at the time you specify in the Alarm Clock Time setting.
Options Enable: · Enabled (Ticked) · Disabled (Un-ticked) (default) Alarm Clock Time
180
a Series / c Series / e Series
Menu item Countdown Timer Fishing -- shallow water arrival
Fishing -- deep water arrival
Water temperature
Description
Options
· 00.00 to 23:59 hrs (hh:mm)
When enabled, counts down the time period specified in the Timer Period setting, and triggers an alarm when zero is reached.
Enable: · Enabled (Ticked) · Disabled (Un-ticked) (default)
Time Period
· 00:00:01 to 99:59:59 (hh:mm:ss)
When enabled, an alarm is triggered when the depth Enable:
reaches the value specified in the Shallow Limit alarm setting. This option is only available when current
· Enabled (Ticked)
depth data is available.
· Disabled (Un-ticked) (default)
Note: The Shallow Limit cannot be set to a depth greater than the depth specified for the Deep Limit setting..
Shallow Limit Default values:
· 1.5 m / 5.0 ft / 0.89 fa (default)
Range:
· 0.6 m to Max depth limit of connected sonar module
· 2 ft to Max depth limit of connected sonar module
· 0.3 fa to Max depth limit of connected sonar module
When enabled, an alarm is triggered when the depth reaches the value specified in the Deep Limit alarm setting. This option is only available when current depth data is available.
Enable: · Enabled (Ticked) · Disabled (Un-ticked) (default)
Note: The Deep Limit cannot be set to a depth less than the depth specified for the Shallow Limit setting..
Deep Limit Default values:
· 1.5 m / 5.0 ft / 0.89 fa (default)
Range:
· Shallow Limit to 914 m
· Shallow Limit to 3,000 ft
· Shallow Limit to 500 fa
When enabled, an alarm is triggered when:
Enable:
· the water temperature is equal to or less than the temperature specified in the Lower Temp Limit setting, or
· the water temperature is equal to or greater than the temperature specified in the Upper Tempo Limit setting.
· Enabled (Ticked) · Disabled (Un-ticked) (default) Upper Temp Limit Defaults:
· 23.9°C / 75°F (default)
Range:
· Lower Temp Limit to 37.7°C
· Lower Temp Limit to 99.9°F
Lower Temp Limit Defaults:
· 15.6°C / 60°F (default)
Range:
· 23.3°C to Upper Temp Limit
Alarm management
181
Menu item Fish
Description
Options
If the Fish alarm is enabled, an alarm tone is triggered if a target is detected that meets the Fish alarm sensitivity. The following options are available under Fish Alarm.
· Enable -- Enables and disables Fish Alarms.
· 9.98°F to Upper Temp Limit Enable: · Enabled (Ticked) · Disabled (Un-ticked) (default) Fish alarm sensitivity
· Fish alarm sensitivity -- If the Fish alarm is set to On, an alarm is triggered when the fish return strength reaches the sensitivity that you specify.
· Fish alarm depth limits -- Enables and disables the shallow and deep fish alarm limits.
· Fish alarm shallow limit -- Specifies the lower value for the Fish alarm depth limits.
· Fish alarm deep limit -- Specifies the upper value for the Fish alarm depth limits.
· Default: 5 · Range: 1 to 10 Fish alarm depth limits: · Enabled (Ticked) · Disabled (Un-ticked) (default) Fish alarm shallow limit Default values: · 0.6 m / 2 ft / 0.3 fa (default) Range:
· 0.6 m to Fish alarm deep limit
· 2 ft to Fish alarm deep limit
· 0.3 fa to Fish alarm deep limit
Fish alarm deep limit Default values:
· 305 m / 1,000 ft / 167 fa Range:
· Fish alarm shallow limit to 914 m · Fish alarm shallow limit to 3,000 ft
· Fish alarm shallow limit to 500 fa
Switch Panel Alarms
Menu item
Description
Switch Panel Alarms The Switch Panel Alarms section is only displayed when connected to a correctly configured Raymarine Digital Switching system.
Options · Enabled (Ticked) (default) · Disabled (Un-ticked)
Engine Alarms Menu item Show alarms for engine errors Check engine
182
Description When enabled, warning alarms from connected, compatible engine management systems will be displayed on the MFD. The engine alarms listed below can be enabled or disabled using the Alarm Manager
· Over temperature · Low oil pressure · Low oil level · Low fuel pressure · Low system voltage · Low coolant level · Water flow · Water in fuel
Options · Enabled (Ticked) (default) · Disabled (Un-ticked) · Enabled (Ticked) (default) · Disabled (Un-ticked)
a Series / c Series / e Series
Menu item
Description
· Not charging · High boost pressure · Rev limit exceeded · EGR system · Throttle position sensor · Emergency stop · Warning level 1 · Warning level 2 · Power reduction · Maintenance needed · Communications error · Sub or secondary throttle · Neutral start protect · Engine shutting down · Unknown error 1 (manufacturer specific error
message) · Unknown error 2 (manufacturer specific error
message) · Unknown error 3 (manufacturer specific error
message) · Unknown error 4 (manufacturer specific error
message) · Unknown error 5 (manufacturer specific error
message) · Unknown error 6 (manufacturer specific error
message) · Unknown error 7 (manufacturer specific error
message) · Unknown error 8 (manufacturer specific error
message) · Check Transmission · Transmission over temperature · Transmission low oil pressure · Transmission low oil level
Options
Alarm management
183
184
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 13: Man Overboard (MOB)
Chapter contents · 13.1 Man overboard on page 186
Man Overboard (MOB)
185
13.1 Man overboard
If you lose a person or object overboard, you can use the Man Overboard (MOB) function to mark the position that the vessel was at when the MOB function was activated.
· MOB data is displayed in the databar, replacing the existing data.
· MOB data is displayed on the homescreen, replacing the status icons.
The MOB function is available at all times, regardless of which application is running. MOB can be set to Dead Reckoning or Position mode. Dead Reckoning mode will take into consideration the effects of wind and tides. This usually provides a more accurate course. Position mode does not take these factors into account.
To obtain a MOB position, your multifunction display must have a GPS position fix. If you're using dead reckoning, heading and speed data must also be available.
When MOB is activated:
· An audible MOB alarm is sounded every 30 seconds until the MOB is cancelled.
· An MOB alarm dialog is displayed until it is acknowledged.
When the MOB alarm is cancelled:
· MOB data is removed from the relevant applications.
· The chart application motion mode is reset.
· The chart is centered on the vessel and pitch / rotation set to default.
· GOTO and route functions are restored.
· The databar mode is reset.
· A MOB normal mode signal is sent to any instrument on SeaTalk.
Waypoint (MOB) button / icon
· The system sends MOB alarms to other Raymarine equipment.
· The active Chart application is changed to a low-detail 2D view, with an initial range of 15 m (50 ft). Motion mode is set to Auto Range. As the vessel moves away from the MOB position a dotted line is displayed, joining the MOB position with the vessel's position.
Depending on the multifunction display variant there will be either a Waypoint (MOB) button or an on-screen icon.
WPT button
· c Series · e Series
· RMK-9 keypad
WPT
· a Series
icons
· gS Series
Throughout this manual the term: Select WPT, refers to pressing the physical WPT button or pressing the on-screen WPT icon.
Activating the man overboard (MOB) alarm
· The active radar application range is changed to 230 m (760 ft).
· All Goto and Follow functions are disabled in all applications. Navigation to any active waypoint is stopped and any existing navigation function is cancelled.
· If position or heading and speed information is available a MOB waypoint is placed at the current vessel position in any application that is capable of showing waypoints and vessel position.
On multifunction displays with physical buttons or when using a remote keypad you can use the WPT (MOB) button to activate the MOB alarm 1. Press and hold the WPT / MOB button for 3
seconds.
Activating the man overboard (MOB) alarm -- Touch only displays
On a Touch only display you can use the onscreen WPT (MOB) icon to activate the MOB alarm 1. Press and hold the onscreen WPT / MOB icon
for 3 seconds.
186
a Series / c Series / e Series
Cancelling the man overboard (MOB) alarm -- Touch only display
On a Touch only display you can cancel the MOB alarm and resume normal operation follow the steps below: 1. Press and hold the onscreen WPT / MOB icon
for 4 seconds. The MOB alarm is cancelled and normal operation is resumed.
Cancelling the man overboard (MOB) alarm
On a multifunction display with physical buttons or when using a remote keypad you can cancel the MOB alarm and resume normal operation follow the steps below: 1. Press and hold the WPT / MOB button for 4
seconds. The MOB alarm is cancelled and normal operation is resumed.
Man Overboard (MOB)
187
188
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 14: DSC VHF radio integration
Chapter contents · 14.1 DSC VHF radio integration on page 190 · 14.2 Enabling DSC VHF radio integration on page 190
DSC VHF radio integration
189
14.1 DSC VHF radio integration
You can connect your DSC VHF radio to your multifunction display and show distress message information and GPS position data for other vessels.
Connecting a DSC VHF radio to your multifunction display provides the following additional functionality:
· Distress Messages -- when your DSC VHF radio receives a DSC message or alarm from another DSC VHF radio, the vessel identification (MMSI), GPS position, and time of distress message is displayed on your multifunction display. With the distress message displayed you can use the buttons provided to: clear the message, place a waypoint on the chart at the GPS position of the distressed vessel, or immediately start navigating (Goto Vessel) to the GPS position of the distressed vessel.
14.2 Enabling DSC VHF radio integration
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select the DSC Alerts option so that On is
displayed.
· Position Data -- the "Position Request" button on your DSC VHF radio enables you to send and receive GPS position data to and from other vessels equipped with a DSC VHF radio.
For information on installing and operating your DSC VHF radio, refer to the handbook that accompanies the radio.
The following image shows an example of a distress message displayed on a multifunction display:
190
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 15: Fuel manager
Chapter contents · 15.1 Fuel manager overview on page 192
Fuel manager
191
15.1 Fuel manager overview
· Fill the fuel tanks to full.
The fuel manager provides an estimate of fuel remaining, and the distance and time which can be travelled before the tanks are empty. In order to calculate these values, you must configure the total capacity of fuel available to the engines and log each time you add fuel. The fuel manager also allows you to set a low fuel warning alarm which is sounded when the vessel's estimated fuel falls below a specified value.
The fuel manager page provides current calculation estimates and controls to enable use of the fuel manager feature.
· Select `All tanks full'.
· Log each subsequent fuel fill whether partial or full.
Note:
Fuel manager estimates the amount of fuel onboard, based on the user logging each time you fill up, the total fuel capacity, and how much fuel is burned by the engine(s). Any incorrect entry could dramatically affect the estimated fuel usage and capacity which could result in a shortage of fuel. This system is not a substitute for other types of fuel calculations.
1
5 Total fuel onboard is an estimate and will be
inaccurate if fuel fills are not entered, or fuel is
6 used by other sources (e.g. generators etc.).
2
7 Estimated distance and time to empty will be
based on the fuel remaining calculation and values
8
do not include weather/tide effects.
3 4
Item Option
1
Back
2
Estimated fuel
remaining (%)
3
All tanks full
4
Turn On/Off
9
10
D12569-1
Description
Back to System Set-up menu -- New e Series only (For New c Series use the Back button).
Graphical representation of percentage of fuel remaining in the fuel tank(s).
Resets fuel remaining to full tank capacity.
Turn fuel manager On or Off.
You should not rely on the fuel manager calculations for accurate voyage planning or in emergency and safety critical situations.
Enabling the fuel manager
To turn the fuel manager on and off follow the steps below.
From the homescreen. 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select Fuel Manager. 3. Select Turn On.
The fuel manager disclaimer is displayed. 4. Select ACCEPT to accept the disclaimer and
start using the fuel manager. The Initialize fuel manager pop-up is displayed. 5. Select OK.
5
Close
Back to Homescreen -- New e Series only (For New c Series use the Home button).
The fuel manager will start the next time the All tanks full icon is pressed.
Disabling the fuel manager
6
Estimated fuel
Volume of fuel remaining in
remaining (vol)
the fuel tank(s).
7
Reset (Fuel used Reset the fuel used this
this season.)
season to zero.
8
Reset (Fuel used Reset the fuel used this trip
this trip.)
to zero.
9
Add partial fill
Specify fill amount by
volume
10
Set-up
Specify settings for fuel manager.
In order to use the fuel manager you must:
· Connect a compatible engine interface to each engine you wish to monitor (to provide fuel flow rate data to the network).
· Enter the total fuel capacity of the vessel's fuel tanks.
· Turn on the fuel manager feature.
From the fuel manager page: 1. Select Turn Off.
The deactivate fuel manager pop-up message is displayed. 2. Select Yes to turn off the fuel manager.
Setting up fuel manager
To set up the required settings for the fuel manager follow the steps below.
With the Fuel Manager page displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select Total Fuel Capacity.
The numeric keypad is displayed. 3. Enter your vessel's total fuel capacity. 4. Select Ok. 5. Select Economy Units.
A list of available options is displayed:
192
a Series / c Series / e Series
· Distance per Volume
· Volume per Distance
· Litres per 100km
6. Select the required economy units. 7. Select Fuel Calculations to select the desired
method of calculation. The following options are available:
· Fuel Used (PGN127497)
· Fuel Flow Rate
Note: If the Fuel Used (PGN127497) is not available on your network you will need to use the Fuel Flow Rate option. When Fuel Flow Rate is selected then your multifunction display must remain powered on whilst the engines are running to enable the fuel calculation to be made.
8. Select Back to go back to the Fuel Manager page.
Resetting fuel used readings You can reset the value of the fuel used this season or fuel used this trip by following the steps below. From the fuel manager page: 1. Select Reset against fuel used this season, or 2. Select Reset against fuel used this trip. The value is set to zero after Reset has been selected.
Note: Performing a Season reset automatically resets the trip value.
Fuel range rings The fuel range ring gives an estimated range that can be reached with the estimated fuel remaining on-board.
Fuel logging
You must ensure all fuel fills are recorded using the fuel manager.
From the fuel manager page:
1. When filling the tanks until full select All tanks full.
The estimated fuel remaining is reset to the value of your fuel tanks capacity.
2. When only partially filling the tank make a note of the volume of fuel added to the tank and then select Add partial fill.
3. Enter the value noted earlier this will be added to your current fuel remaining figure.
Note: It is recommended that you perform an `All tanks full' fill up as regularly as possible as partial fills will cause a higher cumulative inaccuracy in the provided calculations.
The fuel range ring can be displayed graphically in the chart application and indicates an estimated range that can be reached with the:
· Current rate of fuel consumption.
· Estimated fuel remaining on-board.
Setting the low fuel alarm
Using the fuel manager also allows you to set a low fuel alarm which, if activated, is sounded when your vessel's remaining fuel falls to a specified value.
With the fuel manager turned on and set up correctly: 1. From the homescreen select Set-Up. 2. Select Alarms. 3. Select Fuel manager.
The low fuel alarm settings are displayed. 4. Select Low Fuel so that On is highlighted.
Selecting Low Fuel will turn the low fuel alarm On or Off. 5. Select Fuel Level. The fuel level numeric adjust control is displayed. 6. Adjust the fuel level to the required value.
· Course remaining in a straight line.
· Current speed maintained.
Note:
The fuel range ring is an estimated range that can be reached at the current rate of fuel consumption, of the fuel onboard and based on a number of external factors which could either extend or shorten the projected range.
This estimate is based on data received from external fuel management devices, or via the Fuel Manager. It does not take into account prevailing conditions such as tide, current, sea state, wind etc.
You should not rely on the fuel range ring feature for accurate voyage planning or in emergency and safety critical situations.
The low fuel alarm will now be sounded when the fuel remaining in the tank falls to the value specified.
Note: By default the low fuel alarm is switched off.
Enabling the fuel range ring From the chart application, in 2D view: 1. Select Menu.
Fuel manager
193
2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Overlays. 4. Select Fuel Range Ring so that On is selected.
The fuel range ring pop-up message is displayed. 5. Select OK to turn on the fuel range rings.
194
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 16: AIS function
Chapter contents · 16.1 AIS overview on page 196 · 16.2 AIS prerequisites on page 197 · 16.3 AIS context menu on page 197 · 16.4 Enabling AIS on page 198 · 16.5 Displaying AIS vectors on page 198 · 16.6 AIS status symbols on page 199 · 16.7 AIS silent mode on page 199 · 16.8 AIS target symbols on page 200 · 16.9 Displaying detailed AIS target information on page 201 · 16.10 Viewing all AIS targets on page 201 · 16.11 Using AIS to avoid collisions on page 202 · 16.12 Target options on page 203 · 16.13 AIS alarms on page 204 · 16.14 Buddy tracking on page 204
AIS function
195
16.1 AIS overview
The AIS feature enables you to receive information broadcast by other vessels, and to add these vessels as targets in the chart and radar applications.
With an optional AIS unit connected to your system you can:
· Display targets for any other AIS-equipped vessels.
· Display voyage information being broadcast by these targets, such as their position, course, speed and rate-of-turn.
· Display basic or detailed information for each target vessel, including safety-critical target data.
· Set up a safe zone around your vessel.
· View AIS alarm and safety-related messages.
How AIS Works
AIS uses digital radio signals to broadcast `real-time' information between vessels and shore-based stations via dedicated VHF radio frequencies. This information is used to identify and track vessels in the surrounding area and to provide fast, automatic and accurate collision avoidance data. The AIS features complement the radar application, as AIS can operate in radar blind spots and can detect smaller vessels equipped with AIS.
Note: It may not be mandatory for vessels to be fitted with operational AIS equipment. Therefore, you should not assume that your multifunction display will show ALL vessels in your area. Due prudence and judgement should be exercised. AIS should be used to complement radar, NOT substitute it.
· Add AIS-equipped friends and regular contacts to a "Buddy List"
AIS information is displayed in the form of an overlay in the chart and radar applications. Additional data is displayed in a dialog box, for example:
1
2 34 56
7
AIS Simulator Mode
Raymarine recommends that you use the simulator function to familiarize yourself with the AIS features. When the simulator function is enabled (homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > Simulator), it displays 20 AIS targets within a 25 nm range. These targets are displayed using the appropriate AIS target's status symbol, and move around the screen as if they were real targets.
Note: Incoming safety messages are NOT displayed while the simulator is enabled.
097°T 11.6kt 1.237n m 00h04m33s
D12220-1
Item
Description
1
Dangerous target (flashes).
2
Safe zone (defined by
distance and / or time).
3
AIS target vessel.
4
Heading.
5
Direction of turn.
6
COG/SOG vector.
7
Safety critical data.
AIS-equipped vessels in the surrounding area are displayed in the chart or radar application as triangular targets. Up to 100 targets are displayed. As the vessel's status changes, the symbol for the target changes accordingly.
Vectors can be displayed for each target. These vectors indicate the vessels direction of travel and the distance it will travel over a specified period of time (COG / SOG vector). Targets displayed with their vectors are referred to as `active targets' and are scaled according to the size of the vessel. The larger the vessel, the larger the target. You can either display all targets or just dangerous targets.
196
a Series / c Series / e Series
16.2 AIS prerequisites
16.3 AIS context menu
You must have suitable AIS hardware connected to your multifunction display to make use of the AIS functionality.
In order to run AIS, you will need:
The AIS function includes a context menu which provides AIS target information and menu items.
· A receive-only AIS unit or a full AIS transceiver (a unit that sends and receives).
· A VHF antenna.
· A GPS - to provide position data.
· The AIS layer enabled in the chart or radar application, as appropriate.
Note: A receiver will allow you to receive data about other vessels in your area but will not allow other vessels to `see' you. A full transceiver transmits and receives AIS data, and therefore allows you to receive data about other vessels. It also enables other AIS-equipped vessels to see and receive information about your vessel. This could include position, course, speed and rate of turn data.
When the AIS unit is connected to your multifunction display, the status of the unit is indicated by an AIS icon in the status bar.
You can connect an AIS unit to your multifunction display using NMEA0183 or SeaTalkng, depending on the AIS unit. If connecting using NMEA0183, you will now need to specify the 38,400 baud setting (homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > NMEA Set-up) for the NMEA input port that communicates with the AIS transceiver or receiver.
The context menu provides the following AIS target data:
· MMSI
· CPA
· TCPA
· COG
· SOG
The context menu also provide the following menu items:
· AIS Vector -- Switch target vectors On and Off.
· AIS Data -- Switch on screen target data On and Off.
· View Full Data
· Add Buddy -- Add target to the buddy directory.
· Acquire Target (only available if Radar overlay is switched on.)
· Slew thermal camera (only available when thermal camera is connected and operating.)
Accessing the context menu
You can access the context menu by following the steps below. 1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays:
i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
AIS function
197
16.4 Enabling AIS
16.5 Displaying AIS vectors
Enabling AIS in the Chart application
To enable the AIS overlay in the Chart application follow the steps below.
To enable the AIS overlay your system must include an AIS receiver or transceiver. The AIS overlay is not available in 3D view.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlays. 3. Select AIS: so that On is selected.
Selecting AIS: switches the AIS between On and Off.
For AIS information refer to Chapter 16 AIS function.
Enabling AIS in the radar application
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Targets. 3. Select Display AIS Targets. 4. Select the relevant option from the list.
From the Display AIS Targets menu you can switch on All AIS targets, only Dangerous AIS targets or switch AIS targets Off.
You must have the correct data available before AIS vectors can be displayed.
A target is defined as active when it has the following data displayed graphically:
· A COG/SOG vector indicating the predicted distance that a target will travel within a given period of time.
· A heading and direction of turn indicator.
Enabling and disabling AIS vectors
From the chart or radar application: 1. Select an AIS target.
The AIS target context menu is displayed. 2. Select AIS Vector.
Selecting AIS Vector will switch between On and Off.
Note: The same target vector and safe zone settings apply to both radar MARPA and AIS targets.
198
a Series / c Series / e Series
16.6 AIS status symbols
16.7 AIS silent mode
AIS status is indicated by a symbol in the databar.
Symbol
Description
AIS unit is switched on and operating.
AIS currently unavailable.
AIS unit is switched off, or not connected.
AIS silent mode enables you to disable AIS transmissions
AIS silent mode enables you to disable the transmitting functions of your AIS equipment. This is useful when you do not want to transmit your vessel's AIS data to other AIS receivers, but still wish to receive data from other vessels.
Note: Not all AIS equipment supports silent mode. For more information, refer to the documentation that accompanies your AIS unit.
AIS unit is in Silent Mode.
AIS unit is in Silent Mode, with active alarms.
AIS unit is connected and switched on, but has active alarms.
AIS unit is connected and switched on, but the dangerous and lost alarm is disabled.
Enabling and disabling AIS silent mode in the Chart application
From the Chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select AIS Options or *Radar & AIS Options. 3. **Select Targets. 4. Select AIS Set-up. 5. Select Silent Mode.
Selecting Silent Mode will switch AIS silent mode On and Off.
Note:
*When Radar overlay is also enabled the menu name becomes Radar & AIS Options.
** Step 3 is only required when Radar overlay is enabled.
Enabling and disabling AIS Silent Mode in the radar application
From the Radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Targets. 3. Select AIS Set-up. 4. Select Silent Mode.
Selecting AIS Silent Mode will switch silent mode On and Off.
AIS function
199
16.8 AIS target symbols
Your multifunction display shows a range of symbols to represent the different types of AIS target.
Target type
Description
Symbol
Transmitting target Target is moving or at anchor (Target is not activated, dangerous or lost).
Activated target
Target activated -- that is, AIS vector displayed. Vector line (optional) shows predicted distance travelled within a given time.
Selected target
Target selected with cursor. Can view detailed data.
Target type
Description
Search and rescue SARTS target transponders (SARTS) target
Search and rescue SARS target aircraft (SARS) target
Military and law enforcement target
Only displayed when connected to approved STEDS-EAIS AIS hardware.
Symbol
Dangerous target
Uncertain target
Lost target
Buddy target
Aid To Navigation (AToN) target (Real) Aid To Navigation (AToN) target (Real) Aid To Navigation (AToN) target (Virtual) Aid To Navigation (AToN) target (Virtual) Land base station target
Targets within specified distance (CPA) or time (TCPA). Dangerous target alarm sounds if enabled. Target red and flashing.
Calculated CPA / TCPA value uncertain.
When the signal of a dangerous target not received for 20 seconds. Target in latest predicted position. Alarms sounds if enabled. Target flashes.
Target has previously been added to the Buddy List.
AToN target is ON position.
AToN target is OFF position.
AToN target is ON position.
AToN target is OFF position.
Land base station target is ONLINE.
200
a Series / c Series / e Series
16.9 Displaying detailed AIS target information
From the chart or radar application: 1. Select an AIS target.
The AIS target context menu is displayed. 2. Select View AIS Data.
AIS Data The table below shows the AIS target information which if available will be displayed on the multifunction display: · Type · Status · Destination · Last Seen · ETA · MMSI · Call Sign · IMO No. · Length · Beam · Draught · Heading · ROT · Position · COG · SOG · CPA · TCPA
Note: Available data is dependant upon what information is being transmitted from the target vessel and the type of AIS unit connected to your system.
16.10 Viewing all AIS targets
· From the Chart application with only the AIS overlay enabled go to: Menu > AIS Options > Targets > View AIS List
· From the Chart application when the Radar overlay is also enabled go to: Menu > Radar & AIS Options > Targets > View Targets Lists > View AIS List.
· From the Radar application go to Menu > Targets > View Target Lists > View AIS List.
1. Highlight an AIS target from the list. When an AIS target is highlighted the following details are displayed in the list: · MMSI · Range · Bearing · Buddy · Type This list can be filtered to show only buddies or all targets. If available the following data is also shown for the highlighted target: · SOG · COG · ROT · Position · Heading
2. To view full AIS target information Select a target from the list and then select View Full Target Data. The AIS target info dialog is displayed showing all available data for the selected target.
AIS function
201
16.11 Using AIS to avoid collisions
You can use the AIS safe zone and safety message functions to help you avoid collisions with other vessels and objects.
Safe Zones
A safe zone is a ring centred on your vessel within which a target is considered dangerous. It is displayed in the radar or chart applications as a red ring.
This AIS safe zone uses the same criteria as MARPA and will deem a target dangerous if it comes within a specified distance of your vessel (closest point of approach or CPA) within a specified time (time to closest point of approach or TCPA). The CPA and TCPA are calculated using COG/SOG and position from the AIS target.
When your system recognizes a dangerous AIS target:
· The target symbol changes to red and flashes.
· The dangerous alarm dialog is displayed (this can be disabled if required).
· The dangerous alarm sounds (this can be disabled if required).
Note: When the AIS unit is connected and functioning, the system will check for dangerous targets within the safe zone and if enabled issue an alarm whenever necessary. Dangerous target alarm operates irrespective of the status of the AIS target display, or the safe zone ring.
Safety Messages
When the status of the AIS Safety Messages function is set to On, any incoming safety messages from surrounding vessels, shore stations and mobile stations are displayed in a dialog box. If known, the message will include the sending vessel's position in latitude / longitude. You will have the option to:
· Remove the message (Ok).
· Place a waypoint on your chart / radar to mark the sending vessel's position (Place Waypoint).
· Goto the sending vessel's position (Goto Waypoint).
Note: You will NOT receive any safety messages in Simulator mode (homescreen > Set-up > System Settings > Simulator).
Showing the Safe Zone Ring in the Chart application
To show the Safe Zone ring follow the instructions below:
From the Chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Overlays. 4. Select Safe Zone Ring so that Show is selected.
Selecting Safe Zone Ring will switch the zone ring between hidden to visible.
202
Showing the Safe Zone Ring in the Radar application To show the Safe Zone ring follow the instructions below: From the Radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Safe Zone Ring so that Show is selected.
Selecting Safe Zone Ring will switch the zone ring between hidden to visible.
Enabling and disabling AIS safety messages in the Chart application From in the Chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select AIS Options or *Radar & AIS Options. 3. **Select Targets. 4. Select AIS Set-up. 5. Select Safety Messages.
Selecting Safety Messages will switch between safety messages On and Off. Note: *When Radar overlay is also enabled the menu name becomes Radar & AIS Options. ** Step 3 is only required when Radar overlay is enabled.
Enabling and disabling AIS safety messages in the radar application From in the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Targets. 3. Select AIS Set-up. 4. Select Safety Messages.
Selecting Safety Messages will switch between safety messages On and Off.
Displaying safety-critical AIS information From the chart or radar application: 1. Select the AIS target.
The AIS target context menu is displayed. 2. Select AIS Data so that On is highlighted.
Selecting AIS Data will switch between AIS data On and Off. The Safety critical AIS data will now be displayed next to the target in the application.
a Series / c Series / e Series
16.12 Target options
The Target options menu for the Chart application and Radar application are shown below.
Parameter
Description
Options
Vector Length
The length of the vector lines displayed depends on the distance that an AIS target travels in the time period that you specify for this setting.
· 0.5 min · 1 min · 3 min
· 6 min
· 12 min
· 30 min
· 60 min
Target History
Targets' previous position will be plotted as a target icon with lighter shading than the actual target for the time specified.
· Off (default) · 0.5 min · 1 min
· 3 min
· 6 min
AIS function
203
16.13 AIS alarms
16.14 Buddy tracking
The AIS functions generate a number of alarms to alert you to dangerous or lost targets.
In addition to the dangerous target alarm, the system generates an alarm when a dangerous target becomes a lost target i.e. its signal has not been received for 20 seconds.
Your AIS receiver generates local alarms which are displayed and sounded on your multifunction display whenever an alarm condition exists on the unit.
Local AIS alarms
When the connected AIS unit generates an alarm, your multifunction display shows a local alarm message and indicates the alarm status in the status bar.
The Buddy Tracking feature enables you to add AIS-equipped friends and regular contacts to a "Buddy List" on your multifunction display. As soon as a vessel on your Buddy List sails into the range of your AIS unit, the vessel icon changes to indicate this.
1 2 3
4
Active AIS alarms log
D12221-1
The active alarm log shows the status of each local Item
alarm. This log can be accessed as follows:
1
· from the Chart application when only the AIS overlay is enabled by going to: Menu > AIS
2
Options > AIS Set-up > AIS Alarms Log
3
Description Buddy icon Dangerous target icon Own vessel icon
· from the Chart application when the Radar overlay is also enabled by going to: Menu > Radar & AIS Options > Targets > AIS Set-up > AIS Alarms Log
· from the Radar application by going to Menu > Targets > AIS Set-up > AIS Alarms Log.
Acknowledging AIS alarms
In the chart or radar application: 1. Select Ok on the alarm dialog box.
Note: An AIS alarm remains active until it is acknowledged on your multifunction display.
4
Normal AIS icon
How it works
When the AIS Layer is enabled in the chart or radar application, AIS targets are shown on your display. You can add any AIS target to a "Buddy List", each entry consisting of an MMSI number, and an optional name. Subsequently, whenever Buddy Tracking is enabled on your multifunction display, and a "Buddy" vessel with an MMSI number sails into the range of your AIS receiver, an AIS Buddy icon is displayed. Up to 100 vessels may be added to the Buddy List.
Pre-requisites
The following items are required for the Buddy Tracking feature:
· For the purposes of using the Buddy Tracking feature, it is assumed that your display is already connected to a suitable AIS unit.
· Only transmitting AIS-equipped vessels will be detected.
Enabling and disabling buddy tracking in the Chart application
From the Chart application, with the AIS overlay enabled: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select AIS Options or *Radar & AIS Options. 3. Select Targets. 4. Select Display buddies.
Selecting Display buddies will switch the buddy tracking feature On and Off.
Note:
*When Radar overlay is also enabled the menu name becomes Radar & AIS Options.
204
a Series / c Series / e Series
Enabling and disabling buddy tracking in the radar application From the radar application, with AIS enabled: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Targets. 3. Select Display buddies.
Selecting Display buddies will switch the buddy tracking feature On and Off.
Adding a vessel to your buddy list In the chart or radar application: 1. Select the AIS target.
The AIS target context menu is displayed. 2. Select Add Buddy.
i. Select Yes to enter a name for the buddy vessel
ii. Select No to save the vessel to your buddy list without entering a name for the buddy vessel.
The vessel will now be added to your buddy directory.
Adding an AIS buddy from the AIS target list The AIS target list can be accessed from:
· the Chart application with only the AIS overlay enabled: Menu > AIS Options > Targets > View AIS List.
· the Chart application with the Radar and AIS overlays enabled: Menu > Radar & AIS Options > Targets > View Target Lists > View AIS List.
· the Radar application: Menu > Targets > View Target Lists > View AIS List
From the AIS list: 1. Select an AIS target. 2. Select Add Buddy.
i. Select Yes to enter a name for the buddy vessel
ii. Select No to save the vessel to your buddy list without entering a name for the buddy vessel.
The vessel will now be added to your buddy directory.
1. Select the AIS buddy target. The AIS buddy context menu is displayed.
2. Select Remove Buddy. 3. Select Yes to confirm.
The buddy has now been removed from the list.
The buddy list can also be accessed from:
· the Chart application with only the AIS overlay enabled: Menu > AIS Options > AIS Options > > Targets > View Buddy List.
· the Chart application with the Radar and AIS overlays enabled: Menu > Radar & AIS Options > Targets > View Target Lists > View Buddy List.
· the Radar application: Menu > Targets > View Target Lists > View Buddy List.
Displaying additional buddy information
From the chart or radar application: 1. Select the AIS buddy target.
The AIS buddy context menu is displayed. 2. Select Buddy Data so that On is highlighted.
Selecting Buddy Data will switch data between On and Off.
The Buddy MMSI and Name will now be displayed next to the buddy icon.
Editing a buddy's details
From the chart or radar application: 1. Select the AIS buddy target.
The AIS buddy context menu is displayed. 2. Select View Buddy List. 3. Select the buddy you wish to edit.
The Buddy options dialog is displayed. 4. To change the MMSI number select Edit Buddy
MMSI or. The MMSI number must be 9 digits. 5. Select Edit Buddy Name to change the buddy name. This could be the name of the vessel, or the name of the friend who owns the vessel, for example 6. Enter the new details and select SAVE. You will be returned to the buddy list.
Deleting a buddy
From the chart or radar application:
AIS function
205
206
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 17: Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
Chapter contents · 17.1 Waypoints overview on page 208 · 17.2 Routes on page 217 · 17.3 Tracks on page 225 · 17.4 Import and Export on page 227 · 17.5 Waypoints, routes and tracks storage capacity on page 227
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
207
17.1 Waypoints overview
Waypoints are position markers used for the purposes of navigation. Your multifunction display can create waypoints, which can then be selected for active navigation.
There are a range of features for placing, navigating and managing waypoints, these can be accessed from the Waypoints menu and Waypoint context menu. Waypoints are represented on-screen using customizable waypoint symbols. Waypoint can be created, moved, deleted, exported to memory card or imported from a memory card.
2. Active waypoint 3. Alternate waypoint symbols The default waypoint symbol is a red `X'. Alternative symbols can be used if required.
Waypoints in the fishfinder application Waypoints in the fishfinder application are represented by a vertical line labelled WPT.
Waypoint display examples
Waypoints in the chart application In the chart application both active and inactive waypoints are shown. An active waypoint is the one that you are navigating to.
1
2
Waypoint (MOB) button / icon
Depending on the multifunction display variant there will be either a Waypoint (MOB) button or an on-screen icon.
WPT button
· c Series · e Series
· RMK-9 keypad
3
D11761-3
Item
Description
1
Inactive waypoint
2
Active waypoint
3
Alternative waypoint symbols
The default waypoint symbol is a red `X'. Alternative symbols can be used if required.
Waypoints in the radar application
In the radar application both active and inactive waypoints are shown. An active waypoint is the one that you are navigating to.
WPT
· a Series
icons
· gS Series
Throughout this manual the term: Select WPT, refers to pressing the physical WPT button or pressing the on-screen WPT icon.
Waypoint context menu
Placing the cursor over a waypoint in the chart or radar applications displays a context menu showing the waypoint's positional data and menu items.
12
3
1. Inactive waypoint
208
The context menu provides the following positional data for the waypoint in relation to your vessel:
· Latitude
· Longitude
· Range
· Bearing
D11759-3
For inactive waypoints the following menu items are available:
a Series / c Series / e Series
· Goto Waypoint
· Follow From Here (only available when waypoint is part of a route.)
2. Select Place Waypoint. The Waypoint Saved dialog is displayed.
· Edit Waypoint
· Erase Waypoint
· Remove Waypoint (only available when waypoint is part of a route.)
· Move Waypoint
· Measure
· Build Route
· Acquire Target (only available if Radar overlay is switched on.)
· Slew thermal camera (only available when thermal camera is connected and operating.)
For active waypoints the following menu items are available:
· Stop Goto
· Restart XTE
· Advance Waypoint
· Measure
· Build Route
· Acquire Target (only available if Radar overlay is switched on.)
· Slew thermal camera (only available when thermal camera is connected and operating.)
Accessing the context menu
You can access the context menu by following the steps below. 1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays:
i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
3. Select the Symbol field to change the symbol that will be used to display the waypoint in the Chart or Radar application.
4. Select the Name field to change the name of the waypoint.
5. Select the Group field to change the group that the waypoint is assigned to.
6. Select OK to confirm the waypoint details.
Note: If there is no user interaction with the Waypoint saved dialog for approximately 5 seconds then the waypoint is saved with the default settings and the dialog is closed automatically.
Placing a waypoint
From the chart, radar or fishfinder application: 1. Position the cursor at the required position. 2. Press the WPT button.
The context menu is displayed. 3. Select Place Waypoint.
The Waypoint Saved dialog is displayed.
Waypoint placement
Placing a waypoint
You can place a waypoint on a multifunction display with a touchscreen by following the steps below.
D11763-2
From the chart, radar or fishfinder application: 1. Select and hold the required location on screen.
The context menu is displayed.
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
4. Select the Symbol field to change the symbol that will be used to display the waypoint in the Chart or Radar application.
5. Select the Name field to change the name of the waypoint.
6. Select the Group field to change the group that the waypoint is assigned to.
7. Select OK to confirm the waypoint details.
Note: If there is no user interaction with the Waypoint saved dialog for approximately 5 seconds then the waypoint is saved with the default settings and the dialog is closed automatically.
209
Placing a waypoint at your vessel's position
In addition to positional information, a waypoint placed at the vessel position will capture temperature and sounded depth information (if you have the appropriate sensors connected to your system).
From the chart, radar or fishfinder application: 1. Select WPT.
The waypoint menu is displayed. 2. Select WPT again or select Place Waypoint At
Vessel from the menu. The Waypoint Saved dialog is displayed.
7. Select Close or Back to close the dialog.
Waypoint groups
Waypoints are organized into groups. By default all waypoints are placed in the "UNSORTED" group.
New waypoint groups can be created and each waypoint can be assigned to a waypoint group. For example; you could create a waypoint group called "Fishing" and place all of your waypoints where you caught fish into that group.
Waypoint groups can be managed from the Waypoint groups list.
1
2
3
4
5 6
3. Select the Symbol field to change the symbol that will be used to display the waypoint in the Chart or Radar application.
4. Select the Name field to change the name of the waypoint.
5. Select the Group field to change the group that the waypoint is assigned to.
6. Select OK to confirm the waypoint details.
Note: If there is no user interaction with the Waypoint saved dialog for approximately 5 seconds then the waypoint is saved with the default settings and the dialog is closed automatically.
7
8
9
D13010-1
1. Sort By: -- Waypoint groups can be sorted by name or by date by selecting the Sort By: field.
2. Unsorted -- By default new waypoints are added to the UNSORTED waypoint group. Selecting the group will display a list of all waypoints that have not been assigned to a specific group.
3. Search -- You can search for waypoints using keywords by selecting Search.
Placing a waypoint at a known position
You can place a waypoint at a specified location using latitude and longitude coordinates: 1. Select WPT. 2. Select Place Waypoint At Lat/Lon.
The waypoint details dialog is displayed.
4. Import/Export -- Waypoints can be exported to or imported from a microSD card by selecting Import/Export. Refer to 8.5 Saving user data and user settings for details.
5. All waypoints -- Selecting ALL WAYPOINTS displays a list of all waypoints saved on your system.
6. Waypoint Groups -- All waypoint groups are displayed in the list.
7. New Group -- A new waypoint group can be added by selecting New Group.
8. New Waypoint -- New waypoints can be added manually by selecting New Waypoint.
9. Show/Hide -- You can choose which waypoint groups are displayed and which groups are hidden by selecting the relevant group from the list and then selecting Show/Hide.
3. Select the Position field. 4. Enter the Latitude/Longitude position. 5. Select SAVE. 6. You can also edit the waypoint symbol, name and
group by selecting the relevant fields.
Selecting a waypoints group from the list displays a list of all waypoints in that group. Additional functions are available to help manage your waypoints.
210
a Series / c Series / e Series
1
2
3
4
2. Select Assign Symbol.
A list of all available symbols is displayed.
3. Select the symbol that you want to use for the waypoints in the selected group.
A confirmation dialog is displayed.
4. Select Yes to apply the new symbols to the waypoints, or select No to cancel.
5
6
7
8
D13013-1
1. Sort By: -- Sort waypoints by Name, Range, Symbol or Date.
2. Search -- Search for waypoints using keywords. 3. Export -- Exports the waypoint group currently
displayed to a memory card. 4. Waypoint group -- This is the currently selected
waypoint group. 5. Rename Group -- Rename the current group. 6. Erase Wpts -- Erase all waypoints in the group. 7. Move Wpts -- Move all waypoints in the group. 8. Assign Symbol -- Assign a new symbol to all
waypoints in the group.
Displaying the waypoint group list From any application: 1. Select WPT. 2. Select Waypoints.
The waypoint group list is displayed.
Making a new waypoint group
With the Waypoint Group List displayed: 1. Select New Group.
The on-screen keyboard is displayed. 2. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the required
name for the new group. 3. select SAVE .
Renaming a waypoint group
With the Waypoint group list displayed: 1. Select the group you want to rename.
Group details are displayed. 2. Select Rename Group.
The on-screen keyboard is displayed. 3. Using the on-screen keyboard change the group
name as required. 4. Select SAVE.
Assigning a new symbol to a waypoint group
You can assign a new waypoint symbol to all the waypoints in a group.
From the Waypoint group list: 1. Select the group that you want to assign a new
waypoint symbol to. A group details list is displayed showing all waypoints in the selected group.
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
Moving a waypoint to a different group With the Waypoints group list displayed: 1. Select ALL WAYPOINTS.
A list of all waypoints currently on your system is displayed. 2. Select the waypoint you want to move. The waypoint details page is displayed. 3. Select the Group field A list of all groups is displayed. 4. Select the Group that you want to move the waypoint to, or 5. Select Create New Group to move the waypoint to a new group. The waypoint is moved to the selected group.
Moving all waypoints in a group to a different group You can move all waypoints in a group to a different group. With the Waypoints group list displayed: 1. Select the Group that contains the waypoints you
want to move. 2. Select Move Wpts.
A list of all groups is displayed. 3. Select the group from the list that you want to
move the waypoints too. A confirmation dialog is displayed. 4. Select Yes to move the waypoints or No to cancel. The waypoints have now been moved to the new group.
Erasing all waypoints in a group You can erase all waypoints in a selected group. With the waypoint groups list displayed: 1. Select the group that contain the waypoints you
want to erase. A list is displayed showing all waypoints in the selected group. 2. Select Erase Wpts. A confirmation dialog is displayed. 3. Select Yes to erase all waypoints in the group, or No to cancel. All of the waypoints in the selected group are erased from the system and the group will now be empty.
211
Erasing a waypoint group
Before you can erase a waypoint group you must move or erase all the waypoints assigned to that group.
· Show on Chart (Show the waypoint location in the chart application.)
· Delete (Delete the waypoint from the waypoints list.)
Displaying the waypoint list From any application: 1. Select WPT. 2. Select Waypoint List.
The waypoint list is displayed.
Note: The waypoint list can also be accessed directly from the Homescreen by selecting WPT. or by going to the My Data menu and selecting Waypoint List.
With the Waypoint Group displayed: 1. Select the waypoint group that you want to erase. 2. Select Erase Group.
The group is deleted from the system.
Waypoint information
When you create a waypoint, the system assigns information regarding the location marked. You can view and edit the details of any waypoint that has been created and stored.
Editing waypoint details
With the Waypoint List displayed: 1. Select the waypoint you want to edit.
The waypoint information page is displayed. 2. Select the field you want to edit. 3. Use the on-screen keyboard to make the
changes, then select the on-screen keyboard's SAVE button.
Editing a waypoint using the context menu
With the application page displayed: 1. Select the waypoint symbol on-screen.
The waypoint context menu is displayed. 2. Select Edit Waypoint.
The edit waypoint dialog is displayed. 3. Select the field you want to edit. 4. Use the on-screen keyboard to make the
changes, and then select the on-screen keyboard's SAVE key.
Moving waypoints
The following information is assigned or captured for each waypoint:
· Symbol (a default symbol is assigned, or you can select an alternative.)
· Name (a default name is assigned, or you can select an alternative.)
· Position (Latitude and Longitude of the waypoint.)
· Bearing and Range (Bearing and range from vessel.)
· Temperature (requires appropriate sensor, only for waypoints captured at the vessel position.)
· Depth (requires appropriate sensor, only for waypoints captured at the vessel position.)
· Date and time
· Comment (you can add your own text comments to a waypoint.)
From the waypoint information page you can also perform the following actions:
· Goto (Start active navigation to the waypoint.)
212
Moving a waypoint using the context menu With the application page displayed: 1. Select the waypoint symbol on-screen.
The waypoint context menu is displayed. 2. Select Move Waypoint. 3. Select the new position for the waypoint.
Moving a waypoint by entering new coordinates With the Waypoint List displayed: 1. Select All Waypoints. 2. Select the relevant waypoint.
The waypoint information page is displayed. 3. Select the Position field. 4. Use the on-screen keyboard to make the
changes, and then select the on-screen keyboard's SAVE key.
Erasing waypoints
Erasing a waypoint using the context menu With the application page displayed: 1. Select the waypoint symbol on-screen.
The waypoint context menu is displayed.
a Series / c Series / e Series
2. Select Erase Waypoint. The erase waypoint pop up message is displayed.
3. Select Yes to confirm, or No to cancel.
Erasing a waypoint using the waypoint list With the Waypoint List displayed: 1. Select All Waypoints. 2. Select the waypoint you want to erase.
The waypoint information page is displayed. 3. Select Erase.
The erase waypoint pop up message is displayed. 4. Select Yes to confirm, or No to cancel.
Erasing all waypoints From the homescreen: 1. Select My Data. 2. Select Import/Export. 3. Select Erase From System. 4. Select Erase Waypoints From System.
A list of all waypoint groups is displayed.
From the search results you can erase all the waypoints in the search list, move them to an existing or new waypoint group or assign all of the waypoints the same waypoint symbol.
Searching for waypoints by name or keyword Waypoints can be searched for by name or keyword. From the Waypoints list: 1. Select Search.
The search page is displayed. 2. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the waypoint
name or keyword. 3. Select Search.
The search results are displayed.
5. Select Erase All. The confirm delete pop up message is displayed.
6. Select Yes to confirm, or No to cancel.
Waypoint search The waypoint search feature allows you to search for waypoints on your system. The search feature is available by selecting Search from the Waypoints list. Waypoints can be searched for by: · Name or keyword · Symbol · Area
4. Select Erase Wpts to erase the list of waypoints from your system, or
5. Select Move Wpts to move the waypoints to a new or existing group, or
6. Select Assign Symbol to assign a new symbol to all the waypoints in the search results list.
You can also select a waypoint from the list to view its details, or if accessed from the Chart application set a goto or display the waypoint in the Chart application.
Searching for waypoints by symbol
Waypoints can be searched for by waypoint symbol.
From the Waypoints list: 1. Select Search.
The search page is displayed. 2. Select Symbol.
The waypoints symbol list is displayed. 3. Select the symbol that is assigned to the
waypoint(s) you want to search for. A list of all waypoints using the selected symbol is displayed.
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
4. Select Erase Wpts to erase the list of waypoints from your system, or
213
5. Select Move Wpts to move the waypoints to a new or existing group, or
6. Select Assign Symbol to assign a new symbol to all the waypoints in the search results list.
You can also select a waypoint from the list to view its details, or if accessed from the Chart application set a goto or display the waypoint in the Chart application.
Searching for waypoints by area
Waypoints can be searched for by selecting an area in the Chart application.
From the Chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Waypoints.
The waypoints list is displayed. 4. Select Search.
The search page is displayed. 5. Select Area.
The Chart application is displayed with the area search menu open. 6. Select the location for the first corner point of the search area. 7. Select the location for the opposite corner of the search area. A box is drawn on the screen which covers the selected area.
11. Select Assign Symbol to assign a new symbol to all the waypoints in the search results list.
You can also select a waypoint from the list to view its details, set a goto or display the waypoint in the Chart application.
Waypoint symbols
A Range of waypoint symbols are available that can be used to represent different waypoint types.
Black Cross
Red Cross
Black Circle
Red Circle
Black Square
Red Square
Black Triangle Blue Cross Blue Circle
Red Triangle Green Cross Green Circle
Blue Square
Green Square
Blue Triangle
Green Triangle
If the box is drawn in the wrong place you can draw a new area by selecting 2 new corner points.
8. Select Search from the menu.
A list of all waypoints in the selected area is displayed.
Anchor Buoy Toilets
Wreck Fuel Restaurant
Ramp
Caution
9. Select Erase Wpts to erase the list of waypoints from your system, or
10. Select Move Wpts to move the waypoints to a new or existing group, or
214
Green racemark anti-clockwise
Yellow racemark anti-clockwise
Green Racemark clockwise
Yellow Racemark clockwise
a Series / c Series / e Series
Red racemark anti-clockwise Marker
Bottom Mark
Route Start Diver Down
Oil Rig
FAD (Fish Attracting Device) Seaweed
Green Can
Red Can
Yellow Can Fish Trap
Preferred Marks Ledge
Fish 1 Star
Fish 3 Star Lobster
Red Racemark clockwise
Restriction
Rocks Private Reef
Reef Public Reef
Top Mark
Dolphin
Shark
Route End
Billfish
Tank
Diver Down 2
Reef Ball
Sailboat
Filled Circle
Sportsfisher
Trawler
Concrete Rubble
Swimmer
Martini
Oyster
Tree
Tower
Green Nun
Hill or Peak
Bridge
Red Nun
Airplane
Car
Yellow Nun
Skull
Diamond T
Brushpile Post Fish Fish 2 Star School Fish
Diamond Quarter
Filled Triangle
Showing and hiding waypoint groups
From the chart or radar application: 1. Select WPT. 2. Select Display Wpts on: Chart, or Display
Wpts on: Radar depending on the application you have open. The Show/Hide waypoints list is displayed.
Small Fish
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
215
In the example above the Day Trip group will not be displayed in the Chart application.
3. Select Sort by: to switch between Groups and Symbols.
A list of Symbols or Groups is displayed.
4. Select the Group or Symbol from the list that you want to show or hide.
If Show is displayed in the list then the group or symbols will be displayed, if Hide is displayed in the list then the group or symbols are not displayed in the application.
5. Repeat Step 4 for each waypoint group or symbol type you want to show or hide.
6. Alternatively to show or hide all waypoints select Show All or Hide All to show or hide all waypoints.
The list of waypoints and symbols can also be accessed from the application menu:
· Chart application: Menu > My Data > Waypoints.
· Radar application: Menu > Presentation > Select WPTs To Display.
216
a Series / c Series / e Series
17.2 Routes
A route is a series of waypoints typically used to assist with passage planning and navigation.
A route is displayed on screen as a series of waypoints linked by a line.
Building a route
You can build a route on a touchscreen multifunction display by following the steps below.
D11750-1
Route features There are a range of route features for building, navigating and managing routes. The route features allow you to: · Build and save a route for use when required
(stored in the route list). · Navigate (follow) routes. · Manage and edit routes stored on the system. · Build a route from an existing track. Route features are accessed from the chart application: · by selecting an existing route. · by using the Build Route option from the chart
context menu. · by using the Chart application menu: Menu >
Navigate > Follow Route or Build Route. Note: The Route List can also be accessed from the homescreen by selecting My Data and then Routes.
Route building A route can consist of a combination of: · New waypoints · existing waypoints · an existing track As each waypoint is added, it is assigned an index number corresponding to its position in the route and drawn on the chart using the currently specified symbol. The following should be noted: · When a route is being built it is not active and does
not affect any current navigation. · You cannot save a new route if any of the
waypoints within it are currently active.
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
D11762-1
From the chart application: 1. Select and hold a location on screen.
The chart context menu is displayed. 2. Select Build Route.
The build route menu is displayed. 3. Select a location on screen to be the starting
position. 4. Select relevant locations to place subsequent
waypoints in order. The route is saved and displayed as each waypoint is placed. 5. When complete select Finish Build. The finish route build pop up message is displayed. 6. Select Follow to immediately follow the route. or 7. Select Edit to change the route name or change the route color. or 8. Select Exit to save the route and return to the chart application.
Note: If you place a waypoint at the wrong position, select Undo Waypoint from the Route Menu.
Building a route
From the chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Navigate. 3. Select Build Route.
The build route menu is displayed. 4. Select Place Wpt. 5. Using the Joystick select a location on screen. 6. Press the Ok button to place the first waypoint
in the route. 7. Use the Joystick and the Ok button to place
subsequent waypoints. The route is saved and displayed as each waypoint is placed. 8. When your route is complete select Finish Build. The finish route build pop up message is displayed. 9. Select Follow to immediately follow the route. or 10. Select Edit to change the route name or change the route color. or
217
11. Select Exit to save the route and return to the chart application.
Note: If you place a waypoint at the wrong position, select Undo Waypoint.
Building a route using the waypoint list From the chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Navigate. 3. Select Build Route.
The build route menu is displayed. 4. Select Use WPT List.
The waypoint list is displayed. 5. Select the required waypoint.
You will be taken back to the build route menu. 6. Add subsequent waypoints to the route.
The route is saved and displayed as each waypoint is placed. 7. When your route is complete select Finish Build. The finish route build pop up message is displayed. 8. Select Follow to immediately follow the route. or 9. Select Edit to change the route name or change the route color. or 10. Select Exit to save the route and return to the chart application.
Note: If you select the wrong waypoint, select Undo Waypoint from the route menu.
Adjusting chart range while building a route From the Build Route menu: 1. Use the on-screen Range In and Range Out
icons to range in and out of the chart.
Adjusting the chart range while building a route From the Build Route menu: 1. Use the Range In and Range Out buttons to
range in and out of the chart.
Note: If a track break occurs, only the last segment is converted to a route.
Building a route from a track
From the Track List:
· accessed from the homescreen: My Data > Tracks
· accessed from the chart application: Menu > My Data > Tracks
1. Select the Track you want to convert to a route. The track options dialog is displayed.
2. Select Create Route From Track. On completion, the maximum deviation of the route from the recorded track is displayed in a dialog and the new route is added to the route list. It can now be displayed, edited and erased etc. in the same way as other routes in the system.
3. Select Ok to confirm. 4. Select Edit to change the name and line color of
the created route.
Building a route from a track displayed on the chart
From the chart application: 1. Select the required track.
The track context menu is displayed. 2. Select Create Route From Track.
On completion, the maximum deviation of the route from the recorded track is displayed in a pop up message and the new route is added to the route list. It can now be displayed, edited and erased etc. in the same way as other routes in the system. 3. Select Ok to confirm. 4. Select Edit to change the name and line color of the created route.
Build a route from a track
You can create a route from a recorded track.
When a track is converted the system creates the closest route through the recorded track, using the minimum number of waypoints. Each waypoint created will be saved with the depth and temperature data (if applicable) for that position.
D11752-2
218
a Series / c Series / e Series
Autorouting
While building a route, the Autorouting feature can be used to create the shortest route between 2 waypoints.
Autorouting requires Navionics® Updates, Navionics® PlatinumTM or Navionics® PlatinumTM+ cartography. Autorouting can be used when creating new routes or when adding a route leg to an existing route.
Warning: Autorouting -- Traffic separation
The Autorouting feature does not adhere to the Traffic Separation Schemes identified in Rule 10 of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea 1972 as amended.
Raymarine® therefore recommends that you do NOT use Autorouting to create any part of a route which will cross traffic lanes or pass near to traffic separation lines. In these situations Autorouting MUST be switched Off and the route or route leg MUST be built manually, ensuring compliance to the rules laid out in the above regulations.
Autorouting generates a route based on the bottom depth data available on compatible cartography and the user defined Minimum Safe Depth setting. Waypoints automatically generated using Autorouting will be restricted from entering water that is too shallow for the vessel.
Important: When using Autorouting the following restrictions apply:
· Autorouting can only be used when generating routes within the area covered by your compatible cartography.
· Autorouting can be used between waypoints less than 100 nm apart.
· Autorouting always uses the cartography's minimum depth reading when calculating routes.
· Autorouting will fail if the generated route will exceed the maximum waypoint or route capacity of the MFD.
· Autorouting will also fail if insufficient cartographic data is available.
Building a route using Autorouting
Autorouting can be used to create an entire route or can be activated at any time when building a new route.
From the Chart application: 1. Select Build Route from the chart context menu
or the Navigate menu. The Build Route menu is displayed. 2. Select Autorouting so that On is selected.
Autorouting can be switched On and Off at any time during route building. 3. Select the position on the Chart where you want the route or route leg to start.
Warning: Autorouting
Routes created using the Autorouting feature rely on Bottom Depth information taken from compatible electronic cartography and a user defined Minimum Safe Depth value. As both of these values are subjective the generated route MUST be carefully checked and if necessary edited BEFORE starting to follow the route in the Chart application.
4. Select the position on the Chart where you want the route or route leg to end.
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
The system will try to automatically calculate the shortest safe route between the 2 points.
219
9. Select Edit to display the Route in the Route List
If the Autorouting completes successfully the calculated route is displayed.
You can further customize the route from the route list. Reviewing the route list is not an adequate method of checking a route, please refer to Reviewing a route generated using Autorouting for details on how to check a route.
Once finished routes generated using Autorouting will behave the same as any other route.
Important: Autorouting will NOT be used when moving waypoints within routes, extra care should be taken to ensure that the route leg and any moved waypoints are safe to navigate.
Waypoints within the route that were calculated using Autorouting are assigned the Marker waypoint symbol.
5. Subsequent route legs can be added by selecting the next desired location on the Chart.
6. When your route is complete select Finish Build.
The Finish Route Build warning is displayed.
Reviewing a route generated using Autorouting
Before you start to follow any route you should review each waypoint and route leg to ensure it is appropriate to follow.
With the completed route displayed on-screen: 1. Range in on the route to identify areas of caution.
7. Select Exit to complete the route and close the Build Route menu.
8. Select Follow to immediately start following the generated route.
Important: Do not rely on Autorouting alone to guarantee that the route is safe to navigate. Review the suggested route carefully and if necessary edit the route before following.
Areas of caution will be identified by the use of the Caution waypoint symbol before and after the cautionary area.
2. Range in further to review the area around and between the caution symbols.
In the example below the route passes close to a charted buoy.
220
a Series / c Series / e Series
3. Once the reason for the caution has been identified you can manipulate the route by moving the caution waypoints so that the caution area is avoided.
Important: Autorouting will NOT be used when moving waypoints within routes, extra care should be taken to ensure that the route leg and any moved waypoints are safe to navigate. 4. Scroll over the entire route to identify any other
areas that might be of concern, that were not highlighted during Autorouting.
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
221
Troubleshooting Autorouting
The information below details the warnings that can be displayed when using Autorouting, a description of what the warning means and actions to be taken to correct the issue.
Warning message
Description
Resolution
Autorouting has completed successfully The Route maybe followed AFTER it has been reviewed to ensure that the generated route is safe for your vessel to follow.
Autorouting has completed successfully, however the route passes close to areas where extra caution is advised (e.g. a charted buoy). The caution areas will be between waypoints that have been assigned caution symbol.
The route must be reviewed as follows:
· Identify any waypoints using the caution symbol (these will be in sets of 2), check between the caution symbols to identify the reason for the caution.
· If possible move the waypoint(s) to avoid the hazard.
· Review all route legs and their waypoints to ensure appropriate before following the route.
The start and or end point of the route does not meet the minimum safe values specified in the Boat Details settings. The start and end waypoints will be created and joined with a straight route leg, however there will be no automatically generated waypoints and the waypoint symbols will be changed to caution symbols.
Perform the following checks:
· Check that the values specified in the Boat Details settings are correct.
· Using the context menu check the Chart Objects menu at the exact location of the start and or end points to establish if the Depth range min value meets you Minimum Safe Depth.
Note:
If no minimum value for depth is available at the desired location Autorouting will assume a minimum depth of 0 feet.
Autorouting adds its own safety margin of 0.8 m or 20% of the specified Minimum Safe Depth which ever is greater.
· Check for any other hazards that would prevent Autorouting from generating a route.
There is insufficient data available on the cartography to generate the route, The start and end waypoints will be created, however there will be no automatically generated waypoints and the waypoint symbols will be changed to caution symbols.
· Insert compatible cartography (Navionics® Updates or Navionics® PlatinumTM+)
· Update existing cartography
Note: There may be certain areas where sufficient details are not yet available even on the latest cartography.
222
a Series / c Series / e Series
Warning message
Description The start and end point of the desired route are further than 100 nm apart.
A safe route could not be generated The first waypoint will be placed but the end waypoint will not.
Resolution
Create smaller route legs. e.g. instead of trying to create a route from point A to point B, create a route from point A to point B to point C to point D, this will enable a route longer than 100 nm to be created using Autorouting for each route leg.
Check the chart area along the expected route to identify areas which cannot be navigated through due to obstacles or land mass.
Review or edit a route There are a variety of attributes associated with routes. These can be reviewed and edited. You can:
· Show or hide a route on the chart screen.
· Review details of the route
· Change the name or color of a route.
· Add, move and remove waypoints from a route.
· Change the route lines width.
Note: An active route can be edited, with the exception of the active waypoint. If a waypoint being edited becomes active, then the system shall cancel the edit; the waypoint shall remain in its original position.
Showing or hiding routes and tracks From the chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Routes or Tracks. 4. Select Show/Hide. 5. Select the route or track to switch between Show
and Hide.
Selecting a route to review or edit 1. Do one of the following to select the required
route:
· From the chart application, select a route on screen to display the route context menu.
· From the chart application, select: Menu > My Data > Routes and select the required route from the list.
· From the Homescreen, select: My Data > Routes and select the required route from the list.
Adding a waypoint to a route on the chart screen From the chart application: 1. Select the appropriate leg of the route.
The route context menu is displayed. 2. Select Insert Waypoint. 3. Select the location for the new waypoint.
The leg of the route is stretched to include the new waypoint.
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
Removing a waypoint from a route From the chart application: 1. Select the waypoint you want to erase.
The waypoint context menu is displayed. 2. Select Remove Waypoint.
The Remove waypoint dialog is displayed. 3. Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel the action. The waypoint will be removed from the route but will still be available.
Moving a waypoint within a route From the chart application: 1. Position the cursor over the waypoint you want
to move. The waypoint context menu is displayed. 2. Select Move Waypoint. 3. Select the new location for the waypoint.
Erasing routes
Erasing a displayed route From the chart application: 1. Select the route.
The Route context menu is displayed. 2. Select Erase Route.
The erase route pop up message is displayed. 3. Select Yes to confirm, or No to cancel the action.
Erasing a route using the route list From the Chart application menu or the Homescreen: 1. Select My Data. 2. Select Routes.
The route list is displayed. 3. Select the route you want to erase. 4. Select Erase route.
The erase route dialog is displayed. 5. Select Yes to confirm, or No to cancel the action.
Note: You can delete any route, except for the one that you are currently following. When you erase a route, only those waypoints associated with that route are deleted.
Erasing all routes From the homescreen:
223
1. Select My Data. 2. Select Import/Export. 3. Select Erase from System. 4. Select Erase Routes from System.
The erase routes from system dialog is displayed. 5. Select Erase All.
The confirm delete dialog is displayed. 6. Select Yes to confirm, or No to cancel the action.
Route context menu Placing the cursor over a route in the chart application displays a context menu showing the leg of the route highlighted by the cursor and menu items.
The context menu provides the following menu items: · Follow Route · Follow Route In Reverse · Hide Route · Insert Waypoint · Edit Route · Erase Route · Add Route Leg · Acquire Target (only available if Radar overlay is
switched on.) When following a route the context menu options change to: · Stop Follow · Restart XTE · Advance Waypoint · Insert Waypoint · Edit Route · Erase Route -- Disabled · Add Route Leg · Acquire Target (only available if Radar overlay is
switched on.)
Accessing the context menu You can access the context menu by following the steps below. 1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays:
i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
224
a Series / c Series / e Series
17.3 Tracks
A track is an on-screen trail that shows the passage you have taken. This trail is made up of a series of track points which are created automatically. You can save the track to create a permanent record of where you have been
· Track Interval -- specifies the interval value (e.g. 15 minutes).
For example when creating a track for a long journey, an interval set to Auto could result in rapid use of all of the storage available for track points. In this case selecting a higher value for the Track Interval would provide capacity for a longer track.
D11754-2
With tracks you can: · Review where you have been. · Create a route from a track.
Creating a track From the chart application menu: 1. Select Navigate. 2. Select Start Track.
The start track pop up message is displayed. 3. Select Ok.
As you navigate your vessel, your journey is automatically recorded as a track.
Note: If the power fails whilst a track is being recorded or the position fix is lost, a break will occur in the track.
Setting the track interval
From the My Data menu in the Chart application or on the Homescreen: 1. Select Tracks. 2. Select Track Set-up. 3. Select Record Tracks By: and set to the
appropriate value:
· Auto-- The track interval is automatically set (Auto will minimize track points whilst maintaining correlation between the track and the actual path followed).
· Time-- The track points are placed at regular intervals of time.
· Distance-- The track points are placed at regular intervals of distance.
4. Select the Track Interval and set to the appropriate value:
· Units of time (available if "record track by" is set to time).
· Units of distance (available if "record track by" is set to distance).
· Not available -- no Track Interval is available if the "record track by" is set to auto).
Note: If the maximum number of tracking points is reached, you will be warned. The track will continue to be recorded with the earlier tracking points being overwritten.
4. To complete your track select Stop Track from the Navigate menu: Menu > Navigate > Stop Track. The track stopped pop up message is displayed.
5. Select Save, Erase or Cancel.
· Save -- Will save the track and open the Edit track Properties dialog where you can name the track and choose a color for the track line.
· Erase -- Will erase the track.
· Cancel -- Will cancel the Stop Track action.
Track interval
The track interval specifies the time period or distance between the points in a track.
You can adjust the interval between track points and choose the interval type (i.e. distance or time), which can help ensure best use of the available storage.
The settings are available from the Tracks Set-up options.
· Record Track By -- specifies the interval type (Auto / Time / Distance).
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
Reviewing and editing a track You can review and edit aspects of the tracks stored. You can: · Erase a track. · Create a route from a track. · Show or hide a track on the chart (only available
from the chart application). · Change the name of a track. · Change the color of a track.
Showing or hiding routes and tracks From the chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select My Data. 3. Select Routes or Tracks. 4. Select Show/Hide. 5. Select the route or track to switch between Show
and Hide.
Selecting a track to review or edit 1. Do one of the following to select the required
track: · From the Chart application, select a track on
screen to display the track context menu.
225
· From the Chart application, go to the following menu: Menu > My Data > Tracks , and select the required track.
· From the Homescreen, select: My Data > Tracks and select the required track.
Track context menu
Selecting a track in the chart application displays a context menu showing the track length, number of points and menu items.
You can then proceed and review or edit the required track using the options available.
Renaming a track You can change the name of a saved track. With the track list displayed. 1. Select the track you want to edit.
The track options page is displayed. 2. Select Edit Name.
The on-screen keyboard is displayed. 3. Use the on-screen keyboard to change the track
name. 4. When finished Select SAVE. You can also edit track details by selecting Edit Track from the track context menu.
Changing the color of a track You can change the color of a saved track. With the track list displayed. 1. Select the track you want to edit.
The track options page is displayed. 2. Select Edit Colour.
A list of colors is displayed. 3. Select the color you want to use. You can also edit track details by selecting Edit Track from the track context menu.
Erasing tracks
Erasing a track From the My Data menu: 1. Select Tracks.
The track list is displayed. 2. Select the track you want to erase. 3. Select Erase Track.
The erase track pop up message is displayed. 4. Select Yes to confirm, or No to cancel the action.
Erasing all tracks From the Homescreen: 1. Select My Data. 2. Select Import/Export. 3. Select Erase from System. 4. Select Erase Tracks from System.
The tracks list is displayed. 5. Select Erase All.
The confirm delete dialog is displayed. 6. Select Yes to confirm, or No to cancel the action.
The context menu provides the following menu items:
· Stop Goto (only available during active navigation.)
· Erase Track
· Hide Track
· Create Route From
· Rename
· Edit Color
· Acquire Target (only available if Radar overlay is switched on.)
When creating a track the context menu options change to:
· Stop Goto (only available during active navigation.)
· Stop Track
· Erase Route -- Disabled
· Create Route From
· Rename
· Edit Color
· Acquire Target (only available if Radar overlay is switched on.)
Accessing the context menu You can access the context menu by following the steps below. 1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays:
i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
226
a Series / c Series / e Series
17.4 Import and Export
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks can be imported and exported using a memory card.
For details on importing and exporting waypoints, routes and tracks refer to: 8.5 Saving user data and user settings.
17.5 Waypoints, routes and tracks storage capacity
The display can store the following quantities of waypoints, routes and tracks
Waypoints
· 3000 waypoints
· 100 waypoint groups, each group can contain up to 3000 waypoints
Routes · 150 routes, each route can contain up to 200 waypoints
Tracks · 15 tracks, each track can contain up to 10,000 points
Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
227
228
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 18: Chart application
Chapter contents · 18.1 Chart application overview and features on page 230 · 18.2 Electronic charts overview on page 232 · 18.3 Navigation options on page 235 · 18.4 Chart ranging and panning on page 237 · 18.5 Chart selection on page 238 · 18.6 Vessel position on the chart display on page 238 · 18.7 Chart Orientation on page 239 · 18.8 Chart motion mode on page 240 · 18.9 Chart views on page 241 · 18.10 Chart display on page 243 · 18.11 Overlays on page 243 · 18.12 Chart vectors on page 250 · 18.13 Cartography objects on page 251 · 18.14 Object information on page 253 · 18.15 Depth & Contour options on page 257 · 18.16 My Data options on page 259 · 18.17 Multiple chart synchronization on page 259 · 18.18 Measuring distances and bearings on page 260
Chart application
229
18.1 Chart application overview and features
The chart application provides route planning and navigation features. The Chart application is pre-loaded with a LightHouse Charts and Navionics world base maps. Compatible electronic charts can be used to expand the information and detail regarding your surroundings and charted objects. Depending on cartography type the chart application can be set to 2D or 3D view.
Control the level of detailed information displayed in the Chart application
Measuring distances and bearings.
Alter the Chart application's orientation to better suit your needs.
Change (offset) the vessel position in the Chart application.
· 18.10 Chart display · Chart detail · 18.18 Measuring distances
and bearings · 18.7 Chart Orientation
· 18.8 Chart motion mode
Typical Chart application includes the following features to help you navigate your vessel safely and effectively:
Features
Satellite-based navigation. · GPS Status
Route planning with
· 17.1 Waypoints overview
waypoints, routes and tracks. · 17.2 Routes
· 17.3 Tracks
· 8.5 Saving user data and user settings
Navigating using waypoints, · 18.3 Navigation options routes and tracks.
Choice of electronic 2D and · 18.2 Electronic charts
3D cartography.
overview
Note: To obtain full 3D detail, you must have chart cards containing 3D cartography for the appropriate geographic area.
LightHouse charts
Navionics charts
· Electronic chart specification
· Selecting 2D and 3D chart views
Enabling graphical overlays. · 18.11 Overlays
Waypoints, routes and tracks · 8.5 Saving user data and
backup and transfer
user settings
Display chart vectors
· 18.12 Chart vectors
Display animated current and · Animated current
tide information
information
· Animated tide information
Viewing information for charted objects and deciding which objects should be shown or hidden.
· 18.13 Cartography objects · 18.14 Object information
230
Chart application synchronization
Wireless electronic chart (plotter) sync and waypoint sync with Navionics Mobile Marine app.
· Navionics mobile marine app
· Navionics Freshest Data
Plan your journey at home, then transfer the routes to your MFD.
Refer to the Voyager Planner manual for more information (81339).
Chart datum
The chart datum setting affects the accuracy of the vessel position information displayed in the chart application.
In order for your GPS receiver and multifunction display to correlate accurately with your paper charts, they must be using the same datum.
The default datum for your multifunction display is WGS1984. If this is not the datum used by your paper charts, you can change the datum used by your multifunction display, using the system preferences page. The system preferences page can be accessed from the homescreen: Set-up > System Settings > System Preferences > System Datum.
When you change the datum for your multifunction display, the chart grid will subsequently move according to the new datum, and the latitude/longitude of the cartographic features will also change accordingly. Your multifunction display will attempt to set up any GPS receiver to the new datum, as follows:
· If your multifunction display has a built in GPS receiver it will automatically correlate each time you change the datum.
· If you have a Raymarine GPS receiver using SeaTalk or SeaTalkng, it will automatically correlate each time you change the datum on the multifunction display.
· If you have a Raymarine GPS receiver using NMEA0183, or a third-party GPS receiver, you must correlate it separately.
It may be possible to use your multifunction display to correlate an NMEA0183 GPS receiver. From the homescreen go to Set-up > System settings > GPS Set-up > View Satellite Status. If the datum version is displayed, it may be possible to change it. From the homescreen go to Set-up > System settings > Data Sources > GPS Datum.
a Series / c Series / e Series
Note: Raymarine recommends that you check the displayed vessel position in the chart application against your actual proximity to a known charted object. A typical GPS has an accuracy of between 5 and 15 m.
Chart context menu
The Chart context menu provides the cursors positional data and shortcuts to menu options.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
Selecting context menu settings
On touchscreen multifunction displays you can choose how chart object context menus are a accessed.
From the Homescreen: 1. Select Customize. 2. Select Display Preferences. 3. Select Chart Ctxt Menu to switch between Touch
or Hold.
· Hold -- requires you to touch and hold on a chart object to access the context menu.
· Touch -- requires you to touch a chart object to access the context menu.
The method of selecting a chart object using a touchscreen display depends on the Context Menu setting in the chart Set-up menu, which can be set to Touch or Hold. The context menu provides the following positional data for the cursor position in relation to your vessel:
· Latitude
· Longitude
· Range
· Bearing
The following menu items are available:
· Goto Cursor / Stop Goto / Stop Follow
· Place Waypoint
· Photo
· Tide Station (only available if a tide station is selected.)
· Current Station (only available if a current station is selected.)
· Pilot Book (only available at certain ports.)
· Animate (only available if a tide or current station is selected.)
· Chart Objects
· Find Nearest
· Measure
· Build Route
· Acquire Target (only available if Radar overlay is switched on.)
· Slew thermal camera (only available when thermal camera is connected and operating.)
Accessing the context menu
You can access the context menu by following the steps below.
1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays:
i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
Chart application
231
18.2 Electronic charts overview
Your multifunction display includes basic world base maps. Electronic charts provide additional cartographic information.
The level of cartographic detail shown varies for different chart types, geographic locations and chart scales. The chart scale in use is indicated by the on-screen scale indicator, the value displayed is the distance that the line represents across the screen.
You can remove and insert chart cards at any time. The chart screen is automatically redrawn when the system detects that a compatible chart card has been inserted or removed.
Using a dual view page it is possible to display different cartography types simultaneously.
Raster charts are an exact copy / scan of an existing paper chart. All information is embedded directly in the chart. Ranging in and out of raster charts will make everything appear larger or smaller on the screen, including text. When changing the Chart application's orientation everything on the chart will rotate, including the text. As raster charts are a scanned image the file size is normally bigger when compared to the vector equivalent.
Vector charts
Caution: Care of chart and memory cards
To avoid irreparable damage to and / or loss of data from chart and memory cards:
· DO NOT save data or files to a card containing cartography as the charts may be overwritten.
· Ensure that chart and memory cards are fitted the correct way around. DO NOT try to force a card into position.
· DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a screwdriver or pliers to insert or remove a chart or memory card.
LightHous e
CHARTS
Vector charts are computer generated, consisting of a series of points and lines that make up the chart. Chart objects and overlays on vector charts can be switched on and off and chart objects can be selected to provide further information. Ranging in and out of vector charts will make geographical features appear larger or smaller on the screen, however text and chart objects will remain the same size regardless of range. When changing the Chart application's orientation geographical features will rotate but text and chart objects will remain in the correct orientation for the display. As vector charts are generated rather than a scanned image the file size is normally smaller when compared to the raster equivalent.
LightHouse charts
With the introduction of the LightHouse II software, Raymarine multifunction displays now support the use of Raymarine's new LightHouse charts.
LightHouse charts are derived from vector and raster based charts, the LightHouse chart engine enables Raymarine to offer new chart types and regions from around the globe.
Refer to the Raymarine website: for the latest information on available LightHouse charts.
Downloading LightHouseTM charts
LightHouseTM charts can be downloaded through the Raymarine website.
Important: You must read and agree to the LightHouseTM charts End User License Agreement (EULA) before downloading and using LightHouseTM charts.
Raster charts
232
a Series / c Series / e Series
1. Go to the LightHouse charts page of the Raymarine website: http://www.raymarine.com/lighthousecharts/.
2. Select either the Raster or Vector charts. The Chart regions page is displayed.
3. Select your region. The chart region download page is displayed.
5. Read and ensure you FULLY understand the End User License Agreement (EULA).
You should only proceed to the next step if you agree to the terms of the EULA. 6. Enter your details in the relevant fields. 7. Click the check box against `I have read and agree to the LightHouse Charts terms of use. 8. Click Download Chart. The download should start automatically. A link is provided if the download does not commence.
Note:
· Due to the file size the download may take some time.
· Download times will differ depending on connection speed.
· As the files are large it is recommended that you use a download manager / accelerator which can speed up your download time and ensure that if the download fails the download can be resumed rather than downloading the entire file again.
9. Wait for the download to finish.
The downloaded file can now be unzipped / extracted to memory card for use with your multifunction display.
Unzipping files to memory card
The LightHouse charts download file must be unzipped / extracted to memory card for use on your multifunction display.
Note: The instructions below are provided for guidance only. Depending on your PC's operating system and the archiving (zip) software in use the steps required may differ slightly from those shown below. If you are unsure please consult your operating system's and or archiving software's help files.
To unzip / extract charts with a filesize over 4GB you may need to install 3rd-party archiving (zip) software such as 7zip: http://www.7zip.org/.
Ensure you have a memory card with sufficient space for the charts you want to download. The File size is displayed on each chart region's download page.
For best performance it is recommended that you use Class 10 or UHS (Ultra High Speed) class memory cards. 1. Locate the downloaded file.
The file will be stored in the folder you selected or in your normal downloads folder.
4. Click `View the terms of use'.
Chart application
233
2. Right click on the file and select the Extract Here option from the zip options.
3. Once all files have been extracted select the chart files.
4. Right click and choose Send to > Removable Disk
Navionics charts
Your multifunction display is compatible with Navionics cartography. The following Navionics cartography types are available for your multifunction display:
· Ready to Navigate
· Silver
· Gold
· Gold+
· Platinum
· Platinum+
· Fish'N Chip
· Hotmaps
To check the current availability of Navionics chart cards and types, please visit www.navionics.com or www.navionics.it.
Note: Refer to the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com) for the latest list of supported cartography.
The Chart files will now be copied to your memory card.
5. Check that the files have been successfully placed on your memory card by viewing its contents in your file browser.
Navionics mobile marine app
You can wirelessly synchronize data between your multifunction display (MFD) and a mobile device that is running the Navionics mobile marine app.
The synchronization downloads Navionics Freshest Data from your mobile device to your MFD and uploads sonar logs from your MFD to your mobile device. Waypoints and routes can also be synchronized between your mobile device and MFD.
1
2
3
4
5
6. Safely remove your memory card from your PC's card reader.
7. Insert your memory card into the card reader of your multifunction display.
8. Open the Chart application on your multifunction
display.
9. Select the new chart from the Chart selection
1
menu: Menu > Presentation > Chart Selection. 2
The Chart screen will be redrawn to display the
newly selected chart type.
3
4
5
234
7
6
D12166-3
Navionics servers
Download Navionics Freshest Data to mobile device (internet connection required)
Mobile device running Navionics mobile app
Download Navionics Freshest Data to MFD (Wi-Fi connection to MFD required)
MFD
a Series / c Series / e Series
6
* Upload Sonar Logs and Community edits to
mobile device (Wi-Fi connection to MFD required)
7
** Upload Sonar Logs and Community edits
anonymously to Navionics servers (internet
connection required)
Note:
* To participate in Navionics Sonar Charts, Sonar logging must be enabled on your MFD. Sonar Logs can be enabled from the Chart application menu: Menu > Depth & Contour > Sonar Logs.
** The Sonar logs shall be uploaded to Navionics servers anonymously.
To use this feature you must first:
1. Download and install the Navionics Mobile Marine app, available from the relevant app store.
2. Subscribe to Navionics Freshest Data.
3. Download Freshest data to your mobile device.
4. Enable Wi-Fi in the System Settings on the MFD.
5. Enable Wi-Fi on your mobile device.
6. Select the MFD Wi-Fi connection from the list of available Wi-Fi networks on your mobile device.
Navionics Freshest Data
Navionics offer a 12 month subscriptions to their Freshest Data service, which includes updates to nautical charts, sonar charts and community edits layer.
18.3 Navigation options
The chart application provides features to help navigate to a chosen location. The navigation options are found in the Navigate menu: Menu > Navigate
· Pilot Controls -- Accesses the Pilot Control Dialog, when Autopilot Control is enabled.
· Goto Cursor -- Will set the cursor position as the active destination.
· Goto Waypoint -- Provides options to navigate to a waypoint stored on the system
· Stop Goto -- Stops the Goto Cursor or Goto Waypoint.
· Stop Follow -- Stops following the current route.
· Restart XTE -- Restarts the Cross Track Error.
· Advance Waypoint -- When following a route, skips to the next waypoint in the route.
· Follow Route -- Provides options to navigate to a route stored on the system
· Start Track / Stop Track -- Will initiate a track on screen to plot your course as you progress or stop a track that is currently being created.
· Build Route -- Provides options to build a route.
Refer to Chapter 17 Waypoints, Routes and Tracks for details on creating waypoints, routes and tracks.
Navigation
Navigating to a waypoint on the screen
Nautical charts -- Navionics 2D charts.
Sonar Charts -- High definition bathymetry chart layer created by combining multiple data sources including Sonar Logs provided by Navionics community users.
Community Edits -- Edits made by Navionics
users.
D11753-2
To obtain Freshest Data insert your Navionics chart card into your PC, visit the Navionics website www.navionics.com and Click Downloads & Updates.
From the chart or radar application: 1. Select the waypoint.
The waypoint context menu is displayed.
2. Select the Goto Waypoint.
Note: With an active waypoint selected you can select Stop Goto option from the waypoint context menu at any time to cancel the action.
Chart application
Navigating to a waypoint using the waypoints group list From the Chart application: 1. Select WPT.
The waypoint menu is displayed. 2. Select Waypoints.
The waypoints group list is displayed. 3. Browse the group list for the relevant waypoint. 4. Select the waypoint.
The waypoint options dialog is displayed. 5. Select Goto.
235
Navigating to a location on the chart From the chart application: 1. Select the required location on-screen.
The chart context menu is displayed. 2. Select Goto Cursor.
Navigating to the cursor position on the chart using the menu
Cross Track Error (XTE) Cross Track Error (XTE) is the amount of deviation from your intended route or waypoint, expressed as a distance.
XTE
D11765-2
In the event that you steer off-track, you can go straight to your target by resetting XTE.
D11764-2
From the chart application: 1. Position the cursor at the desired destination on
the chart. 2. Select Menu. 3. Select Navigate. 4. Select Goto Cursor.
Cancelling navigation to a waypoint
1. Select any position anywhere on-screen. The waypoint context menu is displayed.
2. Select Stop Goto. 3. Alternatively, in the chart application, go to: Menu
> Navigate > Stop Goto.
Resetting Cross Track Error (XTE)
While following a route in the chart application: 1. Select the route.
The route context menu is displayed. 2. Select Restart XTE.
Resetting XTE results in a new course from the current vessel position to the current target waypoint. This does not affect your saved route.
Note: Once navigation is no longer active, the waypoint symbol returns to its normal state, and the dashed line between your vessel and the waypoint is removed.
Arriving at a waypoint
As your vessel approaches a waypoint, the waypoint arrival alarm is triggered.
D12295-1
You can also reset the XTE from the Navigate Menu: Menu > Navigate > Restart XTE.
Navigating a route
You can follow any route stored on the display. When following a route you visit each waypoint in order. You may also use the follow route options in conjunction with a compatible autopilot to automatically navigate along your chosen route.
With the Waypoint arrival warning displayed:
1. Select OK.
Once the alarm is acknowledged:
· the Dialog is closed and the audible alarm is silenced.
· if navigating a route then the next waypoint is selected.
Note: You can set the radius (distance) of the waypoint arrival circle which is used to trigger the waypoint arrival alarm.
D11751-2
There are a number of ways to select the follow route option:
· Using a stored route within the route list.
236
a Series / c Series / e Series
· From a selected waypoint or any leg within a route.
You can also follow any route in reverse order.
Following a stored route
From the chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Navigate. 3. Select Follow Route.
The Route list is displayed. 4. Select the route you want to follow. 5. Select Follow Route, or 6. Select Follow Route in Reverse to follow the
route in reverse order.
Cancelling navigation of a route
From the chart application: 1. Select the Route.
The route context menu is displayed. 2. Select Stop Follow.
Advancing to the next waypoint in a route
You can skip the current active waypoint and advance to the next waypoint in a route at any time.
While following a route in the chart application: 1. Select the route.
The route context menu is displayed. 2. Select Advance Waypoint.
Note: If the current destination is the last waypoint, the chart advances on to the first waypoint in the route.
18.4 Chart ranging and panning
Ranging in and out The table below shows the Range controls available for each display variant.
Rotary Control · c Series · e Series · RMK-9 keypad
Range in and Range out buttons
· c Series
· e Series (excluding e7 and e7D
· RMK-9 keypad
Range in and Range out on-screen icons
· a Series · e Series · gS Series
Note: e Series and gS Series on-screen range controls can be enabled and disabled from the Homescreen: Customize > Display Preferences > Range Controls
Multi-Touch gesture -- Pinch to Zoom
· a Series · gS Series
00 00
00 00
Panning the chart
You can pan the chart area on a touchscreen multifunction display by following the steps below.
In the chart application: 1. Swipe your finger across the screen from right
to left to pan right. 2. Swipe your finger across the screen from left to
right to pan left. 3. Swipe your finger across the screen from top to
bottom to pan up. 4. Swipe your finger across the screen from bottom
to top to pan down.
Panning the chart
You can pan the chart area on a non-touchscreen multifunction display by following the steps below.
From the chart application: 1. Move the Joystick in the direction you want to
pan.
Chart application
237
18.5 Chart selection
You can select the cartography type to be used in the Chart application. The Chart selection applies to the active Chart instance. You must have the necessary cartography chart cards inserted into your multifunction display in order to display different cartography type.
18.6 Vessel position on the chart display
Your current position is represented on-screen by the vessel symbol.
The vessel symbols are only displayed when heading or COG data is available.
The vessel symbol varies depending on selected settings and the availability of heading data.
Motor Vessel
The motor vessel symbol is used when the vessel type selected during the initial set up wizard is a motor vessel.
Sail Vessel
The sail vessel symbol is used when the vessel type selected during the initial set up wizard is a sail vessel.
Selecting a cartography type
You can select the cartography type you want to display in the Chart application.
Ensure you have inserted the chart card that contains the cartography type you want to display.
Small Vessel
Black dot
The small vessel symbol is used when the Boat Size setting is set to Small.
A black dot is displayed when heading and COG data is not available.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Chart Selection.
A list of available cartography is displayed. 3. Select the cartography type you want to display
The Chart window is re-drawn to show the select cartography type.
Vessel position data can also be shown in the databar.
Locating your vessel
The vessel icon can be repositioned to the center of the screen by following the steps below.
1. Select the Find Ship icon: left hand side of the screen.
located on the
Locating your vessel
The vessel icon can be repositioned to the center of the screen by following the steps below. 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Find Ship.
238
a Series / c Series / e Series
18.7 Chart Orientation
Course Up
N N
The orientation of a chart refers to the relationship between the chart and the direction that you are travelling in.
Chart Orientation is used in conjunction with Motion Mode to control how your vessel and chart relate to one another and how they are displayed on-screen.
The mode you choose applies to the active Chart instance, and is restored at power up.
The following options are available:
D12299-2
North Up
N
In Course Up mode, during active navigation, the Chart application displays the vessel's current destination waypoint directly up. When the destination waypoint changes the chart picture rotates accordingly. The reference used for Course Up depends upon the information available at a given time. The system always prioritizes this information in the following order:
1. Bearing Origin to waypoint
2. Locked heading from an Autopilot
D12300-2
In North Up mode, the Chart Orientation is fixed with true north pointing up this is the (usual orientation of nautical charts). As your heading changes the vessel symbol rotates accordingly. This is the default orientation for the Chart application.
Head Up
3. BTW (Bearing To Waypoint)
4. Heading snapshot
5. Stable COG
6. North Up
If Heading or stable COG data is no longer present then the Orientation mode is suspended and the Chart application will display 0 degrees directly up if there is no active navigation or Course Up if there is active navigation.
Setting the chart orientation
D12298-2
In Head Up mode, the Chart application displays the vessel's current Heading directly up. As the vessel Heading changes the vessel symbol remains fixed and the chart picture rotates accordingly. If Heading is not available then stable COG is used instead. If Heading or stable COG data is no longer present then the Orientation mode is suspended and the Chart application will display 0 degrees directly up if there is no active navigation or Course Up if there is active navigation.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select View & Motion. 3. Select Chart Orientation. 4. Select Head Up, North Up (default), or Course
Up option as appropriate. Once selected the screen will update to reflect the new orientation.
Note: To prevent continuous backwards and forwards rotations as the vessel yaws from side-to-side, the chart will not update unless the heading changes by at least 10 degrees from the last displayed orientation.
Note: It is not possible to select Head-Up when the Motion Mode is set to True.
Chart application
239
18.8 Chart motion mode
The motion mode controls the relationship between the chart and your vessel.
Whilst motion mode is active, as your vessel moves, the chart is redrawn to keep the vessel on-screen. The 3 motion modes are:
· Relative Motion (default)
· True Motion
Boat Position: menu options to determine whether the vessel is fixed in the center of the window or offset. If you change the position to Partial Offset or Full Offset, the view ahead of your vessel will be increased.
True Motion
· Auto Range.
Note: In the 3D chart view, only Relative Motion mode is available.
The current motion mode applies to the active instance of the chart application.
When you pan the chart the motion mode is no longer active. This is indicated in the status bar by brackets around the motion mode -- for example, (Relative Motion). This enables you to view another area of the chart whilst navigating. To reset the motion mode and return your vessel to the screen, select the Find Ship icon or select Find Ship from the menu. Manually changing the range or panning the chart in auto range also suspends motion mode. The default setting is relative motion with the boat icon positioned in the center of the screen. The mode that you select is restored at power up.
D12304-1
When the motion mode is set to True Motion, the chart is fixed and the vessel moves in true perspective to fixed landmasses on-screen. As the vessel's position approaches the edge of the screen, the chart picture is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead of the vessel.
Note: It is not possible to select True Motion when the orientation is set to Head Up.
Auto Range
Boat positions (Relative Motion only) Position Example
Center
D12305-1
Auto Range selects and maintains the largest possible scale of chart that will display both the vessel and the target waypoint. Auto range is not available if radar-chart synchronization is on.
Partial Offset
Setting the motion mode
To change the motion mode follow the steps below.
From the chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select View & Motion. 3. Select Motion Mode:. 4. Select True Motion, Relative Motion, or Auto
Range option as appropriate.
Once selected the screen will update to reflect the new mode.
Full Offset
When the motion mode is set to Relative Motion, the position of your vessel is fixed on-screen and the chart picture moves relative to your vessel. You can use the Menu > Presentation > View & Motion >
Changing the position of the boat icon
From the chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select View & Motion. 3. Select Boat Position. 4. Select Center, Partial Offset, or Full Offset as
appropriate.
240
a Series / c Series / e Series
18.9 Chart views
Item Description
If supported by your cartography type, the Chart application can be set to either 2D or 3D view.
13
AIS target -- a vessel broadcasting AIS information
(optional).
Selecting 2D and 3D chart views You can switch between 2D and 3D views in the chart application if supported by your cartography. From the chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation . 2. Select View & Motion. 3. Select Chart View to select 2D or 3D.
2D chart view The 2D chart view can display a range of information to help you navigate.
14
Range out -- select icon to range out (Touchscreen
displays only).
15
Range in -- select icon to range in (Touchscreen
displays only).
16
Cartographic objects -- level of cartographic
objects is determined by the cartography type.
3D chart view
The 3D view can display a range of information to help you navigate.
1
2
34
56
78 9
1
2 34 5
6
7
10
000°T
8 11
9
10
11
12
12
13
14 15
16
D12306-3
Item 1
Item Description
1
Range -- horizontal chart scale indicator (shown in 2
selected system units).
2
Waypoint -- inactive.
3
3
Orientation -- states the orientation mode that the 4
chart is using (North-up, Head-up, or Course-up).
4
Vessel symbol-- shows your current position.
5
5
Navigation origin line -- during navigation, shows
a solid line from the starting point to the target waypoint. The starting point can be the vessel's
6
original location, the point of XTE reset or the point
the current leg of a route was initiated.
6
Motion mode -- states the current motion mode
7
(Relative, True, or Auto Range).
7
Chart type -- indicates the type of chart in use --
Fish or Navigation.
8
8
Find ship icon -- used to find and center your
vessel on the chart.
9
Vessel position line -- during navigation, shows 9
a dotted line from the vessel's current position to
the target waypoint.
10
10
Cursor -- used to select chart objects and move
around the chart area.
11
11
Target waypoint -- current target waypoint.
12
Databoxes -- used to display data such as depth 12
on the chart screen.
Chart application
13 14
D12307-2
Description
Range -- horizontal chart scale indicator (shown in selected system units).
Depth Scale -- approximate depth beneath your vessel (optional).
Waypoint -- optional.
Center-of-view -- the white cross indicates the center of chart view at the water level (optional).
Orientation -- states the orientation mode that the chart is using.
Cartographic objects -- use the Cartography Set-up menu to choose which objects to display.
Rotation -- shows in degrees true, how far the on-screen view has been rotated from your vessel's heading and the tilt angle of your vessel.
North arrow 3D indication of True North in relation to the chart view. The north arrow also tilts to indicate pitch angle.
Chart type -- indicates the type of chart in use -- Fish or Navigation.
Find ship icon -- used to find and center your vessel on the chart.
Vessel symbol -- your vessel's current position.
Data overlay -- used to display data such as depth on the chart screen.
241
Item
Description
13
Range out -- use icon to range out
(Touchscreen displays only).
14
Range in -- use icon to range in (Touchscreen
displays only).
Manipulating the 3D chart view
From the chart application:
1. With the chart in 3D mode, go to the Adjust Viewing Angle menu: Menu > Adjust Viewing Angle.
2. Select Adjust: so that Pitch and rotate is highlighted.
3. To adjust the pitch: i. Non-touchscreen or HybridTouch displays -- Move the Joystick Up or Down to adjust the pitch ii. HybridTouch or Touch only displays -- Swipe your finger up or down across the screen to adjust the pitch.
D11755-1
· Depth Scale -- Switches on and off a depth scale at your vessel position.
Enabling center of view
In 3D view, to enable the center of view cross hair at sea level follow the steps below.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select View & Motion. 3. Select 3D Display Options. 4. Select Center of View so that On is highlighted.
Selecting centre of view will switch the cross hair on and off.
Adjusting the 3D exaggeration
In the 3D chart view.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select View & Motion. 3. Select 3D Display Options. 4. Select Exaggeration:.
The Exaggeration numeric adjust control is displayed. 5. Adjust the numeric adjust control to the required setting, between 1.0 and 20.0 6. Select Ok or Back to confirm the setting and close the numeric adjust control.
4. To adjust the rotation:
i. Non-touchscreen or HybridTouch displays -- Move the Joystick Left or Right to adjust the rotation
ii. HybridTouch or Touch only displays -- Swipe your finger left or right across the screen to adjust the rotation.
Enabling transducer cone
In 3D view, to enable the transducer cone which indicates the coverage of your fishfinder transducer follow the steps below.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select View & Motion. 3. Select 3D Display Options. 4. Select Transducer Cone so that On is
highlighted. Selecting Transducer cone will switch the function on and off.
D11756-1
3D Display Options
The following options are available with the Chart application in 3D view:
· Center Of View -- Switches a cross hair on and off at the center of the screen at sea level.
· Exaggeration -- Adjusting the exaggeration has the effect of vertically stretching objects on the chart, making it easier to see their shape and position.
· Transducer Cone -- Switches on and off a transducer cone indicating the coverage of a fishfinder transducer.
242
Enabling depth scale In 3D view, to enable a depth indicator at your vessel's location follow the steps below. From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select View & Motion. 3. Select 3D Display Options. 4. Select Depth Scale: so that On is highlighted.
Selecting depth scale will switch depth indicator on and off.
a Series / c Series / e Series
18.10 Chart display
18.11 Overlays
The Chart Display menu option determines the level of detail that is displayed on-screen. The Chart display menu option is only available when using vector based cartography. The Chart display options are shown below.
Simple
Detailed
Extra Detailed
The level of detail shown on-screen is also affected by the cartography Chart detail settings. Refer to Chart detail for information. Changing the chart display detail From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Chart Detail.
The following options are available: · Simple · Detailed · Extra Detailed 3. Select the required option.
The chart has a number of overlays that display different views and information. The overlays require electronic charts with the appropriate feature support and may also require additional hardware and service subscriptions.
You can overlay the following data onto a 2D chart to give greater depth of information. The overlays available are:
· * AIS -- View and track AIS targets. This overlay is not available in 3D view.
· * Radar -- Overlay radar onto the chart. This overlay is not available in 3D view.
· ** Aerial -- Provides an aerial / satellite photography overlay.
· ** Aerial Overlay: -- Determines the coverage of the aerial overlay.
· * NOWRad -- Provides the NOWRad weather radar overlay. This overlay is not available in 3D view.
· Databoxes -- Select whether databoxes are displayed on-screen and what data is displayed.
· Chart Grid -- Determines whether grid lines representing longitude and latitude are displayed on the chart.
· ** 2D Shading -- Determines whether terrain shading is displayed in 2D view.
· ** Community Edits -- Determines whether the community layer is enabled or disabled.
· ** Chart Text -- Determines whether chart text is displayed (place names and so on).
· Chart Boundaries -- Determines whether a line indicating the chart boundary is displayed.
· Range Rings-- View range rings in the Chart application. This overlay is not available in 3D view.
· Safe Zone Ring -- View safe zone ring. This overlay is not available in 3D view.
· Fuel Range Ring -- View the fuel range ring. This overlay is not available in 3D view.
· Boat Size -- Determines the size of the boat icon on-screen.
· Waypoint Name -- Determines whether the Waypoint names are displayed next to waypoints.
· Route Width -- Determine the width of route lines on-screen.
· Track Width -- Determine the width of track lines on-screen.
Note:
* Additional hardware required.
** If supported by your cartography type.
Chart application
243
Enabling AIS in the Chart application To enable the AIS overlay in the Chart application follow the steps below. To enable the AIS overlay your system must include an AIS receiver or transceiver. The AIS overlay is not available in 3D view. From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlays. 3. Select AIS: so that On is selected.
Selecting AIS: switches the AIS between On and Off. For AIS information refer to Chapter 16 AIS function.
Radar overlay You can overlay Radar and MARPA functions in the Chart application to provide target tracking or to help you distinguish between fixed objects and other marine traffic. You can enhance the use of the Chart application by combining it with the following Radar features: · MARPA -- The Mini Automatic Radar Plotting
Aid (MARPA) function is used for target tracking and risk analysis. MARPA targets are only available in the Chart application when Heading data is available. When MARPA targets are being tracked they are displayed in the Chart application regardless of whether Radar overlay is switched On. Associated MARPA functions can be accessed using the menu. · Radar overlay -- You can overlay the Radar image over your Chart image allowing better distinction between fixed objects and other marine traffic. For best results, switch on Radar-Chart synchronization to ensure radar range and chart scale are synchronized.
Radar overlay using Heading Radar overlay requires the use of Heading data from a connected: · Evolution autopilot sensor (such as the EV-1 or
EV-2, or · Fluxgate compass With Heading data available both Radar overlay and MARPA targets can be displayed in the Chart application. The system will always use Heading for the overlay when it is available.
244
When the Radar overlay is using Heading then `OVL' is displayed in the top left corner of the Chart application.
Radar overlay using stable COG
Radar overlay can be set to use COG when Heading data is not available or is lost. In order to use COG for the overlay it must be stable i.e. there must be sufficient SOG.
When using COG for the overlay MARPA targets are not available.
If Heading data becomes available then the overlay will automatically switch back to using Heading instead.
When the Radar overlay is using COG then `OVL-COG' is displayed in the top left corner of the Chart application.
Note: When the overlay is using COG, misalignment of the Radar and Chart images can occur due to tide and current effects.
Enabling Radar overlay
With a connected Radar turned On and Transmitting: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Overlays. 4. Select Radar.
The Radar overlay opacity slider bar control is displayed showing the current opacity percentage. 5. Adjust the slider bar to the required opacity, or 6. Select Off to turn the Radar overlay off. 7. Select Back to close the opacity menu.
Note: Radar overlay is not available in 3D view.
Using COG for the Radar overlay
COG can be used for the Radar overlay when Heading data is not available or is lost.
From the Chart application menu, with Radar overlay switched On: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Overlays. 4. Select Radar w/o Hdg: so that On is highlighted.
The Radar overlay is now set to automatically switch to use COG data if Heading data is not available or is lost. If Heading data subsequently becomes available again the system will automatically change back to using Heading data. An alert message will be displayed when switching to COG.
Note: When the overlay is using COG, misalignment of the Radar and Chart images can occur due to tide and current effects.
Accessing radar controls on the chart
From the chart application:
a Series / c Series / e Series
1. Select Menu. 2. Select Radar Options or Radar & AIS Options.
Note: Any changes made to the radar options from the chart application will be applied to the radar application.
Chart scale and radar range synchronization You can synchronize the radar range in all radar windows with the chart scale. When synchronization is switched on:
· The radar range in all radar windows changes to match the chart scale.
· `Sync' is indicated in the top left-hand corner of the chart window.
· If you change the radar range, in any radar window, all synchronized chart views change scale to match.
3. Select Overlays. 4. Select Aerial.
The aerial opacity slider bar control is displayed showing the current opacity percentage. 5. Adjust the slider bar to the required opacity, or 6. Select Off to turn the aerial overlay off.
Specifying the aerial overlay area
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlays. 3. Select Aerial Overlay:.
A list of overlay options is displayed. 4. Select either On Land, On Land and Shallows, or
On Land and Sea. The chart display is redrawn showing the new overlay selection.
· If you change the scale of a synchronized chart window, all radar windows change range to match.
Synchronizing the chart and radar range In the 2D chart view: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select View & Motion 4. Select Chart Sync. 5. Select Radar.
NOWRad weather overlay
With a suitable weather receiver connected to your multifunction display, you can overlay NOWRad weather information on the chart display.
The NOWRad weather overlay provides NOWRad weather information and reports in the chart application. You can adjust the intensity of the overlay to achieve optimal visibility of both chart and weather information.
Note: Radar range synchronization is not available when the chart motion mode is set to Auto Range.
Aerial photo overlay
Your electronic charts may include aerial photography.
Note: The NOWRad weather overlay can only be used in North America and its coastal waters.
Aerial photos cover the navigable waters up to 3 miles inside the coastline. The resolution is dependent on the region covered by the chart card.
Enabling aerial photo overlay From the chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation.
Chart application
Enabling NOWRad weather overlay on the chart
In the 2D chart view: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Overlays. 4. Select NOWRad.
The NOWRad opacity slider bar control is displayed showing the current opacity percentage. 5. Adjust the slider bar to the required opacity, or 6. Select Off to turn the NOWRad overlay off.
Viewing weather reports from the chart application
In the 2D chart view: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Weather Reports. 3. Select Report At to switch between weather
reports from Ship or Cursor location.
245
4. Select either Tropical Statements, Marine Warnings, Marine Zone Forecasts, or Watchbox Warnings.
Databoxes
Databoxes can be displayed in the application window.
The databoxes can be switched on and off and the data that is displayed can be customized.
Switching the chart grid on and off
The Chart grid can be switched on and off by following the steps below.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlays. 3. Select Chart Grid: so that On is selected to turn
the grid on, or 4. Select Chart Grid: so that Off is selected to turn
the grid off.
2D shading
If supported by your cartography type, you can switch shading of land and sea contours on and off.
1
Customizing databoxes in the chart application
To switch databoxes on and off and to select data to display follow the steps below.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlay. 3. Select Databoxes. 4. Select Databox 1 > On. 5. Select Databox 2 > On. 6. Choose the Select Data option for the relevant
databox. 7. Select the category that reflects the type of data
you want to display in the databox. For example, Depth data. 8. Select the data item. The data you selected is displayed onscreen in the appropriate databox.
Chart grid
You can overlay a grid onto the Chart application
The Chart grid represents the lines of latitude and longitude.
2
D13002-1
1. 2D shading On. 2. 2D shading Off By default 2D shading is switched on. Switching 2D shading on and off 2D shading can be switched on and off by following the steps below. From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlays. 3. Select 2D Shading: so that On is selected to
turn the shading on, or 4. Select 2D Shading: so that Off is selected to
turn the shading off.
By default the Chart grid is switched off.
246
a Series / c Series / e Series
Community layer If supported by your cartography type, you can display User Generated Content (UGC) on the Chart application.
1
Switching chart text on and off
The Chart text can be switched on and off by following the steps below.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlays. 3. Select Chart Text: so that On is selected to turn
chart text on, or 4. Select Chart Text: so that Off is selected to turn
chart text off.
2
Chart boundaries
Chart boundary lines can be shown on-screen, these lines indicate the boundary of the cartography currently in use.
1
D13008-1
1. Community feature On.
2. Community feature Off.
To check if your Navionics cartography supports
community edits downloads please refer the
Navionics website: for information and instructions
2
on downloading the updates to your chart card.
Switching the community edits on and off
If supported by your cartography type, the User Generated Content (UGC) overlay can be switched on and off by following the steps below.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlays. 3. Select Community Edits: so that On is selected
to display UGC, or 4. Select Community Edits: so that Off is selected
to turn off UGC.
Chart text
If supported by your cartography type, chart text such as place names and caution text etc. can be switched on and off.
1
D13005-1
1. Chart boundaries On. 2. Chart boundaries Off. By default Chart boundary lines are switched On.
Switching chart boundary lines on and off Chart boundary lines can be switched on and off by following the steps below. From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlays. 3. Select Chart Boundaries: so that On is selected
to display boundary lines, or 4. Select Chart Boundaries: so that Off is selected
to turn the boundary lines off.
Range rings Range rings provide an on-screen incremental representation of distance from your vessel to help you judge distances at a glance.
2
D13006-1
1. Chart text On.
2. Chart text Off.
The default setting for Chart text is On.
Chart application
247
The rings are always centred on your vessel, and the scale varies to suit your current chart range. Each ring is labelled with the distance from your vessel.
By default range rings are switched off. Range rings are not displayed in 3D view.
· From the Radar application: Menu > Zones > Safe Zone Set-up.
· From the Chart application with only the AIS overlay enabled: Menu > AIS Options > Safe Zone > Safe Zone Set-up.
Switching range rings on and off
The range rings can be switched on and off by following the steps below.
With the Chart application in 2D view: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Overlays. 4. Select Range Rings: so that On is selected to
display Range Rings, or 5. Select Range Rings: so that Off is selected to
turn the Range Rings off.
Safe Zone Ring
The chart application can display and configure a MARPA / AIS safe zone ring.
· From the Chart application with only the Radar overlay enabled: Menu > Radar Options > Safe Zone > Safe Zone Set-up.
· From the Chart application with the AIS and Radar overlays enabled: Menu > Radar & AIS Options > Safe Zone > Safe Zone Set-up.
From the Safe Zone Set-up menu: 1. Select Safe Zone Radius.
i. Select the required radius for the safe zone. 2. Select Time to Safe Zone.
i. Select the required time period. 3. Select Safezone (AIS targets) so that On is
highlighted. Selecting Safezone (AIS targets) will switch the dangerous target alarm between On and Off.
Fuel range rings
The fuel range ring gives an estimated range that can be reached with the estimated fuel remaining on-board.
The safe zone ring shares its configuration with the Radar applications safe zone ring, however can be displayed independently of the safe zone ring in the Radar application.
If a MARPA or AIS target will reach the safe zone ring within the time to safe zone selected an alarm is sounded.
Showing the Safe Zone Ring in the Chart application
To show the Safe Zone ring follow the instructions below:
From the Chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Overlays. 4. Select Safe Zone Ring so that Show is selected.
Selecting Safe Zone Ring will switch the zone ring between hidden to visible.
The fuel range ring can be displayed graphically in the chart application and indicates an estimated range that can be reached with the:
· Current rate of fuel consumption.
· Estimated fuel remaining on-board.
· Course remaining in a straight line.
· Current speed maintained.
Setting up the Safe Zone Ring
You can adjust the Safe Zone Ring radius, the time to Safe Zone and choose whether AIS targets trigger the Safe Zone alarm from the Safe Zone Ring Set-up menu.
The Safe Zone Set-up menu can be accessed as follows:
248
a Series / c Series / e Series
Note:
The fuel range ring is an estimated range that can be reached at the current rate of fuel consumption, of the fuel onboard and based on a number of external factors which could either extend or shorten the projected range.
This estimate is based on data received from external fuel management devices, or via the Fuel Manager. It does not take into account prevailing conditions such as tide, current, sea state, wind etc.
You should not rely on the fuel range ring feature for accurate voyage planning or in emergency and safety critical situations.
1. Select Presentation.
2. Select Overlays.
3. Select Waypoint Name: so that Show is selected to display the waypoint names, or
4. Select Waypoint Name: so that Hide is selected to hide the waypoint names.
Route and Track widths
The width of route and track lines can be changed.
Set-
ting
Route
Track
Thin
Enabling the fuel range ring
From the chart application, in 2D view:
1. Select Menu.
Nor-
2. Select Presentation.
mal
3. Select Overlays.
4. Select Fuel Range Ring so that On is selected.
The fuel range ring pop-up message is displayed.
5. Select OK to turn on the fuel range rings.
Thick
Disabling the Fuel Range Ring
From the chart application, in 2D view: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Overlays. 4. Select Fuel Range Ring so that Off is selected.
Changing the size of the vessel symbol
The vessel symbol size can be changed following the steps below.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlays. 3. Select Boat Size: so that Large is selected to
show the large vessel symbols, or 4. Select Boat Size: so that Small is selected to
show the small vessel symbol.
Changing route or track line widths
The width of the line that make up routes and tracks can be changed by following the steps below.
From the Chart application menu. 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Overlays. 3. Select either Route Width or Track Width as
required. 4. Select the width you require from the list.
Displaying waypoint names
Waypoint names can be shown next to their respective waypoint symbols.
From the Chart application menu.
Chart application
249
18.12 Chart vectors
Chart vectors are available for heading, COG, wind direction and tide direction. Chart vectors are only available in 2D view. A range of vector graphics can be displayed in the chart application when in 2D chart view. The following vectors can be independently enabled or disabled:
4
1
Setting vector length and width
You can specify the length and width of the heading and COG vectors by following the steps below.
In 2D chart view.
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Vectors. 3. Select Vector Length.
A list of times is displayed . 4. Select a time setting or select Infinite. 5. Select Vector Width.
A list of widths is displayed. 6. Select either Thin, Normal or Wide.
2
3
D13007-1
Item Descriptions
1
Wind arrow -- wind direction is displayed as a
yellow line with solid arrow heads pointing towards
your vessel, indicating the wind direction. The width
of the arrow indicates the wind strength.
2
Tide arrow -- tide is displayed as a blue line with
solid arrow head pointing away from your vessel, in
the direction of the tidal set. The width of the arrow
indicates the tide strength.
3
HDG (heading) vector -- a red line shows the
vessel's heading. An arrow head is used if the vector
length is set to a value other than infinite.
4. COG (Course Over Ground) vector -- a green line indicates the vessel's actual course. A double arrow head is used if the vector length is set to a value other than infinite.
Note: If Speed Over Ground (SOG) or heading data is not available, vectors cannot be displayed.
Vector length
The length of the HDG and COG vector lines can be set to the distance your vessel will travel in the time you specify at your current speed or they can be set to infinite.
Enabling and disabling chart vectors
You can enable and disable the available chart vectors by following the steps below.
In 2D chart view:
From the Chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Vectors. 3. Select the relevant menu item to switch Heading
Vector, COG Vector, Tide Arrow, or Wind Arrow On or Off as appropriate.
250
a Series / c Series / e Series
18.13 Cartography objects
Chart detail The chart detail setting determines the amount of detail shown in the Chart application. Low
High
Selecting the Low option for the Chart Detail disables the following objects and overlays: · 2D Shading · Community Edits · Chart Text · Chart Boundaries · Light Sectors · Routing Systems · Caution Areas · Marine Features · Land Features · Panoramic Photo · Roads · Additional Wrecks · Color Seabed Areas · Depth Contours Changing the level of chart detail From the chart application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Objects. 3. Select Chart Detail to switch between High or
Low, as appropriate.
Chart application
251
Cartography objects If supported by you cartography type, cartographic objects can be individually switched on and off. The table below show a list of these objects. The Objects menu is accessed from: Menu > Presentation > Objects.
Note: The Objects menu is only available when the cartography in use supports these features.
Object (Menu item) Show Rocks
Nav. Marks Nav. Mark Symbols Light Sectors Routing Systems Caution Areas Marine Features
Land Features Business Services Panoramic Photos
Description
Options
Determines the depth at which rocks are displayed in the chart application.
· 06 ft / 02 m / 01 fa · 018 ft / 05 m / 03 fa
· 030 ft / 010 m/ 05 fa
· 050 ft / 015 m / 08 fa
· 060 ft / 020 m / 010 fa
· All (default)
Determines whether navigation marks are displayed on the chart:
· Off -- navigation marks are NOT displayed.
· Off · On (default)
· On -- navigation marks are displayed.
Determines which set of navigation mark
· International (default)
symbols is used -- International, or US. These symbols correspond to paper charts.
· US
Determines whether the sector of light cast by a · Off
fixed beacon is displayed or not.
· On (default)
· Off -- sector of light is NOT displayed.
· On -- sector of light is displayed.
Determines whether routing data is displayed or not.
· Off -- routing data is NOT displayed.
· Off · On (default)
· On -- routing data is displayed.
Determines whether caution data is displayed or not.
· Off -- caution data is NOT displayed.
· OFF · ON (default)
· On -- caution data is displayed.
When this menu item is set to On, the
· Off
following water-based cartographic features are displayed:
· On (default)
· Cables.
· Nature of seabed points.
· Tide stations.
· Current stations.
· Port information.
When this menu item is set to On, land-based · Off
cartographic features are displayed.
· On (default)
When this menu item is set to On, symbols indicating the location of a business will be shown.
· Off · On (default)
Determines whether panoramic photos are available for landmarks such as ports and marinas.
· Off · On (default)
252
a Series / c Series / e Series
Object (Menu item) Roads
Additional Wrecks Colored Seabed Areas
Description
Determines whether major coastal roads are displayed on the chart:
· Off -- coastal roads are NOT displayed.
· On -- coastal roads are displayed.
Determines whether extended information for new wrecks is displayed.
Provides greater definition of the seabed. This applies only to limited areas where the extra detail is available.
Options · Off · On (default)
· Off · On (default) · Off (default) · On
18.14 Object information
If supported by your cartography type, you can view detailed information about specific cartographic objects.
· Harbor Facility -- LightHouse charts only
This information can be accessed using the Chart Objects or Find Nearest options from the chart context menu:
· Select a chart object on screen and choose Chart Objects from the chart context menu to view information about the selected object.
· Select Find Nearest from the chart context menu to search for objects close by.
Depending on the cartography type you are using, you can view some or all of the following additional information:
· Details of each cartographic object that is marked on the chart, including source data for structures, lines, open sea areas etc.
· Details of ports, port features, and business services.
· Pilot book information (similar to what you would see in a marine almanac). Pilot book information is available at certain ports.
· Panoramic photos of ports and marinas. The availability of photos is indicated by a camera symbol on the chart display.
You can also search for the nearest instance of a particular chart object using the Find Nearest option. The following object can be searched for:
· Port (Search by name -- Navionics charts only.
· Waypoints
· Ports -- Navionics charts only.
· Tide Station -- Navionics charts only.
· Current Station -- Navionics charts only.
· Obstructions
· Wrecks
· Port Services
· Business Services -- Navionics charts only.
· Small Craft Facility -- LightHouse charts only.
Chart application
Displaying chart object information
From the chart application: 1. Select an object.
The chart context menu is displayed. 2. Select Chart Objects.
The Chart Object Dialog is displayed. 3. Selecting available options will display detailed
information about that item. 4. Selecting the position in the dialog will close the
information dialog and position the cursor over the object.
Searching for the nearest chart object or service
From the chart application: 1. Select a location on screen.
The chart context menu is displayed. 2. Select Find Nearest.
A list of chart object types is displayed. 3. Select the chart object or service in the list.
A list is displayed of the available instances of that particular object or service. 4. Select the item that you want to find. The cursor will be repositioned over the selected object or a list of instance will be displayed.
Searching for a port by name
From the chart application: 1. Select a location on screen.
The chart context menu is displayed. 2. Select Find Nearest.
A list of chart object types is displayed.
253
3. Select Port (search by name) from the list. The onscreen keyboard is displayed.
4. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the desired port name.
5. Select SAVE. The search results are displayed.
6. Select the position against an entry in the list to reposition the cursor over that position.
Displaying pilot book information From the chart application, when a port symbol is displayed for a port which has a pilot book: 1. Select the port symbol.
The chart context menu will be displayed. 2. Select Pilot Book. 3. Select the relevant chapter.
Displaying panoramic photos From the chart application, when a camera symbol is displayed, indicating the availability of a photo: 1. Select the camera symbol.
The chart context menu is displayed. 2. Select Photo.
The photo is displayed on screen. Note: Not all cartography types are capable of displaying panoramic photos.
Current information
Animated current information The electronic charts may allow animation of the current information current stations.
D11748-3
Animated current information is available in the chart application wherever a diamond-shaped symbol with a "C" is displayed:
This symbol identifies the location of a current station and the availability of current information for the location.
· Arrows indicate the direction of current flows.
· The length of the arrow indicates the flow rate.
· The color of the arrow indicates the flow speed:
Red: increasing current flow speed.
Blue: decreasing current flow speed.
The animation can be viewed continuously or incrementally at a time interval that you specify. You can also set the date for the animation, and start or restart the animation at any point within a 24-hour period. If the system does not have a valid date and time the date used will be midday for the system default date.
Note: Not all electronic charts support the animated currents feature. Check the Navionics website: www.navionics.com to ensure the features are available on your chosen cartography level.
Viewing animated current information
From the chart application: 1. Select diamond-shaped current icon.
The chart context menu is displayed. 2. Select Animate.
The animate menu is displayed and the current icons are replaced with dynamic current arrows
Controlling animations
From the chart application, with the animate menu displayed: 1. To start or stop the animation, select Animate: to
switch between Play and Pause. 2. To view the animation in steps, select Step Back
or Step Forward. 3. To set the animation step interval, pause any
playing animations, and then select Set Time Interval. 4. To set the animation date, select Set Date and then using the on screen keyboard enter the required date. 5. To set the animation date to the current date select Today. 6. To set the animation date to 24 hours previous to the current date select Previous Day. 7. To set the animation date to 24 hours ahead of the current date select Next Day.
When you select a current station symbol the chart context menu is displayed, which provides the Animate option.
When you select Animate the animate menu is displayed and the diamond-shaped current symbols are replaced with dynamic current arrows which indicate the direction and strength of the currents:
Current animation.
254
a Series / c Series / e Series
Current graphs
Current graphs provide a graphical view of current activity.
1
2
3
4
10
5
Tide information
Animated tide information
The electronic charts may allow animation of the tide information tide stations.
Animated tide information is available in the chart application wherever a diamond-shaped symbol with a "T" is displayed:
This symbol identifies tide stations and the availability of tide information for the location.
9 6
8
7
D12309-1
1. Back -- Return to the previous menu or view.
2. Sunrise indicator -- Indicates when the sun rises.
3. Sunset indicator -- Indicates when the sun sets.
4. Exit -- Closes the dialog.
5. Nightfall indicator -- The greyed-out section of the graph indicates when nightfall occurs.
6. Current direction -- Indicates the direction of current (relative to north).
7. Ebb/Flood -- Displays a list showing ebb, slack and flood tides.
8. Date navigation -- Use the icons to move to the next or previous day.
9. Time -- The horizontal axis of the graph indicates time, in accordance with the time format specified in the Units Set-up options.
10. Current speed -- The vertical axis of the graph indicates speed, in accordance with the speed preferences specified in the Units Set-up options
Note: The data provided in the current graphs is for information purposes only and should NOT be relied upon as a substitute for prudent navigation. Only official government charts and notices to mariners contain all the current information needed for safe navigation. Always maintain a permanent watch.
Displaying details of currents
From the chart application: 1. Select the C diamond-shaped current icon.
The chart context menu is displayed. 2. Select Current Station.
The graph for the selected station is displayed.
Chart application
When you select a tide station symbol the chart context menu is displayed, which provides the Animate option.
When you select Animate the animate menu is displayed and the diamondshaped symbols are replaced with dynamic tide bar which indicates the predicted tide height for the actual time and date:
Tide animation.
· Tide height is indicated by a gauge. The gauge is comprised of 8 levels, which are set according to the absolute minimum / maximum values of that particular day.
· The color of the arrow on the tide gauges indicates changes in the tide height:
Red: increasing tide height.
Blue: decreasing tide height.
The animation can be viewed continuously or incrementally at a time interval that you specify. You can also set the date for the animation, and start or restart the animation at any point within a 24-hour period. If the system does not have a valid date and time the date used will be midday for the system default date.
Note: Not all electronic charts support the animated tides feature. Check the Navionics website: www.navionics.com to ensure the features are available on your chosen cartography level.
Viewing animated tide information
From the chart application: 1. Select diamond-shaped tide icon.
The chart context menu is displayed. 2. Select Animate.
The animate menu is displayed and the tide icon is replaced with a dynamic tide bar indicator.
Controlling animations
From the chart application, with the animate menu displayed: 1. To start or stop the animation, select Animate: to
switch between Play and Pause. 2. To view the animation in steps, select Step Back
or Step Forward. 3. To set the animation step interval, pause any
playing animations, and then select Set Time Interval.
255
4. To set the animation date, select Set Date and then using the on screen keyboard enter the required date.
5. To set the animation date to the current date select Today.
6. To set the animation date to 24 hours previous to the current date select Previous Day.
7. To set the animation date to 24 hours ahead of the current date select Next Day.
2. Select Tide Station. The graph for the selected station is displayed.
Tide graphs Tide graphs provide a graphical view of tidal activity.
1
2
3
4
9 5
8
6
7
D12294-2
1. Back -- return to the previous menu or view.
2. Sunrise indicator -- indicates when the sun rises.
3. Sunset indicator -- indicates when the sun sets.
4. Exit -- closes the dialog.
5. Nightfall indicator -- the greyed-out section of the graph indicates when nightfall occurs.
6. Low / High Tide -- Indicates the time at which low or high tide occurs.
7. Date navigation -- Use the icons to move to the next or previous day.
8. Time -- The horizontal axis of the graph indicates time, in accordance with the time format specified in the System Settings.
9. Depth -- The vertical axis of the graph indicates tidal water depth. The units for the depth measurement are based on those specified in the Homescreen > Customize > Units Set-up > Depth Units menu.
Note: The data provided in the tide graphs is for information purposes only and should NOT be relied upon as a substitute for prudent navigation. Only official government charts and notices to mariners contain all the current information needed for safe navigation. Always maintain a permanent watch.
Displaying details of tides
From the chart application:
1. Select the T diamond-shaped tide icon. The chart context menu is displayed.
256
a Series / c Series / e Series
18.15 Depth & Contour options
If supported by your cartography type, the following depth and contour settings are available.
Note: The menu items available are dependant upon your cartography type. The depth options are dependant upon the units of measure in use on your system.
Menu item Show Soundings Show Contours Shallow Contour
Safety Contour
Deep Contour
Cartography type LightHouse vector charts and Navionics
Navionics
LightHouse charts
LightHouse charts
LightHouse vector charts and Navionics
Description
Options
Determines the depth at which · None depth soundings are displayed. · 030 ft / 010 m / 05 fa
· 060 ft / 020 m / 010 fa
· 0180 ft / 050 m / 030 fa
· 0500 ft / 0150 m / 083 fa
· All (default)
Determines whether contours are · Off
displayed.
· 06 ft / 02 m / 01 fa
· 018 ft / 05 m / 03 fa
· 030 ft / 010 m / 05 fa
· 050 ft / 015 m / 08 fa
· 060 ft / 020 m / 010 fa
· All (default)
Determines the depth at which the Shallow contour is displayed. The Shallow contour cannot be set to a value greater than the Safety or Deep contours.
· Off · 6 ft / 2 m / 1 fa · 12 ft / 3 m / 2 fa (default) · 18 ft / 5 m / 3 fa
· 20 ft / 6 m / 4 fa
· 30 ft / 10 m / 5 fa
· 50 ft / 15 m / 8 fa
· 60 ft / 20 m / 10 fa
Determines the depth at which the Safety contour is displayed. The Safety contour cannot be set to a value less than the Shallow contour or higher than the Deep contour.
· Off · 6 ft / 2 m / 1 fa · 12 ft / 3 m / 2 fa · 18 ft / 5 m / 3 fa · 20 ft / 6 m / 4 fa
· 30 ft / 10 m / 5 fa (default)
· 50 ft / 15 m / 8 fa
· 60 ft / 20 m / 10 fa
Determines the depth at which the Deep contour is displayed. The Deep contour cannot be set to a value less than the Shallow or Safety contours.
· Off · 6 ft / 2 m / 1 fa · 12 ft / 3 m / 2 fa · 18 ft / 5 m / 3 fa
· 20 ft / 6 m / 4 fa
· 30 ft / 10 m / 5 fa
· 50 ft / 15 m / 8 fa (default)
· 60 ft / 20 m / 10 fa
Chart application
257
Menu item Deep Water Color
Sonar Logs
Cartography type Navionics
Navionics
Description
Determines the color of deep water.
Allows logging of depth and position data to your Navionics chart card. This data will be sent to Navionics to improve the contour detail of Sonar Charts on your multifunction display. Refer to the Navionics website www.navionics.com for instructions on how to upload your sonar logs.
Options · White (default) · Blue · On · Off
Depth soundings and contours
If supported by your cartography type, depth soundings and contours can be used in the Chart application to provide awareness of water depth.
When using vector based cartography you can adjust the depth at which the contours and soundings appear on-screen.
3
1
2
D13009-1
1. Shallow contour
2. Safety contour
3. Deep contour
The Depth & Contours menu can be accessed from: Menu > Presentation > Depth & Contours.
258
a Series / c Series / e Series
18.16 My Data options
The My Data menu provides access to your user data. The options are found in the My Data menu: Menu > My Data.
· Waypoints -- View the waypoints group list.
· Routes -- View the Routes list.
· Tracks -- View the Tracks list.
Refer to Chapter 17 Waypoints, Routes and Tracks for further details.
18.17 Multiple chart synchronization
You can synchronize the heading, range, and position information across multiple chart views and networked displays.
When chart synchronization is enabled:
· It is indicated by "CHRT Sync" in the chart application title bar.
· Any changes made to the heading, range or position in any chart instance will be reflected in all other chart instances.
Note: When the 2D and 3D chart views are synchronized, the Motion Mode is always Relative Motion.
Synchronizing multiple chart instances
From the chart application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Chart Sync. 4. Select Chart from the list.
A tick is placed next to the selected option. 5. Repeat the steps above for each chart instance
and if required on each networked multifunction display you want to sync the chart view.
Note: You cannot sync to another chart if radar sync is turned on.
Chart application
259
18.18 Measuring distances and bearings
You can use the databar and context menu information you can use the measure function to measure distances in the chart application.
You can determine the distance and bearing:
· from your vessel to the position of the cursor;
· between two points on the chart.
Measuring from vessel position to cursor
From the chart application: 1. Select the location on screen that you want
to measure the distance or bearing from your vessel. The chart context menu will be displayed. 2. Select Measure. The following will happen:
· The measure menu will be displayed.
· A line will be drawn from the cursor position to the center of the screen.
· The cursor location will be moved at the center of the screen.
· The bearing and distance will be displayed next to the new cursor location.
3. From the measure menu select From so that Ship is selected. The ruler line is re-drawn from the cursor position to your vessel.
4. You can now adjust the ruler position by moving the cursor to the desired location.
5. If you want the ruler displayed after you have closed the measure menu, select Ruler: so that On is highlighted. Selecting ruler will switch the ruler On and Off.
6. Select Back or Ok to close the measure menu leaving the current measurement on-screen.
4. You can now adjust the end point by moving the cursor to the desired location.
5. You can also Swap Direction of the ruler so that the bearing becomes the bearing from end point to start point.
6. If you want the ruler displayed after you have closed the measure menu, select Ruler so that On is highlighted. Selecting display ruler will switch the ruler On and Off.
7. Select Back or Ok to exit the measure menu leaving the current measurement on-screen.
Repositioning the ruler
You can reposition a ruler by following the steps below. 1. Select the current ruler.
The ruler context menu is displayed. 2. Select Measure.
You can now reposition the ruler as required.
Measuring from point to point
From the chart application: 1. Select the location on screen that you want
to measure the distance or bearing from your vessel. The chart context menu will be displayed. 2. Select Measure. The following will happen:
· The measure menu will be displayed.
· A line will be drawn from the cursor position to the center of the screen.
· The cursor location will be moved at the center of the screen.
· The bearing and distance will be displayed next to the new cursor location.
3. Select From so that Cursor is selected. Selecting measure from will switch between Ship and Cursor.
260
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 19: Fishfinder application
Chapter contents · 19.1 Fishfinder overview and features on page 262 · 19.2 Sonar technologies on page 264 · 19.3 Raymarine sonar modules on page 267 · 19.4 Multiple sonar module support on page 267 · 19.5 Sonar crosstalk interference on page 269 · 19.6 Custom channels on page 271 · 19.7 The sonar image on page 272 · 19.8 Depth Range on page 273 · 19.9 SideVisionTM Range on page 274 · 19.10 Fishfinder scrolling on page 274 · 19.11 Fishfinder display modes on page 275 · 19.12 SideVisionTM Views on page 277 · 19.13 Presentation menu options on page 278 · 19.14 Depth and distance on page 279 · 19.15 Waypoints in the Fishfinder application on page 280 · 19.16 Sensitivity settings on page 280 · 19.17 Fishfinder alarms on page 285 · 19.18 Frequency tuning on page 286 · 19.19 Sounder set-up menu options on page 287 · 19.20 Transducer set-up menu options on page 288 · 19.21 Resetting the sonar on page 289
Fishfinder application
261
19.1 Fishfinder overview and features
The Fishfinder application uses a sonar module and a suitable sonar transducer. The sonar module interprets signals from the transducer and builds up a detailed underwater view. Various sonar technologies are available, all of which work on the same basic principles.
The sonar transducer sends pulses of sound waves into the water and measures the time it takes for the sound waves to travel to the bottom and back. The returning echoes are affected by bottom structure and by any other objects in their path, for example reefs, wrecks, shoals or fish. The Sonar module interprets these signals and builds up a detailed underwater view which is displayed in the Fishfinder application.
The Fishfinder application uses colors and shading to indicate the strength of the returns. You can use this information to determine the bottom structure, the size of fish and other objects in the water, such as debris or air bubbles
Note:
· Some transducers include additional sensors to measure water temperature and/or speed.
· Not all Sonar modules can be used for a source of depth information.
Sonar technology Traditional sonar technology
CHIRP technology DownVisionTM technology
SideVisionTM technology
· Traditional sonar technology
· CHIRP technology
· CHIRP DownVisionTM overview
· CHIRP SideVisionTM overview
Fishfinder display modes (Zoom, A-Scope or Bottom Lock).
Note: The display modes available are dependent on the sonar channel / module being displayed.
· 19.11 Fishfinder display modes
Depth range controls (manual · 19.8 Depth Range or automatic)
Note: Not applicable to SideVisionTM sonar modules.
Distance range controls
Note: Only applicable to SideVisionTM sonar modules.
· 19.9 SideVisionTM Range
Sensitivity Settings to help optimize and simplify the displayed image.
· 19.16 Sensitivity settings
Fishfinder screen
The Fishfinder application displays a scrolling image across the screen of the water under your vessel. Each Fishfinder application pane can be independently configured to show a different sonar module / frequency.
Example CHIRP screen
Fishfinder features
Supports multiple, active sonar modules.
Create custom channels.
Fishfinder application panes.
Pausing and adjusting the speed of the scrolling image.
Using waypoints to mark fishing spots or target locations.
Determining target depths and distances.
Setting Fishfinder alarms (fish, depth or water temperature).
· 19.4 Multiple sonar module support
· 19.6 Custom channels · Fishfinder application
panes · 19.10 Fishfinder scrolling
· 19.15 Waypoints in the Fishfinder application
· 19.14 Depth and distance
· 19.17 Fishfinder alarms
Example DownVisionTM screen Example SideVisionTM screen
262
a Series / c Series / e Series
The Fishfinder window includes the following features:
· The bottom together with any bottom structure such as reefs and shipwrecks etc.
· Target images indicating fish.
· A status bar indicating the current sonar module and channel in use.
· Bottom depth.
· * On-Screen controls.
Note: * On-screen controls are only available on multifunction displays with a touchscreen and are dependent on the sonar module and channel that is being displayed.
· Depth
· Range
The context menu also provide the following menu items:
· Place Waypoint
· * Place Marker
· * Move Marker (only available when a marker has been placed.)
· * Erase Marker (only available when a marker has been placed.)
Note: * Not available on SideVisionTM.
Accessing the context menu
You can access the context menu by following the steps below. 1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays:
i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
Fishfinder application panes
All panes showing an instance of the Fishfinder application is independent and any changes made to the Channel selection or Display mode are automatically saved against that pane of the application.
Multiple pages can be set up on the Homescreen which can be used to display different combinations of Channel and Display mode.
Fishfinder context menu
The Fishfinder application context menu displays data and shortcuts to menu items.
The context menu provides the data for the position of the cursor:
Fishfinder application
263
19.2 Sonar technologies
Traditional sonar technology
Traditional sonar uses a single carrier frequency or carrier wave for the sonar ping. The sonar works by measuring the time it takes the ping echo to return to the transducer to determine target depth.
CHIRP Sonar overview CHIRP sonar produces a conical shaped beam, the coverage of the conical beam is the water column directly beneath the vessel
Conical beam
D12600-2
CHIRP technology
CHIRP sonars use a swept frequency 'CHIRP' signal which can distinguish between multiple close targets, this enables the sonar to display multiple targets instead of large combined targets that you would see when using traditional non-CHIRP sonar.
Benefits of CHIRP include improvements to target resolution, bottom detection even through bait balls and thermoclines and detection sensitivity.
D12784-2
Sonar is effective at a range of speeds. In deeper waters the CHIRP bandwidth is automatically optimized to improve bottom lock and the detection of moving objects (e.g. fish) in the wider water column.
CHIRP sonar screen example
D12601-2
CHIRP DownVisionTM overview
DownVisionTM produces a wideangle side-to-side beam and a thin fore-to-aft beam. The coverage of the DownVisionTM beam is a water column directly beneath and to the sides of the vessel.
DownVisionTM beam
D12777-2
264
a Series / c Series / e Series
DownVisionTM is effective at lower vessel speeds. In deeper waters the CHIRP bandwidth is automatically optimized to improve bottom lock and the detection of moving objects (e.g. fish) in the wider water column.
The wide, thin beam produces clear target returns. The use of CHIRP processing and a higher operating frequency provide a more detailed image, making it easier to identify bottom structures around which fish may reside.
CHIRP DownVisionTM screen example
The use of CHIRP processing and a high operating frequency provide a detailed image, making it easier to identify bottom structures around which fish may reside. The narrow angle the beams make with the bottom at longer ranges can reveal the shadows of structures that protrude from the bottom.
CHIRP SideVisionTM screen example
CHIRP SideVisionTM overview
SideVisionTM interprets signals from a pair of side-looking transducers and builds up a detailed underwater view as your vessel moves forward. The transducers send pulses of sound waves into the water on each side of your vessel, and record the sound waves that reflect off the bottom, and off objects on the bottom or suspended in the water column. The received echoes are affected by the bottom material (for example mud, gravel or rock), and by any other objects in their path (for example cables on the sea floor, bridge piers, wrecks, shoals or fish).
SideVisionTM produces two wideangle side-to-side beams, each with a thin fore-to-aft beam. The coverage of the SideVisionTM beams is a swath on each side of the vessel.
SideVision beams
Note: The "Depth" figure shown in the illustration above assumes that you have a device in your system that provides depth data. Please be aware that not all transducers and / or sonar modules support depth sensing. For more information, refer to the latest specifications and documentation available for your particular products on the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com).
D#####-1
SideVisionTM is effective at lower vessel speeds. The wide, thin beams produce clear target returns. As your vessel moves forward, subsequent returns build up to provide an image of the sea floor on each side of your vessel.
Fishfinder application
265
Interpreting SideVisionTM images
The following illustration shows how SideVisionTM images on your multifunction display are related to the water column and sea floor to the sides of your vessel.
Interpreting SideVision images
SideVisionTM images are constructed line-by-line, similar to the way a television picture is composed of many horizontal lines. Each successive ping from the SideVisionTM transducer adds a new line of image data to the top of your display. Each new line shows sonar returns from both the port and starboard sides of your vessel.
As new lines are added with each successive ping, older data gradually scrolls down the display, building up a detailed image of the water column and sea floor to the sides of your vessel. If your vessel maintains the same bearing and speed for a period of time, you can interpret the image as a plan of the sea floor along your vessel's course.
The illustration also identifies examples of features that may be visible in SideVisionTM images:
· Water: close to your vessel, the SideVisionTM sonar beams may not interact with any solid objects in the water column until they hit the sea floor. The water column close to your vessel is displayed as a dark band in the image. The abrupt change to a lighter section in the image indicates where the sea floor is first detected with each ping.
is shown within the water column, at a distance of approximately 30 feet from the vessel.
· Vegetation: objects in contact with the sea floor that are close to your vessel may be clearly visible in the image at the point where the SideVisionTM beams hit the sea floor. In this example, the shapes in the image indicate vegetation attached to the sea floor.
· Structure: the lighter regions of the SideVisionTM image represent the sea floor. It may be possible to detect differences in the bottom material (for example, where an area of mud meets an area of gravel) as well as solid structures such as pipelines and piers. Larger solid structures, and sea floor relief, may reveal an area of shadow directed away from your vessel.
Note: Unlike DownVisionTM, SideVisionTM does not provide direct depth readings. The scale shown across the top of the image indicates the distance of features from your vessel.
· Bait ball: objects in the water column close to your vessel may be detected before the SideVisionTM beams hit the sea floor. In this example, a bait ball
266
a Series / c Series / e Series
19.3 Raymarine sonar modules
You can find details on Raymarine's sonar modules below.
The depth shown below for DownVisionTM and the range for SideVisionTM sonar modules are typical achievable depths / ranges, depending on the connected transducer in optimum water conditions. The depths shown for Traditional and CHIRP sonar modules are the maximum depths achievable depending on connected transducer in optimum water conditions.
19.4 Multiple sonar module support
Your multifunction display supports multiple active sonar modules on the same network.
You can select which sonar channel you want to be displayed on-screen. Only 1 channel can be displayed at a time in a single Fishfinder application pane. Multiple channels can be displayed at the same time using custom splitscreen pages. Alternatively multiple custom pages could be set up to suit individual requirements.
Sonar module CP100 CP200 CP300 CP450C Dragonfly a68 / a78 / a98 / a128 a67 / a77 / a97 / a127 c97 / c127 e7D / e97 / e127 DSM30 / DSM300
Technology / Description DownVisionTM external SideVisionTM external Traditional external CHIRP external DownVisionTM internal DownVisionTM internal Traditional internal Traditional internal Traditional internal Legacy external
Note: SideVisionTM cannot be used as a source of depth data.
Fishfinder application
Channel Auto
50 kHz / 83 kHz
100 kHz 160 kHz 200 kHz Low CHIRP Medium CHIRP High CHIRP DownVisionTM
Description
Sonar module
Automatically selects the best frequency for bottom tracking
· CP300
· CP450C
· Sonar variant MFDs
Good for deeper waters and for a wide sonar beam
· CP300
· CP450C
· Sonar variant MFDs
Good detail at most depths, with moderately wide sonar beam
· CP450C
Gives good detail in · CP450C shallow waters
Gives the best detail · CP300
in shallow waters
· Sonar variant
MFDs
Good target separation in deep water
· CP450C
Good all round performance, with great target separation
· CP450C
Best for clear target separation in shallow waters and bottom detail
· CP450C
Gives photo like images of bottom structure
· CP100
· DownVisionTM variant MFDs
267
Channel SideVisionTM
Sonar (200 kHz CHIRP)
Description
Gives a clear view of fish and structure either side of your vessel.
Targets bait and predator fish with wide sonar beam
Sonar module · CP200
· CP100 · DownVisionTM
variant MFDs
Note:
1. The channels available are dependent on the sonar module and its connected transducer.
2. DownVisionTM sonar modules include both a DownVisionTM channel and a traditional sonar channel.
3. SideVisionTM sonar modules include 1 SideVisionTM channel, the view icons can be used to switch between left and right views.
Displaying multiple sonar channels
Up to 4 sonar channels can be viewed at the same time by creating a custom splitscreen page that includes multiple Fishfinder application instances.
Important: Your ping rate may be reduced if you display different channels from the same sonar module at the same time.
1. Create a new splitscreen page using multiple instances of the Fishfinder application.
Refer to the Changing an existing page on the homescreen section to find out how to create a page.
Important software requirements for multiple sonar systems
If your system includes more than one source of sonar data you must ensure that any CP300 or CP450C sonar modules are running software version v4.04 or later.
2. Open the newly created page.
This applies to systems which include:
· Any number of MFD(s) with an internal sonar module plus a CP300 and / or CP450C sonar module; or
· No MFD(s) with an internal sonar module, but more than one CP300 or CP450C sonar module.
This does NOT apply to any systems that do NOT include a CP300 or CP450C sonar module.
Note: For software downloads and instructions on how to update the software for your product(s), visit www.raymarine.com/software.
Selecting the sonar channel
To select the channel you want to display follow the steps below.
From the Fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Channel.
The Channel selection page is displayed. 3. Select the tab for the sonar module you want to
use. A list of available channels for the selected sonar module is displayed. 4. Select a channel from the list.
3. Select the Ok button in one of the Fishfinder panes.
4. Select to channel that you want to view in the selected pane.
Refer to the Selecting the sonar channel section for details on selecting a sonar channel.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each pane on the splitscreen page.
The Channel selection page will close and the Fishfinder application will now show the selected channel.
268
a Series / c Series / e Series
Depth data source
19.5 Sonar crosstalk interference
Where multiple sources of depth data exist on a system and the depth Data Source is set to Auto the system will automatically select the optimum source for depth data.
The system will set the data source for depth according to the priority table below:
1st
CP450C
SeaTalkhs
2nd
CP300
SeaTalkhs
3rd
DSM300
SeaTalkhs
4th
DSM30
SeaTalkhs
There are 2 types of potential sonar crosstalk interference in a Raymarine sonar system:
1. SideVision sonar crosstalk interference
2. Multiple sonar crosstalk interference
The types of crosstalk interference that you may experience in your system depend on the combination and type of sonar equipment installed, and the way in which the equipment has been installed.
SideVision sonar crosstalk Multiple sonar crosstalk
interference
interference
5th
Traditional
SeaTalkhs / internal
sonar variant
multifunction
displays
6th
DownVisionTM
SeaTalkhs / internal
variant
multifunction
display
7th
CP100
SeaTalkhs
8th
Instrument /
SeaTalkng
multifunction
display
9th
Instrument
SeaTalk
10th
Instrument /
NMEA 0183
multifunction
display
If multiple sonar modules of the same type are present on a SeaTalkhs network then the unit with the highest serial number will be selected as the preferred data source. For SeaTalkng and NMEA 0183 networks the unit with the highest CAN address is selected.
If the preferred depth data source becomes unavailable then the system will automatically select the next highest priority data source.
Refer to the Data Source menu section for details on selecting preferred data sources.
Important: A depth offset must be set for all installed transducers to ensure consistent and accurate data is shown. Refer to the Depth Offset section for details.
Note: SideVisionTM cannot be used as a source for depth data.
Due to the high sensitivity of SideVision transducers, you may experience some minor crosstalk interference between the left and right receiving channels in areas of strong target returns. Examples of strong target returns include solid objects such as underwater bridge structure. This interference shows up in the Fishfinder application as subtle reflections from the right sonar image displayed in the left sonar image, or vice versa.
When using multiple sonar modules and transducers operating in overlapping frequency ranges, you may experience some crosstalk interference between the ranges. This interference is displayed in the Fishfinder application as vertical "rain drops" throughout the water column. These vertical "rain drops" indicate that 2 sonar modules are operating in close frequency proximity to one another.
SideVision sonar crosstalk interference
Crosstalk interference is expected behavior in a high sensitivity device such as a SideVision transducer, and is not indicative of a fault with your transducer or sonar module.
Reducing multiple sonar crosstalk interference
Crosstalk interference in systems with multiple sonar modules and transducers is the result of a number of factors, including installation, operation, and environment.
· Choose an equipment combination that minimizes overlapping frequencies. Wherever possible, choose to use sonar modules and transducers that operate in different frequency ranges ("Channels"), for example CP100 and CP300 sonar modules and CPT-100 and B744V transducers. This will help to ensure that each component is operating in a distinct relative frequency range for example, a "high" frequency range for the CP100 and a "low" frequency range for the CP300.
Fishfinder application
· Only use the sonar channels that you really need. Although it is possible to run multiple sonar
269
modules simultaneously in a Raymarine system, it may not always be necessary to do so. If you are in a scenario that requires only one sonar module to be active at a time, disable any other sonar modules by changing the Fishfinder application pane to a single one which only displays the output from one sonar module. Alternatively, disable the ping for any unused sonar modules by selecting MENU > Channel > Ping > OFF in the Fishfinder application.
· Identify the sonar module and transducer that is causing the interference. To do this, disable the ping or remove the power for one of the sonar modules in your system. If the interference in the Fishfinder application disappears immediately, you now know which device is causing the interference. If the interference doesn't disappear, repeat the exercise again with the other sonar module(s) in your system, one at a time. Once you know which device is causing the interference, proceed with the following methods to reduce the interference from the relevant device.
· Adjust the Interference Rejection Filter. The default setting for all Raymarine MFDs is "Auto". Changing this setting to "High" might help to reduce interference (MENU > Setup > Sounder Setup > Interference Rejection). Note that the Interference Rejection Filter setting is not available for all sonar modules.
· Decrease the power output of the interfering transducer. Adjusting the "Power Mode" in the Sensitivity Settings in the MFD's Fishfinder application can help to minimize the presence of crosstalk interference (MENU > Sensitivity Settings > Power Mode). Note that the Power Mode setting is not available for all transducers.
· Ensure that you have a common RF ground point for all electrical equipment on your vessel. On vessels without an RF ground system, ensure all product drain wires (where available) are connected directly to the negative battery terminal. Ineffective RF grounding can cause electrical interference which may in turn result in sonar crosstalk interference.
· Increase the physical distance between your sonar modules. Electrical interference may be occurring between a cable on one sonar module, and a cable on a different sonar module. Ensure that your sonar modules are physically located as far away from each other as possible.
· Increase the physical distance between your sonar transducers. Electrical and / or acoustic interference may be occurring between the different transducers in your system. Ensure that your transducers are physically located as far away from each other as possible.
Note: Given the effort and potential difficulties involved in relocating sonar equipment, it should only be considered as a last resort when you judge the interference to be a significant problem which cannot be resolved using the methods described above.
270
Note: Due to physical size and other constraints that vary from vessel to vessel, it may not be possible to completely eliminate crosstalk interference from your system. However, this will not impede your ability to benefit from the full capabilities of your sonar system. Being able to easily identify the way in which interference is displayed in the Fishfinder application can sometimes be the best and easiest route to dealing with it.
a Series / c Series / e Series
19.6 Custom channels
Renaming custom channels
When connected to an External Traditional sonar module such as the CP300 or an External CHIRP sonar module such as the CP450C, custom channels can be created from the sonar module's default channels; excluding Auto channels. This enables some settings to be customized and saved as a separate channel. These channels can then be assigned to individual Fishfinder application panes. Up to 10 custom channels can be created for each compatible sonar module.
When changed the following settings are saved to the channel that is currently displayed:
With the Channel selection page displayed:
1. Select the tab for the sonar module that contains the channel you want to rename.
2. Select the Channel options icon next to the custom channel.
The custom channel options page is displayed
· Sensitivity settings
· Range settings
· Frequency tuning -- Only 2 frequency settings can be saved per transducer / sonar module combination.
Note: Performing a Sonar Reset will erase all custom channels for the current sonar module.
Creating a custom channel
To create a custom channel follow the steps below.
From the Fishfinder application menu: 1. Select Channel.
The Channel selection page is displayed. 2. Select the tab for the sonar module you want to
create a custom channel for. 3. Select the Channel options icon located next to
the channel that you want to use, or 4. using nontouch controls, select the channel
and then press and hold the Ok button until the options screen is displayed. 5. Select Copy Channel. The on-screen keyboard is displayed. 6. Enter the name you want to assign to your new channel. 7. Select SAVE. The new channel is now available in the channel list for the relevant sonar module.
3. Select Rename. The on-screen keyboard is displayed.
4. Enter the new name for the channel. 5. Select SAVE.
Deleting custom channels
With the Channel selection page displayed: 1. Select the tab for the sonar module that contains
the channel you want to delete. 2. Select the Channel options icon next to the
custom channel. 3. Select Delete.
A confirmation dialog is displayed. 4. Select Yes.
The custom channel has now been removed from your system.
8. Select the new channel to display it in the Fishfinder application pane.
Changes made to the Sensitivity, Range or Frequency tuning settings are automatically saved to the channel displayed.
You can now assign the new channel to a Fishfinder application pane.
Fishfinder application
271
19.7 The sonar image
Interpreting the bottom using sonar It is important to understand how to correctly interpret the bottom structure represented on-screen. The bottom usually produces a strong echo. The following images show how different bottom conditions are represented on-screen:
1
2
Size of the target
The larger the target, the larger the return on the fishfinder display. The size of a fish target is also dependent upon the size of the fish's swim bladder rather than its overall size. The swim bladder varies in size between different breeds of fish.
Clutter / Background noise
The fishfinder picture may be impaired by echoes received from floating or submerged debris, air bubbles or even the vessel's movement. This is known as `Noise' or `Clutter' and is controlled by the Sensitivity Settings. The system can automatically control some settings according to depth and water conditions. You can also adjust the settings manually if required.
3
Transducer frequency
The same target will appear differently when using different transducer frequencies. The lower the frequency the broader the mark.
Item
Description
1
A hard bottom (sand) produces a thin line.
2
A soft bottom (mud or seaweed cover) produces
a wide line.
3
A rocky or uneven bottom or a wreck produces
an irregular image with peaks and troughs.
The dark layers indicate a good echo; the lighter areas indicate weaker echoes. This could mean that the upper layer is soft and therefore allowing sound waves to pass to the more solid layer below.
It is also possible that the sound waves are making two complete trips hitting the bottom, bouncing off the vessel, then reflecting off the bottom again. This can happen if the water is shallow or the bottom is hard.
D6855-3
Recovering lost bottom
If the seabed floor (bottom) is lost then follow the steps below to recover the bottom depth.
From the fishfinder application: 1. Ensure your vessel is in clear undisturbed water. 2. If range is set to Manual, adjust the range to the
known, charted depth of your location. or 3. If range is set to Auto then switch the range
to manual and adjust the range to the known, charted depth of your location. 4. Once bottom has been regained you can switch range mode back to Auto.
Factors influencing the sonar display
The quality and accuracy of the display can be influenced by a number of factors including vessel speed, depth, object size, background noise and transducer frequency.
Vessel speed
The shape of the target changes along with your speed. Slower speeds return flatter, more horizontal marks. Higher speeds cause the target to thicken and arch slightly, until at fast speeds the mark resembles a double vertical line.
Target depth
The closer the target to the surface, the larger the mark on screen.
Water depth As water depth increases signal strength decreases, resulting in a lighter onscreen image of the bottom.
272
a Series / c Series / e Series
19.8 Depth Range
The Depth Range function enables you to define the range of depth that you see in the Fishfinder application. In Auto Range, the Fishfinder application automatically adjusts the range to ensure the water column and bottom are always displayed. In Manual Range, you can adjust the range displayed on-screen to suit your needs.
The table below shows examples of the Range function used with different sonar types.
Traditional and CHIRP DownVisionTM
channels
channel
Auto Range
Manual Range
Controls Rotary Control
Multifunction displays · c Series · e Series · RMK-9 keypad
Range in and Range out buttons
· c Series
· e Series (excluding e7 and e7D
· RMK-9 keypad
Slide the screen · a Series
Up or Down
· e Series
· gS Series
Changing the depth range
You can choose from either:
· Automatic adjustment whereby the display automatically shows the shallowest required range.
· Manual adjustment of the depth range, up to the maximum depth allowed by the Fishfinder application.
From the Fishfinder application menu: 1. Select Range. 2. Select Range to switch between Auto and Man. 3. With manual mode selected you can now adjust
the depth range shown on-screen.
Note: With the Range menu displayed you cannot use the Rotary Control to range in and out. To use the Rotary control to range in and out, first close the Range menu.
Range shift
The Range Shift function enables a specific area of the water column to be displayed on-screen.
In the below example the top 20 feet of the water column is not displayed
Range in and out
The method of ranging in and out of the Fishfinder application is dependent upon the multifunction display variant being used.
The table below shows the Range controls available for each display variant.
Using range shift
The default setting adjusts the display to keep the bottom in the lower half of the screen. Alternatively you can shift the image within the current range.
From the application menu, with Range set to Manual: 1. Select Range. 2. Select Range Shift.
The range shift dialog is displayed. 3. Adjust the setting to the required value.
You will see the range changing on the screen as you adjust the setting. 4. Select Back or press the Ok button to confirm the setting and close the range shift dialog.
Fishfinder application
273
19.9 SideVisionTM Range
19.10 Fishfinder scrolling
The SideVisionTM Range function enables you to define the distance to the left and right of the vessel that is displayed on-screen. The range displayed on-screen can be adjusted to suit your needs.
The table below shows examples of the SideVisionTM Range function.
SideVisionTM channel
Ranged Out
The fishfinder image scrolls from right to left. You can pause the scrolling or adjust the scroll speed, to ease placing of waypoints or VRMs onscreen.
Scroll speed
You can adjust the speed at which the fishfinder image scrolls. A faster speed provides more detail which may be useful when you are looking for fish. If you select a slower speed the information remains on the display for longer.
Ranged In
SideVisionTM Range in and out
The method of ranging in and out of a Fishfinder application displaying SideVisionTM is shown below.
The table below shows the Range controls available for each display variant.
Controls
Multifunction displays
Rotary Control · c Series
· e Series
· RMK-9 keypad
Range in and Range out buttons
· c Series
· e Series (excluding e7 and e7D
· RMK-9 keypad
Range in and Range out on-screen icons
· a Series · e Series · gS Series
Scroll pause
You can pause the display to see a `snapshot' of the fishfinder image. When the image is paused scrolling stops but the depth indication continues to be updated.
Adjusting the scroll speed
The default scroll speed is 100%, the scroll speed can be adjusted following the steps below.
From the Fishfinder application menu: 1. Select Presentation. 2. Select Scroll Speed.
The Scroll speed numeric adjust control is displayed. 3. Adjust the scroll speed to the required setting.
Adjustment increments are as follows:
· 10% increments for values between 10% and 100%
· 100% increments for values between 100% and 500%
4. Select Back or Ok to confirm and close the numeric adjust control.
Pausing the screen
The Fishfinder application can be paused.
From the Fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Scrolling so that Pause is highlighted.
Selecting Scrolling again will resume the scrolling.
274
a Series / c Series / e Series
19.11 Fishfinder display modes
Selecting a display mode for the Fishfinder application When using a Legacy, Traditional, CHIRP or DownVisionTM you can select which display mode you want to use. From the Fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Display Mode. 3. Select Select Mode:. 4. Select the required display mode:
· None
· Zoom
· * A-Scope
· * Bottom Lock
Note: * Not available on the DownVisionTM channel of a DownVisionTM sonar module.
Note: Display modes are not applicable to SideVisionTM.
Fishfinder zoom mode The zoom display mode magnifies a region of the fishfinder screen to display more detail. This zoom option enables you to:
· Replace the standard fishfinder image with the zoomed image, or display the zoomed image alongside the standard fishfinder image.
· Set the zoom factor to a predefined level, or adjust it manually.
· Reposition the zoomed portion of the image to a different point in the display.
When the range increases, the area shown in the zoom window also increases.
Zoom split With the zoom display mode you can split the screen and display the zoomed image alongside the standard fishfinder image (ZOOM SPLIT). The zoomed section is indicated on the standard fishfinder screen by a zoom box.
1. Select Menu. 2. Select Display Mode. 3. Select Zoom so that Split is highlighted.
Selecting Zoom will switch between Split and Full.
Adjusting the fishfinder zoom factor
When the display mode is set to Zoom, you can select a zoom factor or adjust it manually.
From the Fishfinder application, with the display mode set to Zoom. 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Display Mode. 3. Select Zoom Factor. 4. Select a preset Zoom Factor (x2, x3, x4) or
select Manual Once selection is made you will be returned to the Display Mode menu. 5. If Manual is chosen select Manual Zoom The manual zoom factor numeric adjust dialog is displayed. 6. Adjust the setting to the required value. 7. Select Back or use the Ok button to confirm the setting.
Adjusting the position of the fishfinder zoomed area
When the Zoom display mode is selected, the system automatically selects a zoom position so that the bottom details are always shown in the lower half of the screen. If required, you can reposition the portion of the image to be zoomed so that an alternative area is displayed.
From the Fishfinder application, with Zoom display mode selected: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Display Mode. 3. Select Zoom Position so that Man is selected.
Selecting the zoom position will switch between Man and Auto. 4. Select Man Zoom Pos:. The Zoom position numeric adjust control is displayed. 5. Adjust the setting to the required value. 6. Select Back or Ok to close the menu.
Fishfinder A-Scope mode
The A-Scope mode enables you to view a live (rather than historical) image of the seabed and fish directly below your vessel.
Selecting split screen in zoom mode
From the fishfinder application, with the zoom display mode selected:
The standard fishfinder display shows a historical record of fishfinder echoes. If required, you can display a live image of the bottom structure and the fish directly below the transducer by using the A-Scope feature. The width of the bottom covered by the A-Scope is indicated at the bottom of the window. A-Scope provides a more precise and easier to interpret indication of the target strength.
There are three A-Scope modes:
Fishfinder application
275
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
The A-scope image is centred in the window.
The left-hand side of the Mode 1 image is expanded to give a more detailed view.
The A-scope image angles outward as signal width increases with depth.
The numbers displayed at the bottom when in A-Scope mode indicate the approximate diameter (in selected depth units) of the conical beam's coverage of the bottom.
Adjusting the bottom lock range/position
From the fishfinder application, with bottom lock display mode selected: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Display Mode. 3. Select Bottom Lock to switch between Full
screen and Split screen 4. Select B-Lock Range.
Selecting Bottom Lock Range will display the B-Lock Range numeric adjust dialog. 5. Adjust the setting to the required value. 6. Select Back or use the Ok button to confirm the setting. 7. Select B-Lock Shift to reposition the image onscreen. Selecting Bottom Lock Shift will display the B-Lock Shift numeric adjust dialog. 8. Adjust the setting to the required value. 9. Select Back or use the Ok button to confirm the setting.
Selecting A-Scope mode
From the fishfinder application, with the A-Scope display mode selected: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Display Mode. 3. Select Select Mode:. 4. Select A-Scope. 5. Select A-Scope: to display the list of A-Scope
modes. 6. Select the required mode.
Bottom Lock
The Bottom Lock display mode applies a filter which flattens the image of the bottom and makes any objects on or just above it easier to see. This feature is particularly useful for finding fish that feed close to the bottom.
Adjusting the range of the bottom lock image allows you to view more bottom details. You can also reposition the image on the screen to anywhere between the bottom of the window (0%) and the middle of the window (50%) using the Bottom Shift control.
276
a Series / c Series / e Series
19.12 SideVisionTM Views
When connected to a SideVisionTM sonar module the default view displays both Left (port) and Right (starboard) views at the same time, the View icons and View menu can be used to switch between left and right views or both.
View: Both
View: Left View: Right
2. Select the Left view icon to display only the left channel.
3. Select the Right view icon to display only the right channel, or
4. Select the Both view icon to display both channel simultaneously.
Selecting a SideVisionTM view using the menu.
When viewing a SideVisionTM channel on an MFD without a touchscreen or on a HybridTouch MFD, you can use the menu to select which channel you want to display in the Fishfinder application.
From the Default SideVisionTM view: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select View.
The View options are displayed. 3. Select Left to display only the left channel. 4. Select Right to display only the right channel, or 5. Select Both to display both channel
simultaneously.
Selecting a SideVisionTM view
When viewing a SideVisionTM channel on an MFD with a touchscreen, you can select which channel you want to display in the Fishfinder application using the View icons.
From the Default SideVisionTM view:
1. Select the on-screen view icon, located in the bottom right corner of the screen
The View icons are displayed in the bottom center area of the screen.
Fishfinder application
277
19.13 Presentation menu options
The Presentation menu provides access to features which provide additional on-screen detail.
The table below shows the available Presentation options.
Menu Item
Description
Options
* Target Depth ID
Controls whether the depth of identified targets are displayed. The level of targets displayed is directly linked to the level of Fish Alarm sensitivity.
· On · Off (default)
** Depth Lines
Controls whether horizontal lines indicating depth are displayed.
· On · Off (default)
*** Range Lines
Controls whether vertical lines indicating range are displayed.
· On · Off (default)
*White Line
When set to On, this option displays a white line along the contour of the seabed. This helps to distinguish objects close to the bottom.
· On · Off (default)
*Bottom Fill
When set to On, · On
this option displays a solid color fill for
· Off (default)
the seabed.
Menu Item
Description
Options
Color Palette
Various color palettes are available to suit different conditions and your personal preferences.
Traditional / CHIRP sonar channels
· Classic Blue (default)
· Classic Black
· Classic White
· Sunburst
· Greyscale
· Inverse Greyscale
· Copper
· Night Vision
DownVisionTM / SideVisionTM channels
· Copper (default)
· Inv. Copper
· Slate Grey
· Inv. Slate Grey
Scroll Speed
Specify the fishfinder scroll speed.
· 100% (default) · 10% to 500%
** Gain controls
Controls whether or not the on-screen sensitivity settings are displayed.
· Show (default) · Hide
Databoxes Set-up
Allows you to set up and display/hide up to 2 databoxes in the bottom left corner of the screen:
· Databox 1
· Select Data
· Databox 2
· Select Data
Databox 1
· On
· Off
Select Data Allows selection of a data type by category. Databox 2
· On
· Off
Select Data Allows selection of a data type by category.
Note: · * Not available on DownVisionTM or
SideVisionTM channels. · ** Not available on SideVisionTM' · *** Only available on SideVisionTM'
278
a Series / c Series / e Series
19.14 Depth and distance
Legacy, Traditional CHIRP and DownVisionTM sonar modules use there respective transducers to obtain depth readings. SideVisionTM can only display depth readings when a separate source for depth is available on the network.
The Fishfinder application provides a number of features to help you determine depth and distance.
Note: The VRM is only available in Bottom Lock mode when viewing the display mode in Split screen.
1
2 34 5
6
7
D12222-5
Description
1 Depth reading -- current depth of bottom.
2 Depth Target ID -- depths are displayed against recognized targets. The sensitivity of these IDs is directly linked to the Fish Alarm sensitivity; the greater the fish alarm sensitivity, the greater the number of labelled targets.
3 Depth lines -- horizontal dashed lines drawn at regular intervals to indicate the depth from the surface.
4 Horizontal VRM marker -- indicates the depth of the target.
5 Vertical VRM marker -- indicates the distance behind your vessel.
6 Cursor Depth -- this is the depth of the cursor position. Cursor Range -- this is the range from your vessel to the cursor position.
7 Depth markers -- these numbers indicate depth.
Measuring depth and distance with VRM
You can use a Variable Range Marker (VRM) to determine an object's depth and distance behind your vessel. These markers consist of a horizontal (depth) line and a vertical (distance) line, each of which are labelled with the appropriate measurement.
From the Fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu 2. Select Scroll so that Pause is highlighted (This
may make it easier to position the marker). Selecting Scroll will switch the scroll between Pause and Resume. 3. Select the location you want to place the marker. 4. Open the Fishfinder context menu. 5. Select Place Marker.
Once placed you can move the marker by selecting Move Marker from the Fishfinder context menu.
Fishfinder application
279
19.15 Waypoints in the Fishfinder application
Placing a waypoint in the Fishfinder application enables you to mark a position so that you can return to it later.
When a waypoint is placed its details are added to the waypoint list and a vertical line showing the waypoint symbol is displayed on-screen. The waypoints can then be navigated from the Chart application.
19.16 Sensitivity settings
The Sensitivity settings menu provides access to features and functions that enhances what is displayed on-screen. In most situations default values should be adequate.
The tables below show the sensitivity settings available for each sonar module type.
Legacy, traditional and CHIRP sonar modules
CHIRP external
Tradi- Tradi- Legacy
tional ex- tional in- external
ternal
ternal
Gain
Auto Gain Modes
Color Gain
Contrast
TVG
Placing a Waypoint in the fishfinder application
From the fishfinder application: 1. Select and hold the required location.
The fishfinder context menu is displayed. 2. Select Place Waypoint.
Placing a waypoint using the WPT button or icon
From the fishfinder application: 1. Select WPT.
The waypoint menu is displayed. 2. Whilst the waypoint menu is open:
Auto TVG Modes
Noise Filter
Color Threshold
Power Mode
Note: * Auto TVG modes are disabled when TVG is set to manual.
DownVisionTM and SideVisionTMsonar modules
· Select WPT again to place a waypoint at your vessels position, or
· Select the appropriate option: Place Waypoint At Vessel, Place Waypoint At Cursor or Place Waypoint At Lat/lon.
Placing a Waypoint using the context menu
You can place a waypoint in the fishfinder application using the context menu.
From the Fishfinder context menu: 1. Select Place Waypoint.
The Waypoint is placed at the cursors location. and the new waypoint dialog is displayed. 2. Select Ok to accept the default waypoint details, or 3. Select a field to edit the new waypoint's details.
DownVisionTM Gain
Auto Gain Modes Color Gain Contrast
TVG
Auto TVG Modes Noise Filter Color Threshold
SideVisionTM
Power Mode
280
a Series / c Series / e Series
Gain
The gain settings alter the way the sonar module processes background noise. Adjusting the gain settings can improve the sonar image, however for optimum performance in most conditions, we recommend that you use the auto settings.
The gain control determines the strength above which echoes are displayed on-screen.
20% Manual Gain Auto Gain
80% Manual Gain
Auto
In Auto mode the sonar module automatically adjusts the gain setting to suit current conditions.
When connected to a Legacy sonar module or a Traditional internal sonar module 3 Auto Gain modes are available:
· Cruising (Low)
· Trolling (Med)
· Fishing (Fast)
Manual
If necessary you can set the gain controls manually, between a value of 0% to 100%. This value should be set high enough to see fish and bottom detail but without too much background noise. Generally a high gain is used in deep and/or clear water; a low gain in shallow and/or murky water.
The new values remain set even when you switch off the display.
On-screen gain controls
Touch only and HybridTouch multifunction displays have on-screen gain controls.
Selecting the on-screen gain control will display the gain settings:
When in manual mode the slider bar control is shown.
Note: SideVisionTM channels do not use on-screen Gain controls The Gain setting can be found in the Sensitivity Settings menu.
Enabling and disabling on-screen gain controls You can enable and disable the on-screen gain controls by following the steps below. On a touchscreen multifunction display, with the relevant application displayed. 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Gain Controls.
Selecting Gain Controls will switch between showing and hiding the on-screen controls.
Note: When the on-screen Gain controls are set to Hidden then the Gain settings can be accessed directly from the application menu: Menu > Gain.
Adjusting gain manually using on-screen controls 1. Select the on-screen Gain control located on the
left hand side of the fishfinder application. 2. Select the Auto box to switch between Auto and
Manual gain. 3. With Auto deselected, select and hold the Slider
and move Left to decrease value or Right to increase value.
Setting the auto gain mode using the on-screen controls 1. Select the on-screen Gain control located on the
left hand side of the fishfinder application. 2. Select the Auto box so that a tick is displayed
in the box. 3. Select the required Auto Gain Mode.
When connected to a Legacy sonar module or a traditional internal sonar module the automatic gain has 3 modes.
Adjusting fishfinder gain using the menu
The fishfinder gain setting can be accessed from the fishfinder menu.
From the fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Sensitivity Settings. 3. Select Gain.
The Gain adjust dialog is displayed 4. Adjust the gain control to the required setting, or 5. Select Auto.
A tick is displayed in the Auto box to signify automatic gain is enabled.
When connected to external CHIRP, external Traditional or DownVisionTM sonar modules gain modes are not required.
Fishfinder application
Setting auto gain mode using the menu
When using a Legacy sonar module or a Traditional internal sonar module 3 Auto Gain modes are available. The Auto Gain mode can be set by following the steps below.
From the Fishfinder application menu:
281
1. Select Sensitivity Settings. 2. Select Auto Gain Mode. 3. Select the required auto gain mode.
Color gain Traditional, CHIRP and Legacy sonar channels use different colors to determine the strength of an echo. You can adjust the color gain manually between 0% and 100% or set it to automatic.
20% Manual Color Auto Color Gain 80% Manual Color
Gain
Gain
· Setting a high value gives a wide band for the lightest shade, but a small signal band for the other shades.
Adjusting the contrast To adjust the contrast setting follow the steps below. From the Fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Sensitivity settings. 3. Select Contrast.
The Contrast slider bar control is displayed. 4. Adjust the control to the required value. 5. Select Back to confirm setting and close slider
bar, or 6. Select Auto to enable automatic contrast.
Color gain sets the lower limit for the strongest echo color. All echoes with a signal strength above this value are displayed in the strongest color. Those with a weaker value are divided equally between the remaining colors.
· Setting a low value produces a wide band for the weakest color, but a small signal band for the other colors.
· Setting a high value gives a wide band for the strongest color, but a small signal band for the other colors.
Time Varied Gain (TVG)
The Time Varied Gain (TVG) setting controls the amount of attenuation applied throughout the water column, which provides a balance of shallow water returns (where echoes are strong) against deep water returns (where echoes are weak) so that targets of the same size produce echoes of the similar size regardless of target depth. The TVG setting can be manually set from 0% to 100% or set to automatic.
Adjusting the color gain
To adjust the color gain on Legacy and Traditional and CHIRP sonar channels follow the steps below.
From the Fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Sensitivity settings. 3. Select Color Gain.
The color gain slider bar control is displayed. 4. Adjust the control to the required value. 5. Select Back to confirm setting and close slider
bar, or 6. Select Auto to enable automatic color gain.
Contrast
DownVisionTM and SideVisionTM use monochrome shading to determine the strength of echoes. You can adjust the contrast manually between 0% and 100% or set it to automatic.
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
D13057-1
· A higher TVG setting will produce weaker targets / less clutter on-screen.
· A lower TVG setting will produce stronger targets / more clutter on-screen.
Note: TVG values between 0% and 30% represent top out mode control, values between 31% and 100% represent TVG control.
31% TVG
100% TVG
Auto TVG
20% Manual Contrast
Auto Contrast
80% Manual Contrast
Contrast sets the lower limit for the strongest echo shade. All echoes with a signal strength above this value are displayed in the lightest shade. Those with a weaker value are divided equally between the remaining shades.
· Setting a low value produces a wide band for the darkest shade, but a small signal band for the other shades.
282
Note: TVG has no effect in simulator mode however top out mode (0% to 30%) does.
Top out mode Top out mode is a digital filter that is combined with the TVG control. The top out mode filter reduces noise and clutter from the top portion of the sonar beam. Top out mode is active when TVG values are between 0% and 30%. TVG values between 31% and 100% represent actual TVG control.
a Series / c Series / e Series
On-screen TVG controls
Touch only and HybridTouch multifunction displays have on-screen TVG controls.
0% TVG
30% TVG
Setting TVG to Automatic
The TVG setting can be set to automatic by following the steps below.
From the Fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Sensitivity Settings. 3. Select TVG.
The TVG slider bar control is displayed. 4. Select Auto so that a tick is placed in the auto
box.
Auto TVG mode
Selecting the on-screen TVG control will display the TVG settings.
When connected to an external CHIRP sonar modules (excluding DownVisionTM) and external Traditional sonar modules (excluding legacy) the automatic TVG has 3 modes.
When TVG is set to automatic 3 auto TVG modes are available, depending on sonar module in use.
The auto TVG modes available are as follows:
When in manual mode the slider bar control is shown.
· Low
· Medium · High Auto TVG modes are only available on Legacy sonar modules and Traditional internal sonar modules.
Selecting an auto TVG mode Follow the steps below to select an Auto TVG mode. From the Fishfinder application, with TVG set to Auto: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Sensitivity Settings. 3. Select Auto TVG. 4. Select the required setting: Low, Medium or High.
Manually adjusting TVG
Enabling and disabling on-screen gain controls
You can enable and disable the on-screen gain controls by following the steps below.
On a touchscreen multifunction display, with the relevant application displayed. 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Gain Controls.
Selecting Gain Controls will switch between showing and hiding the on-screen controls.
Note: When the on-screen Gain controls are set to Hidden then the Gain settings can be accessed directly from the application menu: Menu > Gain.
From the Fishfinder application menu: 1. Select Sensitivity Settings. 2. Select TVG.
The TVG slider bar control is displayed. 3. Adjust the slider bar control to the required
setting.
Values between 31% and 100% represent TVG control. 4. Select Back or OK to close slider bar control.
Adjusting TVG manually using on-screen controls
Touch only and HybridTouch multifunction displays have on-screen TVG controls.
1. Select the on-screen TVG control located on the left hand side of the Fishfinder application.
2. Select the Auto box to switch between Auto and Manual TVG.
3. Adjust the setting to the required value.
Fishfinder application
Setting auto TVG using the on-screen controls
Touch only and HybridTouch multifunction displays have on-screen TVG controls. 1. Select the on-screen TVG control located on the
left hand side of the fishfinder application. 2. Select the Auto box to select Auto TVG mode.
283
3. When connected to external CHIRP sonar modules (excluding DownVisionTM) and external traditional sonar modules (excluding legacy) you can select an auto TVG mode,
Noise Filter
The Noise Filter is available on DownVisionTM sonar modules. The Noise Filter reduces the amount of clutter displayed on-screen by varying the gain throughout the column of water.
The Noise Filter can be set to automatic or adjusted manually:
· Automatic -- In Auto mode the Noise Filter is set to 20%.
· Manual -- You can adjust the Noise Filter manually, between a value of 0% to 100%.
A low value decreases the depth at which the filter is applied.
A high value increases the depth at which the filter is applied.
The new values remain set even when you switch off the display.
Adjusting the Noise Filter
Follow the steps below to adjust the Noise Filter.
From the Fishfinder application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Sensitivity Settings. 3. Select Noise Filter.
The Noise filter slider bar control is displayed. 4. Adjust the Noise Filter to the required value, or 5. Select the Auto check box to switch to Auto
mode.
Note: The Noise filter can also be adjusted by selecting the on-screen N. Filter control.
Color threshold
Color threshold determines the signal strength below which targets are not shown. Traditional and CHIRP sonar use different colors to determine signal strengths whilst DownVisionTM uses monochrome shading.
The Color Threshold setting is a global setting. When the color threshold value is changed all Fishfinder application panes on all networked multifunction displays will share the same color threshold value.
A low setting would result in only the strongest colors or lightest shades being displayed.
Adjusting the color threshold
The color threshold's default value is 100%, you can adjust this setting so that less colors / shades are displayed.
From the Fishfinder application menu: 1. Select Sensitivity Settings. 2. Select Color Threshold. 3. Adjust the color threshold to the required value. 4. Select Ok to confirm setting and close the
numeric adjust control.
Power mode
Power mode controls the power level of the transducer. Power mode can be set to automatic or adjusted manually between 0% and 100%. Power mode is only available on CHIRP, Traditional and Legacy sonar modules.
· Auto -- This is the default setting. When auto is selected the sonar module automatically determines the optimum setting based on the current depth, speed, and (bottom) signal strength.
· Manual -- You can adjust the power level between in 1% increments. Lower power levels are normally used in depth ranges less than 2.4 m (8 ft.) and higher power levels are typically selected for depths greater than 3.7 m (12 ft.).
Adjusting the transducer power level
From the Fishfinder application menu: 1. Select Sensitivity settings. 2. Select Power Mode.
The power mode slider bar control is displayed. 3. Adjust the slider bar to the required setting, or 4. Select Auto to set automatic power mode.
Color threshold
100% (default)
Traditional / CHIRP DownVisionTM
channels
channel
50%
284
a Series / c Series / e Series
19.17 Fishfinder alarms
The following Fishfinder alarms can be set when a depth data source is available.
· Fish -- alarm sounds when a target meets the specified sensitivity level and, is within the depth limits (if enabled).
· Fishfinder Deep -- alarm sounds when the detected depth is greater than the deep limit.
· Fishfinder Shallow -- alarm sounds when the detected depth is less than the shallow limit.
Setting up fish alarms
From the Alarms menu homescreen > Set-up > Alarms: 1. Select Fish.
The Fish alarms menu is displayed. 2. Select Fish so that On is highlighted. 3. Select Fish Sensitivity.
The fish sensitivity numeric adjust control is displayed. 4. Adjust the fish sensitivity to the require value. The greater the fish alarm sensitivity, the greater the number of target image depths displayed. 5. Select Fish Depth Limits so that On is highlighted. The shallow and deep fish limit settings will be activated in the menu. 6. Select Shallow Fish Limit. The shallow fish limit numeric adjust control is displayed. 7. Adjust the value to the require setting. 8. Select Ok to confirm the new value and close the numeric adjust control. 9. Select Deep Fish Limit. The deep fish limit numeric adjust control is displayed. 10. Adjust the value to the require setting. 11. Select Ok to confirm the new value and close the numeric adjust control.
1. Select Fishfinder Shallow. 2. Select Shallow so that On is highlighted.
Selecting Shallow will switch between On and Off. 3. Select Shallow Limit.
The shallow limit numeric adjust control is displayed. 4. Adjust the setting to the required value. 5. Select Ok to confirm the new value and close the numeric adjust control.
Note: The Shallow Limit cannot be set to greater than the Deep Limit.
Setting up fishfinder deep alarm
From the Alarms menu homescreen > Set-up > Alarms: 1. Select Fishfinder Deep. 2. Select Deep so that On is highlighted.
Selecting Deep will switch between On and Off. 3. Select Deep Limit.
The deep limit numeric adjust control is displayed. 4. Adjust the setting to the required value. 5. Select Ok to confirm the new value and close the
numeric adjust control.
Note: The Deep Limit cannot be set to less than the Shallow Limit.
Setting up fishfinder shallow alarm
From the Alarms menu homescreen > Set-up > Alarms:
Fishfinder application
285
19.18 Frequency tuning
The frequency is dependent on the sonar module and transducer in use. When using a non-CHIRP sonar module or a CHIRP sonar module that is operating in non-CHIRP mode then the transducer's frequency can be manually fine-tuned.
The advantages of being able to tune the frequency include:
· Optimization for particular species of fish and water conditions.
· Avoiding interference from other sonar operating nearby (at the same frequency).
· Use of wide or narrow beam on a particular transducer.
Traditional and Legacy frequency tuning
The following frequency types are available on Legacy and Traditional sonar modules:
· Auto -- When operating in automatic no fine-tuning is needed as the system will set the frequency automatically to suit your transducer's operating conditions.
· Lower frequencies -- (e.g. 50 kHz) -- Produces a wide sonar beam and penetrate the water well. Lower frequencies provide a lower resolution image that may not be as good at detecting small fish. Use lower frequencies if you require a large coverage beneath your vessel or if you are in deep water.
· Higher frequencies -- (e.g. 200 kHz) -- Produces a narrow beam and produce a high resolution image. They are most useful in shallower water (up to 1000 ft) and at higher speeds.
The graph below depicts fine-tuning of a Traditional or Legacy sonar frequency (from 50% to +50%).
detecting small fish. Use lower frequencies if you require a large coverage beneath your vessel or if you are in deep water.
· Medium frequency -- non-CHIRP mode (e.g. 90 kHz) -- Produces good detail at most depths, with moderately wide sonar beam.
· High frequency -- non-CHIRP mode (e.g. 160 kHz) -- Produces a narrow beam and produce a high resolution image. They are most useful in shallower water (up to 1000 ft) and at higher speeds.
· Low Chirp -- CHIRP mode (e.g. 42 to 65 kHz) -- No fine-tuning is not needed as the CHIRP sonar module will sweep the transducer's available frequency range in each ping.
· Med Chirp -- CHIRP mode (e.g. 85 to 135 kHz) -- No fine-tuning is not needed as the CHIRP sonar module will sweep the transducer's available frequency range in each ping.
· High Chirp -- CHIRP mode (e.g. 130 to 210 kHz) -- No fine-tuning is not needed as the CHIRP sonar module will sweep the transducer's available frequency range in each ping.
With the CHIRP sonar module set to a non-CHIRP mode the frequency can be fine tuned to adjust the frequency at which the transducer is transmitting.
The graph below depicts fine-tuning of a CHIRP broadband sonar frequency (from --50% to +50%).
-50%
+50%
1
2
3
Sensitivity (dB) Sensitivity (dB)
-50% +50%
1
2
3
Low Frequency
1. Tuning range 2. Transducer characteristics 3. Operating (center) frequency
High
D12575-2
Low
Frequency
High
D12574-2
1. Tuning range
2. Transducer characteristics
3. Operating frequency
CHIRP frequency tuning
The list below provides details of the frequency types available when using a CHIRP sonar module.
· Auto -- When operating in automatic no fine-tuning is needed as the system will set the frequency automatically to suit your transducer's operating conditions.
· Low frequency -- non-CHIRP mode (e.g. 50 kHz) -- Produces a wide sonar beam and penetrate the water well. Lower frequencies provide a lower resolution image that may not be as good at
286
Fine-tuning the sonar frequency
When connected to a Traditional or Legacy sonar module or when operating a CHIRP sonar module in non-CHIRP mode the transmit frequency can be fine-tuned.
From the Fishfinder application: 1. Ensure that the channel frequency that you want
to fine-tune is displayed in the active Fishfinder pane. 2. Select Menu. 3. Select Set-up. 4. Select Sounder Set-up. 5. Select Tune Frequency. The frequency adjust control is displayed. 6. Adjust the frequency until optimum results are achieved.
a Series / c Series / e Series
19.19 Sounder set-up menu options
This section details the options available in the Sounder set-up menu: (Menu > Set-up > Sounder Set-up).
Menu Item
Description
Options
* Ping Rate
Hyper Ping is a setting only available on Traditional internal and Legacy sonar modules, for use in shallow waters (depth range set to 6 meters (20 feet) or less. In depths of over 6 meters (20 feet) the ping rate will revert to normal until depth conditions are met. When set to Hyper the display will provide an accurate, undistorted image of the bottom at speeds of up to 40 kts.
· Normal (default) · Hyper
* Ping Rate Limit
Provides a speed limiter; it is useful to adjust the ping rate limit to suit local conditions. For example, the ping rate may be too fast when there is a hard bottom in shallow water.
Note: Ping rate limit is disabled if Ping Rate is set to Hyper.
· DownVisionTM sonar: 5 to 80 pings per second.
· Legacy and Traditional Internal sonars: 5 to 50 pings per second.
· CHIRP and traditional external sonars: 5 to 30 pings per second.
Ping Enable
The sonar ping can be disabled. This is useful when other equipment is being tested, or if someone is diving beneath the boat. This setting reverts to Enabled when the sonar module is powered off.
· On · Off
* Tune Frequency * Interference rejection
* 2nd Echo IR
Enables non-CHIRP channel frequencies to be manually tuned. Removes spikes caused by other fishfinder-equipped vessels.
Note: Interference rejection is be disabled if Ring Rate is set to Hyper.
Adjusts the ping rate in small increments, according to the 2nd echo level. This results in better sensitivity of the image.
Note: 2nd Echo IR is be disabled if Ring Rate is set to Hyper.
· 50% to +50%
· Auto · Low · Medium · High · Off · Off · Low · High
Sonar reset Trip Reset
Restore all settings on the sonar module to factory · Yes
default. When performing a sonar Reset, it is normal to briefly lose connection with the sonar
· No
module.
Transducer selection is not affected by the Sonar
Reset operation.
Resets the Trip Counter of the sonar module
· Yes
· No
Note: * Not applicable to SideVisionTM.
Fishfinder application
287
19.20 Transducer set-up menu options
The Transducer Set-up menu should be used when setting up your multifunction display for the first time or when installing a depth transducer.
Note: The settings listed below will only be available if the connected transducer supports the data type.
Menu Item Transducer
Speed Transducer
Depth Offset
Description
Options
Select the appropriate transducer type from those Options available are dependent on the
displayed.
sonar module connected.
Some transducers may be detected by the system
automatically.
Select the appropriate speed transducer from those available. This option is only available if you are not using a combined Depth/Speed or Depth/Speed/Temperature transducer.
Options available are dependent on the sonar module connected.
Offset represents the depth of the transducer relative to:
· 9.8 to +9.8 feet -- or equivalent units
· Waterline = 0.0 ft and above.
· Keel = 0.1 ft and below.
Speed Offset Temperature Offset
Offset applied to the speed log.
Offset applied to the temperature transducer value.
· 0 to 100% · 9.9 to +9.9 °F -- or equivalent units
288
a Series / c Series / e Series
19.21 Resetting the sonar
The reset function restores the unit to its factory default values.
Note: Performing a factory reset will clear speed and temperature calibration settings and the depth offset.
1. Using a compatible Raymarine multifunction display go to the Fishfinder application page.
2. Select Menu from the side menu. 3. Select Set-up. 4. Select Sounder Set-up. 5. Select Sonar reset. 6. Select Yes to confirm.
The unit will now be reset to factory default settings.
Fishfinder application
289
290
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 20: Data application
Chapter contents · 20.1 Data application overview on page 292
· 20.2 Selecting datapages using touch on page 294
· 20.3 Selecting datapages on page 295 · 20.4 Customizing the data application on page 295 · 20.5 List of data items on page 297 · 20.6 Engine identification on page 304 · 20.7 Setting boat details on page 306 · 20.8 Setting maximum engine RPM on page 306 · 20.9 Color theme on page 307 · 20.10 Units set-up on page 308 · 20.11 Resetting minimum and maximum readings on page 309 · 20.12 Resetting all datapages on page 309
Data application
291
20.1 Data application overview
Example -- engine page for 2 engine vessel.
The Data application enables you to view data generated by the multifunction display or data that is available on your system.
Data can be obtained from devices connected using SeaTalkhs, SeaTalkng or NMEA protocols.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Pre-configured datapages
The default datapage configuration is dependant upon the boat type selected during the initial set-up wizard.
Each datapage consists of a number of 'cells', that display the information.
Default datapage configuration is shown below:
Motor vessel
Sailing vessel
Page Page number
Page
Page
number
1/6
Engine
1/5
Engine
2/6
Navigation 2/5
Navigation
3/6
Environment 3/5
Sailing
4/6
Fishing
4/5
Environment
5/6
Fuel
5/5
Rolling road
6/6
Rolling road
Note: Datapage selection is a local setting, and therefore only affects the individual display that you are currently using. It does not affect any networked displays.
Engine page
The Engine page is available for all boat types. The dials and type of data displayed is dependent on the Number of engines set in the Boat Details settings.
Important: The relevant engine data must be available on your network for the Engine page to show engine data.
292
8
9
10
11 12
D13058-1
1. Port engine combined oil pressure and coolant temperature dial
2. Total fuel 3. Engine Economy total 4. Starboard engine combined oil pressure and
coolant temperature dial 5. Port engine RPM dial 6. Starboard engine RPM dial 7. Trim tabs 8. SOG 9. Port alternator 10. Rudder bar 11. Starboard alternator 12. Depth
Navigation page The Navigation page is available for all boat types.
1 23
4
5
7
6
8
9
10
11
D13062-1
1. Heading 2. Rolling road 3. Target waypoint 4. Waypoint ETA (Estimated time of arrival) 5. Heading to target waypoint 6. Distance to target waypoint 7. COG 8. SOG 9. VMG to waypoint 10. Rudder bar 11. Depth
a Series / c Series / e Series
Sailing page
When the boat type has been configured as a sailing vessel, the Sailing page is available in the Data application.
The Sailing page includes compass and wind dials that displays various data designed specifically for sailing vessel.
Fishing page The Fishing page is available when the boat type is set to a motor vessel.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
D13020-1
1. Compass dial 2. Wind dial 3. Waypoint icon -- Only displayed during active
navigation. 4. Heading (red) and COG (green) arrows 5. True wind arrow (yellow) 6. Apparent wind arrow (yellow) 7. Tide arrow (blue)
4
5
6
7
D13060-1
1. Water temperature 2. Live well 3. Time 4. Target waypoint range and bearing 5. Waypoint TTG 6. SOG 7. Depth
Fuel page
The Fuel page is available when the boat type is set to a motor vessel.
1
2
Environment page
The Environment page is available for all boat types.
3
12
3
5 7
9 10
1. Wind dial 2. AWAS and AWS 3. Air temperature 4. Water temperature 5. Set 6. AWS 7. Drift 8. TWS 9. True wind arrow 10. Apparent wind arrow
Data application
4
5
D13061-1
4
1. Estimated fuel
2. Total fuel
3. Fuel gauge
6
4. Fuel (trip)
8
5. Engine economy total
D13059-1 Rolling road The Rolling road page is available for all boat types.
1
2
4
1. Rolling road 2. Target waypoint 3. Vessel icon
3 5
D13063-1
293
4. Course correction indicator 5. Course correction details
20.2 Selecting datapages using touch
You can scroll through all available pages using the touchscreen.
D12878-1
From the Data application: 1. Touch the screen. 2. Slide your finger up and let go of the screen to
go to the next datapage. 3. Slide your finger down and let go of the screen to
go to the previous datapage.
294
a Series / c Series / e Series
20.3 Selecting datapages
To select datapages using a non-touch multifunction display follow the steps below.
From the data application: 1. Move the Joystick Down to goto the next page,
or 2. Move the Joystick Up to goto the previous page.
20.4 Customizing the data application
You can customize the data application to show the system and instrument data that you require. In addition to displaying the default, pre-configured datapages in the data application, you can also: · Change the order datapages appear. · Customize datapages content to your specific
requirements. · Rename the datapages. · Add new custom datapages. · Delete existing datapages. · Set boat details such as number of engines, fuel
tanks, and batteries. · Set the maximum engine RPM range. · Change color theme. · Change the units of measurement. · Reset minimum and maximum readings. · Reset all pages to default.
Changing datapage order
You can change the order that datapages appear.
From the data application: 1. Scroll to the datapage you want to move. 2. Select Menu. 3. Select Edit Page.
The edit page menu is displayed. 4. Select Move Page Up or Move Page Down.
Each time move page up or move page down is selected the datapage will be moved 1 space up or down in the data application.
Data application
Customizing datapage content using touch
On touchscreen multifunction displays you can customize a data item by pressing and holding on the item onscreen.
From the Data application: 1. Display the datapage that contains the data item
you want to change. 2. Touch and hold your finger on the data item.
After approximately 3 seconds the data item is highlighted and the Select Data Category menu is displayed. 3. Navigate the menu to locate the data item you want to use. 4. Select the data item. The selected data item is now displayed in place of the original data item.
Customizing datapage content
From the data application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Edit Page. 3. Select the cell you want to change. 4. Select Select Data Category.
295
5. Select a data category. Selecting a data category will display a list of data items for that category.
6. Select the data item you want to display. Once selected a tick will be placed next to the data item in the menu and the cell on screen will display the new data item
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 for all the data items you want to change.
Renaming a datapage
From the data application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Edit Page. 3. Select Rename Page.
The on screen keyboard is displayed. 4. Enter the new name for the datapage. 5. Select SAVE.
Deleting a datapage
You can delete custom or pre-configured datapages from the data application. The minimum number of datapages allowed is 1.
From the data application: 1. Scroll to the datapage you want to delete. 2. Select Menu. 3. Select Delete Page.
The confirm delete pop up message is displayed. 4. Select Yes to delete the datapage, or No to
cancel the action.
Note: You cannot create a new engine page with the same layout as the pre-configured engine datapages.
Adding a new datapage
You can add your own customized datapages to the data application. The total number of datapages including pre-configured pages is 10.
From the data application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Create New Page.
A list of available page layouts is displayed. 3. Select the required page layout.
The new page is displayed on screen.
4. Select the blank cell on the new page layout that you want to add a data item to.
5. Select Select Data Category. 6. Select a data category.
Selecting a data category will display a list of data items for that category. 7. Select the data item you want to display. Once selected a tick will be placed next to the data item in the menu and the cell on screen will display the selected data item. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 6 for all the data items you want to change. 9. Select Rename Page. The on screen keyboard is displayed. 10. Enter the new name for the datapage. 11. Select SAVE.
296
a Series / c Series / e Series
20.5 List of data items
Categories of data available to display in the data application, databoxes, databar, and expanded databar are shown below. Dial graphics are not available in databoxes or databars.
The following table shows the data items available by category.
Data Category Description Data Item
Data application Graphics
Battery**
Battery status Battery Amps
Battery Temperature
Battery Voltage
Boat Depth Distance
Battery Charge
Types of data generated by your vessel. For example, tank levels.
Rate of Turn
Heel Angle
Trim Tabs (Data application only.)
Depth data. Depth
Maximum Depth
Minimum Depth
Types of data related to distance travelled by your vessel. For example, trip distance.
Log & Trip
Log
Trip
Ground Log and Trip Ground Log
Ground Trip 1
Ground Trip 2
Ground Trip 3
Ground Trip 4
Data application
297
Data Category Engine**
Description
Types of data generated by engines. For example, oil pressure.
Data Item RPM
RPM & SOG
Coolant Temperature
Coolant Pressure
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Oil Pressure & Coolant Temperature Transmission Oil Temperature
Transmission Oil Pressure
Transmission Gear Boost Pressure
Fuel Pressure
Fuel Flow Rate
Fuel Flow (Inst)
Fuel Flow (Avg)
Engine Hours Engine Trim Alternator Engine Load
Data application Graphics
298
a Series / c Series / e Series
Data Category Fuel**
Description Data Item
Types of data related to the fuel system. For example, fuel levels.
Fuel Level (%) Total Fuel (%) Total Fuel (vol)
Fuel Flow Total
Economy
Estimated Fuel Remaining
Distance to Empty
Time to Empty
Fuel Used (Trip)
Environment
Fuel Used (Season)
Environmentalrelated data. For example, air temperature.
Pressure Air Temperature
Minimum Air Temperature
Maximum Air Temperature
Drift
Set
Set & Drift
Apparent Wind Chill True Wind Chill
Humidity
Dew Point
Sunset / Sunrise
Water Temperature
Data application
Data application Graphics
299
Data Category GPS
Description Data Item
Minimum Water Temperature
Maximum Water Temperature
GPS-related Vessel Position
data. For
example, vessel position.
COG & SOG
COG
SOG
Heading Navigation
300
Maximum SOG
Average SOG
Heading-related data. For example, locked heading.
Heading
Heading and Speed (Data application only.)
Locked Heading
Locked Heading Error
LH Error and LH (Data application only.)
Tack Heading
Types of data related to navigation. For example, bearing to waypoint.
Compass (Data application only.)
Cursor Position (Only available in the Databar and data overlay.)
Cursor info (Only available in the Databar and data overlay.)
Cross Track Error
Rolling Road (Data application only.)
Data application Graphics
a Series / c Series / e Series
Data Category Description
Data Item Waypoint Info
Active Waypoint Name Target Position
Bearing to Waypoint
BTW & DTW (Data application only.) Course Made Good CMG & DMG
Pilot Speed
CMG & VMG (Data application only.)
Distance to Waypoint
Distance Made Good
Waypoint ETA
Waypoint TTG
Route ETA
Route TTG
Pilot-related data. For example, rudder.
Speed-related data. For example, VMG (Velocity Made Good) to Waypoint.
Rudder Angle
Speed
Maximum Speed Average Speed
Speed and SOG
VMG to Windward
VMG to Waypoint
Data application
Data application Graphics
301
Data Category Tanks**
Description
Data related to water tanks
Data Item Fresh Water (%)
Grey Water (%)
Black Water (%)
Live Well (%)
Time Wind
Time-related data. For example, local time.
Local Time Local Date
Wind-related data. For example, VMG (Velocity Made Good) to Windward.
AWA Maximum AWA Minimum AWA
AWS
Maximum AWS Minimum AWS TWA Maximum TWA Minimum TWA TWS
Maximum TWS Minimum TWS TWD
Cardinal Wind
Ground Wind
Beaufort AWA and TWA
302
Data application Graphics
a Series / c Series / e Series
Data Category Description
Data Item AWA & AWS
Data application Graphics
AWA (CH) and AWS
AWA and VMG
TWA & TWS
TWA (CH) and TWS
TWA and VMG
GWD and Beaufort
GWD & GWS
None
Note: *Dials and graphical representations are only available from the Data application. Databar and data cell overlays can only display digital items.
Note: **The Battery, Engine, Fuel and Tanks menus will display 1 set of data items per configured device (e.g. if the system has been configured with 3 engines then 3 sets of engine data items will be displayed).
Data application
303
20.6 Engine identification
Engine data can be displayed on your MFD using the Data application, which provides some preset Engine pages for displaying some of the most common types of engine data.
Important: Before you can display Engine data on your MFD, you must:
· Ensure that your MFD is running LightHouse software version 8 or later.
· Refer to the important "Engine setup with an ECI interface" and "Using the engine identification wizard" information.
· Make the data connections, according to the instructions provided in the 87202 ECI Installation instructions.
· Ensure all data buses are powered up (including engine data CAN buses, gateways, and also the SeaTalkng bus).
· Start the engine. It is important that only one engine is running at a time, to ensure that the system can isolate the correct engine data message.
· Run the Engine identification wizard to ensure that your engines are displayed in the correct order in the Data application.
304
a Series / c Series / e Series
Engine setup with an ECI interface
Before you can display engine data on your MFD, you may need to use the "Engine Identification wizard" on the MFD to setup the engines.
Important: When setting up on a multiple engine system, engines should always be turned on in sequence from port to starboard.
The following table details the different types of engine supported by the ECI interface unit, and the setup requirements for each:
Engine CAN bus protocol
Engine CAN bus Number of engines configuration
Setup via wizard on Number of ECI units MFD required
NMEA 2000
1
Single CAN bus
1
NMEA 2000
2+
Single shared CAN bus 1
NMEA 2000
2+
J1939
1
Separate CAN bus for each engine
Single CAN bus
1 for each CAN bus 1
J1939
2+
Single shared CAN bus 1
J1939
2+
Separate CAN bus for 1 for each CAN bus each engine
Engine interfacing without an ECI unit
For engines with a NMEA 2000 CAN bus it may be possible to connect to a Raymarine MFD via a SeaTalkng system without the use of a Raymarine ECI unit.
Refer to your engine dealer and also your local Raymarine dealer for advice on any engine instancing requirements and suitable connection cables.
Using the engine identification wizard
If your engine data appears in the wrong order on the engine data pages you can correct this by running the engine identification wizard.
From the Homescreen: 1. Select Set-up > System Settings > External
Devices > Engines Set-up. 2. If required change the number of engines your
vessel has by selecting Num. of Engines: and entering the correct number of engines.
ii. Turn On the port engine and select OK.
The wizard will now listen for data and assign the engine instance as the port engine. iii. Turn On the center port engine and select OK.
The wizard will now listen for data and assign the engine instance as the center port engine. iv. Turn On the center engine and select OK.
The wizard will now listen for data and assign the engine instance as the center engine. v. Turn On the center starboard engine and select OK.
The wizard will now listen for data and assign the engine instance as the center starboard engine. vi. Turn On the starboard engine and select OK.
The wizard will now listen for data and assign the engine instance as the starboard engine.
5. Select OK on the Identify Engines confirmation dialog.
You can select up to 5 engines. 3. Select Identify engines.
The engines will now appear in the correct location on the engine data page.
Important: It is important that only one engine is running at a time, to ensure that the system can isolate the correct engine data message.
4. Follow the onscreen prompts to complete the engine identification wizard.
The engines that will be included in the identification wizard are determined by the Number of engines set during step 2 above.
i. Switch Off ALL vessel engines and select Next.
The wizard will run through all engines (max of 5 as defined in step 2 above) from port to starboard in sequence.
Data application
305
20.7 Setting boat details
20.8 Setting maximum engine RPM
You can change vessel settings from the Data application menu.
From the Data application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Boat Details. 3. Select Num. of Engines, Num. of Fuel Tanks,
or Num. of Batteries. 4. Select either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
If the number of engines has been changed then the Engine datapage will be reset to display the correct number of engines.
You can set the maximum RPM range to display on the RPM data item.
From the data application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Max RPM Range.
A list of available RPM settings is displayed. 3. Select the required RPM range.
A tick will be placed next to the selected RPM range in the menu and the RPM range on the engine datapage will be changed to your new setting.
Examples Auto*
10,000 RPM
Note: *The maximum RPM when in auto mode is set by the engine.
306
a Series / c Series / e Series
20.9 Color theme
The color theme in the Data application can be switched between light and dark. Dark theme (default)
Light theme
Changing the color theme You can change the color theme by following the steps below. From the Data application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Color Theme.
Selecting color theme will switch color between Light and Dark.
Data application
307
20.10 Units set-up
You can specify your preference for the units of measurement that will be used in all applications.
Menu item
Description
Options
Distance Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to distance.
· Nautical Miles
· NM & m (major units = Nautical Miles, minor units = meters)
· Statute Miles
· Kilometers
Speed Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to speed.
· Knots · MPH (Miles Per Hour) · KPH (Kilometers Per Hour)
Depth Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to depth.
· Feet · Meters · Fathoms
Temperature Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to temperature.
· Fahrenheit · Celsius
Pressure Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to pressure.
· Bar · PSI · Kilopascals
Volume Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to volume.
· US Gallons · Imperial Gallons · Liters
Economy Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to fuel usage.
· Distance per Volume · Volume per Distance · Liters per 100 km
Wind Speed Units
The units of measure that will be used in all applications for the display of all values related to wind speed.
· Knots · Metres per second
Changing units of measure
You can change the units of measure used by the multifunction display.
From the Data application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Units Set-up. 3. Select the type of measurement you want to
change. 4. Select the new unit of measure.
308
a Series / c Series / e Series
20.11 Resetting minimum and maximum readings
Minimum and maximum readings sorted on the display can be reset from the Data application.
From the Data application, with the data you want to reset displayed onscreen: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Data Resets. 3. Select the data item you want to reset.
The reading is reset.
Note: Resets will only be available for data items that are currently displayed onscreen.
20.12 Resetting all datapages
You can reset the datapages in the data application to the factory defaults. 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Reset All Pages.
The confirm reset pop up message is displayed. 3. Select Yes to reset or No to cancel the action.
Note: Resetting all pages will restore your pre-configured pages to default settings and remove any custom pages that have been created. Number of engines and maximum RPM settings will not be changed during the reset.
Data application
309
310
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 21: Radar application
Chapter contents · 21.1 Radar application overview and features on page 312 · 21.2 Multiple radar scanners on page 314 · 21.3 Radar scanner status symbols on page 314 · 21.4 Radar context menu on page 316 · 21.5 Radar range and image quality on page 316 · 21.6 Target tracking on page 319 · 21.7 Distances, range, and bearing on page 322 · 21.8 Radar mode and orientation on page 325 · 21.9 Radar presentation menu options on page 327
· 21.10 Radar tuning: On-screen gain controls on page 330 · 21.11 HD and SuperHD radar adjustments on page 331 · 21.12 Non-HD digital radomes adjustments on page 333 · 21.13 Dual range radar operation on page 335 · 21.14 Radar scan speed on page 336 · 21.15 Radar Set-up menu on page 337 · 21.16 Resetting the radar on page 339
Radar application
311
21.1 Radar application overview and features
Radio Detection And Ranging (RADAR) is used to detect the presence, distance and speed of objects (known as `targets'). Radar works by transmitting radio pulses, then detecting reflections of these pulses (echoes) from objects in the area and displaying the reflections as targets on your display.
Important: Until you are familiar with interpreting the radar display; every opportunity should be taken to compare the radar screen patterns with visual targets such as other vessels, buoys and coastal structures. You should practise harbor and coastal navigation during daylight hours and in clear weather conditions.
12
3
4
5
· Color palettes.
· Adding AIS overlay.
· MARPA targets.
· VRM/EBL markers
Typically, your vessel's position is at the center of the display, and its dead ahead bearing is indicated by a vertical heading line, known as the Ship's Heading Marker (SHM).
Note: If the cursor is placed over the SHM, the SHM will temporarily be removed to help placing markers or acquiring targets etc.
Onscreen targets may be large, small, bright or faint, depending on the size of the object, its orientation and surface. If using a non-HD digital radome scanner, strongest target returns are displayed in yellow with weaker returns in 2 shades of blue. If using a HD or SuperHD radar scanner, stronger target returns show as different colors from a range of 256 colors, providing better clarity.
Note: Colors stated above refer to the default color palette.
67
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8
9
10
D12207-3
Description
Radar status bar. The status bar displays the following information:
· Range
· Radar scanner serial number
· Gain mode
· Orientation
· Motion mode
· Range ring spacing
Onscreen controls (Touchscreen multifunction displays only.)
Ship's Heading Marker (SHM)
Guard Zone
Radar status
Databox overlay
Waypoint
Safe zone ring
Range controls (Touchscreen multifunction displays only.)
Ship's position
Additional functionality of the Radar application includes:
312
Be aware that the size of a target on screen is dependent on many factors and may not necessarily be proportional to its physical size. Nearby objects may appear to be the same size as distant larger objects.
With experience, the approximate size of different objects can be determined by the relative size and brightness of the echoes.
You should bear in mind that the size of each onscreen target is affected by:
· The physical size of the reflecting object.
· The material from which the object is made. Metallic surfaces reflect signals better than non-metallic surfaces.
· Vertical objects such as cliffs reflect signals better than sloping objects such as sandbanks.
· High coastlines and mountainous coastal regions can be observed at longer radar ranges. Therefore, the first sight of land may be a mountain several miles inland from the coastline. Although the coastline may be much nearer, it may not appear on the radar until the vessel is closer to shore.
· Some targets, such as buoys and small vessels difficult to discern, because they do not present a consistent reflecting surface as they bob and toss about in the waves. Consequently these echoes tend to fade and brighten, and at times disappear momentarily.
· Buoys and small vessels resemble each other, but vessels can often be distinguished by their motion.
Note: A GPS receiver and a fast heading sensor are required for MARPA operation, and to enable radar/chart overlay.
a Series / c Series / e Series
Radar application Features
Depending on the connected · Radar Features radar scanner different options will be available.
Supports up to 2 radar scanners connected simultaneously.
· 21.2 Multiple radar scanners
Tracking targets.
· 21.6 Target tracking
Determining target distance, · 21.7 Distances, range, and
range and bearing.
bearing
Using waypoints to mark the · Waypoints in the radar
location of targets.
application
Changing the radar display · 21.8 Radar mode and
mode and orientation.
orientation
HD and SuperHD radar
Your multifunction display can be used with radar scanners.
HD and SuperHD radar scanners provide a range of advantages, making it easier to discern objects around your vessel.
HD and SuperHD radar scanners provide:
· Improved target detection.
· Full-color image.
· Dual Range operation.
· SuperHD option. This effectively increases the transmitter power by a factor of at least 2, and reduces the beamwidth by a similar amount.
Note: You must connect a SuperHD radar scanner in order to use the SuperHD option.
Radar Features
Depending on the type of Raymarine radar you have different features will be available to you, the table below shows which features and settings are supported by radar type:
Feature
Non-HD
SuperHD
Digital HD
HD Open Open
Radome Radome Array Array
Color
Auto / Auto / Auto /
Gain
Manual Manual Manual
(0-100%) (0-100%) (0-100%)
FTC
Off/On
(0-100%)
Sea
Auto Mode: Buoy Auto Mode: Harbor
Harbour / Coastal / Offshore / Manual (0-100%)
Auto / Manual (0-100%)
Auto / Manual (0-100%)
Auto / Manual (0-100%)
Radar application
Feature
Auto Mode: Offshore
Auto Mode: Coastal
Auto Mode: Bird
Power Boost
Antenna Boost
Non-HD Digital Radome
HD Radome
SuperHD HD Open Open Array Array
Interfer- Off /
Off / On
ence Re- Normal /
jection High
Off / On
Off / On
Target Ex- Off / Low / Off / On Off / On Off / On pansion High
MARPA 10
25
25
25
Targets
Dual Range
Dual
N/A
Range
Restric-
tions
Scanner 24 RPM 24 RPM / 24 RPM / 24 RPM /
Speed
Auto
Auto
Auto
Parking Offset
0-360 0-360 degrees degrees
Antenna Size
4ft / 6ft 4ft / 6ft
Display Timing
0-153.6m 0-767m 0-767m 0-767m (range de- (range de- (range dependant) pendant) pendant)
STC Preset
0-100%
Gain Preset
0-100
Tune Correction
Note: Features not listed are supported by all types of Raymarine Non-HD Digital, HD and SuperHD radars.
313
21.2 Multiple radar scanners
21.3 Radar scanner status symbols
The multifunction display supports the use of up to 2 radar scanners on the same network. For each radar application you can select which radar scanner is displayed. 2 radar scanners can be displayed simultaneously by creating a dual splitscreen radar page on the Homescreen.
Selecting a radar scanner On systems with 2 radar scanners, you can select which radar scanner is displayed in each radar application. From the Radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Select Radar option. 3. Select the radar scanner that you want to display
in the current radar application. The radar selection will be remembered by the application and will be displayed automatically the next time that application page is displayed.
The radar scanner power mode status is indicated in the databar.
Symbol
Radar power mode
Description
Transmit (TX)
Rotating icon, signifying that the scanner is on and transmitting. When SCANNER is set to ON, select this mode to activate the scanner. This is the usual mode of operation.
Standby (STBY)
Static icon, indicating that the scanner is on but not transmitting, and the antenna is not rotating. The scanner does not transmit and the radar data is removed from the screen. This is a power-save mode used when the radar is not needed for short time periods. When you return to transmit mode, the magnetron does not need to warm up again. This is the default mode.
Off
Scanner powered off when radar
not required, but display is in use
for other applications, such as the
chart. When selected, the system
counts down. During this time you
cannot re-power the scanner.
Timed Transmit
Scanner switches between on/transmitting, and standby mode. Scanner goes into power save mode when constant use of radar is not required.
Powering on the radar scanner
From the Radar application, with the Radar scanner powered off:
1. Select On from the onscreen .
The Radar scanner will power up in Standby mode.
314
a Series / c Series / e Series
3. Select Transmit to start the radar transmitting, or Standby to stop the radar transmitting.
2. Once the Radar has powered up, select Tx to start the Radar transmitting.
Putting the Radar into Standby The Radar can be placed into Standby mode, which allows the Radar to remain powered up but not transmitting. With the Radar transmitting, from the Radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Radar: so that Standby is selected.
Powering down the Radar scanner When the Radar is powered up it can be powered down using the Radar application menu. With the Radar powered up, from the Radar application 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Power down radar.
Using the power button to switch operating modes The radar operating modes can also be set using the multifunction displays shortcut page. 1. Press and release the Power button.
If you have 2 radar scanners connected; options for each radar scanner will be shown. The shortcuts page is displayed:
2. Select Power up radar(s) to turn on connected radars, or Power down Radar to turn off the selected radar.
Selecting Power up radar(s) will power up all radars connected to the network.
Radar application
315
21.4 Radar context menu
21.5 Radar range and image quality
The radar application includes a context menu which provides positional data and menu items.
Radar image quality
A number of factors can affect the quality of a radar image, including echoes, sea clutter, and other interference.
Not all radar echoes are produced by valid targets. Spurious or missing echoes may be caused by:
· Side lobes.
· Indirect echoes.
The context menu provides the following positional data for the cursor location in relation to your vessel: · Latitude · Longitude · Range · Bearing The context menu also provide the following menu items: · Acquire Target · Place VRM/EBL · Place Waypoint At Cursor · Slew thermal camera (Only available when
thermal camera is connected and operating.)
Accessing the context menu
· Multiple echoes.
· Blind sectors.
· Sea, rain, or snow clutter.
· Interference.
Through observation, practice, and experience, you can generally detect these conditions very quickly and use the radar controls to minimize them.
Side Lobes
Side lobe patterns are produced by small amounts of energy from the transmitted pulses that are radiated outside the narrow main beam. The effects of side lobes are most noticeable with targets at short ranges (normally below 3 nm), and in particular with larger objects. Side lobe echoes form either arcs on the radar screen similar to range rings, or a series of echoes forming a broken arc.
You can access the context menu by following the steps below.
1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays: i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
1
2
2
4
3
6 5
6
D1638-5
Item Description
1
Main lobe
2
Side lobes
3
Antenna
4
Arc
5
True echo
6
Side echoes
Indirect Echoes
There are several types of indirect echoes or ghost images. These sometimes have the appearance of true echoes, but in general they are intermittent and poorly defined.
316
a Series / c Series / e Series
1
2
3 4
Item Description
1
False echo
2
True echo
3
Passing ship
4
Mast or funnel
5
True echo
6
False echo
on the intensity of the rainfall or snow in the storm cell. The images in the table below show how the Rain control can clear up this clutter:
5
Rain clutter off
6
D1641-5
Rain clutter on
Multiple Echoes
Multiple echoes are not very common but can occur if there is a large target with a wide vertical surface at a comparatively short range. The transmitted signal will be reflected back and forth between the target and your own ship, resulting in multiple echoes, displayed beyond the range of the true target echo, but on the same bearing.
1
2
D1642-4
Sea Clutter
Radar returns from waves around the vessel can clutter the centre of the radar picture, making it difficult to detect real targets. Such `sea clutter' usually appears as multiple echoes on the display at short range scales, and the echoes are not repetitive or consistent in position. With high winds and extreme conditions, echoes from sea clutter may cause dense background clutter in the shape of an almost solid disc. Sea clutter can be suppressed using the sea clutter settings. The images in the table below show how the sea clutter settings can clear up some of this clutter:
Item Description
1
True echo
2
Multiple echoes
Sea clutter off
Blind Sectors
Obstructions such as funnels and masts near the radar antenna may obstruct the radar beam and cause radar shadows or `blind sectors'. If the obstruction is relatively narrow, there will be a reduction of the beam intensity, though not necessarily a complete cut-off. However, for wider obstructions there may be a total loss of signal in the shadow area. There may also be multiple echoes which extend behind the obstruction. Blind sector effects can normally be minimized by careful selection of the scanner site prior to installation.
Rain or Snow Clutter
The radar can see echoes from rain or snow. Returns from storm areas and rain squalls consist of countless small echoes that continuously change size, intensity and position. These returns sometimes appear as large hazy areas, depending
Sea clutter in auto
Radar application
317
Interference
When two or more radar-equipped vessels are operating within range of each other mutual radar interference can occur. This usually appears as a spiral of small dots from the display centre This type of interference is most noticeable at long ranges. This interference can be suppressed using the interference rejection settings. The images in the table below show how the Interference rejection settings can clear up some of this interference:
Interference rejection off
The table below shows typical maximum radar ranges for various radar antenna heights and target heights. Remember that although the radar horizon is greater than the optical horizon, the radar can only detect targets if a large enough target is above the radar horizon.
Antenna height Target height Maximum range
(meters)
(meters)
(Nautical miles)
3
3
7.7
3
10
10.9
5
3
8.8
5
10
12
Interference rejection on
Maximum radar range
The usable range of the radar is limited by factors such as the height of the scanner, and height of the target.
Maximum radar range is essentially line-of-sight, so is limited by the height of the scanner and the height of the target as illustrated below:
h
1
Item 1 2 3 a1 a2 Rmax
h
H
318
Rmax
a1
a2
2
Rmax = 2.23 ( h + H )
H 3
D1643-4
Description Radar equipped vessel.
Curvature of the earth.
Target (Cliff).
Radar horizon of antenna.
Radar horizon of target. Maximum radar range in nautical miles. Rmax = a1 + a2 Radar antenna height in metres. Target height in metres.
a Series / c Series / e Series
21.6 Target tracking
The Guard Zone , VRM/EBL and MARPA functions will help you track targets and avoid collisions. With a radar connected to your multifunction display, you can: · Assess how far away a target is and its bearing
(VRM/EBL). · Set an alarm to trigger when a target is within a
specified zone (Guard Zone). · Display detailed information on tracked targets
(MARPA). · Display the range and bearing of a target.
Setting up a radar guard zone From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Zones. 3. Select Guard Zone so that On is highlighted.
Selecting Guard Zone will switch the zone On and Off. 4. Select Guard Zone Set-up. 5. Select Shape: to switch between Sector or Circle. 6. Select Outer: . The Outer numeric adjust control is displayed. 7. Adjust the outer edge of the guard zone to the required distance. 8. Select Ok to close the numeric adjust control. 9. Select Inner: . The Inner numeric adjust control is displayed. 10. Adjust the inner edge of the guard zone to the required distance. 11. Select Ok to close the numeric adjust control. 12. Select Width: . The Width numeric adjust control is displayed. 13. Adjust the width of the guard zone in degrees. 14. Select Ok to close the numeric adjust control. 15. Select Bearing: . The Bearing numeric adjust control is displayed. 16. Adjust the bearing of the guard zone in degrees port or degrees starboard. 17. Select Ok to close the numeric adjust control.
Note: Guard zone width and bearing can only be adjusted when the Shape: is set to Sector.
Guard zone context menu The guard zone function includes a context menu which provides additional menu items.
Radar application
The context menu provides the following menu items:
· Acquire Target.
· Adjust Zone
· Zone Off
Accessing the context menu
You can access the context menu by following the steps below. 1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays:
i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
Adjusting guard zone sensitivity
You can adjust the threshold at which the alarm is triggered by a target entering the guard zone.
From the Radar application menu: 1. Select Zones. 2. Select Sensitivity.
The sensitivity numeric adjust control is displayed. 3. Adjust the sensitivity to the required value. 4. Select Ok or Back to confirm setting and close
the numeric adjust control.
MARPA overview
MARPA is used for target tracking and risk analysis in the radar application.
With an accurate heading sensor connected to your multifunction display, you can use the Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (MARPA) functions for target tracking and risk analysis. MARPA improves collision avoidance by calculating information for tracked targets, and provides continuous, accurate, and rapid situation evaluation. The number of targets that you can track at any one time is dependent on the model of radar scanner that you are using.
MARPA tracks acquired targets, and calculates the target's speed and course.
Each target tracked can be displayed with a graphic indicating the Closest Point of Approach (CPA), and Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA). The calculated target data can also be shown on your screen. Each target is continually assessed and an audible alarm is sounded if a target becomes dangerous, or is lost.
For effective MARPA operation, your multifunction display must have accurate heading and speed data for your vessel. The better the quality of the heading and speed data, the better MARPA will perform. For the best heading data, a Raymarine SMART heading sensor or a gyro-stabilized autopilot is required.
In True Motion mode, Speed Over Ground (SOG) and Course Over Ground (COG) information is required to show true target course and speed.
In Relative Motion mode, heading and speed information is required.
319
12
3
4
If a target is lost, either because the MARPA software has lost contact with it, or because it has moved out of range, an audible alarm is sounded and an on-screen warning appears. The on-screen symbol will change to the target lost symbol. Acknowledging the warning will silence the alarm and remove the on-screen warning and the target lost symbol.
Effective range for MARPA targets
MARPA target acquisition is only available at radar range scales of up to 12 nm, although tracking continues at all ranges.
D12219-1
If you change to a smaller range scale, targets may
Item
Description
be beyond the range of your radar scanner and
1
Safe target
will be lost. In such cases, an on-screen warning indicates that the target is off-screen.
2
Lost target
3
Dangerous target
MARPA context menu
The MARPA function includes a context menu which
4
Target being acquired
provides positional data and menu items.
Safety notices
MARPA can improve collision avoidance when used wisely. It is your responsibility to exercise common prudence and navigational judgement.
There are conditions where acquiring a target may become difficult. These same conditions may be a factor in successfully tracking a target. Some of the conditions are:
· The target echo is weak. The target is very close to land, buoys or other large targets.
· The target or your own vessel is making rapid manoeuvres.
· Choppy sea state conditions exist and the target is buried in excessive sea clutter or in deep swells.
· Choppy sea state conditions exist yielding poor stability; own vessel's heading data is very unstable.
· Inadequate heading data.
Symptoms of such conditions include:
· target acquisition is difficult and the MARPA vectors are unstable;
· the symbol wanders away from the target, locks-on to another target, or changes to a lost symbol target.
In these circumstances, target acquisition and tracking may need to be re-initiated and in some cases might be impossible to maintain. Better quality heading data might improve performance in these circumstances.
How a MARPA risk is assessed
Each target is monitored to ascertain whether it will be within a certain distance from your vessel within a certain time. If so, the target is designated as dangerous, and an audible warning is sounded and a warning displayed. The target symbol changes to the dangerous target symbol and flashes to indicate that it is a dangerous target. Acknowledging the alarm will remove the warning.
320
The context menu provides the following target information: · CPA · TCPA · COG · SOG The context menu also provide the following menu items: · Cancel target · CPA Graphic · MARPA Data · Slew thermal camera (Only available when
thermal camera is connected and operating.)
Accessing the context menu
You can access the context menu by following the steps below. 1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays:
i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
Configuring target options
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Targets. 3. Select Target Options.
a Series / c Series / e Series
4. Select Vector Length. 5. Select an appropriate time period.
The distance that your vessel travels in the time period you specify here determines the length of the vector lines. 6. Select Target History. 7. Select an appropriate time period. The target's previous position will be plotted on the radar display as a target icon with lighter shading than the actual target.
Note: MARPA and AIS functions share Safe Zone and Vector Length settings.
Setting up the Safe Zone Ring
You can adjust the Safe Zone Ring radius, the time to Safe Zone and choose whether AIS targets trigger the Safe Zone alarm from the Safe Zone Ring Set-up menu.
The Safe Zone Set-up menu can be accessed as follows:
· From the Radar application: Menu > Zones > Safe Zone Set-up.
· From the Chart application with only the AIS overlay enabled: Menu > AIS Options > Safe Zone > Safe Zone Set-up.
· From the Chart application with only the Radar overlay enabled: Menu > Radar Options > Safe Zone > Safe Zone Set-up.
· From the Chart application with the AIS and Radar overlays enabled: Menu > Radar & AIS Options > Safe Zone > Safe Zone Set-up.
From the Safe Zone Set-up menu: 1. Select Safe Zone Radius.
i. Select the required radius for the safe zone. 2. Select Time to Safe Zone.
i. Select the required time period. 3. Select Safezone (AIS targets) so that On is
highlighted. Selecting Safezone (AIS targets) will switch the dangerous target alarm between On and Off.
Using MARPA
Acquiring a MARPA target to track
From the radar application: 1. Select the target to be acquired.
The MARPA context menu is displayed. 2. Select Acquire Target.
The "target being acquired" symbol is displayed. If the target is present for several scans, the radar locks-on to the target, and the symbol changes to "safe target" status.
Cancelling a MARPA target using the MARPA context menu
From the radar application: 1. Select the relevant target.
The MARPA context menu is displayed. 2. Select Cancel Target or Cancel All Targets.
Radar application
Cancelling a MARPA target using the menu
1. Select Menu. 2. Select Targets. 3. Select View Target Lists. 4. Select View MARPA List. 5. Select the relevant MARPA target from the list. 6. Select Cancel Target or Cancel All Targets.
Vessel vectors (CPA graphics) overview
CPA graphics show vectors for your vessel and a selected target.
A vector is a line on-screen showing the predicted courses of your vessel and the selected target if you both remain on your present course. These vectors vary in length due to vessel speed and vector length set in the MARPA Set-up menu.
1
2
143°T 28.0kt
0.556nm 00h30m09s
D9008-2
Item
Description
1
Target vector
2
CPA graphic
True motion
With the display set in true motion mode, the vectors of your vessel and the target are shown extended to their intersection point. The CPA is shown as a line that is placed on your vessel's vector at the point of the CPA. The length and direction of the line indicates the distance and bearing of the target at CPA. The text indicates CPA and TCPA. The text next to the target symbol indicates its true course and speed.
Relative motion
With the display set in relative motion mode, no vector extension of your vessel is shown. The CPA line emerges from your own vessel, with the target vector extension being shown as relative, not true. The text next to the target indicates its course and speed.
Displaying MARPA target data
1. Select the target. The MARPA context menu is displayed which provides the following data:
· Closest Point of Approach (CPA).
· Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA).
· COG (if available).
· SOG (if available).
321
2. To display CPA graphics select CPA Graphic from the context menu: i. Select Auto to display the CPA graphic when the target is selected. ii. Select On to display the CPA graphic while the target is being tracked. iii. Select Off to hide the CPA graphic.
3. To display course and bearing information alongside to the target select MARPA Data so that Show is highlighted. i. Selecting MARPA Data will switch between Show and Hide.
Viewing full MARPA target information
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Targets. 3. Select View Target Lists. 4. Select View MARPA List. 5. Select the relevant target.
21.7 Distances, range, and bearing
When you are using the radar application, you can measure distances, ranges and bearings in a variety of ways.
These options are detailed in the table below:
Functions
Distances Between Points
Range
From Your
Vessel
Bearings
Range Rings Yes (approx- Yes (approx- No imate dis- imate range) tance)
Cursor
No
Yes
Yes
Variable
No
Range
Markers /
Electronic
Bearing Lines
(VRM/EBL)
Yes
Yes
Floating
Yes
No
Yes
VRM/EBL
Measuring using the range rings
Use the range rings to gauge the approximate distances between points. Range rings are concentric circles displayed on the screen and centred from your vessel at pre-set distances. The number and spacing of the rings changes as you range in and out.
Examples:
D12214-1
D12215-1
D12216-1
Range -- 1/4 nm Range Rings -- 760ft apart
Range -- 3/4 nm Range Rings -- 1/4 nm apart
Range -- 1 1/2 nm Range Rings -- 1/4 nm apart
Measuring using the cursor
To measure the bearing and range from your vessel to a specified target, move the cursor to the appropriate position on the screen and press Ok, the radar context menu will be displayed which shall provide:
· Latitude
· Longitude
· Range
· Bearing
1
2
D12217-2
322
a Series / c Series / e Series
Item
Description
12
3
1.
Cursor
0.471nm
2.
Bearing and range from your
55°P
vessel to the cursor position
VRM/EBL
You can also display the cursor position in the databar, from the homescreen select: Customize > Databar Set-up > Edit Databar, now select the data box where you want the cursor position to be displayed. Select Navigation > Cursor Position.
Measuring using VRM/EBL
Variable Range Markers (VRM)
A Variable Range Marker (VRM) is a circle centred on your vessel's position and fixed with respect to the heading mode. When this circle is adjusted to align with a target, its range from your vessel is measured and displayed on the Radar context menu when you select the VRM with the cursor.
Electronic Bearing Lines (EBL)
An Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) is a line drawn from your vessel to the edge of the window. When this line is rotated to align with a target, its bearing relative to your vessel's heading is measured and displayed on the Radar context menu when you select the VRM with the cursor.
The VRM/EBL are combined to measure both the range and the bearing of the specified target.
D12218-1
Item
Description
1
Range and bearing
2
Target 1
3
Target 2
VRM/EBL context menu
The VRM/EBL function includes a context menu which provides positional data and menu items.
1 23
4
0.624nm 56°S
VRM/EBL
D8403-2
Item
Description
1
VRM
2
Target
3
EBL
4
Range and bearing
Measuring using floating VRM/EBL
You can use the VRM/EBL float function to measure the range and bearing between any two points on the radar screen. This function allows you to move the VRM/EBL centre away from your vessel's position and onto a target. You can then change the radius of the VRM to determine the distance between two points and change the angle of the EBL, relative to its new origin, to obtain the bearing.
Radar application
The context menu provides positional data of the VRM/EBL in relation to your vessel: · Range · Bearing The context menu also provide the following menu items: · Float Centre · Adjust · VRM/EBL Off
Accessing the context menu You can access the context menu by following the steps below. 1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays:
i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
Creating a VRM/EBL on the radar display To create a VRM/EBL on a touchscreen multifunction display follow the steps below: From the radar application: 1. Select and hold on the screen.
The radar context menu is displayed. 2. Select Place VRM/EBL. 3. Select the required location / target.
The VRM/EBL is now set at the selected location.
323
Creating a VRM/EBL on the radar display
From the radar application: 1. Select a target or location on screen. 2. Press the Ok button.
The radar context menu is displayed. 3. Select Place VRM/EBL. 4. Using the Joystick adjust the VRM/EBL to the
required bearing and range. 5. Press the Ok button to save the setting.
Using the radar range rings
Radar range rings enable you to measure the distance between two points on the radar display.
Use the range rings to gauge the approximate distances between points. Range rings are concentric circles displayed on the screen and centred from your vessel at pre-set distances. The number and spacing of the rings changes as you range in and out.
Examples:
Creating a floating VRM/EBL on the radar display
To float a VRM/EBL on a touchscreen multifunction display follow the steps below:
From the radar application with a VRM/EBL already created: 1. Press and hold on the VRM/EBL.
The VRM/EBL context menu is displayed. 2. Select Float Center. 3. Select the desired location for the center position.
The VRM/EBL is placed at the new location.
Creating a floating VRM/EBL on the radar display
D12214-1
D12215-1
D12216-1
Range -- 1/4 nm Range Rings -- 760ft apart
Range -- 3/4 nm Range Rings -- 1/4 nm apart
Range -- 1 1/2 nm Range Rings -- 1/4 nm apart
Enabling and disabling radar range rings
From the radar application: 1. Select MENU. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Range Rings.
Selecting Range rings will switch the range rings On and Off.
From the radar application with a VRM/EBL already created: 1. Position the cursor over the VRM/EBL. 2. Press the Ok button.
The radar context menu is displayed. 3. Use the Rotary Control to select Float Center. 4. Press the Ok button. 5. Using the Joystick, move the center position of
the circle to the desired position. 6. Press the Ok button to confirm the new position.
Unfloating a VRM/EBL on the radar display
To re-center a VRM/EBL on a touchscreen multifunction display follow the steps below:
From the radar application: 1. Position the cursor over the VRM/EBL.
The Radar context menu is displayed. 2. Select Center.
Unfloating a VRM/EBL on the radar display
From the radar application: 1. Position the cursor over the VRM/EBL. 2. Press the Ok button.
The VRM/EBL context menu is displayed. 3. Select Center.
324
a Series / c Series / e Series
21.8 Radar mode and orientation
Item
Description
Radar orientation modes
The radar can operate in a number of orientation modes to suit different types of navigation.
The orientation of the radar refers to the relationship between the radar and the direction that you are travelling in. There are three orientation modes to choose from:
· Head-Up
· North-Up
· Course-Up
These orientation modes are used in conjunction with motion mode to control how your boat and radar relate to one another and how they are displayed on screen. Any changes that you make to the orientation of the radar are retained when you switch off your multifunction display.
Head-Up
1
True north at top.
2
As your vessel's heading
changes:
· Radar picture is fixed (north up)
· SHM rotates accordingly
Note: If heading data becomes unavailable whilst in this mode, a warning message will be shown, the status bar indicates North-Up in brackets and the radar uses 0° heading in relative motion. When heading data becomes available once more, North-Up mode is reinstated.
Note: It is not possible to select Head Up mode when the motion mode is set to True.
Course-Up
1
N
2
N
This is the default mode for the radar application.
1
N
2
Item 1
2
North-Up
1
N
Radar application
N
D12208-1
Description
Ship's Heading Marker (SHM) (indicating the vessel's current heading is upwards).
As the vessel's heading changes:
· SHM is fixed upwards
· Radar picture rotates accordingly
2
N
D12209-1
Item
Description
D12210-1
1
Current course upwards.
2
As your vessel's heading
changes:
· Radar picture is fixed
· SHM rotates accordingly
If you select a new course, the picture will reset to display the new course upwards.
The reference used for Course-Up depends upon the information available at a given time. The system always prioritizes this information in the following order:
1. Bearing from origin to destination, that is, intended course.
2. Locked heading from an Autopilot.
3. Bearing to waypoint.
4. Instantaneous heading (when course-up is selected).
Note: If heading data becomes unavailable whilst in this mode, a warning message will be shown, the status bar indicates the Course Up in brackets and the radar uses 0° heading in relative motion. When heading data becomes available once more, Course-Up mode is reinstated.
Selecting the radar orientation mode From the radar application: 1. Select Menu.
325
2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Orientation & Motion Mode. 4. Select Orientation. 5. Select the required orientation.
Radar motion modes overview
The motion mode controls the relationship between the radar and your vessel. There are two modes:
· Relative motion.
· True motion.
The selected motion mode is displayed in the status bar. The default setting is Relative Motion with no offset.
Changing the radar vessel offset
Radar offset is only available in Relative motion mode.
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Orientation & Motion Mode. 4. Select Boat Offset. 5. Select the required offset value.
Relative Motion (RM) with optional Vessel Offset
When the motion mode is set to Relative, the position of your vessel is fixed on the screen and all the targets move relative to the vessel. You can specify whether the vessel is fixed in the center of the window, partially offset or fully offset to increase the view ahead, as shown below:
Examples:
D12211-1
D12212-1
D12213-1
Center offset
Partial offset
Full offset
The default motion mode is "Relative", with center offset.
True Motion (TM)
When the motion mode is set to True, fixed radar targets maintain a constant position and moving vessels (including your vessel) travel in true perspective to each other and to fixed landmasses on the screen. As the vessel's position approaches the edge of the screen, the radar picture is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead.
Note: If heading and position data become unavailable when True motion is selected, a warning message will be shown, the mode will revert to relative motion and be noted in the status bar in brackets, for example, (TM).
Note: It is not possible to select True Motion when the orientation is set to Head Up.
Selecting the radar motion mode
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Orientation & Motion Mode. 4. Select Motion Mode.
Selecting Motion Mode will switch between True and Relative.
326
a Series / c Series / e Series
21.9 Radar presentation menu options
Function
Description
Options
Dual Range
This menu item allows you to turn Dual range mode On and Off. · On
· Off
Dual Range Channel
This menu item allows you to choose long or short channel for · 1
dual range.
·2
Orientation & Motion Mode
This menu item contains a sub-menu which enables you to adjust the orientation and motion mode:
· Orientation · Motion Mode · Boat Offset
Orientation · Head Up · North Up · Course Up Motion Mode
· True
· Relative
Boat Offset
· Center (default)
· Partial Offset
· Full Offset
Select Waypoints to Display
This menu item takes you to the Display Waypoints dialog where you can choose which waypoint icons to Show/Hide in the radar application.
Display Waypoint · Show · Hide
Waypoint Name
This menu item allows you to show or hide waypoint names in the radar application.
· Show · Hide
Enhance Echoes
This menu item contains a sub-menu which enable you to adjust the follow options:
· Interference Rejection · IR Level -- only available on non-HD digital radomes. · Expansion
Interference Rejection
· On · Off IR Level -- only available on non-HD digital radomes.
· Expansion Level -- only available on non-HD digital radomes.
· Wakes
· Wakes Period
· Normal · High Expansion · On
· Off
Expansion Level -- only available on non-HD digital radomes.
· Low
· High
Wakes
· On
· Off
Wakes Time Period
· 10 Secs
· 30 Secs
· 1 Min
Radar application
327
Function Color Palette
Range Rings Safe Zone Ring Gain Controls Databoxes
Description
Options
· 5 Min
· 10 Min
This menu item allows you to select a Color Palette for the radar application.
· Bold · Professional 1
· Professional 2
· Classic
· Night Vision
This menu item allows you to turn the range rings On and Off. · On
· Off
This item allows you to show or hid the safe zone ring in the radar application.
· Show · Hide
This item allows you to show or hide the onscreen gain controls · Show
on multifunction displays with a touchscreen.
· Hide
This menu item contains a sub-menu which enables you to turn on and select information to display in data cells located on the bottom left of the radar application (Data cells will be displayed in all radar windows).
Databox 1 & 2 · On · Off
· Databox 1
Select Data
· Select Data · Databox 2
· List of available data by category
· Select Data
Enhance echoes functions
Enabling radar interference rejection
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Enhance Echoes. 4. Select Interference Rejection so that On is
highlighted. Selecting Interference Rejection will switch the function between On and Off. 5. For non-HD digital radomes you can also select an interference rejection level: i. Select IR Level.
Selecting IR Level will switch between Normal and High.
Enabling radar expansion
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Enhance Echoes. 4. Select Expansion so that On is highlighted.
Selecting expansion will switch the function between On and Off. 5. For non-HD digital radomes you can also select an interference rejection level i. Select Expansion Level.
Selecting Expansion Level will switch between Low and High.
328
Radar wakes (Trails)
Radar wakes enable you to see target history. Wakes will appear differently depending on whether your radar is set to True motion or Relative motion mode.
Relative motion mode
In relative motion mode radar wakes appear on targets that are moving relative to the sea (Sea stabilized) this includes targets that are fixed to the ground, such as piles.
Wakes do not appear if a target is moving at the same speed and in the same direction as your vessel.
Relative motion mode example
1 2 5
AF T ILLUSTRATION DRTEMPORARY
3 4
D12744-1
a Series / c Series / e Series
1
Target moving faster and in the same direction
· 10 sec
as vessel (Wake appears towards your vessel's
· 30 sec
heading).
· 1 min
2
Ships heading marker.
· 5 min
3
Target moving in opposite direction to vessel (Wake
appears opposite to your vessel's heading).
· 10 min
4
Target moving at approximately the same speed
6. Select the required time period.
and direction as vessel (Minimal to no wake).
5
Fixed target (Wake in opposite direction to your
vessel's heading).
True motion mode In true motion mode radar wakes appear on targets that are moving relative to the ground. Wakes do not appear on targets that are fixed to the ground.
True motion mode example
2
AF T ILLUSTRATION DRTEMPORARY
1 3
4
D12745-1
1
Ships heading marker.
2
Target travelling at between 0 kt to 1 kt (Minimal to
no wake).
3
Target moving in opposite direction to vessel (Wake
appears in opposite direction to your vessel's
heading).
4
Target moving in same direction as vessel (Wake
appears towards your vessel's heading).
Note: You may see a wake `ring' around fixed targets due to small error factors such as rotation time delays. This is normal operation.
Enabling radar wakes
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation.
3. Select Enhance Echoes.
4. Select Wakes so that On is highlighted.
Selecting Wakes will switch the function between On and Off.
5. Select Wakes time period. A list of wake time periods id displayed:
Radar application
329
21.10 Radar tuning: On-screen gain controls
Touchscreen multifunction displays provide on-screen access to controls for Gain, Rain and Sea clutter.
4. Adjust the slider bar to the required setting.
5. The slider bar will auto dismiss, or you can select the on-screen icon again to close the slider bar.
Gain control
Rain control
Sea control
Note: non-touchscreen controls are accessed by the menu options: Menu > Rain and Menu > Adjust Gain.
Enabling and disabling on-screen gain controls You can enable and disable the on-screen gain controls by following the steps below. On a touchscreen multifunction display, with the relevant application displayed. 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Gain Controls.
Selecting Gain Controls will switch between showing and hiding the on-screen controls.
Note: When the on-screen Gain controls are set to Hidden then the Gain settings can be accessed directly from the application menu: Menu > Gain.
Using the on-screen gain controls To adjust settings using the on-screen controls follow the steps below. On a touchscreen multifunction display, with the radar application displayed: 1. Select either the Gain, Rain or Sea on-screen
icon. The on-screen slider bar control is displayed. 2. Select the Auto box (Gain and Sea) or Off box (Rain) so that a tick is placed in the box to switch to automatic control or switch the control off, or 3. Select the Auto box (Gain and Sea) or Off box (Rain) so that a tick is removed placed in the box to switch to manual control.
330
a Series / c Series / e Series
21.11 HD and SuperHD radar adjustments
You can use the presets and other functions to improve the quality of the radar picture.
The following settings are available from the Radar menu and apply to HD radomes, HD and SuperHD open array scanners:
Menu Item Preset Mode
Description
Options
The radar gain presets enable you to quickly select pre-configured settings to achieve the best picture in different situations. Raymarine strongly recommends the use of these presets to achieve optimum results.
· Buoy -- a special mode that enhances the detection of small objects like mooring buoys. It is useful at ranges up to 0.75 nm.
· Harbor -- this is the default mode. This setting takes account of land clutter so that smaller targets, like navigation buoys, are not lost.
· Coastal -- accounts for the slightly higher levels of sea clutter you might encounter out of harbor and adjusts the radar display accordingly.
· Offshore -- automatically adjusts for high levels of sea clutter.
· Bird Mode -- a special mode that helps you to identify flocks of birds, useful when identifying suitable fishing locations, for example.
Note: Bird Mode requires a SuperHD open array with software version 3.23 or above or an HD radome.
Rain Adjust Preset
Radar application
The radar scanner detects echoes from rain or snow. These echoes appear on screen as countless small echoes continuously changing size, intensity and position. Turning the rain clutter function On suppresses the bulk effect of rain returns from around your vessel, making it easier to recognize other objects. You can adjust the intensity of this setting between 0 and 100%.
Each of the gain presets can be manually adjusted using gain, color gain and sea clutter functions.
· On -- enables the Rain function and allows you to adjust the setting between 0 and 100%.
· Off -- disables the Rain function. This is the default.
· Gain -- enables you to use a preset in automatic mode, or to adjust its gain manually between 0 and 100%.
· Color Gain-- adjusts the intensity (color) of displayed targets, but does not affect the number of targets displayed. Increasing the color gain causes more targets to be displayed in the same color, which may help you to determine whether an object is an actual target, or just background noise. Reducing the color gain may provide better target detail and detection.
· Sea -- radar echoes from waves around your vessel can clutter the center of the radar picture, making it difficult to detect real targets. Adjusting the sea gain reduces this clutter for up to 5 nautical miles (depending on wave and sea conditions) from your vessel.
· SuperHD Controls -- for SuperHD scanners only:
Antenna Boost: scales the effective antenna size. At zero, the effective antenna size matches its actual size. At 95%, the effective antenna size is doubled. Increasing the effective antenna size separates targets that appear merged at lower settings.
Power Boost: adjusts effective transmit power. At zero, the radar operates at its standard power (4 kW or 12 kW). At 90, the effective power is increased by a factor of at least two. Increasing the power makes targets more distinct from noise. For maximum benefit, reduce power boost to prevent saturation of strong targets.
331
Selecting radar presets
These presets require a HD or SuperHD radar scanner. Bird mode requires a SuperHD open array scanner with software version 3.23 or above or an HD radome.
From the Radar application menu: 1. Select Preset Mode. 2. Select Buoy, Harbor, Costal, Offshore, or Bird
as appropriate.
Adjusting radar preset gain
Raymarine strongly recommends the use of the preset gain modes to achieve optimum results. However if required manual adjustments can be made.
From the Radar application menu, with the required Preset Mode selected: 1. Select Adjust Preset <Mode>, where <Mode>
shall be the Preset mode already selected. 2. Select Gain . 3. The Gain slider bar control is displayed. 4. Adjust the Gain slider bar control to the
appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%), or 5. Select the Auto box so that a tick is placed in the
box for automatic gain control.
4. Select the Off box so that a tick is placed in the box to turn off anti rain clutter control.
Adjusting SuperHD radar antenna boost
From the Radar application menu: 1. Select Adjust Preset <Mode>, where <Mode>
shall be the Preset mode already selected. 2. Select Antenna.
The Antenna Boost slider bar control is displayed. 3. Adjust the Antenna Boost slider bar control to the
appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%), or 4. Select the Auto box so that a tick is placed in the
box for automatic boost control.
Adjusting SuperHD radar power boost
From the Radar application menu: 1. Select Adjust Preset <Mode>, where <Mode>
shall be the Preset mode already selected. 2. Select Power.
The Power Boost slider bar control is displayed. 3. Adjust the Power Boost slider bar control to the
appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%), or 4. Select the Auto box so that a tick is placed in the
box for automatic boost control.
Adjusting radar preset color
From the Radar application menu, with the required Preset Mode selected: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Adjust Preset <Mode>, where <Mode>
shall be the Preset mode already selected. 3. Select Col: . 4. The Color slider bar control is displayed. 5. Adjust the Color slider bar control to the
appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%), or 6. Select the Auto box so that a tick is placed in the
box for automatic color control.
Adjusting radar anti sea clutter
From the Radar application menu, with the required Preset Mode selected: 1. Select Adjust Preset <Mode>, where <Mode>
shall be the Preset mode already selected. 2. Select Sea: . 3. The Sea clutter slider bar control is displayed. 4. Adjust the Sea clutter slider bar control to the
appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%), or 5. Select the Auto box so that a tick is placed in the
box for automatic sea clutter control.
Adjusting radar anti rain clutter
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Rain.
The Rain clutter slider bar control is displayed. 3. Adjust the Rain clutter slider bar control to the
appropriate setting (between 0% and 100%), or
332
a Series / c Series / e Series
21.12 Non-HD digital radomes adjustments
You can use the gain presets and other functions to improve the quality of the radar picture.
The following settings apply to non-HD digital radomes and are available from the Radar menu:
Menu Item Rain
Adjust Preset
Description
Options
The radar scanner detects echoes from rain or snow. These echoes appear on screen as countless small echoes continuously changing size, intensity and position. Turning the rain clutter function On suppresses the bulk effect of rain returns from around your vessel, making it easier to recognize other objects. You can adjust the intensity of this setting between 0 and 100%.
· On -- enables the Rain function and allows you to adjust the setting between 0 and 100%.
· Off -- disables the Rain function. This is the default.
Enables you to adjust the sensitivity of the radar reception. In some situations, adjusting the sensitivity may improve the clarity of the radar picture. The following settings are available:
· Gain
· FTC -- Enables you to remove areas of clutter at a distance from your vessel. It also helps you to distinguish between two very close echoes on the same bearing, which may otherwise merge and appear as one echo. You can adjust the intensity of the FTC function between 0 and 100%:
A higher setting shows only the leading edge of large (rain clutter) echoes, while the effect on smaller (ship) echoes is only slight.
A lower setting reduces background noise and fill-in returns from land and other large targets.
· Sea -- Enable you to quickly select pre-configured settings to achieve the best picture in different situations. Each of the gain presets has a gain function, which is set to automatic mode by default. Raymarine strongly recommends the use of these presets to achieve optimum results. However, you can adjust this gain manually if required.
· Auto Sea Mode
Gain
· Auto -- the preset operates in automatic mode. This is the default.
· Man -- allows you to manually adjust the intensity of the gain, from 0 to 100%.
FTC
· On -- enables the FTC function and allows you to adjust the setting between 0 and 100%.
· Off -- disables the FTC function. This is the default.
Sea
· Auto-- the preset operates in automatic mode. This is the default.
· Man-- allows you to manually adjust the intensity of the sea gain, from 0 to 100%.
Auto Sea Mode
· Harbor -- this is the default mode. This setting takes account of land clutter so that smaller targets, like navigation buoys, are not lost.
· Coastal -- accounts for the slightly higher levels of sea clutter you might encounter out of harbor and adjusts the radar display accordingly.
· Offshore -- Automatically adjusts for high levels of sea clutter.
Adjusting radar anti rain clutter From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Rain.
The Rain clutter slider bar control is displayed. 3. Adjust the Rain clutter slider bar control to the
appropriate setting (between 0% and 100%), or 4. Select the Off box so that a tick is placed in the
box to turn off anti rain clutter control.
Radar application
Adjusting the radar FTC function
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Adjust Preset <Mode>, where <Mode>
shall be the Preset mode already selected. 3. Select FTC.
The FTC slider bar control is displayed. 4. Adjust the FTC slider bar control to the
appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%), or
333
5. Select the Auto box so that a tick is placed in the box for automatic FTC control.
Adjusting radar anti sea clutter
From the Radar application menu, with the required Preset Mode selected: 1. Select Adjust Preset <Mode>, where <Mode>
shall be the Preset mode already selected. 2. Select Sea: . 3. The Sea clutter slider bar control is displayed. 4. Adjust the Sea clutter slider bar control to the
appropriate setting (between 0 and 100%), or 5. Select the Auto box so that a tick is placed in the
box for automatic sea clutter control.
Selecting radar preset mode
These presets require a digital radar scanner.
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Preset Mode. 3. Select Harbor, Costal or Offshore as appropriate.
334
a Series / c Series / e Series
21.13 Dual range radar operation
The Dual Range radar function enables you to view 2 ranges at the same time in separate windows. The function is available with SuperHD and HD radar scanners.
Using your multifunction display and an HD or SuperHD radar scanner, you can view either a short or a long range image in separate radar windows.
The default setting is Long, which provides a standard scanner range.
Scanner HD Radome
Dual range mode
Long (1)
Short (2)
*Range covered by software versions 1.xx to 2.xx
1/8 nm to 48 nm
1/8 nm to 48 nm
Range covered by software versions 3.xx onwards
1/8 nm to 48 nm
1/8 nm to 48 nm
Limitations of software version 1.xx and 2.xx
· The value for the short range setting must be less than or equal to the long range setting.
· With Dual Range On and a short range window active Expansion control shall be disabled in the Enhance Echoes menu.
Using Dual Range with SuperHD scanners
Dual range radar operation with SuperHD scanners.
Limitations
· Dual Range operation is not available if MARPA targets are active.
· You cannot acquire MARPA targets if Dual Range is enabled.
· Radar/chart sync and radar/chart overlay are temporarily disabled when Dual Range is enabled.
Dual range radar compatibility The range covered by the short Dual Range option depends on the radar scanner you are using, and the software version it is using.
When using the short Dual Range option, a SuperHD scanner operates in HD mode only. When using the long Dual Range option, a SuperHD radar operates in SuperHD mode.
Scanner
Dual Range mode Operating mode
4 Kw SuperHD Long Open Array
SuperHD
Short
HD
12 Kw SuperHD Long Open Array
SuperHD
Short
HD
Scanner
4 Kw HD Open Array
Dual range mode Long (1)
Short (2)
*Range covered by software versions 1.xx to 2.xx
1/8 nm to 72 nm
1/8 nm to 3 nm
Range covered by software versions 3.xx onwards
1/8 nm to 72 nm
1/8 nm to 72 nm
Enabling Dual Range radar operation In the radar application. 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Presentation. 3. Select Dual Range so that On is highlighted.
Selecting Dual Range will switch between dual range On and Off.
Selecting range operation
4 Kw SuperHD Open Array
Long (1) Short (2)
12 Kw HD Long (1) Open Array
1/8 nm to 72 1/8 nm to 72
nm
nm
1/8 nm to 3 nm
n/a
1/8 nm to 72 nm
1/8 nm to 72 nm
With Dual Range set to on and the radar application screen displayed:
1. Select Menu.
2. Select Presentation.
3. Select Dual Range Channel to switch between 1 or 2, as appropriate.
Short (2)
12 Kw SuperHD Open Array
Long (1) Short (2)
n/a
1/8 nm to 72 nm
1/8 nm to 72 nm
1/8 nm to 72 nm
1/8 nm to 3 1/8 nm to 72
nm
nm
Radar application
335
21.14 Radar scan speed
SuperHD open array radars with software version 3.23 or above or HD radomes support multiple scan speeds.
Radar scan speed is set up using the Radar Set-up menu. When the system detects a scanner that is capable of operating at both 24 RPM and 48 RPM, 2 options are provided for scanner speed:
· 24 RPM
· Auto
If you have a radar scanner that only operates at 24 RPM, the scanner speed option is disabled. If the scanner speed option is enabled, you must select the Auto option if you want to use the higher scan speeds. This option automatically switches between the 24 RPM and 48 RPM scan speeds as appropriate.
Selecting radar scan speed
Follow the steps below to change the radar speed.
The speed option requires a 48 RPM compatible Raymarine HD radome or Raymarine SuperHD open array radar scanner.
Select your radar scanner speed from within the radar application. 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Radar Set-up. 3. Select Radar Speed 4. Select the required scanner speed:
· Auto
· 24 RPM
The Auto option automatically selects the appropriate speed for your radar range. 48 RPM is used at radar ranges of up to 3 nm. It provides an increased refresh rate, which is useful at high speed or in areas where you have large numbers of radar targets. At radar ranges of greater than 3 nm the display switches the radar speed to 24 RPM.
336
a Series / c Series / e Series
21.15 Radar Set-up menu
The Radar Set-up menu enables you to configure the performance and behavior of your radar scanner.
Function
Description
Options
Timed Transmit Set-up
This menu item contains a sub-menu that enables you to adjust the timed transmit options:
· Timed Transmit · Transmit Period · Standby Period
Timed Transmit · On · Off Transmit Period · 10 Scans
· 20 Scans
· 30 Scans
Standby Period
· 3 minutes
· 5 minutes
· 10 minutes
· 15 minutes
Tune Adjust
This menu item allows you to fine tune the radar scanner's receiver for maximum returns on the display. Raymarine recommends that this function is set to Auto. If you set this function to Manual and adjust the setting shortly after powering up the radar scanner, you should adjust it again approximately 10 minutes after powering up the scanner, as the required setting will change after the magnetron has warmed up.
Man · Auto · Man 0% -- 100%
EBL Reference
The measurement point used for reference when measuring distances using Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) and range rings in the chart application. The options are Relative to ships heading or referenced to the compass is degrees Magnetic -- True as selected in Bearing Mode.
· Relative · Mag-True
Sea Clutter Curve
This menu item allows you to adjust the Sea Clutter -- radar echoes from waves can make it difficult to detect real targets. These echoes are known as "sea clutter". Several factors can affect the level of clutter you see, including the weather and sea conditions, and the mounting height of the radar. The sea clutter curve setting adjusts the radar's sensitivity to sea clutter. The steepest setting for the curve is 1, and the most shallow setting is 8.
· Adjust Curve (1 to 8)
Scanner Speed
SuperHD open array radars with software version 3.23 or above or HD radomes support multiple scan speeds:
· 24 RPM · 48 RPM
Scanner Speed
· 24 RPM
· Auto -- his option automatically switches between the 24 RPM and 48 RPM scan speeds as appropriate.
Advanced
This menu item contains a sub-menu that enables you to adjust the following options: · Bearing Alignment · Display Timing · Main Bang Suppression · Tune Preset · STC Preset-- Non-HD Digital radomes only · Reset Advanced
Bearing Alignment · -180º -- 179.5º Display Timing · 0.415 n m -- selected range Main Bang Suppression · On · Off Tune Preset
· 0 -- 255
Radar application
337
Function
Description
Adjusting the radar tune control
From the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Radar Set-up. 3. Select Tune Adjust. 4. Select Tune Adjust: .
The Tune Adjust slider bar control is displayed. 5. Adjust the slider bar control to the appropriate
setting, or 6. Select the Auto box so that a tick is placed in the
box for automatic tuning.
Options
STC Preset · 0 -- 100% Reset Advanced · Yes · No
338
a Series / c Series / e Series
21.16 Resetting the radar
To reset radar settings to defaults follow the steps below:
From in the radar application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Radar Set-up. 3. Select Advanced. 4. Select Reset Advanced.
A confirmation pop up message is displayed. 5. Select Yes to confirm reset.
Radar application
339
340
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 22: Camera application
Chapter contents · 22.1 Camera application overview and features on page 342 · 22.2 Changing the camera feed on page 343 · 22.3 Displaying multiple camera feeds using Quad View on page 343 · 22.4 Camera cycling on page 344 · 22.5 Naming camera / video feeds on page 345 · 22.6 Adjusting the video image on page 346 · 22.7 Selecting the aspect ratio on page 346 · 22.8 Selecting a location to store recordings on page 347 · 22.9 Record and playback on page 347 · 22.10 Taking photos on page 349 · 22.11 Viewing photos on page 350
Camera application
341
22.1 Camera application overview and features
Analog and IP camera and video feeds can be viewed using the Camera application. Analog feeds must be connected directly to the display, IP feeds must be available on the SeaTalkhs network. IP camera feeds can be recorded and photos can be taken.
12
3
4
5
6
Recording IP camera feeds
Playing back recorded footage.
Taking photos of an IP camera feed
Viewing images.
· 22.9 Record and playback · 22.9 Record and playback · Taking a photo · 22.11 Viewing photos
Note: For information on connecting a camera / video source and compatible video formats, refer to Chapter 4 Cables and connections.
78
D12881-1
1
Camera feed number indicates the current feed
and number of available feeds
2
Recording status indicates that the camera
application is recording and the current elapsed
record time
3
Camera name indicates the name of the camera
that is currently displayed
4
Recording indicates if the camera application is
recording and which feed is being recorded
5
Menu opens the Camera application's main menu
6
Cycle indicates if the feed cycling is turned On
or Off
7
Record video temporary onscreen icon to start /
stop recording (Touchscreen displays only)
8
Take photo temporary onscreen icon to take a
photo (Touchscreen displays only)
Important:
· Multifunction displays must be powered up before power is applied to networked IP cameras; this is to enable your multifunction display to assign the camera(s) a valid IP address.
· If IP a camera(s) is not detected, try power cycling the camera(s) whilst leaving the multifunction display turned on.
Camera application features
Changing camera or video · 22.2 Changing the camera
feeds.
feed
Cycling through available feeds.
· 22.4 Camera cycling
Displaying multiple feeds using Quad View.
· 22.3 Displaying multiple camera feeds using Quad View
342
a Series / c Series / e Series
22.2 Changing the camera feed
Changing the camera / video feed On a New a Series or New e Series display, if more than 1 feed is available you can change which feed is displayed on the screen using touch.
22.3 Displaying multiple camera feeds using Quad View
When an IP camera is available on the network, the Camera application can be set to Quad View. In Quad View up to 4 camera feeds can be viewed simultaneously.
Quad View can consist of up to 4 x IP feeds or 1 x analog feed and up to 3 x IP feeds.
D12598-1
From the Camera application. 1. Touch and swipe your finger up to move to the
next video feed. 2. Touch and swipe your finger down to display the
previous video feed.
Changing the camera / video feed
On a New c Series or New e Series display, if more than 1 feed is available you can change which feed is displayed on the screen using the Joystick.
From the Camera application 1. Move the Joystick Down to display the next
video feed. 2. Move the Joystick Up to display the previous
video feed.
Changing the camera / video feed using the menu
When more than 1 feed is available, you can change which feed is displayed onscreen using the menu.
From the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera View. 3. Select Camera:. 4. Select the feed you want to display.
To enable Quad View, from the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera View. 3. Select Layout: so that Quad View is displayed. 4. Arrange the feeds by selecting a feed in each
of the Top-Left, Top-Right, Bottom-L and Bottom-R menu options as required.
Analog feeds can only be displayed in the top left corner. 5. The top left corner can also be set to cycle through all available analog and IP feeds using the cycling options available in the Top-Left menu.
See 22.4 Camera cycling for details of cycling feeds.
Recording, taking photos, naming feeds and adjusting the video image are not supported in Quad View; however it is possible to switch to Quad View whilst recording in Single View.
Note: Except for gS Series displays, Quad View is not available on MFDs with a 9 inch or below screen size when the Camera application is being viewed as part of a splitscreen page.
Note: Displaying multiple IP feeds on multiple MFDs simultaneously may cause some feeds to not be displayed.
Camera application
Using onscreen controls
On touchscreen displays, onscreen controls are available to quickly switch between Quad View and Single View.
In Quad View: 1. Select the feed.
The Expand icon
is displayed.
2. Select the Expand icon to view the feed in fullscreen.
343
3. Select the fullscreen feed.
22.4 Camera cycling
The Quad View icon
is displayed.
4. Select the Quad View icon to switch the Camera application back to Quad View.
When multiple feeds are available the Camera application can be set up to automatically cycle through the available feeds at a specified time interval.
Note: Camera cycling is not available when the Camera application is viewed as part of a splitscreen page.
With camera cycling turned on the Camera application will cycle through the display's available video input(s) and any available networked IP camera feeds. The feeds will be cycled in the order they appear in the Camera selection menu: Menu > Camera View > Camera:. Direct video input feeds will appear first followed by any networked IP camera feeds. When the final feed in the list has been displayed the Camera application will loop back to the first feed in the list.
Camera cycling will cycle through the multifunction display's available video input(s) even if no feed is connected to the input(s). When no feed is present on a video input the `No video source available' message is displayed. You can choose whether or not the video input(s) appear during camera cycling.
The time interval that each feed is displayed, before switching to the next feed can be adjusted.
Enabling camera cycling
Camera cycling can be enabled independently in both Single View and Quad View.
From the camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera View. 3. Select Camera Cycling. 4. Select Camera Cycling: so that On is
highlighted. Selecting Camera Cycling will switch cycling On and Off.
When the menu is closed the camera application will cycle through all available feeds at the defined time interval.
Setting the time interval for camera cycling
The time interval that each video feed is displayed for can be adjusted. The time interval specified will apply to Camera cycling in Single View and Quad View.
From the Camera application, with Camera cycling turned on: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera View. 3. Select Camera Cycling. 4. Select Cycle Interval:.
The cycle interval adjustment control is displayed. 5. Adjust the setting to the required time interval.
During camera cycling each feed is displayed for the specified time before changing to the next feed.
344
a Series / c Series / e Series
Showing or hiding video input feeds during camera cycling
By default your multifunction display's video input(s) are shown during cycling, even if no feed is connected. You can choose to Include or Exclude video input(s) from Camera cycling. The Input(s) included or excluded will apply to both Single View and Quad View.
From the Camera application:
1. Select Menu.
2. Select Camera View.
3. Select Camera Cycling.
4. Select the Include <Camera Name>: option for the video input you want to Show or Hide.
Selecting Include <Camera Name>: option will switch between showing or hiding the video input during camera cycling.
22.5 Naming camera / video feeds
To help distinguish between camera feeds each feed can be named.
From the Camera application: 1. Select the feed you want to name so that it is
displayed on the screen. 2. Select Menu. 3. Select Adjust. 4. Select Edit Name.
The onscreen keyboard is displayed. 5. Enter the name you want the feed to be called. 6. Select SAVE to save the new name for the feed.
The name of the feed is displayed in the camera application's status bar.
Note: In the steps above <Camera Name> represents the default feed name provided by the connected device or the custom name which can be assigned to the feed.
Turning off camera cycling
You can turn off Camera cycling using the methods detailed below.
From the camera application, with camera cycling turned on: 1. Select Menu > Camera View > Camera Cycling
> Camera Cycling: so that Off is highlighted, or 2. Change the camera / video feed manually.
Camera application
345
22.6 Adjusting the video image
22.7 Selecting the aspect ratio
If supported by your connected camera / video input device or networked IP camera, you can adjust the image settings.
With a video feed displayed in the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Adjust. 3. Select Contrast, Brightness, or Color, as
appropriate. The numeric adjust control is displayed. 4. Adjust the level to the required setting.
If supported by your connected camera / video input device or networked IP camera, you can manually change the aspect ratio between 4:3 and 16:9.
From the camera application with a feed displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Adjust. 3. Select Aspect ratio so that 4:3 or 16:9 is selected
as required.
346
a Series / c Series / e Series
22.8 Selecting a location to store recordings
In order to record, playback or capture a still image of IP camera feeds you must select the location you want to save to.
If saving to a memory card ensure that a memory card with sufficient space is inserted into the relevant card reader slot.
Note: Do not save files to cartography chart memory cards.
From the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Set-up. 3. Select Save Files to:. 4. Select the location from the list:
· SD1
· SD2
22.9 Record and playback
The Camera application can be used to record live IP camera feeds from a connected IP camera. The recording can then be played back at any time.
The camera application records IP camera feeds in .mp4 format which can be saved to a memory card or to the display's internal storage.
The Camera application titlebar displays the name of the feed being recorded and a recording timer is displayed onscreen that shows the elapsed time.
Recording an IP camera feed
To record the feed from an IP camera follow the steps below.
From the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Videos. 3. Select Record.
The recording will start.
· Internal (default)
SD1 and SD2 will only be selectable if a memory card is inserted into the relevant slot.
Note: If your multifunction display only has 1 card reader slot then only SD1 and Internal is displayed.
Camera application
Whilst the camera application is recording you can use your multifunction display as normal e.g. view a different camera feed, go back to the Homescreen, or open a different application. The selected feed will continue to record until stopped or until the memory of the selected location is full.
Note: On a touchscreen display you can also start a recording using the onscreen icons. Refer to Onscreen icons.
Approximate record times
The approximate record times are dependant on IP camera resolution and settings, lighting conditions and available storage space. A Raymarine® CAM200IP, set to factory default settings can record at an approximate rate of 22.5 MB per minute; allowing up to 44 minutes of record time per 1 GB of available storage space.
Note: Recordings and images can be saved to the MFDs internal storage, refer to the Internal storage section for approximate available storage.
Stop recording
Recording can be stopped at any time. From the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Videos.
347
3. Select Stop. The File is saved and the Video Saved confirmation dialog is displayed.
4. Select OK to confirm, Play to playback the recorded file or Delete to delete the file.
The confirmation dialog will automatically close after 5 seconds.
Playing back a video file
You can playback video clips using the Camera application.
From the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Videos. 3. Select View.
The My Files browser is opened. 4. Locate the Video file you want to view.
Video files stored on internal storage are saved in Internal > User Data > Video files.
Video files stored on memory card are saved in SD Card # > Raymarine > Video files. 5. Select the Video file. The file options dialog is displayed. 6. Select Play Video. The Video file is played.
You can also playback video clips from the My Data menu from the Homescreen: Homescreen > My Data > Images and Videos.
When the operation is complete a confirmation pop-up message is displayed.
8. Select OK.
Moving and copying video files
You can copy and move files between your display's internal storage and memory cards using the steps below.
Ensure you have a memory card inserted in the card reader.
From the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Videos. 3. Select View.
The My Files browser is opened. 4. Locate the relevant video file.
Video files stored on internal storage are saved in Internal > User Data > Video files.
Video files stored on memory card are saved in SD Card # > Raymarine > Video files. 5. Select the video file. The file options dialog is displayed. 6. Select Move or Copy. 7. Confirm the location you want to move or copy the file to. A progress indicator is displayed e.g.:
348
a Series / c Series / e Series
22.10 Taking photos
When a camera feed from an IP camera is displayed you can capture a still image. Photos can be taken using the following methods:
Capture -- Immediate image capture.
From the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Photos. 3. Select Timer. 4. Select Time Delay.
A list of time intervals is displayed:
· 5s
Timer -- You can select the image to be taken in 5, 10 or 30 seconds after selection.
Remote -- You can use a wireless remote control (e.g. the RCU3) to take the photo.
Taking a photo To take a photo of what is currently displayed in the Camera application follow the steps below. If saving to a memory card ensure that a memory card with sufficient space is inserted into the relevant card reader slot. From the Camera application, with an IP camera feed displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Photos. 3. Select Capture.
The photo is saved and a confirmation dialog is displayed showing a preview of the picture taken.
· 10 s
· 30 s
5. Select a time interval from the list. 6. Select Start Timer.
The photo will be taken after the time delay specified has elapsed. A confirmation dialog is then displayed showing a preview of the photo taken. 7. Select OK to confirm. 8. Select View to view the photo fullscreen. 9. Select Delete to delete the photo.
Taking a photo using a remote control
To take a photo using a Raymarine wireless remote control as the trigger follow the steps below.
If saving to a memory card ensure that a memory card with sufficient space is inserted into the relevant card reader slot. 1. Ensure that your wireless Raymarine remote
control is paired to the multifunction display and working. 2. From the Camera application, select Menu. 3. Select Photos. 4. Select Remote. The Remote dialog is displayed. 5. Press any button on the connected remote control to take a photo. The photo is saved and a confirmation dialog is displayed showing a preview of the photo. 6. Select OK to confirm. 7. Select View to view the photo fullscreen. 8. Select Delete to delete the photo.
4. Select OK to confirm. 5. Select View to view the picture fullscreen. 6. Select Delete to delete the picture.
Note: On a touchscreen display you can also take a photo using the onscreen icons. Refer to Onscreen icons.
Onscreen icons
On Touchscreen multifunction displays you can touch anywhere on the screen to display the onscreen icons
The onscreen icons can be used to start / stop recording or to take a picture.
Taking a photo using the timer
To take a photo after a defined interval follow the steps below.
If saving to a memory card ensure that a memory card with sufficient space is inserted into the relevant card reader slot.
Camera application
349
Record icon
Stop Recording icon
Take Photo icon
The onscreen icons will close after 5 seconds. Using the onscreen icons
1. Select the Record icon to start recording. 2. Select the Stop recording icon to stop the
recording. 3. Select the Take Photo icon to capture a still
image.
22.11 Viewing photos
You can view the photos you have taken by following the steps below.
From the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Photos. 3. Select View.
The My Files browser is opened. 4. Locate the photo you want to view.
Photos stored on internal storage are saved in Internal > User Data > Image files.
Photos stored on memory card are saved in SD Card # > Raymarine > Image files. 5. Select the file. The file options dialog is displayed. 6. Select View Image. The photo is displayed onscreen.
You can also view images from the My Data menu from the Homescreen: Homescreen > My Data > Images and Videos.
Moving and copying Photos
You can copy and move files between your display's internal storage and memory cards using the steps below.
Ensure you have a memory card inserted in the card reader.
From the Camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Photos. 3. Select View.
The My Files browser is opened. 4. Locate the relevant photo.
Photos stored on internal storage are saved in Internal > User Data > Image files.
Photos stored on memory card are saved in SD Card # > Raymarine > Image files. 5. Select the file. The file options dialog is displayed. 6. Select Move or Copy. 7. Confirm the location you want to move or copy the file to. A progress indicator is displayed e.g.:
When the operation is complete a confirmation pop-up message is displayed.
8. Select OK.
350
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 23: Thermal camera application -- Pan and tilt cameras
Chapter contents · 23.1 Thermal camera application overview on page 352 · 23.2 Thermal camera image on page 352 · 23.3 Controls overview on page 353 · 23.4 Camera control on page 354 · 23.5 Image adjustments on page 356 · 23.6 Pan and tilt camera -- new camera interface on page 359 · 23.7 High power and high torque modes on page 362 · 23.8 Pan and tilt camera -- old camera interface on page 363
Thermal camera application -- Pan and tilt cameras
351
23.1 Thermal camera application overview
The thermal camera application enables you to control a connected thermal camera and display its image on your multifunction display.
23.2 Thermal camera image
The thermal camera provides a video image which is shown on your display.
Thermal imaging (also known as infrared) cameras enable you to see clearly in low-light and no-light conditions. For example, a thermal camera can help you navigate at night or identify obstacles in areas of low visibility or even total darkness.
The thermal application enables you to:
· Control the camera:
Pan.
Tilt.
Zoom (range).
Return camera to "home" (default) position.
Set the camera "home" position.
The video feed provides:
Pause the camera image.
· Thermal image.
Toggle between visible light and thermal camera lenses.
Toggle surveillance mode. · Adjust the camera image:
Color palette. Scene presets. Brightness. Contrast. Color. Video polarity (reverse video color).
· Status icons / system information.
You should take time to familiarize yourself with the thermal image. This will help you to make the most of your system:
· Consider every object you view in terms of how it will look "thermally" as opposed to how it looks to your eye. For example look for changes caused by the heating effect of the sun. These are particularly evident right after sunset.
· Experiment with white-hot and black-hot (reverse video) modes.
· Experiment by looking for hot objects (such as people) compared to the colder surroundings.
Displaying the thermal camera application
With the home screen displayed: 1. Select a page icon that includes the thermal
camera application. The thermal camera application is displayed.
Note: If the home screen does NOT include a page icon that features the thermal camera application you will need to create a new page icon featuring the thermal camera application.
· Experiment with the camera for daytime viewing. The camera can provide improved daytime viewing in environments where traditional video camera performance suffers, such as in shadows or backlit scenes.
Thermal camera status icons
The thermal camera image includes icons to show the current status of the camera.
Icon
Description
Camera direction indicator.
Camera home position.
Camera paused.
Scene preset mode for night conditions.
Scene preset mode for daytime conditions.
352
a Series / c Series / e Series
Icon
Description
23.3 Controls overview
Scene preset mode for night docking.
Scene preset mode for identifying people or objects in the water. Rear-view mode -- image is flipped horizontally. Zoom setting: 2x zoom.
The thermal camera application is available on compatible Raymarine multifunction displays and systems. It includes controls for the thermal camera.
Rotary control Zoom image in / out.
Joystick
· Pan and tilt camera
Note: On touchscreen displays you can also use the touchscreen to pan and tilt the camera.
Zoom setting: 4x zoom. Single active controller on network.
OK CANCEL / Back RANGE IN / OUT
· Navigate menus Confirm menu selection Cancel selection Zoom image in / out.
Multiple active controllers on network.
PC / laptop detected on network.
Point mode enabled.
Point mode disabled.
Stabilization Off.
Stabilization On.
FFC (Flat Field Correction)
Periodically the camera will perform a Flat Field Correction (FFC). This will fine tune the thermal image to suit the current ambient temperature.
The FFC operation is indicated by a momentary pause and a green rectangle displayed in the upper left of the thermal video image.
Thermal camera application -- Pan and tilt cameras
353
23.4 Camera control
Power up and standby When the breaker connecting power to the camera is switched on, the camera will run a boot up sequence lasting for about 1 minute, after which the camera will be in Standby mode. In order for the camera to operate, you must bring the camera out of standby mode using the camera controls.
Thermal camera standby Standby mode can be used to temporarily suspend the thermal camera's functions when the camera is not needed for a prolonged period. When in standby mode the camera:
· Does NOT provide a live video image.
· Moves the camera into its "stowed" (parked) position (lens facing down into the camera base) to protect the camera optics.
· Engages its pan / tilt motors to hold the camera in place in rough seas.
· Pan continuously through 360º. · Tilt (elevate) to ±90º relative to the horizon. · Zoom (magnify) the thermal camera image. Note: Stabilized variants of the T-Series thermal cameras include a continuous zoom function, non-stabilized variants can switch between x2 and x4 magnification.
Panning and tilting, and the thermal image On a touchscreen multifunction display you can pan and tilt the thermal camera image using the touchscreen.
Move your finger up and down the screen to tilt the camera up or down.
Move your finger left and right on the screen to rotate the camera left or right (panning).
Note: The "stowed" (parked) position can be configured using the camera's setup menu.
Enabling and disabling thermal camera standby With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Use the Standby menu item to switch the camera
in and out of standby mode.
Note: You can also use any of the camera controls in the thermal camera application to "wake" the camera from standby mode.
Pan, tilt and zoom The camera controls allow for pan and tilt (elevation) of the camera, as well as zoom (magnification) of the thermal image.
Thermal camera home position
The home position is a preset position for the camera.
The home position usually defines a useful reference point -- for example, straight ahead and level with the horizon. You can set the home position as required and to return the camera to the home position at any time.
The home icon appears on-screen momentarily when the camera returns to the home position. The icon flashes when a new home position is set.
Resetting the thermal camera to the home position
When connected to a pan, tilt thermal camera the home position of the camera can be set.
In the thermal camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera Home.
The camera returns to its currently defined home position, and the "Home" icon appears on-screen momentarily.
Setting the thermal camera home position
With the thermal camera application displayed:
1. Use the joystick or touchscreen to move the camera to the desired position.
2. Select Menu.
3. Select Camera Set-up.
4. Select Set Home Position.
The "Home" icon flashes on-screen to indicate
D11973-1
that a new home position has been set.
354
a Series / c Series / e Series
Pausing the thermal camera image With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Pause Image.
Thermal camera surveillance mode In surveillance mode the camera pans left and right continuously. The camera continues to pan until surveillance mode is disabled, or the camera controls are used to move the camera. When this occurs the camera does not automatically resume surveillance mode and the mode must be enabled again if required.
Enabling and disabling thermal camera surveillance mode With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Image Options. 3. Use the Surveillance menu item to select the On
or Off option, as appropriate.
Surveillance mode settings The scan width and scan speed can be adjusted. Scan Width The scan width determines the distance that the camera pans left and right when in surveillance mode.
Scan Speed The scan speed determines the speed at which the camera pans left and right when in surveillance mode.
Setting scan width The surveillance mode scan width can be adjusted by following the steps below. From the thermal camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera Set-up. 3. Select Surveillance Settings. 4. Select Scan Width.
The scan width options will be displayed:
· Narrow -- The camera will scan approximately 20º left and right of the center (40º total).
· Medium -- The camera will scan approximately 40º left and right of the center (80º total).
· Wide -- The camera will scan approximately 80º left and right of the center (160º total).
5. Select the required option.
Setting scan speed The surveillance mode scan speed can be adjusted by following the steps below. From the thermal camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera Set-up. 3. Select Surveillance Settings. 4. Select Scan Speed.
The scan speed options will be displayed:
Thermal camera application -- Pan and tilt cameras
· Slow
· Medium
· Fast
5. Select the required option.
Thermal camera stabilization
The Raymarine T470SC and T473SC thermal cameras includes a mechanical stabilization feature.
The mechanical stabilization feature improves image stability by compensating for vessel motion and keeping the camera aimed at the point of interest. Mechanical stabilization has two aspects: horizontal (azimuth) and vertical (elevation). By default, mechanical stabilization is set to on, which provides the best on-the-water performance particularly when the vessel is underway and traveling on rough water or in swell conditions. You can disable or enable stabilization whenever you want. When you enable full stabilization (horizontal and vertical), the Stabilization On (no wave) icon flashes. It does not display continually, since this is the normal mode of operation. If you disable stabilization, the Stabilization Off (wave) icon remains on the screen to make you aware that the motion of the vessel can affect the camera performance. This is not a normal mode of operation. Stabilization is automatically turned off when the camera is stowed, but the system restores your setting when the camera is powered on. You can turn off the horizontal (pan) stabilization while retaining the tilt stabilization by enabling point mode.
Enabling / Disabling stabilization
Stabilization is enabled by default. You can enable or disable stabilization at any time by following the steps below.
From the thermal camera application
1. Select Menu.
2. Select Camera Set-up.
3. Select Stabilization Mode.
Selecting Stabilization mode switches stabilization On and Off.
Thermal camera point mode
Point mode is only applicable to thermal cameras which have mechanical stabilization.
Enabling point mode only has significance when stabilization is enabled. Enabling point mode turns off the horizontal (pan) stabilization while retaining the vertical (tilt) stabilization. This can be helpful when you want to use the thermal camera as an aide to navigation and keep the camera pointing in the same position relative to the vessel as it turns. For example, you may have stabilization enabled and have set the camera to point straight ahead relative to the front of the vessel. If the vessel is turned at a sharp angle under these conditions, the camera sensor will not follow the direction of the vessel. Enabling point mode keeps the camera in sync with the vessel direction while maintaining a stable elevation position. When point mode is enabled, a lock icon displays. The camera's azimuth position
355
is now locked to the base. When you disable point mode, the unlock icon displays momentarily. The camera always starts up with point mode disabled.
Enabling / Disabling point mode
Point mode is disabled by default. With Stabilization enabled you can also enable point mode at any time by following the steps below.
From the thermal camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera Set-up. 3. Select Point Mode.
Selecting point mode switches point mode On and Off.
23.5 Image adjustments
Adjusting the thermal camera image
With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Adjust Contrast. 3. Select the Contrast, Brightness, or Color option
as appropriate. The relevant numeric adjust control is displayed. 4. Adjust the value as required. 5. Select Back or Ok to confirm the new value.
Thermal camera scene presets
Scene presets enable you to quickly select the best image setting for the current environmental conditions.
During normal operation the thermal camera automatically adjusts itself to provide a high-contrast image optimized for most conditions. The Scene presets provide 4 additional settings that may provide better imagery in certain conditions. The 4 modes are:
Night Running -- scene preset mode for night conditions.
Day Running -- scene preset mode for daytime conditions.
Night Docking -- scene preset mode for night docking.
Search -- scene preset mode for identifying people or objects in the water.
Although the preset names indicate their intended use, varying environmental conditions might make another setting more preferable. For example, the night running scene preset might also be useful while in a harbor. You may find it beneficial to experiment with the different scene presets to discover the best preset to use for different conditions.
Changing the thermal camera scene preset
With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Image Options. 3. Use the Scene menu item to switch between the
available scene presets, as appropriate.
Thermal camera color modes
A range of color modes are available to help you distinguish objects on-screen in different conditions.
Changing the color mode switches the thermal camera image between a greyscale mode and 1 or more color modes. There are 5 color modes available.
The factory default color mode is white, which may improve your night vision. This default mode can be changed if required using the camera's on-screen Video Setup menu.
356
a Series / c Series / e Series
Note: If you have the Disable Color Thermal Video option selected in the camera's on-screen Video Setup menu, only 2 color modes are available -- greyscale and red.
Changing the thermal camera color mode
With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Image Options. 3. Use the Colour menu item to switch between the
available color palettes, as appropriate.
Thermal and visible-light operation
"Dual payload" thermal cameras are equipped with 2 cameras -- a thermal imaging (infrared) camera and a visible-light camera.
Thermal camera -- provides night-time imagery, based on temperature differences between objects. Thermal imaging produces a clear image even in total darkness.
Thermal camera reverse video
You can reverse the polarity of the video image to change the appearance of objects on-screen.
The reverse video option (video polarity) switches the thermal image from white-hot (or red-hot if the color mode setting is active) to black-hot. The difference between white-hot and black-hot is shown below:
White-hot thermal image.
Visible-light camera -- provides black and white (or greyscale) imagery during the day and in low-light conditions. Helps to improve navigational abilities in low-light conditions; for example during twilight hours when operating along intercoastal waterways and near harbor entrances.
Black-hot thermal image.
Note: The T470SC and T473SC have a color camera and continuous zoom lens.
You may find it useful to experiment with this option to find the best setting to suit your needs.
Enabling thermal camera reverse video With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Image Options. 3. Select Reverse Video.
Switching between thermal and visible-light camera lenses With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Image Options. 3. Use the Image Type menu item to switch between
IR and Visible Light views, as appropriate.
Thermal camera rear view mode The rear view mode flips the video image horizontally, providing a "mirror image". This is useful for example in instances where the camera is rear-facing and you are viewing the image on a forward-facing monitor.
Enabling thermal camera rear view mode With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Image Options. 3. Select Rear View.
Thermal camera application -- Pan and tilt cameras
Slew to Cue Slew to cue is a feature which maintains a selected position or object in the thermal cameras field of view. Slew to Cue options are available in the chart and radar applications as target context menu items.
Note: Heading data must be available on the system for Slew to Cue to work correctly.
357
For details on how to select a target to `slew to' refer to the radar and chart sections of your manual.
The thermal camera can also automatically slew to:
· MOB target
· Dangerous AIS target
· Dangerous MARPA target
Options to enable or disable the automatic slew options are available in the thermal camera application
3. Select Slew Settings. The Slew settings page is displayed which includes the following auto slew options:
· Auto Slew to MOB
· Auto Slew to Dangerous AIS target
· Auto Slew to Dangerous MARPA target
4. Select the relevant option. Selecting an option from the list will switch the auto slew option for that item On or Off.
Setting the camera's height above sea level
To ensure that the thermal camera's alignment can be set correctly the height of the camera above sea level must be set.
From the thermal camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera Set-up. 3. Select Slew Settings.
The Slew settings page is displayed. 4. Select Camera height above sea level.
The Camera height above sea level pop up is displayed. 5. Adjust the value to the required setting.
Aligning the thermal camera horizontally
If you find that slew to cue objects are consistently too far left or right on the screen then you can make fine adjustments to the cameras alignment by following the steps below.
From the thermal camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera Set-up. 3. Select Align camera.
The Align camera to boat pop up is displayed. 4. Adjust the value to the required setting.
This value will adjust the camera's offset position to port or starboard.
Aligning the thermal cameras elevation
If you find that slew to cue objects are consistently too low or high on the screen then you can make fine adjustments to the cameras alignment by following the steps below.
From the thermal camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera Set-up. 3. Select Elev Align:.
The Align camera to boat pop up is displayed. 4. Adjust the value to the required setting.
This value will adjust the camera's offset position to port or starboard.
Enabling / disabling automatic slew to cue From the thermal camera application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Camera Set-up.
358
a Series / c Series / e Series
23.6 Pan and tilt camera -- new camera interface
The thermal camera application menu options for a pan and tilt thermal camera with the new camera interface are shown below.
Activate Camera
Brings the thermal camera out of standby mode. (only available when camera is in standby.)
Pause Image
· On
· Off (default)
Camera Home Image Options
Select to return the camera to its home position. Select to display the Image Options sub-menu.
· Color
Red
Greyscale
Glowbow Rainbow Fusion
· Scene
Night Running Night Docking
Day Running
Man Overboard · Thermal / Visible
· Reverse video
Adjust Contrast
· Rear View · Surveillance Select to display the Adjust Contrast sub-menu.
· Contrast · Brightness
Standby
· Color
Select to place the camera in to standby mode. (only available when camera is activated.)
Camera Set-up
Select to display the Camera Set-up menu.
· Set Home Position
· Slew Settings
· Align Camera · Elev Align:
· Surveillance Settings
· Default Color · Icon Level
· Stabilization Mode
· Point Mode
· Ball Down Mode · High Power Standby
· High Power Torque
· JCU Icon · PC Icon
Thermal camera application -- Pan and tilt cameras
359
Camera Set-up menu Set Home Position Slew Settings
Align Camera Elev Align Surveillance Settings
Default Color
Icon Level Stabilization Mode Point Mode Ball Down Mode High Power Standby
· Restore Factory Defaults · Calibrate Platform
Sets the camera's current position as the Camera Home position.
Provides automatic slew options and camera alignment settings.
· Auto Slew to MOB · Auto Slew to dangerous AIS target
· Auto Slew to dangerous MARPA target
· Camera height above sea level
Enables changes to camera's horizontal alignment.
Enables changes to camera's elevation (vertical) alignment.
Enables you to set the speed and width · Scan Speed
the camera will scan when in surveillance mode.
Slow
Medium
Fast
· Scan Width
Narrow
Medium
Wide
Enables selection of default color palette. · Red
· Greyscale
· Glowbow
· Rainbow
· Fusion
Enables selection of level of icons displayed on-screen.
· None · Minimal
· All
Enables and disables stabilization mode. · On (default)
Note: Only available on stabilized variants of the T-Series cameras.
· Off
Enables and disables point mode.
· On
· Off (default)
This options should be enables when the · On
camera is mounted upside down in the `ball down' configuration.
· Off (default)
This option controls the amount of power used to hold the camera in position while it is in standby mode. With the setting enabled the camera will consume more power, but will help ensure that the camera is held in place in rough seas.
· On (default) · Off
360
a Series / c Series / e Series
High Power Torque
JCU Icon PC Icon Restore Factory Defaults Calibrate platform
This option controls the amount of power used to hold the camera steady when in use. With the setting enabled the camera will consume more power, but will help ensure that the camera is held in place in rough seas. The High Power Torque mode may be useful for power boats that operate at higher speeds and experience high impact environments, and can accept higher power consumption.
· On (default) · Off
Shows or hides the on-screen JCU connected icon.
· On (default) · Off
Shows or hides the on-screen PC connected icon.
· On (default) · Off
Enables you to restore the camera's settings to factory default values.
The calibrate platform option re-initializes the pan and tilt mechanism in the thermal camera.
Note: The thermal camera menu options available are dependant on the software version of your multifunction display and thermal camera. If options are different than listed above please refer to the manual that accompanied your thermal camera and / or the installation and operations handbook which accompanied your multifunction display.
Thermal camera application -- Pan and tilt cameras
361
23.7 High power and high torque modes
Camera State Standby
Standby
Standby
Awake
Awake
Awake
Camera setting
· High Power Mode ON
· High Torque Mode ON
· High Power Mode OFF
· High Torque Mode ON
· High Power Mode ON
· High Torque Mode OFF
· High Power Mode OFF
· High Torque Mode OFF
· High Power Mode ON or OFF
· High Torque Mode ON
· High Power Mode ON or OFF
· High Torque Mode OFF
Dual payload 22 W
8W
13 W
8W
30 W
20 W
Single payload 17.4 W
7.4 W
13 W
7.4 W
19.4 W
16.5 W
362
a Series / c Series / e Series
23.8 Pan and tilt camera -- old camera interface
The thermal camera application menu options for a pan and tilt thermal camera with the old camera interface are shown below.
Activate Camera
Brings the thermal camera out of standby mode. (only available when camera is in standby.)
Pause Image
· On
· Off (default)
Camera Home
Select to return the camera to its home position.
Image Options
Select to display the Image Options sub-menu.
· Color
Red
Greyscale
Glowbow
Rainbow
Fusion
· Scene
Night Running
Night Docking
Day Running
Man Overboard
· Thermal / Visible
· Reverse video
· Rear View
· Surveillance
Adjust Contrast
Select to display the Adjust Contrast sub-menu.
· Contrast
· Brightness
· Color
Standby
Select to place the camera in to standby mode. (only available when camera is activated.)
Camera Set-up
Select to display the Camera Set-up menu.
· Set Home Position
· Camera menu -- (Onscreen display (OSD) menu)
· Align Camera
Camera Set-up menu Set Home Position
Camera menu
Align Camera
Sets the camera's current position as the Camera Home position.
Provides access to the camera's onscreen display (OSD) menu options.
Enables changes to camera's horizontal alignment.
Note: The thermal camera menu options available are dependant on the software version of your multifunction display and thermal camera. If options are different than listed above please refer to the manual that accompanied your thermal camera and / or the installation and operations handbook which accompanied your multifunction display.
Note: It may be possible to update your camera to the new camera interface. Please contact your Raymarine dealer for details.
Thermal camera application -- Pan and tilt cameras
363
OSD menu options
Setup menus
The setup menus provide a range of tools and settings to configure the thermal camera.
The menus can be accessed from any controller on the system. The menus are overlaid onto the video image.
Note: The on-screen menus only appear on the thermal camera image. They are not available when viewing the visible light image (on dual payload models).
Menus available
Enable Point Mode / Disable Point Mode
Selecting Enable Point mode will turn point mode on, selecting disable point mode will turn point mode off. Only applies to models with mechanical stabilization.
Video Setup
This menu is used to set the video configuration options.
Set Symbology Settings associated with the status icons.
User
Configure the USER button on the JCU.
Programmable
Button
System Setup Settings to optimize operation for this particular system / installation.
About / Help
Helpful information and restore to factory defaults setting.
Exit
Cancels on-screen menu.
Video setup menu
Menu item / Description
Settings / Operation
Set Thermal Color This saves the current color setting as
Default
the default value.
Set Reverse Video This toggles the infrared image
or Set Video
between white-hot (or red-hot if viewing
Polarity
a color image) and black-hot.
Enable / Disable Color Thermal Video
Enable or disable the thermal color palettes:
· Enabled Greyscale, Red, Sepia, Rainbow and Fusion palettes are available.
· Disabled Only Greyscale and Red palettes are available.
Display Test Pattern
Use the display test pattern when setting up the color / contrast settings for your particular display or monitor. You can switch through the 4 test patterns available.
Exit
Set symbology menu
Menu item / Description
Settings / Operation
Enable / Disable PC Icon
· Enabled The PC icon is displayed whenever a PC is detected on the network.
· Disabled The PC icon is not displayed.
Enable / Disable JCU Icon
· Enabled The JCU icon is displayed whenever a JCU is detected on the network.
· Disabled The JCU icon is not displayed.
Display All Icons Selecting this menu item enables all available icons.
Display Minimal Selecting this menu item reduces the
Icons
icon activity:
· Position, Zoom, Rearview, Pause, Stabilization disabled and Point Mode enabled icons are unaffected.
· Home and Scene icons are displayed only momentarily.
· Other icons are not shown.
Hide All Icons
Selecting this option hides all icons except for:
· Position indicator
· Rearview mode enabled
· Stabilization disabled
· Point mode enabled
Exit
Returns to the main menu.
364
a Series / c Series / e Series
Surveillance mode menu
Menu item / Description
Settings / Operation
Scan Width
This setting determines the distance that the camera pans left and right when in surveillance mode. Select from:
· Narrow -- The camera will scan approximately 20º left and right of the center (40º total).
· Medium -- The camera will scan approximately 40º left and right of the center (80º total). Or,
· Wide The camera will scan approximately 80º left and right of the center (160º total).
Scan Speed
This option determines the speed at which the camera pans left and right when in surveillance mode. Select between:
· Slow
· Medium
· Fast
Exit
System Setup menu
Menu item / Description
Settings / Operation
Enable / Disable Ball-Down Installation
This menu option should be enabled when the camera is mounted upside down in the "ball-down" configuration.
Enable / Disable Twist-to-Pan mode
This menu option changes the JCU controls pan and zoom functions as follows: Enabled -- Pan the camera by rotating the Puck clockwise or counterclockwise, zoom in and out by pushing the puck in and pulling it out. (This is default operation of the JCU). Disabled -- Pan the camera by moving the Puck left or right, zoom in and out by rotating the Puck clockwise and counterclockwise.
Enable / Disable High Power Standby
This option controls the amount of power used to hold the camera in position while it is in Standby mode. The enabled setting will consume more power, but will help ensure that the camera is held in place in rough seas.
Note: If the camera moves when in standby (due to shock or vibration), then the Position indicator or Home setting may need realigning (reset the camera to realign).
Menu item / Description
Settings / Operation
Enable / Disable High Motor Torque
This option controls the amount of power used to hold the camera steady when in use. The enabled setting will consume more power, but help ensure that the camera is held in place in rough seas. The High Motor Torque mode may be useful for power boats that operate at higher speeds and experience high impact environments, and can accept higher power consumption.
Note: If the camera moves due to shock or vibration, then the Position indicator or Home setting may need realigning (reset the camera to realign).
Enable / Disable Rearview Mode
When this option is enabled the camera image is reversed and you will see a mirror image on the display.
Enable / Disable Stabilization
When this option is enabled horizontal and vertical stabilization is turned on. Only applies to T470SC and T473SC.
Set Stow Position
This option sets the current position as the Stow position. The camera moves to the stow position whenever it is turned off or put into Standby mode.
Name Camera
Use this option to name the camera.
Surveillance mode This options enables you to set the scan width and speed when in surveillance mode.
Exit
Exit to main menu.
High power / High torque power use
Camera State
Dual Camera setting payload
Standby · High Power 22 W Mode ON
· High Torque Mode ON
Standby · High Power 8 W Mode OFF
· High Torque Mode ON
Standby · High Power 13 W Mode ON
· High Torque Mode OFF
Awake
· High Power 8 W Mode OFF
· High Torque Mode OFF
Single payload 17.4 W
7.4 W
13 W
7.4 W
Thermal camera application -- Pan and tilt cameras
365
Camera State Awake
Awake
Camera setting
· High Power Mode ON or OFF
· High Torque Mode ON
· High Power Mode ON or OFF
· High Torque Mode OFF
Dual payload 30 W
20 W
Single payload 19.4 W
16.5 W
User Programmable Button menu
Use this menu to set up the USER button on the JCU.
Menu item / Description
USER button operation
Search settings The USER button will set the camera scene to Search mode.
Switch Thermal / VIS Video (Dual payload models only)
The USER button will switch between Thermal and Low Light camera images.
Hide / Show All The USER button will toggle between
Icons
Show and Hide icon settings.
Reverse Video
The USER button will toggle between the White-hot and Black-hot (reverse) thermal image.
Rearview Mode
The USER button will toggle Rearview mode on and off.
Surveillance Mode The USER button will toggle Surveillance mode on and off.
Point Mode
The USER button will toggle Point Mode on and off.
Exit
Returns to the main menu.
366
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 24: Thermal camera application -- fixed mount cameras
Chapter contents · 24.1 Thermal camera application overview on page 368 · 24.2 Thermal camera image on page 368 · 24.3 Controls overview on page 369 · 24.4 Camera control on page 370 · 24.5 Image adjustments on page 370 · 24.6 Fixed mount camera menu on page 372
Thermal camera application -- fixed mount cameras
367
24.1 Thermal camera application overview
The thermal camera application enables you to control a connected thermal camera and display its image on your multifunction display.
24.2 Thermal camera image
The thermal camera provides a video image which is shown on your display.
Thermal imaging (also known as infrared) cameras enable you to see clearly in low-light and no-light conditions. For example, a thermal camera can help you navigate at night or identify obstacles in areas of low visibility or even total darkness.
The thermal application enables you to:
· Control the camera:
Zoom (range).
Pause the camera image.
· Adjust the camera image:
Color palette.
Scene presets.
The video feed provides:
Brightness.
· Thermal image.
Contrast. Color. Video polarity (reverse video color).
· Status icons / system information.
You should take time to familiarize yourself with the thermal image. This will help you to make the most of your system:
Displaying the thermal camera application
With the home screen displayed: 1. Select a page icon that includes the thermal
camera application. The thermal camera application is displayed.
Note: If the home screen does NOT include a page icon that features the thermal camera application you will need to create a new page icon featuring the thermal camera application.
· Consider every object you view in terms of how it will look "thermally" as opposed to how it looks to your eye. For example look for changes caused by the heating effect of the sun. These are particularly evident right after sunset.
· Experiment with white-hot and black-hot (reverse video) modes.
· Experiment by looking for hot objects (such as people) compared to the colder surroundings.
· Experiment with the camera for daytime viewing. The camera can provide improved daytime viewing in environments where traditional video camera performance suffers, such as in shadows or backlit scenes.
Thermal camera status icons
The thermal camera image includes icons to show the current status of the camera.
Icon
Description
Camera paused.
Scene preset mode for night conditions.
Scene preset mode for daytime conditions.
Scene preset mode for night docking.
Scene preset mode for identifying people or objects in the water.
368
a Series / c Series / e Series
Icon
Description
24.3 Controls overview
Rear-view mode -- image is flipped horizontally.
Zoom setting: 2x zoom.
The thermal camera application is available on compatible Raymarine multifunction displays and systems. It includes controls for the thermal camera.
Rotary control Zoom image in / out.
Zoom setting: 4x zoom.
OK Joystick
Confirm menu selection. Navigate menus.
Single active controller on network.
CANCEL / Back Cancel selection. RANGE IN / OUT Zoom image in / out.
Multiple active controllers on network.
PC / laptop detected on network.
FFC (Flat Field Correction)
Periodically the camera will perform a Flat Field Correction (FFC). This will fine tune the thermal image to suit the current ambient temperature.
The FFC operation is indicated by a momentary pause and a green rectangle displayed in the upper left of the thermal video image.
Thermal camera application -- fixed mount cameras
369
24.4 Camera control
24.5 Image adjustments
Power up and standby
Adjusting the thermal camera image
When the breaker connecting power to the camera is switched on, the camera will run a boot up sequence lasting for about 1 minute, after which the camera will be in Standby mode.
In order for the camera to operate, you must bring the camera out of standby mode using the camera controls.
Thermal camera standby
With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Adjust Contrast. 3. Select the Contrast, Brightness, or Color option
as appropriate. The relevant numeric adjust control is displayed. 4. Adjust the value as required. 5. Select Back or Ok to confirm the new value.
Standby mode can be used to temporarily suspend the thermal camera's functions when the camera is not needed for a prolonged period.
When in standby mode the camera does not provide a live video image.
Enabling and disabling thermal camera standby
With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Use the Standby menu item to switch the camera
in and out of standby mode.
Note: You can also use any of the camera controls in the thermal camera application to "wake" the camera from standby mode.
Thermal camera scene presets
Scene presets enable you to quickly select the best image setting for the current environmental conditions.
During normal operation the thermal camera automatically adjusts itself to provide a high-contrast image optimized for most conditions. The Scene presets provide 4 additional settings that may provide better imagery in certain conditions. The 4 modes are:
Night Running -- scene preset mode for night conditions.
Day Running -- scene preset mode for daytime conditions.
Pausing the thermal camera image
With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Pause Image.
Night Docking -- scene preset mode for night docking.
Search -- scene preset mode for identifying people or objects in the water.
Although the preset names indicate their intended use, varying environmental conditions might make another setting more preferable. For example, the night running scene preset might also be useful while in a harbor. You may find it beneficial to experiment with the different scene presets to discover the best preset to use for different conditions.
Changing the thermal camera scene preset
With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Image Options. 3. Use the Scene menu item to switch between the
available scene presets, as appropriate.
Thermal camera color modes
A range of color modes are available to help you distinguish objects on-screen in different conditions.
Changing the color mode switches the thermal camera image between a greyscale mode and 1 or more color modes. There are 5 color modes available.
The factory default color mode is white, which may improve your night vision. This default mode can be changed if required using the camera's on-screen Video Setup menu.
370
a Series / c Series / e Series
Note: If you have the Disable Color Thermal Video option selected in the camera's on-screen Video Setup menu, only 2 color modes are available -- greyscale and red.
Changing the thermal camera color mode With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Image Options. 3. Use the Colour menu item to switch between the
available color palettes, as appropriate.
Thermal camera reverse video You can reverse the polarity of the video image to change the appearance of objects on-screen. The reverse video option (video polarity) switches the thermal image from white-hot (or red-hot if the color mode setting is active) to black-hot. The difference between white-hot and black-hot is shown below:
White-hot thermal image.
Black-hot thermal image.
You may find it useful to experiment with this option to find the best setting to suit your needs.
Enabling thermal camera reverse video With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Image Options. 3. Select Reverse Video.
Thermal camera rear view mode The rear view mode flips the video image horizontally, providing a "mirror image". This is useful for example in instances where the camera is rear-facing and you are viewing the image on a forward-facing monitor.
Enabling thermal camera rear view mode With the thermal camera application displayed: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Image Options. 3. Select Rear View.
Thermal camera application -- fixed mount cameras
371
24.6 Fixed mount camera menu
The thermal camera application menu options for a fixed mount thermal camera are shown below.
Activate Camera
Brings the thermal camera out of standby mode. (only available when camera is in standby.)
Pause Image
· On
· Off (default)
Image Options
Select to display the Image Options sub-menu.
· Color
Red
Greyscale
Glowbow
Rainbow
Fusion
· Scene
Night Running
Night Docking
Day Running
Man Overboard
· Reverse video
· Rear View
Adjust Contrast
Select to display the Adjust Contrast sub-menu.
· Contrast
· Brightness
· Color
Standby
Select to place the camera in to standby mode. (only available when camera is activated.)
Camera Set-up
Select to display the Camera Set-up menu.
· Default Color
· Icon Level
· Ball Down Mode
· High Power Standby
· JCU Icon
· PC Icon
· Restore Factory Defaults
Camera Set-up menu Default Color
Icon Level
Enables selection of default color palette. · Red
· Greyscale
· Glowbow
· Rainbow
· Fusion
Enables selection of level of icons displayed on-screen.
· None · Minimal
· All
372
a Series / c Series / e Series
Ball Down Mode High Power Standby
JCU Icon PC Icon Restore Factory Defaults
This options should be enables when the · On
camera is mounted upside down in the `ball down' configuration.
· Off (default)
This option controls the amount of power used to hold the camera in position while it is in standby mode. With the setting enabled the camera will consume more power, but will help ensure that the camera is held in place in rough seas.
· On (default) · Off
Shows or hides the on-screen JCU connected icon.
· On (default) · Off
Shows or hides the on-screen PC connected icon.
· On (default) · Off
Enables you to restore the camera's settings to factory default values.
Note: The thermal camera menu options available are dependant on the software version of your multifunction display and thermal camera. If options are different than listed above please refer to the manual that accompanied your thermal camera and / or the installation and operations handbook which accompanied your multifunction display.
Thermal camera application -- fixed mount cameras
373
374
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 25: Fusion link application
Chapter contents · 25.1 Fusion link overview on page 376 · 25.2 Media sources on page 377 · 25.3 Browsing music on page 379 · 25.4 Selecting shuffle and repeat functions on page 379 · 25.5 Adjusting volume levels for each zone on page 380 · 25.6 Selecting the zone to control on page 380 · 25.7 Adjusting the tone controls on page 381 · 25.8 Selecting the system to control on page 381 · 25.9 Menu options on page 382
Fusion link application
375
25.1 Fusion link overview
The multifunction display can control a connected 700 series Fusion entertainment system.
1
2 3
4
5
6
7
D12746-1
1
Fusion menu options and track lists.
2
Shuffle and Repeat icons.
3
Track / media specific details and controls.
4
Zone volume control.
5
Zone selector.
6
Media source.
7
Media controls (See below).
Note: Album artwork is only available when using an iPod.
· Adjust the volume level.
· Mute and Unmute the volume.
· Adjust the tone controls (Bass, Middle, and Treble).
· Skip backwards and forwards through tracks.
· Scan backwards and forwards through the current track.
· Play / Pause the current track.
· Select the zone to be controlled. (For information on setting up zones refer to the manual that accompanied your Fusion entertainment system.
· Set Shuffle and Repeat functions.
Accessing the Fusion link application
If more than one Fusion entertainment system is connected to your system then you can choose which system the Fusion link application will control. 1. Select the FUSION link page icon from the
homescreen. A list of connected Fusion entertainment systems is displayed. 2. Select the system you want to control.
Media controls
1
2
3
4
5
6
D12747-1
1
Volume Down.
2
Mute / Unmute.
3
Volume Up.
4
· Single press -- Skips back to the beginning of
the current track, subsequent presses will skip
backwards through the available tracks.
· Press and hold -- Scans the current track backwards in 10 seconds intervals.
5
Play / Pause current track.
6
· Single press -- Skips forward to the next track,
subsequent presses will skip forwards through
the available tracks.
· Press and hold -- Scans the current track forwards in 10 seconds intervals.
The Fusion link application can be used to: · Browse available media sources.
376
a Series / c Series / e Series
25.2 Media sources
DVD
The layout and controls available are determined by the selected media source.
iPod
1
2
3 2
1
3
4
4
56
D12748-1
1
Album artwork.
2
Track title.
3
Artist.
4
Track progress.
5
Track number.
6
Album title.
Menu options available for iPods are as follows: · Browse music. · Repeat. · Shuffle. · Tone Controls. · Select Fusion System.
USB
1 2
3 4
5
D12750-1
1
Time elapsed.
2
Title.
3
Chapter.
4
Remote button.
5
DVD remote controls including:
· Directional keypad. · Enter.
· Menu.
· Details.
Menu options available for DVD devices are as follows:
· Tone Controls.
· Select Fusion System.
AM / FM radio
5
D12749-1
1
Track title.
2
Artist.
3
Album title.
4
Track number.
5
Track progress.
Menu options available for USB devices are as follows: · Browse music. · Repeat. · Shuffle. · Tone Controls. · Select Fusion System.
Fusion link application
1
3 4
1
Frequency.
2
Frequency type.
3
Channel name.
4
Preset name.
2
D12751-1
Menu options available for the Radio are as follows: · Preset.
377
· Tone Controls. · Select Fusion System. VHF
1
Note: The Fusion head unit must be used to control a satellite receiver connected to a fusion media system. Current track information and channel details are displayed on the Fusion application.
Selecting a media source
You can select which media source you want to control.
2
3
D12753-1
1
Squelch control.
2
Channel.
3
Manual / Auto status.
Menu options available for VHF radios are as follows: · Preset. · Scan. · Tone Controls. · Select Fusion System.
AUX
From the Fusion link application: 1. Select Src:.
A list of media sources is displayed. 2. Select the relevant media source.
1
D12754-1
1
Input gain.
Menu options available for AUX devices are as follows:
· Tone Controls.
· Select Fusion System.
Satellite radio
1
3 4
D12752-1
1
Track name.
2
Artist.
3
Channel details.
378
a Series / c Series / e Series
25.3 Browsing music
You can browse the music available on your connected iPod or USB device.
From the Fusion link application: 1. Select the Menu icon. 2. Select Browse Music.
The media device name is displayed. 3. Select the media device.
The contents of the device are displayed. 4. Browse the available folders by selecting on
them. 5. Select the Back icon to move back up the folder
structure. 6. Select the track that you want to listen to.
The main screen is displayed and the track will begin to play.
25.4 Selecting shuffle and repeat functions
You can set the Fusion link application to repeat the selected folder or to shuffle the play order.
From the Fusion link application: 1. Select the Menu icon. 2. Select Repeat to switch the repeat folder function
on or off. 3. Select Shuffle to switch the shuffle function on
or off.
Fusion link application
379
25.5 Adjusting volume levels for each zone
The volume level for each zone can be adjusted individually or you can adjust all zones at the same time.
From the Fusion link application: 1. Select Vol:.
The zone volume control is displayed.
25.6 Selecting the zone to control
You can select which zone the main screen will control. From the Fusion link application: 1. Select Zone:.
The zone selection bar is displayed.
2. Select the relevant zone. 3. Adjust the volume level to the required setting. 4. Select the Back icon to go back to the main
screen.
Note: Adjusting the All Zones level will adjust all of the zones at the same time.
2. Select the zone you want to control.
3. The volume controls on the main screen will now control the volume level of the selected zone.
380
a Series / c Series / e Series
25.7 Adjusting the tone controls
25.8 Selecting the system to control
The Bass, Middle, and Treble tone controls can be adjusted.
From the Fusion link application: 1. Select the Menu icon. 2. Select Tone Controls. 3. Select either Bass, Middle, or Treble. 4. Adjust the level to the required setting. 5. Select Back to go back to the menu options. 6. Select Back from the menu options to go back to
the main screen.
Where more than one Fusion entertainment system is connected you can select which system the Fusion link application will control.
From the Fusion link application: 1. Select the Menu icon. 2. Select Select Fusion system.
A list of available systems is displayed. 3. Select the system you want to control.
The Fusion link application will now control the selected system.
Fusion link application
381
25.9 Menu options
Menu option Browse Music Repeat
Shuffle Tone Controls
Select Fusion system Preset Scan
Media sources Description
· iPod. · USB.
Enables browsing of music stored on the device.
· iPod.
· Off
· USB.
· Folder -- Repeats all songs in the current folder.
· iPod. · USB.
Switches track shuffle on and off.
· All devices.
Enables adjustment of the following tone controls:
· Bass.
· Middle.
· Treble.
· All devices.
Enables you to select the Fusion entertainment system you want to control.
· AM / FM Radio. · VHF Radio.
Enables selection and saving of channels as presets.
· VHF Radio.
Enables scanning of saved channels.
382
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 26: Weather application (North America only)
Chapter contents · 26.1 Weather application overview on page 384 · 26.2 Weather application set up on page 384 · 26.3 Weather application display overview on page 385 · 26.4 Weather map navigation on page 388 · 26.5 Weather context menu on page 388 · 26.6 Weather information on page 389 · 26.7 Weather reports on page 390 · 26.8 Animated weather graphics on page 391 · 26.9 Weather application menu options on page 391 · 26.10 Glossary of weather terms on page 393
Weather application (North America only)
383
26.1 Weather application overview
26.2 Weather application set up
The weather application overlays historical, live, and A number of steps must be completed before you
forecasted weather graphics on a world map.
can use the weather application for the first time.
The weather application can only be used in North · Your multifunction display must be connected to a
America and its coastal waters.
Raymarine Sirius weather receiver.
The weather application graphics and their associated weather data enable you to determine the actual conditions in the vicinity of your vessel, or at a particular location.
Weather forecasts and warnings, detailing both current and predicted conditions, are regularly updated in the weather application.
Note: For types of warnings, watches, and advisories, refer to the NOAA website at www.nws.noaa.gov
Disclaimer -- advisory only
The weather information is subject to service interruptions and may contain errors or inaccuracies and consequently should not be relied upon exclusively. You are urged to check alternate weather information sources prior to making safety related decisions. You acknowledge and agree that you shall be solely responsible for use of the information and all decisions taken with respect thereto. By using this service, you release and waive any claims against Sirius Satellite Radio Inc., WSI, Navcast Incorporated, and Raymarine with regard to this service.
· Identify your Raymarine Sirius weather receiver's electronic serial number (ESN). This information can be obtained from the homescreen Set-up menu by selecting the device from the select devices page: Set-up > Maintenance > Diagnostics > Select Device >
· Using your ESN contact SiriusXM (www.siriusxm.com) to subscribe for Sirius Marine Weather (www.siriusxm.com/marineweather). When viewing the multifunction display's weather application, the ESN may be accessed from the following menu: Menu > Sirius ESN.
· You must be navigating within US coastal waters.
· Your multifunction display must obtain a GPS fix on your vessels location.
· You must specify the weather graphics that you want to display in the weather application.
If you do not have the subscription agreement, you may view a copy on the internet at www.sirius.com/marineweather
384
a Series / c Series / e Series
26.3 Weather application display overview
The weather application displays a range of graphics to indicate weather conditions and forecast information.
The following diagram illustrates the main features of the weather application display:
Symbol
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
10
9
11 11
D8564-4
Item
Description
1
Range
2
Canadian radar
3
Animation and time / date
4
Signal strength
5
Find ship icon
6
Surface observation stations
7
Wave heights
8
NOWRad
9
Marine zones
10
Data overlay cells
11
On-screen Range in and out icons
(Touchscreen displays only)
Weather symbols
The weather application uses a range of graphics and symbols to represent different weather conditions and forecasts.
Symbol
Description
Storm cast (dark blue) arrows indicating direction and speed of a storm.
Wave height · Highest waves (red) · Intermediate waves
(greens) · Lowest waves (blues)
Weather application (North America only)
Description Canadian radar (dark greens, yellow, orange and red)
Lightning -- a lightning symbol is shown at each cloud-to-ground strike:
· Light (recorded in last 1015 minutes.)
· Medium (recorded in last 510 minutes.)
· Dark (recorded in last 05 minutes.)
More recent strikes are overlaid over older symbols. Wind -- Wind symbols show the current wind direction and strength and can be displayed as either an arrow or a wind barb. Wind arrows indicate speed -- the larger the arrow, the greater (stronger) the wind speed. Wind barbs give a more precise indication of wind speed as shown in the wind speed symbols section. Sea surface temperature (green, yellow and orange)
· Blue -- coldest · green · yellow · orange and red -- warmest Surface observation stations (pink) -- Current or historical weather data can be viewed at surface observation stations. Not all data is available for all stations.
Cities -- The city symbols enables you to access details of city weather forecasts. Up to 3 forecasts are displayed for each city. NOWRad
· Rain (green, yellow and red.)
· Snow (blues) · Mixture (pinks)
385
Storm tracking symbols
The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent different types of storm tracks. The storm tracking function enables you to monitor significant storms in the area.
Examples of significant storms include tropical disturbances, depressions, storms and cyclones, hurricanes, typhoons, and super typhoons.
The weather map displays the track that the storm has taken, its current and forecasted position, the wind radii (current position only), direction, and speed of travel.
Storm tracks are highlighted on the weather map in the form of symbols, as shown below.
Historical Current
(grey)
(red)
Forecast (orange)
Description
Hurricane (Category 15)
Tropical storm
Tropical disturbance, tropical depression
When a symbol is selected, additional storm information can be accessed by the context menu: · Storm's name and type. · Date and time. · Position, direction and speed. · Pressure and maximum wind speed and gusts.
Surface pressure symbols
The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent different surface pressure conditions.
Symbol
Description
High / low pressure (blue and red)
Warm front (red)
Symbol
Description Dry line (red)
Isobars (grey)
Surface observation station symbols
The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent different types of surface observation station.
Symbol
Description
Buoy station
C-MAN (Coastal-marine automated network)
WSI (Weather services international)
NWS (National weather service)
Wind speed symbols
The weather application uses a range of symbols to represent different wind speeds.
Symbol Speed Symbol Speed Symbol Speed
37 kts
812
kts
1317 kts
1822 kts
2327 kts
2832 kts
3337 kts
3842 kts
4347 kts
4852 kts
5357 kts
5862 kts
Cold front (blue) Occluded front (purple) Stationary front (red-blue) Trough (brown) Squall line (red)
6367 kts
7882 kts
9397 kts
6872 kts
8387 kts
98102 kts
7377 kts
8892 kts
etc.
386
a Series / c Series / e Series
Wave information symbols
The weather application uses a range of graphics and symbols to represent different types of wave information.
Symbol
Description
Wave height -- Waves are shown in 16 shades of color from:
Color code Dark green Yellow Orange Light red Dark red
Intensity in mm per hour 4.01 to 12.00 mm/hr 12.01 to 24.00 mm/hr 24.01 to 50.00 mm/hr 50.01 to 100 mm/hr 100.01+ mm/hr
· Reds -- Highest waves Reflectivity intensity to rainfall correlation
· Greens -- Intermediate waves
· Blues -- Lowest waves
Wave period -- wave periods are shown using shades of blue, the darker the shade the shorter gap between successive waves. The wave period detail can be accessed by the context menu View Data option.
Wave direction -- direction of waves is indicated by blue arrows.
You can use the table below to correlate reflectivity intensity in dBz to estimated rainfall in millimeters per hour or inches per hour.
Reflectivity Intensity
Rainfall (mm/hr) Rainfall (in/hr)
5
0.0749
0.0029
10
0.1538
0.0059
15
0.3158
0.0123
20
0.6484
0.0253
25
1.332
0.0519
30
2.734
0.1066
35
5.615
0.219
40
11.53
0.4497
45
23.68
0.9235
NOWRad precipitation color codes
50
48.62
1.8963
NOWRad displays the type and level of precipitation: 55
99.85
3.8949
Reflectivity
60
Color code
Precipitation type Intensity
65
Light green
Rain
(15 to 19 dBz)
70
Medium green Rain
(20 to 29 dBz)
75
Dark Green
Rain
(30 to 39 dBz)
80
Yellow
Rain
(40 to 44 dBz)
85
Orange
Rain
(45 to 49 dBz)
90
Light red
Rain
(50 to 54 dBz)
95
205.05 401.07 864.68 1775.65 3646.33 7487.83 15376.51 31575.91
7.9975 15.6424 33.723 69.252 142.21 292.03 599.69 1231.46
Dark red
Rain
(55+ dBz)
100
64841.98
2528.84
Light blue Dark blue
Snow Snow
(5 to 19 dBz)
105
(20+ dBz)
110
133154.6 273436.4
5193.03 10664.02
Light pink Dark pink
Mixed Mixed
(5 to 19 dBz) (20+ dBz)
Canadian radar precipitation color codes
Canadian radar shows the intensity of precipitation for Canada. Unlike NOWRad, Canadian radar does not show the precipitation type.
Color code
Intensity in mm per hour
Transparent (nothing shown 0.00 to 0.20 mm/hr at very low precipitation)
Light green
0.21 to 1.00 mm/hr
Selecting weather graphics
From the weather application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Display Graphics.
The display graphics list is displayed. 3. Select each graphic you want to Show or Hide. 4. Selecting a graphic will switch between Show or
Hide.
Note: The Wind Vector graphic options are Arrow or Barb.
Medium green
1.01 to 4.00 mm/hr
Weather application (North America only)
387
26.4 Weather map navigation
26.5 Weather context menu
You can move around the weather map and place waypoints.
When you open the weather application, a world map is displayed. If the system has a position fix for your vessel, the map will be centred on your location. As in the chart application, use the cursor to move around the map and view different locations, and the Range Control to zoom in and out. Use the WPT button to place waypoints.
Note: Waypoints are not displayed in the weather application, to view waypoints you will need to have an active chart application or radar application displayed.
The weather application includes a context menu which provides positional data and the option to view weather reports from the cursor location.
The context menu provides the following positional data for the cursor location in relation to your vessel: · Latitude · Longitude
Locating your vessel
The vessel icon can be repositioned to the center of the screen by following the steps below.
· Range
· Bearing
Depending on the item or location selected on screen the context menu provides the following options:
1. Select the Find Ship icon: left hand side of the screen.
located on the
· View Report -- Only available when a city is selected.
· View Data-- Not available when a city is selected.
· View Full Report -- Only available when an observation station is selected.
Accessing the context menu
You can access the context menu by following the steps below. 1. Non-touchscreen and HybridTouch displays:
i. Selecting a location, object or target on-screen and pressing the Ok button.
2. HybridTouch and Touch only displays: i. Selecting an object or target on-screen. ii. Selecting and holding on a location on-screen.
388
a Series / c Series / e Series
26.6 Weather information
You can view weather information for: · a specific location · a surface observation station (when displayed) · Cities (when displayed)
Viewing weather data at a specific location You can view weather details at a particular location on the world map regardless of the display graphics being shown in your weather application. From the weather application: 1. Select the location you wish to view weather
details for. The context menu is displayed. 2. Select View Data. A weather information page is displayed.
Viewing city weather forecasts
You can view weather forecasts for a particular city by following the steps below:
From the weather application, with cities displayed: 1. Select a city.
The weather context menu is displayed. 2. Select View Report.
The City forecast is displayed. Up to 3 forecasts are shown.
Weather information page When selecting View Data from the weather context menu the following information is displayed: · Zone description · Zone ID · Precipitation intensity · Precipitation type · Sea surface temperature · Wind speed · Wind form · Wave height · Wave period · Wave direction
Viewing weather station reports
You can view surface observation station reports by following the steps below:
From the weather application, with surface observation stations displayed: 1. Select a surface observation station.
The weather context menu is displayed. 2. Select View Full Report.
The station report is displayed.
Station report
Surface observation station reports contain the following information (when available)
· Station ID, name, type, bearing, time and date
· Air temperature
· Visibility
· Sea pressure
· Wind speed and form
· Sea temperature
· Wave information
Weather application (North America only)
389
26.7 Weather reports
Watchbox alert box
You can view a number of different weather reports to give you a comprehensive view of the weather. Your multifunction display shows weather reports for:
· Tropical statements.
· Marine warnings.
The watchbox alert box is a red polygon which shows the location where severe weather is occurring.
The watchbox alert box shall be displayed if the weather application is displayed, watchbox alerts are On and the watchbox alert area is within the specified range from your vessel, or set to All.
· Marine zone forecasts.
· Watchbox warnings.
Tropical statements
Tropical statements provide information on tropical
weather conditions. This information may not be
1
available in all areas.
Marine warnings
You can display a report for the current marine warnings in the US coastal or near shore areas, or for the zone around your cursor or vessel.
Marine zone forecasts
These forecasts cover:
· US coastal weather forecasts, offshore forecasts and high seas forecasts, or
· Great lakes forecasts and near shore forecasts, or
· Canadian coastal weather forecasts.
Watchbox warnings
When a tornado or thunderstorm warning is received within the specified alert range of your vessel, the system generates a watchbox alert. This alert provides information on the type of warning and validity period. The full watchbox report text is also displayed.
Displaying weather reports
From the weather application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select View Report. 3. Select either Tropical Statements, Marine
Warnings, Marine Zone Forecasts, or Watchbox Warnings.
The relevant report, warning, or statement is displayed.
D12297-1
Item
Description
1
Watchbox alert box
Viewing watchbox alerts
You can view a watchbox alert at any time by following the steps below:
From the weather application with a watchbox alert box displayed. 1. Select the watchbox alert box.
The context menu is displayed. 2. Select View Data.
The watchbox alert message is displayed.
Setting watchbox alert range
You can specify the range from your vessel that you wish to receive watchbox alerts from.
From the weather application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Watchbox Alerts. 3. Select the required range, All, or Off if you do not
want to receive watchbox alerts.
· Selecting a range will display watchbox warnings occurring within the specified range.
· Selecting All will display all watchbox warning regardless of range from your vessel.
Changing the position of forecasts on the weather map
From the weather application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select View Report. 3. Select Report At.
Selecting report at will switch between reports from Ship location or Cursor location.
· Selecting Off will stop watchbox alerts.
Note: When the watchbox alert setting is set to Off watchbox reports will still be received but you will not be alerted.
Note: You cannot change the position of Tropical Statements or Watchbox Warnings.
390
a Series / c Series / e Series
26.8 Animated weather graphics
26.9 Weather application menu options
You can view animated weather graphics to provide an indication of changing weather patterns. The animated weather option enables you to view an animation from the current time for:
· NOWRad -- weather radar
· Wind
· Waves
· Pressure -- surface pressure
Running a weather animation From the weather application: 1. Select Menu. 2. Select Animate Weather. 3. Select Animate.
A list of animation is displayed. 4. Select the type of animation from the list. 5. Select Play so the On is displayed.
Selecting play will switch between on and off.
The following options are available from the weather application menu:
Menu item
Description
Options
Find Ship
Selecting Find Ship will reset the display to show your vessel in the center of the screen.
Display Graphics
The Display Graphics menu allows to choose what graphics to Show or Hide in the weather application.
Display Graphics
· Canadian Radar
· Cities · Lightning · Marine Zones
· NOWRad
· Sea Surface Temperature
· Storm Cast
· Storm Tracks
· Surface Pressure
· Surface Observation Stations
· Wind
Note: You cannot display information (by moving the cursor over a symbol) when animation is running. The Range and Rotary controls do however remain operable provided the PAUSE option has not been selected. Ranging / panning will cause the animation to restart.
Note: The animation will be switched to Off if the animation menu is closed.
Animate Weather
The Animate Weather menu contains the following sub-menus:
· Animate
· Play
· Pause
· Adjust Range
· Wind Vector -- Arrow or Barb
· Watchbox · Wave Height · Wave Period · Wave Direction Animate: · NOWRad · Wind · Wave · Pressure Play: · On · Off
Pause:
· On
· Off
Adjust Range Adjust Range allows you to use the Range
Weather application (North America only)
391
Menu item View Report
Watchbox Alert
Data Overlay Set-up
Sirius User ID
Description
Options
Control to zoom in and out.
The View Report menu allows you to view the different types of weather reports received. You can also select the location of the report.
Report At · Ship · Cursor View Report · Tropical
Statements
· Marine Warnings
· Marine Zone Forecasts
· Watchbox Warnings
The Watchbox Alerts menu allows you to turn alerts Off, or select a range.
Alert Range · Off · 50 nm · 150 nm
· 300 nm
· 500 nm
· All
Note: Unit of measurement is dependant upon unit set-up choices.
Allows you to set up and display/hide up to 2 data cells in the bottom left corner of the screen: · Data Cell 1 · Select Data
Category · Data Cell 2 · Select Data
Category
This option will display your registered Sirius User ID.
Data Cell 1
· On
· Off
Select Data Category Allows selection of a data type by category. Data Cell 2
· On
· Off
Select Data Category Allows selection of a data type by category.
392
a Series / c Series / e Series
26.10 Glossary of weather terms
Term Cold front Cyclone Depression Dry line Forecast Front High High Pressure Hurricane
Definition
The boundary between two different air masses where cold air pushes warm air out of the way and brings colder weather.
A large area of low atmospheric pressure, characterized by inward spiralling winds. A "low" also called a "depression". Also the name used for a hurricane in the Indian Ocean and Western Pacific.
An area of low pressure. Also called a cyclone.
A region where there is a strong gradient in dew point temperatures. It is often found in a region where strong thunderstorms develop.
Something that tells us what the weather is probably going to be like.
The boundary between two masses of air with different temperatures (i.e. a mass of cold air and a mass of warm air).
Also known as an 'anticyclone' an area of high atmospheric pressure with a system of winds rotating outwards. This usually means dry weather. It is the opposite of a 'low'.
A mass of air that presses down strongly on the surface of the Earth because it is being cooled and is therefore more dense.
A violent, spiralling storm that forms over the Atlantic Ocean, with winds over 120 kph. Such storms usually have a lifespan of several days. Also known as a typhoon or tropical cyclone. There are 5 levels of hurricane:
Isobar Lightning Low Low Pressure
Millibar Occluded Front
· Category 1-- Winds 7495 mph (6482 kt or 119153 km/hr). Storm surge generally 45 ft above normal. No real damage to building structures. Damage primarily to unanchored mobile homes, shrubbery, and trees. Some damage to poorly constructed signs. Also, some coastal road flooding and minor pier damage.
· Category 2 -- Winds 96110 mph (8395 kt or 154177 km/hr). Storm surge generally 68 feet above normal. Some roofing material, door, and window damage of buildings. Considerable damage to shrubbery and trees with some trees blown down. Considerable dam age to mobile homes, poorly constructed signs, and piers. Coastal and low lying escape routes flood 24 hours before arrival of the hurricane centre Small craft in unprotected anchorages break moorings.
· Category 3 -- Winds 111130 mph (96113 kt or 178209 km/hr). Storm surge generally 912 ft above normal. Some structural damage to small residences and utility buildings with a minor amount of curtain wall failures. Damage to shrubbery and trees with foliage blown off trees and large trees blown down. Mobile homes and poorly constructed signs are destroyed. Low lying escape routes are cut by rising water 35 hours before arrival of the centre of the hurricane. Flooding near the coast destroys smaller structures with larger structures damaged by battering from floating debris. Terrain continuously lower than 5 ft above mean sea level may be flooded inland 8 miles (13 km) or more. Evacuation of low lying residences with several blocks of the shoreline may be required.
· Category 4 -- Winds 131155 mph (114135 kt or 210249 km/hr). Storm surge generally 1318 ft above normal. More extensive curtain wall failures with some complete roof structure failures on small residences. Shrubs, trees, and all signs are blown down. Complete destruction of mobile homes. Extensive damage to doors and windows. Low lying escape routes may be cut by rising water 35 hours before arrival of the centre of the hurricane. Major damage to lower floors of structures near the shore. Terrain lower than 10 ft above sea level may be flooded requiring massive evacuation of residential areas as far inland as 6 miles (10 km).
· Category 5 -- Winds greater than 155 mph (135 kt or 249 km/hr). Storm surge generally greater than 18 ft above normal. Complete roof failure on many residences and industrial buildings. Some complete building failures with small utility buildings blown over or away. All shrubs, trees, and signs blown down. Complete destruction of mobile homes. Severe and extensive window and door damage. Low lying escape routes are cut by rising water 35 hours before arrival of the centre of the hurricane. Major damage to lower floors of all structures located less than 15 ft above sea level and within 500 yards of the shoreline. Massive evacuation of residential areas on low ground within 510 miles (816 km) of the shoreline may be required.
A line on a weather map linking areas with equal air pressure.
Discharge of static electricity in the atmosphere, usually between the ground and a storm cloud.
Also called a 'depression' this region of low pressure can mean wet weather.
A mass of air that presses down only weakly on the surface of the Earth's surface as it is warmed and it therefore less dense.
A unit used to measure atmospheric pressure.
An area where warm air is pushed upwards as a cold front overtakes a warm front and pushes underneath it.
Weather application (North America only)
393
Term Precipitation Pressure Centre Squall line Super typhoon
Tornado Tropical cyclone
Tropical depression Tropical storm
Tropics Trough
Typhoon
Wave cyclone Wave period
Definition
Moisture that is released from the atmosphere as rain, drizzle, hail, sleet or snow, as well as dew and fog.
A region of high or low pressure.
A non-frontal band, or line, of thunderstorms.
A typhoon that reaches maximum sustained 1 minute surface winds of at least 65 m/s (130 kt, 150 mph). This is the equivalent of a strong category 4 or 5 hurricane in the Atlantic basin or a category 5 severe tropical cyclone in the Australian basin.
A funnel shaped whirlwind which extends to the ground from storm clouds.
A low pressure system that generally forms in the tropics. The cyclone is accompanied by thunderstorms and, in the Northern Hemisphere, a counterclockwise circulation of winds near the earth's surface.
An organized system of clouds and thunderstorms with a defined surface circulation and maximum sustained winds of 38 mph (33 kt) or less.
An organized system of strong thunderstorms with a defined surface circulation and maximum sustained winds of 3973 mph (34 63 kt).
An area on the Earth's surface that lies between 30º north and 30º south of the equator.
An elongated area of relatively low atmospheric pressure, usually extending from the centre of a low pressure region.
The name for a tropical storm originating in the Pacific Ocean, usually the China Sea. They are basically the same as the hurricanes of the Atlantic Ocean and the cyclones of the Bay of Bengal.
A storm or low pressure centre that moves along a front.
The period is the time gap between successive waves and the longer the period the faster the waves travel.
394
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 27: Sirius audio application (North America only)
Chapter contents · 27.1 Sirius audio overview on page 396
Sirius audio application (North America only)
395
27.1 Sirius audio overview
A connected, compatible Raymarine Sirius marine weather / satellite radio receiver can be controlled using the Sirius audio application.
Note: A Sirius subscription is required to enable use of a Sirius marine weather / satellite radio receiver.
To enable volume controls the Raymarine Sirius marine weather / satellite radio receiver also needs to be connected to a vessel entertainment system. Volume control is achieved using a combination of the multifunction display controls and the vessel entertainment system controls.
1. Select Menu. 2. Select Select channel.
The Channel browser is displayed.
1
2
3
3. Select the relevant channel from the list.
4 5
6
9
8
7
D12756-1
1
Signal strength (Between 0 and 3 bars).
2
Track name and Artist name.
3
Menu -- The menu is used to browse available
satellite radio channels.
4
Station details.
5
Sirius receiver ID.
6
Favorite channels.
7
Volume up.
8
Mute / Unmute.
9
Volume down.
The Sirius audio application can be used to: · Browse available radio channels. · Switch radio channel. · Assign channels as favorites. · Change the volume level. · Mute the volume.
Note: Sirius satellite radio is only available in North America.
Adding favorites
You can programme up to 6 favorite channels in the Sirius audio application. To save the current channel as a favorite follow the steps below. 1. Switch to the channel you want to save as a
favorite. 2. When the channel is displayed onscreen select
and hold on a favorite channel number (1 to 6) for 2 seconds.
The radio channel is now assigned as a favorite.
Using the volume controls
The Sirius audio application can be used to control the volume of your Sirius audio receiver.
With the Sirius audio application displayed: 1. Select the Volume up or Volume down icon to
change the volume level, or 2. Select the Mute icon to mute and un-mute the
audio.
Accessing the Sirius audio application 1. Select the Sirius Audio page icon from the
homescreen.
Changing the channel You can view a list of available satellite radio channels and select the station you want to listen to. From the Sirius Audio application:
396
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 28: Mobile applications
Chapter contents · 28.1 Raymarine mobile apps on page 398 · 28.2 Enabling Wi-Fi on page 399 · 28.3 Enabling mobile apps on page 399 · 28.4 Setting up Wi-Fi security on page 400 · 28.5 Selecting a Wi-Fi channel on page 400
Mobile applications
397
28.1 Raymarine mobile apps
6. "RayControl" remote controls
Raymarine mobile apps enable viewing and control of your multifunction display via a compatible mobile device, using a Wi-Fi connection.
Raymarine currently offers the following mobile apps:
RayRemote
This app enables you to stream or control your multifunction display remotely from a compatible smartphone, using a Wi-Fi connection.
· RayView · RayRemote
Note: RayRemote is able to switch between displaying the remote controls or the video stream.
· RayControl
1
2
34
Note: Your multifunction display must have software version V3.15 or later in order to use mobile apps.
RayView
D125 99- 2
This app enables you to stream what you see on your multifunction display to a compatible smartphone or
1.
Multifunction display.
tablet device, using a Wi-Fi connection.
2. Wi-Fi connection (2 way streaming or remote
control).
1
2
34
3. Compatible smartphone.
4. RayRemote app
To use Raymarine mobile apps you must first:
· Download and install the required app from the relevant app store.
· Enable Wi-Fi in the System Settings on the
D12165-2
multifunction display.
1. Multifunction display.
· Enable Wi-Fi on your compatible device.
2. Wi-Fi connection (1 way streaming only). 3. Compatible device. 4. "RayView" video streaming app.
RayControl -- This app enables you to stream and remotely control your multifunction display from a compatible tablet device, using a Wi-Fi connection.
Note: For safety reasons pilot controls and power button options are not available remotely.
· Select the Raymarine Wi-Fi connection from the list of available Wi-Fi networks on your compatible device.
· Enable the relevant type of connection (i.e. Viewing or Remote Control) in the System Settings on the multifunction display.
Mobile app compatibility
The Raymarine mobile apps are compatible with the following devices.
Device
Operating system
1
2
3
4 56
iPhone 4 or later
iOS
iPad 2 or later
iOS
Android smartphone
Android V2.2.2 or greater with 1GHz or greater processor
Android tablet
Android V2.2.2 or greater with 1GHz or greater processor
Kindle Fire
Android \ amazon
D125 02- 3
1. Multifunction display. 2. Wi-Fi connection (2 way streaming and remote
control). 3. Compatible tablet. 4. "RayControl" streaming and remote control app. 5. "RayControl" controls access (Touch the arrow
to access controls).
398
a Series / c Series / e Series
28.2 Enabling Wi-Fi
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select Wireless Connections. 4. Select Wi-Fi > ON.
28.3 Enabling mobile apps
Raymarine mobile apps must be enabled on your multifunction display before you can stream video or remote control your multifunction display via a tablet or smartphone device.
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select System Settings. 3. Select Wireless Connections. 4. Select Mobile apps. 5. Select Viewing only to enable video streaming
only, or 6. Select Remote Control to enable remote control
and video streaming using. 7. Launch the relevant Raymarine mobile app on
your tablet or smartphone device and follow the on-screen instructions.
Mobile applications
399
28.4 Setting up Wi-Fi security
28.5 Selecting a Wi-Fi channel
You can encrypt the Wi-Fi connection on the multifunction display to prevent unauthorized devices from accessing the connection. The default encryption is WPA2.
With the homescreen displayed:
1. Select Set-up.
2. Select System Settings.
3. Select Wireless Connections.
4. Select Wi-Fi > On.
5. Select Wi-Fi Name and specify the SSID. This should be a memorable word and must be unique to each multifunction display in your system.
By default the SSID is the serial number of the multifunction display.
6. Select Wi-Fi Security and specify the type of encryption you want to use -- None, WPA only, WPA2 only (default), or WPA/WPA2.
By default the multifunction display automatically selects an available Wi-Fi channel. If you're experiencing difficulties with wireless video streaming it may be necessary to manually specify a Wi-Fi channel for both the multifunction display and the device you want to stream video to.
With the homescreen displayed:
1. Select Set-up.
2. Select System Settings.
3. Select Wireless Connections.
4. Select Wi-Fi > On.
5. Select Wi-Fi Channel.
6. Select one of the listed channels.
Note:
· Raymarine strongly recommends the use of the WPA2 security setting.
· Selecting None for your Wi-Fi Security will leave your Wi-Fi open and allow anyone with a Wi-Fi enabled device access to your system.
7. It is recommended that the default Wi-Fi Passphrase is NOT changed.
Note: Once Wi-Fi security is set up on the multifunction display you must specify the same SSID and password credentials on your iPhone or iPad before wireless video streaming can be used.
Changing the default passphrase
It is recommended that the default passphrase is not changed, however if you do need to change the passphrase follow the steps below:
From the Wireless Connections menu: Set-up > System Settings > Wireless Connections 1. Select Wi-Fi Passphrase.
The on-screen keyboard will be displayed, showing the current passphrase. 2. Use DEL to delete the current passphrase. 3. Enter a new passphrase.
Note: Ensure the passphrase you choose is 'strong' by using a combination of upper/lower case letters, numbers and special characters. The passphrase can be between 8 and 63 characters in length with longer passphrases being more secure.
4. Select SAVE to save the new passphrase.
400
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 29: Maintaining your display
Chapter contents · 29.1 Service and maintenance on page 402 · 29.2 Product cleaning on page 402
Maintaining your display
401
29.1 Service and maintenance
29.2 Product cleaning
This product contains no user serviceable components. Please refer all maintenance and repair to authorized Raymarine dealers. Unauthorized repair may affect your warranty.
Routine equipment checks
Best cleaning practices.
When cleaning products:
· If your product includes a display screen, do NOT wipe the screen with a dry cloth, as this could scratch the screen coating.
Raymarine strongly recommends that you complete a number of routine checks to ensure the correct and reliable operation of your equipment.
Complete the following checks on a regular basis:
· Do NOT use abrasive, or acid or ammonia based products.
· Do NOT use a jet wash.
· Examine all cables for signs of damage or wear and tear.
· Check that all cables are securely connected.
Cleaning the display case
The display unit is a sealed unit and does not require regular cleaning. If it is necessary to clean the unit, follow this basic procedure:
1. Switch off the power to the display.
2. Wipe the display with a clean, soft cloth (a microfibre cloth is ideal).
3. If necessary, use a mild detergent to remove grease marks.
Note: Do NOT use solvents or detergents on the screen itself.
Note: In certain conditions, condensation may appear inside the display screen. This will not harm the unit, and can be cleared by powering on the display for a short time.
Cleaning the display screen
A coating is applied to the display screen. This makes it water repellent, and prevents glare. To avoid damaging this coating, follow this procedure: 1. Switch off the power to the display. 2. Rinse the screen with fresh water to remove all
dirt particles and salt deposits. 3. Allow the screen to dry naturally. 4. If any smears remain, very gently wipe the screen
with a clean microfibre cleaning cloth (available from an opticians).
Cleaning the sun cover
The supplied sun cover features an adhesive surface. In certain conditions unwanted contaminants may stick to this surface. To avoid damaging the monitor display, clean the sun cover regularly following this procedure: 1. Carefully remove the sun cover from the display. 2. Rinse the sun cover with fresh water to remove
all dirt particles and salt deposits. 3. Allow the sun cover to dry naturally.
402
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 30: Troubleshooting
Chapter contents · 30.1 Troubleshooting on page 404 · 30.2 Power up troubleshooting on page 405 · 30.3 Radar troubleshooting on page 406 · 30.4 GPS troubleshooting on page 407 · 30.5 Troubleshooting Autorouting on page 408 · 30.6 Sonar troubleshooting on page 410 · 30.7 Sonar crosstalk interference on page 411 · 30.8 Thermal camera troubleshooting on page 413 · 30.9 System data troubleshooting on page 415 · 30.10 Video troubleshooting on page 416 · 30.11 Wi-Fi troubleshooting on page 417 · 30.12 Bluetooth troubleshooting on page 418 · 30.13 Touchscreen troubleshooting on page 419 · 30.14 Touchscreen alignment on page 420 · 30.15 Miscellaneous troubleshooting on page 421
Troubleshooting
403
30.1 Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting information provides possible causes and corrective action required for common problems associated with marine electronics installations.
All Raymarine products are, prior to packing and shipping, subjected to comprehensive test and quality assurance programs. However, if you experience problems with the operation of your product this section will help you to diagnose and correct problems in order to restore normal operation.
If after referring to this section you are still having problems with your unit, please contact Raymarine Technical Support for further advice.
404
a Series / c Series / e Series
30.2 Power up troubleshooting
Problems at power up and their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
The system (or part of it) does not start up.
Possible causes Power supply problem.
Possible solutions
Check relevant fuses and breakers.
Check that the power supply cable is sound and that all connections are tight and free from corrosion.
Check that the power source is of the correct voltage and sufficient current.
Troubleshooting
405
30.3 Radar troubleshooting
Problems with the radar and their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
No Data or No scanner message Radar scanner power supply
Check that the scanner power supply cable is sound and that all connections are tight and free from corrosion.
Check relevant fuses and breakers.
Check power source is of the correct voltage and sufficient current (using voltage booster if appropriate).
SeaTalkhs / RayNet network problem
Check that the Scanner is correctly connected to a Raymarine network switch or SeaTalkhs crossover coupler (as applicable).
Check the status of the Raymarine network switch.
Check that SeaTalkhs / RayNet cables are free from damage.
Software mismatch between equipment may prevent communication.
Contact Raymarine technical support.
Switch at scanner pedestal in Ensure scanner pedestal switch is in ON position. OFF position
Radar will not initialize (Voltage Intermittent or poor power control module (VCM) stuck in connection "sleep mode"
Check power connection at VCM. (Voltage at input = 12 / 24 V, Voltage at output = 40 V)
The bearing of a target on the The radar bearing alignment
radar screen is incorrect.
requires correcting.
Check and adjust radar bearing alignment.
406
a Series / c Series / e Series
30.4 GPS troubleshooting
Problems with the GPS and their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
"No Fix" GPS status icon is displayed.
Geographic location or prevailing Check periodically to see if a fix is obtained in better conditions preventing satellite conditions or another geographic location. fix.
GPS connection fault.
Ensure that external GPS connections and cabling are correct and fault free.
External GPS antenna in poor position. For example:
Ensure GPS antenna has a clear view of the sky.
· Below decks.
· Close proximity to transmitting equipment such as VHF radio.
GPS installation problem.
Refer to the installation instructions.
Note: A GPS Status screen is available within the display. This provides satellite signal strength and other relevant information.
Troubleshooting
407
30.5 Troubleshooting Autorouting
The information below details the warnings that can be displayed when using Autorouting, a description of what the warning means and actions to be taken to correct the issue.
Warning message
Description
Resolution
Autorouting has completed successfully The Route maybe followed AFTER it has been reviewed to ensure that the generated route is safe for your vessel to follow.
Autorouting has completed successfully, however the route passes close to areas where extra caution is advised (e.g. a charted buoy). The caution areas will be between waypoints that have been assigned caution symbol.
The route must be reviewed as follows:
· Identify any waypoints using the caution symbol (these will be in sets of 2), check between the caution symbols to identify the reason for the caution.
· If possible move the waypoint(s) to avoid the hazard.
· Review all route legs and their waypoints to ensure appropriate before following the route.
The start and or end point of the route does not meet the minimum safe values specified in the Boat Details settings. The start and end waypoints will be created and joined with a straight route leg, however there will be no automatically generated waypoints and the waypoint symbols will be changed to caution symbols.
Perform the following checks:
· Check that the values specified in the Boat Details settings are correct.
· Using the context menu check the Chart Objects menu at the exact location of the start and or end points to establish if the Depth range min value meets you Minimum Safe Depth.
Note:
If no minimum value for depth is available at the desired location Autorouting will assume a minimum depth of 0 feet.
Autorouting adds its own safety margin of 0.8 m or 20% of the specified Minimum Safe Depth which ever is greater.
· Check for any other hazards that would prevent Autorouting from generating a route.
There is insufficient data available on the cartography to generate the route, The start and end waypoints will be created, however there will be no automatically generated waypoints and the waypoint symbols will be changed to caution symbols.
· Insert compatible cartography (Navionics® Updates or Navionics® PlatinumTM+)
· Update existing cartography
Note: There may be certain areas where sufficient details are not yet available even on the latest cartography.
408
a Series / c Series / e Series
Warning message
Description The start and end point of the desired route are further than 100 nm apart.
A safe route could not be generated The first waypoint will be placed but the end waypoint will not.
Resolution
Create smaller route legs. e.g. instead of trying to create a route from point A to point B, create a route from point A to point B to point C to point D, this will enable a route longer than 100 nm to be created using Autorouting for each route leg.
Check the chart area along the expected route to identify areas which cannot be navigated through due to obstacles or land mass.
Troubleshooting
409
30.6 Sonar troubleshooting
Problems with the sonar and their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
Sonar data not available on multifunction display.
Unit power supply fault. Other unit fault.
Check the unit power supply and cables. Refer to the instructions supplied with the unit.
SeaTalkhs / RayNet network problem.
Check that the unit is correctly connected to a Raymarine network switch. If a crossover coupler or other coupler cable / adapter is used, check all connections (as applicable).
Check the status of the Raymarine network switch (if applicable).
Check that SeaTalkhs/ RayNet cables are free from damage.
Software mismatch between equipment may prevent communication.
Contact Raymarine technical support.
Problematic data readings.
Note: Not all transducers and / or sonar modules support the detection of depth, range and temperature. For more information, refer to the latest specifications and documentation available for your particular products on the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com).
Gain or Frequency settings may Check the sonar presets, gain and frequency settings. be inappropriate for present conditions.
Unit power supply fault.
Check the voltage from the power supply, if this is too low it can affect the transmitting power of the unit.
Unit cable fault.
Ensure that the power, transducer and all other cables to the unit are properly connected and free from damage.
Transducer fault.
Check that the transducer is mounted correctly and is clean.
If you have a transom mount transducer, check that the transducer hasn't kicked-up due to hitting an object.
Other unit fault.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the unit.
Vessel stationary.
Fish arches are not displayed if the vessel is stationary; fish will appear on the display as straight lines.
High vessel speed
Turbulence around the transducer may be confusing the unit.
Scroll speed set to zero
Adjust the scroll speed.
Incorrect speed reading (DST) Paddle wheel fault
Check that the paddle wheel is clean.
No speed offset set
Add speed offset.
Incorrect calibration
Re-calibrate equipment
Transducer does not have a speed element
Install transducer with speed element to enable speed readings.
410
a Series / c Series / e Series
30.7 Sonar crosstalk interference
There are 2 types of potential sonar crosstalk interference in a Raymarine sonar system:
1. SideVision sonar crosstalk interference
2. Multiple sonar crosstalk interference
The types of crosstalk interference that you may experience in your system depend on the combination and type of sonar equipment installed, and the way in which the equipment has been installed.
SideVision sonar crosstalk Multiple sonar crosstalk
interference
interference
Due to the high sensitivity of SideVision transducers, you may experience some minor crosstalk interference between the left and right receiving channels in areas of strong target returns. Examples of strong target returns include solid objects such as underwater bridge structure. This interference shows up in the Fishfinder application as subtle reflections from the right sonar image displayed in the left sonar image, or vice versa.
When using multiple sonar modules and transducers operating in overlapping frequency ranges, you may experience some crosstalk interference between the ranges. This interference is displayed in the Fishfinder application as vertical "rain drops" throughout the water column. These vertical "rain drops" indicate that 2 sonar modules are operating in close frequency proximity to one another.
SideVision sonar crosstalk interference
Crosstalk interference is expected behavior in a high sensitivity device such as a SideVision transducer, and is not indicative of a fault with your transducer or sonar module.
Reducing multiple sonar crosstalk interference
Crosstalk interference in systems with multiple sonar modules and transducers is the result of a number of factors, including installation, operation, and environment.
· Choose an equipment combination that minimizes overlapping frequencies. Wherever possible, choose to use sonar modules and transducers that operate in different frequency ranges ("Channels"), for example CP100 and CP300 sonar modules and CPT-100 and B744V transducers. This will help to ensure that each component is operating in a distinct relative frequency range for example, a "high" frequency range for the CP100 and a "low" frequency range for the CP300.
· Only use the sonar channels that you really need. Although it is possible to run multiple sonar
Troubleshooting
modules simultaneously in a Raymarine system, it may not always be necessary to do so. If you are in a scenario that requires only one sonar module to be active at a time, disable any other sonar modules by changing the Fishfinder application pane to a single one which only displays the output from one sonar module. Alternatively, disable the ping for any unused sonar modules by selecting MENU > Channel > Ping > OFF in the Fishfinder application.
· Identify the sonar module and transducer that is causing the interference. To do this, disable the ping or remove the power for one of the sonar modules in your system. If the interference in the Fishfinder application disappears immediately, you now know which device is causing the interference. If the interference doesn't disappear, repeat the exercise again with the other sonar module(s) in your system, one at a time. Once you know which device is causing the interference, proceed with the following methods to reduce the interference from the relevant device.
· Adjust the Interference Rejection Filter. The default setting for all Raymarine MFDs is "Auto". Changing this setting to "High" might help to reduce interference (MENU > Setup > Sounder Setup > Interference Rejection). Note that the Interference Rejection Filter setting is not available for all sonar modules.
· Decrease the power output of the interfering transducer. Adjusting the "Power Mode" in the Sensitivity Settings in the MFD's Fishfinder application can help to minimize the presence of crosstalk interference (MENU > Sensitivity Settings > Power Mode). Note that the Power Mode setting is not available for all transducers.
· Ensure that you have a common RF ground point for all electrical equipment on your vessel. On vessels without an RF ground system, ensure all product drain wires (where available) are connected directly to the negative battery terminal. Ineffective RF grounding can cause electrical interference which may in turn result in sonar crosstalk interference.
· Increase the physical distance between your sonar modules. Electrical interference may be occurring between a cable on one sonar module, and a cable on a different sonar module. Ensure that your sonar modules are physically located as far away from each other as possible.
· Increase the physical distance between your sonar transducers. Electrical and / or acoustic interference may be occurring between the different transducers in your system. Ensure that your transducers are physically located as far away from each other as possible.
Note: Given the effort and potential difficulties involved in relocating sonar equipment, it should only be considered as a last resort when you judge the interference to be a significant problem which cannot be resolved using the methods described above.
411
Note: Due to physical size and other constraints that vary from vessel to vessel, it may not be possible to completely eliminate crosstalk interference from your system. However, this will not impede your ability to benefit from the full capabilities of your sonar system. Being able to easily identify the way in which interference is displayed in the Fishfinder application can sometimes be the best and easiest route to dealing with it.
412
a Series / c Series / e Series
30.8 Thermal camera troubleshooting
Problems with the thermal camera and their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
Video not displayed.
Camera is in Standby mode.
The camera will not display video if it is in Standby mode. Use the camera controls (either the thermal camera application or JCU) to "wake" the camera from standby.
Problem with the thermal camera video connections.
· Check thermal camera video cables are sound and properly connected.
· Ensure that the video is connected into video input 1 at the multifunction display or GVM.
· Ensure that the correct video input is selected at the display.
Problem with power supply to the camera or JCU (if used as the primary controller)
· Check the power connections to the camera and JCU / PoE injector (if used).
· Ensure that the power switch / breaker is on.
· Check the fuse / breaker state.
Cannot control thermal camera Thermal camera application is
from Raymarine display or
not running.
keyboard.
Ensure the thermal camera application is running on the multifunction display (as oppose to the video application which does not have camera controls).
Erratic or unresponsive controls. Network problem.
Check that the controller and thermal camera are correctly connected to the network. (Note: This may be a direct connection or via a Raymarine network switch.)
Check the status of the Raymarine network switch.
Check that SeaTalkhs / RayNet cables are free from damage.
Control conflict, e.g. caused by multiple users at different stations.
Ensure that no other controllers are in use at the same time.
Problem with the controller.
Check power / network cabling to the controller and PoE injector (PoE only used with optional Joystick Control Unit).
Check other controllers if available. If other controllers are operating this will eliminate the possibility of a more fundamental camera fault.
Cannot switch between thermal Camera is not a dual payload
and visible (VIS / IR) video
model.
image .
VIS / IR cable not connected.
Only "dual payload" (dual lens) thermal cameras support VIS / IR switching.
Ensure that the VIS / IR cable is connected from the camera to the Raymarine system. (The IR-only cable does not support switching).
Noisy image.
Poor quality or faulty video cable.
Cable is picking up electromagnetic interference (EMI) from another device.
Ensure that the video cable is no longer than necessary. The longer the cable is (or the smaller the wire gauge / thickness), the more severe the losses become. Use only high quality shielded cable suitable for a marine environment.
· Ensure you are using a high quality shielded cable.
· Ensure proper cable separation, for example do not run data and power cables in close proximity with each other.
Troubleshooting
413
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
Image too dark or too light.
Display brightness is set too low. Use the brightness controls at the display to adjust accordingly.
The contrast or brightness settings in the thermal camera application are set too low.
Use the appropriate menu in the thermal camera application to adjust the contrast and brightness of the image.
The Scene Mode is not appropriate for the current conditions.
A particular environment may benefit from a different Scene Mode setting. For example, a very cold background (such as the sky) could cause the camera to use a wider temperature range than appropriate. Use the SCENE button.
Image freezes momentarily.
FFC (Flat Field Correction).
The image will pause momentarily on a periodic basis during the Flat Field Correction (FFC) cycle. Just prior to the FFC, a small green square will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
Image is inverted (upside down). Camera "Ball down" setting is Ensure that the Ball down setting within the thermal
incorrect.
camera system setup menu is set correctly.
414
a Series / c Series / e Series
30.9 System data troubleshooting
Aspects of the installation can cause problems with the data shared between connected equipment. Such problems, their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
Instrument, engine or other system data is unavailable at all displays.
Data is not being received at the display.
Check the data bus (e.g. SeaTalkng) wiring and connections.
Check the overall integrity of the data bus (e.g. SeaTalkng) wiring.
If available refer to the reference guide for the data bus (e.g. SeaTalkng reference manual).
Data source (e.g. ST70 instrument or engine interface) is not operating.
Check the source of the missing data (e.g. ST70 instrument or engine interface).
Check the power to the SeaTalk bus.
Refer to the manufacturer's handbook for the equipment in question.
Software mismatch between equipment may prevent communication.
Contact Raymarine technical support.
Instrument or other system data Network problem. is missing from some but not all displays.
Check that all required equipment is connected to the network.
Check the status of the Raymarine network Switch.
Check that SeaTalkhs / RayNet cables are free from damage.
Software mismatch between equipment may prevent communication.
Contact Raymarine technical support.
Troubleshooting
415
30.10 Video troubleshooting
Problems with the video inputs and their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
No signal message on screen Cable or connection fault (video image not displayed)
Check that the connections are sound and free from corrosion.
416
a Series / c Series / e Series
30.11 Wi-Fi troubleshooting
Aspects of the installation can cause problems with the data shared between wireless devices. Such problems, their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
No wireless connection.
Tablet / smartphone does not have a wireless connection established with the multifunction display.
Ensure that Wi-Fi is enabled on the multifunction display (Homescreen: > Set-Up > System Settings > Wireless Connections > Wi-Fi > On).
Ensure that the "Wi-Fi" option is enabled on the iPhone (available from the phone's Settings menu).
Ensure that the Raymarine connection is selected as the Wi-Fi network. If a passcode has been specified for the multifunction display's Wi-Fi connection ensure that the same passcode is entered into the iPhone when prompted.
No Raymarine app on device.
Tablet / smartphone does not have Raymarine app installed and running.
Download the required Raymarine app from the relevant application store.
Start the Raymarine app on your device.
Raymarine app runs slowly or not at all.
No waypoint / routes synchronization with Navionics Marine app.
Mobile applications are NOT enabled on the multifunction display.
Enable "Viewing only" or "Remote Control" (Homescreen: > Set-Up > System Settings > Wireless Connections > Mobile Apps).
Device not compatible with Raymarine app.
Recommended device requirements:
· iOS Devices = Best performance achieved on iPhone 4 or later and iPad 2 or later.
· Android/Kindle Fire = Best performance achieved with 1GHz processor and better and running 2.2.2. or later.
MFD software incompatible with Ensure your MFD contains software application version
mobile application.
3.15 or later.
Smartphone / tablet does not have "Navionics Marine" app installed and running.
Download the "Navionics Marine" app from the relevant app store.
Start the "Navionics Marine" app on the device.
Weak or intermittent Wi-Fi signal.
Smartphone / tablet can no longer connect to the internet or receive e-mails after using a Raymarine mobile app.
Chart application is not running on the multifunction display. Interference from other wireless devices in the vicinity.
Device still connected to the multifunction display.
Start the chart application on the multifunction display.
Multiple wireless devices running simultaneously (such as laptops, phones, and other wireless devices) can sometimes cause wireless signal conflicts. Temporarily disable each wireless device in turn until you have identified the device causing the interference.
Ensure the access point on your device is switched back to your previous access point (e.g. the marina Wi-Fi).
Troubleshooting
417
30.12 Bluetooth troubleshooting
Aspects of the installation can cause problems with the data shared between wireless devices. Such problems, their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
No wireless connection.
iPhone does not have a Bluetooth connection established with the multifunction display.
Ensure that Bluetooth is enabled on the multifunction display ( Homescreen: > Set-Up > System Settings > Connections > Bluetooth > On).
Ensure that the "Bluetooth" option is enabled on the iPhone (available from the phone's Settings / General menu).
Ensure that the Bluetooth device is paired with the multifunction display that you want to use it with. To do this: Homescreen: > Set-Up > System Settings > Connections > New Bluetooth Connection.
No media player control.
Media player device is not compatible with the Bluetooth 2.1+ EDR power class 1.5 (supported profile: AVRCP 1.0) or higher.
Check the Bluetooth compatibility with the device manufacturer. If the device is not Bluetooth 2.1+ EDR power class 1.5 (supported profile: AVRCP 1.0) compatible then it is not suitable for wireless use with the multifunction display.
"Audio Control" is NOT enabled Enable "Audio Control" ( Homescreen: > Set-Up > on the multifunction display. System Settings > Connections > Connections
Manager > Audio Control > On).
Weak or intermittent Bluetooth signal.
Interference from other wireless devices in the vicinity.
Multiple wireless devices running simultaneously (such as laptops, phones, and other wireless devices) can sometimes cause wireless signal conflicts. Temporarily disable each wireless device in turn until you have identified the device causing the interference.
418
a Series / c Series / e Series
30.13 Touchscreen troubleshooting
Problems with the touchscreen and their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
Touchscreen does not operate Touch lock is enabled. as expected.
Use the Joystick to turn off the touch lock on the home screen.
Screen is not being operated with bare fingers, for example gloves are being worn.
Bare fingers must make contact with the screen for correct operation. Alternatively you may use conductive gloves.
Touchscreen requires calibration.
Use the setup menus to calibrate the touchscreen.
Saltwater deposits on the screen.
Carefully clean and dry the screen in accordance with the instructions provided.
Troubleshooting
419
30.14 Touchscreen alignment
If the touchscreen is misaligned to your touch, you can realign it to improve the accuracy.
Realignment involves a simple exercise to align an on-screen object with your touch. For best results, perform this exercise when your vessel is anchored or moored.
Note: This only applies to touchscreen multifunction displays.
Aligning the touchscreen
With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select Maintenance. 3. Select Touchscreen Alignment. 4. Place your finger over the on-screen object
momentarily, then remove it. 5. Repeat the action a further 3 times. 6. If the operation was successful, an "Alignment
Completed" message is displayed. 7. Select Exit to return to the Maintenance menu. 8. If the operation was unsuccessful at any point
during the alignment exercise, an "Incorrect touch detected" message is displayed, the alignment exercise is repeated. 9. After 2 failed alignment exercises you may be asked to perform a precision alignment exercise.
420
a Series / c Series / e Series
30.15 Miscellaneous troubleshooting
Miscellaneous problems and their possible causes and solutions are described here.
Problem
Possible causes
Possible solutions
Display behaves erratically:
· Frequent unexpected resets. · System crashes or other
erratic behavior.
Intermittent problem with power to the display.
Check relevant fuses and breakers.
Check that the power supply cable is sound and that all connections are tight and free from corrosion.
Check that the power source is of the correct voltage and sufficient current.
Software mismatch on system Go to www.raymarine.com and click on support for the
(upgrade required).
latest software downloads.
Corrupt data / other unknown issue.
Perform a factory reset.
Important: This will result in the loss of any settings and data (such as waypoints) stored on the product. Save any important data to a memory card before resetting.
Troubleshooting
421
422
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 31: Technical specification
Chapter contents · 31.1 a Series on page 424 · 31.2 c and e Series on page 428
Technical specification
423
31.1 a Series
a6x Physical specifications
Dimensions
· Width: 163.57 mm (6.44 in)
· Height (NOT including bracket): 143.47 mm (5.65 in)
· Height (including bracket): 162.72 mm (6.41 in)
· Depth (NOT including cables): 74.1 mm
· Depth (including cables): 167.5 mm (6.6 in)
Weight (bare unit)
0.715 kg (1.58 lbs)
a7x Physical specifications
Dimensions
· Width: 205.1 mm (8 in)
· Height (NOT including bracket): 147.1 mm (5.8 in)
· Height (including bracket): 163.3 mm (6.4 in)
· Depth (NOT including cables): 73.6 mm (2.9 in)
· Depth (including cables): 164.5 mm (6.48 in)
Weight (bare unit) 0.715 kg (1.58 lbs)
a9x Physical specifications
Dimensions
· Width: 250.1 mm (9.8 in.)
· Height (NOT including bracket): 189.5 mm (7.5 in.)
· Height (including bracket): 198.26 mm (7.8 in.)
· Depth (NOT including cables): 82.6 mm (3.3 in.)
· Depth (including cables): 164.5 mm (6.5 in.)
Weight (bare unit)
2.31 kg (5 lbs)
a12x Physical specifications
Dimensions
· Width: 318 mm (12.5 in.)
· Height (NOT including bracket): 238.3 mm (9.4 in.)
· Height (including bracket): 248.14 mm (9.8 in.)
· Depth (NOT including cables): 84.1 mm (3.3 in.)
· Depth (including cables): 164.5 mm (6.5 in.)
Weight (bare unit)
3.68 kg (8.1 lbs)
a6x Power specification
Nominal supply voltage 12 V dc
Operating voltage range 10.8 V dc to 15.6 V dc
Fuse / Breakers
It is recommended that you fit a thermal breaker or fuse at the distribution panel. The suitable fuse rating for the thermal breaker is dependent on the number of devices you are connecting. If in doubt consult an authorized Raymarine dealer
Power consumption
Full brightness:
· a65 -- 8.6 W Max
· a67 -- 12.2 W Max
· a68 -- 8.5 W Max
PowerSave mode:
· a65 -- 3.8 W Max
· a67 -- 7.4 W Max
· a68 -- 4.9 W Max
Note: Power consumption figures represent a loaded system; for sonar variants this includes an active 600 W transducer and DownVisionTM variants includes an active CPT-100 transducer.
LEN (Refer to Seatalkng
1
reference manual for further
information).
a7x Power specification Nominal supply voltage 12 V dc Operating voltage range 10.8 V dc to 15.6 V dc
424
a Series / c Series / e Series
Fuse / Breakers Power consumption
It is recommended that you fit a thermal breaker or fuse at the distribution panel. The suitable fuse rating for the thermal breaker is dependent on the number of devices you are connecting. If in doubt consult an authorized Raymarine dealer
Full brightness:
· a75 -- 7.7 W Max
· a77 -- 13.2 W Max
· a78 -- 9.9 W Max
PowerSave mode:
· a75 -- 3.1 W Max
· a77 -- 8.2 W Max
· a78 -- 5.2 W Max
Note: Power consumption figures represent a loaded system; for sonar variants this includes an active 600 W transducer and DownVisionTM variants includes an active CPT-100 transducer.
LEN (Refer to Seatalkng
1
reference manual for further
information).
a9x Power specification
Nominal supply voltage 12 V / 24 V dc
Operating voltage range 10.8 V dc to 31.2 V dc
In-line Fuse
· 7 A (Standard 20 mm glass fuse)
Power consumption
Full brightness:
· a95 -- 13.8 W Max
· a97 -- 15.1 W Max
· a98 -- 15 W Max
PowerSave mode:
· a95 -- 5.0 W Max
· a97 -- 7.3 W Max
· a98 -- 5.7 W Max
LEN (Refer to Seatalkng
1
reference manual for further
information).
Note: Power consumption figures represent a loaded system; for sonar variants this includes an active 600 W transducer and DownVisionTM variants includes an active CPT-100 transducer.
Technical specification
a12x Power specification
Nominal supply voltage 12 V / 24 V dc
Operating voltage range 10.8 V dc to 31.2 V dc
In-line Fuse
· 7 A (Standard 20 mm glass fuse)
Power consumption
Full brightness:
· a125 -- 23 W Max
· a127 -- 23.9 W Max
· a128 -- 24.3 W Max
PowerSave mode:
· a125 -- 5.2 W Max
· a127 -- 7.4 W Max
· a128 -- 6.7 W Max
LEN (Refer to Seatalkng
1
reference manual for further
information).
Note: Power consumption figures represent a loaded system; for sonar variants this includes an active 600 W transducer and DownVisionTM variants includes an active CPT-100 transducer.
Environmental specification
Environmental specifications below apply to all display variants
Operating temperature
-25 ºC to +55 ºC (-13 ºF to 131 ºF)
Storage temperature
-30 ºC to +70 ºC (-22 ºF to 158 ºF)
Relative humidity
Maximum 75%
Waterproof rating
· IPX6 and IPX7
· IPX6 (e165 only)
Viewing angle
000
00000
000
00000
A
B
C
000
00000
000
D
000
D12576-1
a6x
a7x
a9x
a12x
A
60º
75º
80º
80º
(Right)
B (Left) 60º
75º
80º
80º
C (Up) 60º
70º
80º
80º
D
50º
75º
80º
80º
(Down)
425
Note: The viewing angles stated above were taken using internationally agreed standards and should be used for comparison purposes only. Do NOT install the product before testing its viewability in the desired location.
Wireless connections
Wi-Fi
802.11 b / g
Bluetooth
Bluetooth 2.1 + EDR power class 1.5 (supported profile: AVRCP 1.0)
a Series Display specification
a6x
a7x
a9x
a12x
Size
5.7 in 7 in
9.0 in 12.1 in
Type
TFT
TFT
TFT
TFT
backlit backlit backlit backlit
LED
LED
LED
LED
Color depth
24bit
24bit
24bit
24bit
Resolution
640 x 480 800 x 480 800 x 480 1280
VGA
WVGA WVGA x 800
WXGA
Aspect 4:3
16:9
16:9
16:9
Maxi- 5
6
6
6
mum al-
lowable
wrongly
illumi-
nated
pixels
a6x and a7x Data connections
Wired connections NMEA 2000 Network (SeaTalkhs)
1 x SeaTalkng® connection
1 x RayNet type SeaTalkhs port. 10/100 Mbits/s
Internal GPS specification
The Internal GPS specification applies to the following MFDs a Series (excluding a9x and a12x), c Series and e Series (excluding the e165).
Channels
50
Cold start
<2 minutes
Refresh rate
5 Hz
Receiver IC Sensitivity
163 dBm Tracking
Satellite Based Aiding System (SBAS)
WAAS + EGNOS + MSAS
Special features
Active Jamming Reduction
Operating frequency
1575.42MHz
Signal Acquisition
Automatic
Almanac Update
Automatic
Geodetic Datum
WGS-84, alternatives available through Raymarine displays.
Update Rate
1 second
Antenna
Ceramic chip
Accuracy
· Without SBAS: <= 15 metres 95% of the time
· With SBAS: <= 5 metres 95% of the time
Wireless connections Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
802.11 b / g
Note: Wi-Fi connection only applies to Wi-Fi variant displays.
Bluetooth 2.1 + EDR power class 1.5 (supported profile: AVRCP 1.0)
a9x and a12x Data connections
Wired connections
NMEA 0183
· NMEA port 1: Input and output, 4800 / 38400 baud rates
· NMEA port 2: Input only, 4800 / 38400 baud rates
NMEA 2000
1 x SeaTalkng® connection
Network (SeaTalkhs)
2 x RayNet type SeaTalkhs port. 10/100 Mbits/s
GA150
1 x TNC type external GPS / GLONASS antenna connection
Video input
1 x BNC type video input connection
426
Internal GNSS (GPS / GLONASS) receiver specification
Channels
72
Cold start
<2 minutes
Receiver IC Sensitivity
167 dBm (Tracking) / 148 dBm (Acquisition)
GNSS compatibility
· GPS · GLONASS
· * Beidou
SBAS compatibility
· WAAS · EGNOS
· MSAS
Special features
Active Jamming and Interference Reduction
Operating frequency
· GPS L1 C/A · GLONASS L10F
· Beidou B1
Signal Acquisition Automatic
Almanac Update Automatic
a Series / c Series / e Series
Geodetic Datum Refresh Rate Antenna
Position Accuracy
WGS-84 (alternatives available through Raymarine MFD)
10 Hz (10 times per second Concurrent GNSS)
· Internal -- Ceramic chip mounted near top of unit
· External -- GA150 external antenna may be used
· Without SBAS: <= 15 metres 95% of the time
· With SBAS: <= 5 metres 95% of the time
Note: * Supported but not currently available. A software update will be required to add support for this GNSS when it becomes available. A GA150 must be connected to receive Beidou. Please check with your Raymarine dealer for further details.
Internal sonar specification
The internal sonar specifications only apply to sonar variant multifunction display variants.
Operating frequencies
50 / 83 / 200 KHz
Transmit power
Up to 600 W RMS, depending on transducer
Depth range
Up to 3000 ft, depending on transducer
Internal storage
Multifunction displays (MFDs) include internal storage that can be used to store recorded video and photos taken using the Camera application. The table below shows the approximate available internal storage space for LightHouse powered MFDs.
MFD variant
Approximate
Approximate
available internal record time
storage
(CAM200IP)
a Series
2 GB
88.8 minutes
c Series
2 GB
88.8 minutes
e Series
2 GB
(excluding e165)
88.8 minutes
e165
6 GB
266.6 minutes
gS Series
14 GB
622.2 minutes
Note:
· The available internal storage stated above is based on MFD manufactured after May 2014. Available storage on displays manufactured prior to this date may vary.
· Available internal storage space is subject to change without prior notice.
· The approximate record times stated above were taken using a CAM200IP set to its default resolution of 720p. Increasing image resolution and other factors such as lighting conditions may affect the resulting filesize and therefor reduce the available record time.
Sonar / DownVisionTM specification
The following specification only applies to DownVisionTM products.
Channels
2 x CHIRP (1 x sonar and 1 x DownVisionTM)
Beam coverage
· Sonar -- conical beam.
· DownVisionTM -- Wide (port / starboard) and thin (fore / aft) fan beam.
Depth
Typical depth performance of 183 m (600 ft). Applies to both Sonar and DownVisionTM channels.
a9x and a12x Video specification
Signal type
Composite
Format
PAL or NTSC
Connector type
BNC (female)
Output resolution
720p
Electronic chart specification
Embedded electronic · LightHouse Charts world base
charts
map.
· Navionics world base map.
Compatible LightHouse charts
· Vector -- LightHouse charts · Raster -- LightHouse charts
Compatible Navionics chart cards
· Navionics Ready to Navigate · Navionics Silver · Navionics Gold
· Navionics Gold+
· Navionics Platinum
· Navionics Platinum+
· Navionics Fish'N Chip
· Navionics Hotmaps
Note:
Refer to the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com) for the latest list of supported charts.
Technical specification
427
Conformance specification
Conformance certification applies to all display variants
Conformance
· NMEA 2000 certification
· WiFi Alliance certification
· Bluetooth certification
· Europe: 1999/5/EC
· Australia and New Zealand: C-Tick, Compliance Level 2
· FCC 47CFR part 15
· Industry Canada RSS210
31.2 c and e Series
e7 / e7D Physical specifications
Dimensions
· Width: 233 mm (9.17 in.)
· Height (NOT including bracket): 145 mm (5.71 in.)
· Height (including bracket): 180 mm (7.09 in.)
· Depth (NOT including cables): 64 mm (2.52 in.)
· Depth (including cables): 160 mm (6.29 in.)
Weight (bare unit)
e7
· 1.465 kg (3.23 lb.)
e7D
· 1.550 kg (3.42 lb.)
Weight (boxed unit)
e7
· 2.385 kg (5.26 lb.)
e7D
· 2.423 kg (5.34 lb.)
e95 / e97 / c95 / c97 Physical specifications
Dimensions
· Width: 290 mm (11.42 in.)
· Height (NOT including bracket): 173 mm (6.81 in.)
· Height (including bracket): 212 mm (8.35 in.)
· Depth (NOT including cables): 64 mm (2.52 in.)
· Depth (including cables): 160 mm (6.29 in.)
Weight (bare unit)
e95 / c95
· 2.165 kg (4.77 lb.)
e97 / c97
· 2.265 kg (4.99 lb.)
Weight (boxed unit)
e95 / c95
· 3.540 kg (7.8 lb.)
e97 / c97
· 3.635 kg (8 lb.)
428
a Series / c Series / e Series
e125 / e127 / c125 / c127 Physical specifications
Dimensions
· Width: 354 mm (13.94 in.)
· Height (NOT including bracket): 222 mm (8.74 in.)
· Height (including bracket): 256 mm (10.08 in.)
· Depth (NOT including cables): 69 mm (2.72 in.)
· Depth (including cables): 160 mm (6.29 in.)
Weight (bare unit)
e125 / c125
· 3.320 kg (7.32 lb.)
e127 / c127
· 3.450 kg (7.6 lb.)
Weight (boxed unit)
e125 / c125
· 4.955 kg (10.9 lb.)
e127 / c127
· 5.070 kg (11.18 lb.)
e165 Physical specifications
Dimensions
· Width: 426 mm (16.8 in)
· Height (NOT including bracket): 281.4 mm (11.1 in)
· Height (including bracket): 295 mm (11.6 in)
· Depth (NOT including cables): 68.4 mm (2.7 in)
· Depth (including cables): 176.6 mm (7 in)
Weight (bare unit) 5.6 kg (12.3lb)
e7 / e7D Power specification
Nominal supply voltage 12 V dc
Operating voltage range 10.8 V dc to 15.6 V dc
Fuse / Breakers
In-line fuse (fitted within power cable)
· 7 A. (Standard 20 mm glass fuse)
Power consumption
Full brightness:
· e7 -- 10 W
· e7D -- 13.8 W
PowerSave mode:
· e7 -- 4.3 W
· e7D -- 10.3 W
Note: Power consumption figures represent a loaded system and for sonar variants include an active 600 W transducer.
LEN (Refer to Seatalkng
1
reference manual for further
information).
c95 / c97 / e95 / e97 power specification
Nominal supply voltage 12/24 V dc
Operating voltage range 10.8 V dc to 31.2 V dc
Fuse / Breakers
In-line fuse (fitted within power cable)
· 7 A. (Standard 20 mm glass fuse)
Power consumption
Full brightness:
· c95 -- 13.1 W
· c97 -- 16.7 W
· e95 -- 18 W
· e97 -- 22.1 W
PowerSave mode:
· c95 --5.9 W
· c97 -- 9.7 W
· e95 -- 11.2 W
· e97 -- 14.9 W
Note: Power consumption figures represent a loaded system and for sonar variants include an active 600 W transducer.
LEN (Refer to Seatalkng
1
reference manual for further
information).
c125 / c127 / e125 / e127 power specification Nominal supply voltage 12/24 V dc Operating voltage range 10.8 V dc to 31.2 V dc
Technical specification
429
Fuse / Breakers Power consumption
In-line fuse (fitted within power cable)
· 7 A. (Standard 20 mm glass fuse)
Full brightness:
· c125 -- 16.3 W
· c127 -- 20.8 W
· e125 -- 27.6 W
· e127 -- 33.5 W
PowerSave mode:
· c125 --6.1 W
· c127 -- 14.6 W
· e125 -- 10.9 W
· e127 -- 17 W
Note: Power consumption figures represent a loaded system and for sonar variants include an active 600 W transducer.
LEN (Refer to Seatalkng
1
reference manual for further
information).
e165 power specification
Nominal supply 12/24 V dc voltage
Operating voltage range
10.8 V dc to 31.2 V dc
Fuse / Breakers In-line fuse (fitted within power cable)
· 7 A. (Standard 20 mm glass fuse)
Power consumption
Full brightness: · e165 -- 59.5 W
PowerSave mode:
· e165 -- 10.9 W
Note: Power consumption figures represent a loaded system and for sonar variants include an active 600 W transducer.
LEN (Refer
1
to Seatalkng
reference manual
for further
information).
430
Environmental specification
Environmental specifications below apply to all display variants
Operating temperature
-25 ºC to +55 ºC (-13 ºF to 131 ºF)
Storage temperature
-30 ºC to +70 ºC (-22 ºF to 158 ºF)
Relative humidity
Maximum 75%
Waterproof rating
· IPX6 and IPX7
· IPX6 (e165 only)
000
000000
Viewing angle
000
000000
A
B
000000
C
000
000
000000
000
D
000
D12268-1
e125 /
e7 / e7D
e95 / e97 / e127 / c95 / c97 c125 /
e165
c127
A
70º
80º
80º
80º
B
70º
80º
80º
80º
C
70º
80º
80º
70º
D
50º
60º
60º
70º
Note: The viewing angles stated above were taken using internationally agreed standards and should be used for comparison purposes only. Do NOT install the product before testing the viewability in the desired location.
e7 / e7D Display specification
Size
7 in.
Type
TFT backlit LED
Color depth
24bit
Resolution
800 x 480 pixels (WVGA)
Maximum allowable
7
wrongly illuminated pixels
e95 / e97 / c95 / c97 Display specification
Size
9 in.
Type
TFT backlit LED
Color depth
24bit
Resolution
800 x 480 pixels (WVGA)
Maximum allowable
8
wrongly illuminated pixels
a Series / c Series / e Series
e125 / e127 / c125 / c127 Display specification
Size
12 in.
Type
TFT backlit LED
Color depth
24bit
Resolution
1280 x 800 pixels (WXGA)
Maximum allowable
8
wrongly illuminated pixels
Almanac Update Geodetic Datum
Update Rate Antenna Accuracy
Automatic
WGS-84, alternatives available through Raymarine displays.
1 second
Ceramic chip
· Without SBAS: <= 15 metres 95% of the time
e165 Display specification
Size
15.4 in.
· With SBAS: <= 5 metres 95% of the time
Type Color depth Resolution
TFT backlit LED 24bit 1280 x 800 pixels (WXGA)
Internal sonar specification
The internal sonar specifications only apply to sonar variant multifunction display variants.
Aspect ratio
16:9
Operating frequencies
50 / 83 / 200 KHz
Maximum allowable 8 wrongly illuminated pixels
c Series and e Series data connections
Transmit power Depth range
Up to 600 W RMS, depending on transducer
Up to 3000 ft, depending on transducer
Wired connections
NMEA 0183
2x NMEA 0183 ports:
Video specification Signal type
Composite
· NMEA port 1: Input and output, 4800 / 38400 baud
· NMEA port 2: Input only, 4800 / 38400 baud
Format Connector type Output resolution
PAL or NTSC BNC (female) 720p
NMEA 2000 Network (SeaTalkhs)
1 x SeaTalkng® connection
· e7 and e7D = 1 x RayNet type SeaTalkhs port. 10/100 Mbits/s
· c Series and e Series (excluding e7 and e7D) = 2x RayNet type SeaTalkhs port. 10/100 Mbits/s
Internal storage
Multifunction displays (MFDs) include internal storage that can be used to store recorded video and photos taken using the Camera application. The table below shows the approximate available internal storage space for LightHouse powered MFDs.
Wireless connections
Wi-Fi
802.11 b / g
Bluetooth
Bluetooth 2.1+ EDR power class 1.5 (supported profile: AVRCP 1.0)
MFD variant a Series c Series
Approximate available internal storage
2 GB
2 GB
Approximate record time (CAM200IP)
88.8 minutes
88.8 minutes
Internal GPS specification
The Internal GPS specification applies to the following MFDs a Series (excluding a9x and a12x), c Series and e Series (excluding the e165).
e Series (excluding e165)
e165
gS Series
2 GB
6 GB 14 GB
88.8 minutes
266.6 minutes 622.2 minutes
Channels
50
Cold start
<2 minutes
Refresh rate
5 Hz
Receiver IC Sensitivity
163 dBm Tracking
Satellite Based Aiding System (SBAS) Special features Operating frequency Signal Acquisition
WAAS + EGNOS + MSAS
Active Jamming Reduction 1575.42MHz Automatic
Technical specification
431
Note:
· The available internal storage stated above is based on MFD manufactured after May 2014. Available storage on displays manufactured prior to this date may vary.
· Available internal storage space is subject to change without prior notice.
· The approximate record times stated above were taken using a CAM200IP set to its default resolution of 720p. Increasing image resolution and other factors such as lighting conditions may affect the resulting filesize and therefor reduce the available record time.
Electronic chart specification
Embedded electronic · LightHouse Charts world base
charts
map.
· Navionics world base map.
Compatible LightHouse charts
· Vector -- LightHouse charts · Raster -- LightHouse charts
Compatible Navionics chart cards
· Navionics Ready to Navigate · Navionics Silver · Navionics Gold
· Navionics Gold+
· Navionics Platinum
· Navionics Platinum+
· Navionics Fish'N Chip
· Navionics Hotmaps
Note:
Refer to the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com) for the latest list of supported charts.
Conformance specification
Conformance certification applies to all display variants
Conformance
· NMEA 2000 certification
· WiFi Alliance certification
· Bluetooth certification
· Europe: 1999/5/EC
· Australia and New Zealand: C-Tick, Compliance Level 2
· FCC 47CFR part 15
· Industry Canada RSS210
432
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 32: Technical support
Chapter contents · 32.1 Raymarine customer support on page 434 · 32.2 Learning resources on page 434 · 32.3 Third-party support on page 435
Technical support
433
32.1 Raymarine customer support
32.2 Learning resources
Raymarine provides a comprehensive customer support service. You can contact customer support through the Raymarine website, telephone and e-mail. If you are unable to resolve a problem, please use any of these facilities to obtain additional help.
Raymarine has produced a range of learning resources to help you get the most out of your products.
Video tutorials
Web support
Please visit the customer support area of our website at:
www.raymarine.com
Raymarine official channel on YouTube:
· http://www.youtube.com/user/RaymarineInc
This contains Frequently Asked Questions, servicing information, e-mail access to the Raymarine Technical Support Department and details of worldwide Raymarine agents.
Telephone and e-mail support In the USA: · Tel: +1 603 324 7900 · Toll Free: +1 800 539 5539 · E-mail: support@raymarine.com In the UK, Europe, and the Middle East: · Tel: +44 (0)13 2924 6777 · E-mail: ukproduct.support@raymarine.com In Southeast Asia and Australia: · Tel: +61 (0)29479 4800 · E-mail: aus.support@raymarine.com
Product information If you need to request service, please have the following information to hand: · Product name. · Product identity. · Serial number. · Software application version. · System diagrams. You can obtain this product information using the menus within your product.
Viewing product information With the homescreen displayed: 1. Select Set-up. 2. Select Maintenance. 3. Select Diagnostics. 4. Select Select Device. 5. Select the relevant product from the list. 6. Select Show All Data.
Video Gallery: · http://www.rayma-
rine.co.uk/view/?id=2679
Product Support videos: · http://www.rayma-
rine.co.uk/view/?id=4952
Note: · Viewing the videos requires a device with an
Internet connection. · Some videos are only available in English.
Training courses Raymarine regularly runs a range of in-depth training courses to help you make the most of your products. Visit the Training section of the Raymarine website for more information: · http://www.raymarine.co.uk/view/?id=2372
FAQs and Knowledge Base Raymarine has produced an extensive set of FAQs and a Knowledge Base to help you find more information and troubleshoot any issues. · http://www.raymarine.co.uk/knowledgebase/
Technical support forum You can use the Technical support forum to ask a technical question about a Raymarine product or to find out how other customers are using their Raymarine equipment. The resource is regularly updated with contributions from Raymarine customers and staff: · http://raymarine.ning.com/
434
a Series / c Series / e Series
32.3 Third-party support
Contact and support details for third-party suppliers can be found on the appropriate websites.
Fusion www.fusionelectronics.com
Navionics www.navionics.com
Sirius www.sirius.com
Technical support
435
436
a Series / c Series / e Series
Chapter 33: Spares and accessories
Chapter contents · 33.1 Digital ClearPulse Transducers and accessories on page 438 · 33.2 DownVisionTM transducers and accessories on page 439 · 33.3 Network hardware on page 439 · 33.4 Network cable connector types on page 440 · 33.5 RayNet to RayNet cables and connectors on page 442 · 33.6 Network cable types on page 443 · 33.7 SeaTalkng cabling components on page 443 · 33.8 SeaTalkng cables and accessories on page 444 · 33.9 SeaTalk accessories on page 445 · 33.10 e9 and e12 Video cables on page 445 · 33.11 a Series spares on page 446 · 33.12 c Series and e Series spares on page 446
Spares and accessories
437
33.1 Digital ClearPulse Transducers and accessories
The transducers listed below can be connected directly to sonar variant MFDs.
Depth transducers Part number Image A80170
Mounting In-Hull
Housing P79
Part number Image A80215
A80216
Mounting Thru-hull
Housing
SS60 (600W, 12° angle)
Thru-hull
SS60 (600W, 20° angle)
Depth and Temperature transducers
Part number Image
Mounting Housing
A80150
Transom P48
A102140
Transom
P48 (widebeam)
Depth, Speed and Temperature (DST) transducers
Part number Image
Mounting Housing
A66090
Thru-hull
B744V (including fairing block)
A102138
Transom P58
E66073 A80171 E66087 E66088
In-hull /
P74
Trolling
Thru-hull -- P319 Low profile
Thru-hull
B60 (20° angle)
Thru-hull
B60 (12° angle)
Accessories
Part number Item
Notes
A62363
1 m (3.28 ft) Minn Kota transducer adaptor cable
Only for direct connection to sonar variant multifunction display.
E66066
0.5 m (1.64 ft) transducer adaptor cable for DSM transducers
For connecting any 600 watt sonar module-compatible sonar transducer directly to a sonar variant multifunction display.
E66074
3 m (9.84 ft.) transducer extension cable
A80172
Thru-hull B258
A80173 A80214
438
Thru-hull -- B164 Low profile
Thru-hull
SS60 (600W, 0° angle)
a Series / c Series / e Series
33.2 DownVisionTM transducers and accessories
The transducers listed below can be connected directly to DownVisionTM variant MFDs.
Depth and temperature transducers
Part number Image
Mounting Housing
A80270
Transom
CPT-100 plastic
A80277
Thru-hull
CPT-110 plastic
A80271
Thru-hull
CPT-120 bronze
33.3 Network hardware
Item HS5 RayNet network switch
RJ45 SeaTalkhs network switch
Part number
Notes
A80007
5port switch for network connection of multiple devices featuring RayNet connectors. Equipment with RJ45 SeaTalkhs connectors can also be connected using suitable adapter cables.
E55058
8port switch for network connection of multiple SeaTalkhs devices featuring RJ45 connectors.
Part number Description
Notes
A80207
Transom transducer shield for vessels with a trolling motor
A80273
4 m (13.12 ft) transducer extension cable for CPT-100, CPT-110 and CPT-120 transducers
RJ45 SeaTalkhs crossover coupler
E55060
· Enables direct connection of RJ45 SeaTalkhs devices to smaller systems where a switch is not required.
· Enables the connection of RJ45 SeaTalkhs devices to a HS5 RayNet network switch (in conjunction with suitable adapter cables).
· Enables 2 RJ45 SeaTalkhs cables to be connected together to extend the length of the cabling.
Recommended for internal installations.
Important: Do NOT use crossover devices for POE (Power Over Ethernet) connections.
Ethernet RJ45 coupler
R32142
· Enables direct connection of RJ45 SeaTalkhs devices to smaller systems where a switch is not required.
· Enables the connection of RJ45 SeaTalkhs devices to a HS5 RayNet network switch (in conjunction with suitable adapter cables).
· Enables 2 RJ45 SeaTalkhs cables to be connected together to extend the length of the cabling.
Recommended for external installations.
Spares and accessories
439
33.4 Network cable connector types
There are 2 types of network cable connector -- SeaTalkhs and RayNet.
SeaTalkhs connector -- used for connecting SeaTalkhs devices to a Raymarine network switch via SeaTalkhs cables.
RayNet connector -- used for connecting Raymarine network switches and SeaTalkhs devices to the multifunction display via RayNet cables. Also required for connecting a crossover coupler if only one device is being connected to the display's Network connector.
440
a Series / c Series / e Series
RayNet to RJ45 adapter cables
1 2 3
400 mm (1.3 ft)
A80160
100 mm (3.9 in)
A80247
400 mm (1.3 ft)
A80272
3 m (9.84 ft)
4
A80276
1 m (3.28 ft) 3 m (9.84 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft)
5
A62360 A80151 A80159
D13158-1
Description
Typical use
Quantity
1
Adapter cable with a RayNet (female) A typical use for this adapter cable is to connect a DSM300 1
socket on one end, and a waterproof sonar module to a LightHouse MFD, using all-waterproof
(female) socket on the other end
cable connections. This adapter cable will also accept the
accepting the following cables with an following RJ45 SeaTalkhs cables, although the RJ45 plug
RJ45 SeaTalkhs waterproof locking that connects at the equipment end (e.g. DSM300) will NOT
(male) plug:
be waterproof:
· A62245 (1.5 m).
· E55049 (1.5 m).
· A62246 (15 m).
· E55050 (5 m).
· E55051 (10 m).
· A62135 (15 m).
· E55052 (20 m).
2
Adapter cable with a RayNet (female) Directly connect a Raymarine radar scanner with an RJ45 1
socket on one end, and a waterproof SeaTalkhs (male) cable to a RayNet network switch (e.g.
(female) RJ45 socket on the other HS5) or LightHouse MFD.
end, along with a locking gland for a
watertight fit.
3
Adapter cable with a RayNet (male) Connect a legacy G-Series GPM-400, C-Series Widescreen 1
plug on one end, and an RJ45
or E-Series Widescreen MFD to a Raymarine radar scanner
SeaTalkhs waterproof (male) plug on supplied with a RayNet power / data cable.
the other end.
4
Adapter cable with a RayNet (female) Connect a legacy G-Series GPM-400, C-Series Widescreen 1
socket on one end, and an RJ45 or E-Series Widescreen MFD to a RayNet network switch
SeaTalkhs waterproof (male) plug on (e.g. the HS5).
the other end.
5
Adapter cable with a RayNet (female) Connect a LightHouse MFD to a legacy SR6 switch /
1
socket on one end, and an RJ45 weather receiver or a legacy 8port SeaTalkhs network
SeaTalkhs (female) socket on the switch. Another common use for the cable is in conjunction
other end.
with a crossover coupler (E55060 or R32142) to connect
Raymarine products with an RJ45 connection (e.g. radar
scanner, thermal camera or DSM300) to a LightHouse MFD
or RayNet network switch (e.g. the HS5).
Spares and accessories
441
33.5 RayNet to RayNet cables and connectors
1 400 mm (1.3 ft) 2 m (6.56 ft) 5 m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
A80161 A62361 A80005 A62362 A80006
2
R70014
3
A80262
4
100 mm (3.9 in)
A80162
D13160-1
Description
Typical use
Quantity
1
Standard RayNet connection cable Suitable for connecting all RayNet equipment directly to 1
with a RayNet (female) socket on both LightHouse multifunction displays featuring a RayNet
ends.
connector. Can also be used to connect RayNet equipment
via a RayNet network switch (e.g. HS5).
2
RayNet cable puller (5 pack).
These "handles" securely attach to the twist-lock on RayNet 5 cables, enabling you to pull the cables through conduits and other obstacles.
3
RayNet to RayNet right-angle coupler Suitable for connecting RayNet cables at 90° (right angle) to 1
/ adapter.
devices, for installations where space is limited. For example,
use this adapter to connect a RayNet cable to a multifunction
display when there is not enough space behind the display for
the usual cable bend radius required by a standard RayNet
cable. This adapter features a RayNet (female) socket at
one end, and a RayNet (male) plug at the other end.
4
Adapter cable with a RayNet (male) Suitable for joining (female) RayNet cables together for
1
plug on both ends.
longer cable runs.
442
a Series / c Series / e Series
33.6 Network cable types
33.7 SeaTalkng cabling components
There are 2 types of SeaTalkhs network cable -- "patch" and "network".
· Patch -- for connecting the following devices to a Raymarine network switch:
Thermal camera via PoE injector.
Additional Raymarine network switch.
PC or laptop using Voyager planning software.
· Network -- for connecting the following devices to a Raymarine network switch:
Sonar Module.
SR100 Sirius weather receiver.
Additional compatible Raymarine multifunction displays.
SeaTalkhs network cables
Cable
Part number
1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable
E55049
5 m (16.4 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable
E55050
10 m (32.8 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable
E55051
20 m (65.6 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable
E55052
SeaTalkng cabling components and their purposes.
Connection / Cable
Notes
Backbone cable (various lengths)
The main cable carrying data. Spurs from the backbone are used to connect SeaTalkng devices.
T-piece connector
Used to make junctions in the backbone to which devices can then be connected.
Terminator
Required at either end of the backbone.
Inline terminator
Used to connect a spur cable directly to the end of a backbone; useful for longer cable runs.
Spur cable
Used to connect devices to the backbone. Devices may be daisy chained or connected directly to the T-pieces.
SeaTalkng 5way connector
Used to branch, split, or make additional connections in SeaTalk or SeaTalkng networks.
Blanking plug
Inserted into unused spur connector positions in a 5-way connector or T-piece.
SeaTalkhs patch cables
Cable
Part number
1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalkhs patch E06054 cable
5 m (16.4 ft) SeaTalkhs patch E06055 cable
10 m (32.8 ft) SeaTalkhs patch E06056 cable
15 m (49.2 ft) SeaTalkhs patch A62136 cable
20 m (65.6 ft) SeaTalkhs patch E06057 cable
Spares and accessories
443
33.8 SeaTalkng cables and accessories
SeaTalkng cables and accessories for use with compatible products.
Description
Part No Notes
SeaTalkng starter kit T70134 Includes:
· 1 x 5 Way connector (A06064)
· 2 x Backbone terminator (A06031)
· 1 x 3 m (9.8 ft) spur cable (A06040)
· 1 x Power cable (A06049)
SeaTalkng Backbone Kit
A25062
Includes:
· 2 x 5 m (16.4 ft) Backbone cable (A06036)
· 1 x 20 m (65.6 ft) Backbone cable (A06037)
· 4 x T-piece (A06028)
· 2 x Backbone terminator (A06031)
· 1 x Power cable (A06049)
SeaTalkng 0.4 m (1.3 ft) spur
A06038
SeaTalkng 1 m (3.3 ft) spur
A06039
SeaTalkng 3 m (9.8 ft) spur
A06040
SeaTalkng 5 m (16.4 ft) spur
A06041
SeaTalkng 0.4 m A06042 (1.3 ft) elbow spur
SeaTalkng 0.4 m A06033 (1.3 ft) backbone
SeaTalkng 1 m
A06034
(3.3 ft) backbone
SeaTalkng 3 m
A06035
(9.8 ft) backbone
SeaTalkng 5 m
A06036
(16.4 ft) backbone
SeaTalkng 9 m (29.5 ft) backbone SeaTalkng 20 m (65.6 ft) backbone
A06068 A06037
SeaTalkng to bare ends 1 m (3.3 ft) spur
A06043
SeaTalkng to bare ends 3 m (9.8 ft) spur
A06044
444
Description
SeaTalkng Power cable
SeaTalkng Terminator
SeaTalkng T-piece
Part No A06049 A06031 A06028
SeaTalkng 5way A06064 connector
SeaTalkng
A06030
backbone extender
SeaTalk to
E22158
SeaTalkng converter
kit
SeaTalkng Inline terminator
A80001
SeaTalkng Blanking plug
ACU / SPX SeaTalkng spur cable 0.3 m (1.0 ft)
SeaTalk (3 pin) to SeaTalkng adaptor cable 0.4 m (1.3 ft)
SeaTalk to SeaTalkng spur 1 m (3.3 ft) spur
SeaTalk2 (5 pin) to SeaTalkng adaptor cable 0.4 m (1.3 ft)
DeviceNet adaptor cable (Female)
A06032 R12112 A06047 A22164 A06048 A06045
DeviceNet adaptor A06046 cable (Male)
DeviceNet adaptor E05026 cable (Female) to bare ends.
DeviceNet adaptor E05027 cable (Male) to bare ends.
Notes
Provides 1 x spur connection Provides 3 x spur connections
Allows the connection of SeaTalk devices to a SeaTalkng system. Provides direct connection of a spur cable to the end of a backbone cable. No T-piece required.
Connects an SPX course computer or an ACU to a SeaTalkng backbone.
Allows the connection of NMEA 2000 devices to a SeaTalkng system. Allows the connection of NMEA 2000 devices to a SeaTalkng system. Allows the connection of NMEA 2000 devices to a SeaTalkng system. Allows the connection of NMEA 2000 devices to a SeaTalkng system.
a Series / c Series / e Series
33.9 SeaTalk accessories
SeaTalk cables and accessories for use with compatible products.
Description
Part No
Notes
3way SeaTalk D244 junction box
1 m (3.28 ft)
D284
SeaTalk extension
cable
3 m (9.8 ft) SeaTalk D285 extension cable
5 m (16.4 ft)
D286
SeaTalk extension
cable
9 m (29.5 ft)
D287
SeaTalk extension
cable
12 m (39.4 ft) E25051 SeaTalk extension cable
20 m (65.6 ft) D288 SeaTalk extension cable
33.10 e9 and e12 Video cables
The following video cable is required for the video in / out connector on the e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 variant multifunction displays.
Part number
Description
Notes
R70003
5 m (16.4 ft.) Video cable for e9 and e12 (1 x video in and 1 x video out VGA)
Spares and accessories
445
33.11 a Series spares
Item
a6x
Trunnion (bracket) mFrounnt t kit bezel (Gunmetal)
R70147 R70148
Front bezel (Black)
R70359
Suncover R70149
Power cable Straight 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
R70159
Power cable rightangled 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
A80221
Mounting R70197 screw kit
Part numbers
a7x
a9x
R70158 R70305
R70156 R70304
R70360 R70357
R70155 R70303 R70159 R62379
A80221 R70029
R70230
a12x R70309 R70308
R70358 R70307 R62379
R70029
33.12 c Series and e Series spares
Item
Trunnion (bracket) mount kit
Front bezel (Gunmetal)
Rear bezel (Gunmetal)
Front bezel (Black)
Suncover
Power and data cable Straight 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
Power and data cable Right-- angled 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
Mounting adaptor kit (Widescreen MFDs)
Mounting adaptor kit (Classic MFDs)
Mounting screw kit
Flush mount panel kit
e7 / e7D A62358 R62377 N/A R70361 R62365 R62379
R70029
N/A
N/A
R62369 R62376
Part numbers e12x /
e9x / c9x c12x R70001 R70002
R70004 R70006
R70027 R70028
R70362 R70363
R70005 R62379
R70007 R62379
R70029 R70029
R70008 R70009
R70010 R70011
N/A
N/A
R70079 R70080
e165 A80176 R70126 N/A R70364 R70127 R62379
R70029
N/A
N/A
N/A R70125
446
a Series / c Series / e Series
Appendix A Connectors and pinouts
Power, data, and video connector
4 1
9 8
10
2
7
11
3
6
5
D12186-1
Item
Identification
Connector type
Current source to network
Current sink from network
Remarks
PWR / NMEA / Video
11 pin twist-lock
No current sourced for external devices
· PSU: Main Power input.
· NMEA: No power required for interface.
· Video: No power required for interface.
Power, data and video cable cores and colors
Signal
Pin
AWG
Color
BATT+
2
16
Red
BATT-
7
16
Black
SCREEN 10
26
Black
NMEA1 TX+ 8
26
Yellow
NMEA1 TX- 9
26
Brown
NMEA1 RX+ 1
26
White
NMEA1 RX- 4
26
Green
NMEA2 RX+ 3
26
Orange /
White
NMEA2 RX- 11
26
Orange /
Green
VIDEO IN 6
RG179 coaxial
VIDEO RTN 5
Screen
Network connector
2 1
9 8
7
3 4
10 5
6
D12187-1
Pin Cable 1 White / Orange 2 Orange 3 Blue 4 White / Blue
Connectors and pinouts
Signal
Description
Ethernet (pair 2) Bi-directional Pair 2+
Ethernet (pair 2) Bi-directional Pair 2
Ethernet (pair 1) Bi-directional Pair 1+
Ethernet (pair 1) Bi-directional Pair 1
Pin Cable 5 White / Green 6 Green 7 White / Brown 8 Brown
9 Not connected 10 Foil
Signal
Description
Ethernet (pair 3) Bi-directional Pair 3+
Ethernet (pair 3) Bi-directional Pair 3
Ethernet (pair 4) Bi-directional Pair 4+
Ethernet (pair 4) Bi-directional Pair 4
Not connected Not connected
Shield
Isolated from 0V
Note: Use only Raymarine RayNet cables when connecting SeaTalkhs devices.
SeaTalkng connector
5
1
6
4
2
3
Item Identification Connector type Current source to network
Current sink from network
Remarks ST2/NMEA2000 STNG No current sourced for external devices <160mA (Interface drive only)
Pin
Signal
1
+12V
2
0V
3
Screen
4
CanH
5
CanL
6
SeaTalk (not connected)
Note: Use only Raymarine cables when connecting to SeaTalkng
Video in/out connector
Q JO !4 Q JO !3 Q JO !2
Q JO !6 Q JO !5 Q JO !: Q JO !9
Q JO !2 4
Q JO !2 3
Q JO !7 Q JO !8 Q JO !2 1 Q JO !2 2
Q JO !2 5
Q JO !2 6
PIN
Signal
`1
H-SYNC
2
V-SYNC
3
VSYNC 0V
447
PIN
Signal
4
DDC CLK
5
DDC DATA
6
BLUE RTN
7
BLUE
8
Not used
9
HSYNC 0V
10
GREEN RTN
11
GREEN
12
VIDEO IN2
13
VIDEO IN2 RTN
14
RED RTN
15
RED
448
a Series / c Series / e Series
Appendix B NMEA 0183 sentences
The display supports the following NMEA 0183 sentences. These are applicable to NMEA 0183 and SeaTalk protocols.
Sentence
Description
Transmit
Receive
AAM
Waypoint arrival alarm sentence
APB
Autopilot sentence `B'
BWC
Bearing and distance to waypoint
BWR
Bearing and distance to waypoint -- Rhumb
DBT
Depth below transducer
DPT
Depth
DSC
Digital selective calling information sentence
DSE
Distress sentence expansion
DTM
Datum reference sentence
GBS
GPS satellite fault detection data sentence
GGA
GPS System fix data
GLC
Geographic position loran C sentence
GLL
Geographic position latitude longitude
GSA
GPS DOP and active satellites
GSV
GPS satellites in view
HDG
Heading deviation and variation sentence
HDT
Heading true sentence
HDM
Heading magnetic sentence
MDA
Meteorological composite sentence
MSK
MSK receiver interface sentence
MSS
MSK receiver signal status sentence
MTW
Water temperature
MWV
Wind speed and angle
RMB
Recommended minimum navigation information
RMC
Recommended minimum specific GNSS data
RSD
Radar system data
TTM
Tracked target message
VHW
Water speed and heading
VLW
Distance travelled through the water
VTG
Course over ground and ground speed
XTE
Cross track error measured sentence
ZDA
Time and date
NMEA 0183 sentences
449
Appendix C NMEA data bridging
NMEA data bridging allows data that exists on the display's NMEA 2000 bus to be repeated to NMEA 0183 devices, and vice versa.
An example of NMEA data bridging is in a system that includes a third-party GPS receiver connected to the NMEA 0183 Input of a Raymarine display. The GPS data messages transmitted by the GPS receiver are repeated to any appropriate devices connected to the display's NMEA 2000 bus. Bridging only occurs when the data is being transmitted by an NMEA 0183 device that is not already being transmitted by a NMEA 2000 device, and vice versa.
For a list of data messages (PGN sentences) that are bridged between NMEA 2000 and NMEA 0183, refer to the list of supported NMEA 2000 sentences provided in this document.
450
a Series / c Series / e Series
Appendix D NMEA 2000 sentences
The display supports the following NMEA 2000 sentences. These are applicable to NMEA 2000, SeaTalkng and SeaTalk 2 protocols.
Message number
Message description
Transmit
Receive
Bridged to NMEA 0183
59392
ISO Acknowledgment
59904
ISO Request
60928
ISO Address Claim
126208
NMEA - Request group function
126464
PGN List Receive / Transmit PGN's Group
function
126992
System time
126996
Product information
126998
Configuration information
127237
Heading / Track Control
127245
Rudder
127250
Vessel heading
127251
Rate of Turn
127257
Attitude
127258
Magnetic Variation
127488
Engine parameters, rapid update
127489
Engine parameters, dynamic
127493
Transmission parameters, dynamic
127496
Trip parameters, Vessel
127497
Trip parameters, Engine
127498
Engine parameters, static
127503
AC Input status
127504
AC Output status
127505
Fluid level
127506
DC Detailed status
127507
Charger Status
127508
Battery status
127509
Inverter status
128259
Speed (water referenced)
128267
Water depth
128275
Distance log
129025
Position, rapid update
129026
COG and SOG, rapid update
129029
GNSS position data
129033
Time and date
129038
AIS Class A position report
129039
AIS Class B position report
129040
AIS Class B extended position report
129041
AIS Aids to Navigation (AToN) report
129044
Datum
NMEA 2000 sentences
451
Message number 129283 129284 129291 129301 129539 129540 129542 129545 129550 129551 129793 129794 129798 129801 129802 129808 129809 129810 130306 130310 130311 130312 130313 130314 130576 130577 130578
Message description Cross track error Navigation data Set and drift, rapid update Time to or from mark GNSS DOPs GNSS Sats in view GNSS pseudorange noise statistics GNSS RAIM output GNSS differential correction receiver interface GNSS differential correction receiver signal AIS UTC and date report AIS Class A static and voyage related data AIS SAR aircraft position report AIS Addressed safety related message AIS Safety related broadcast message DSC call information AIS class B "CS" static data report, part A AIS class B "CS" static data report, part B Wind data Environmental parameters Environmental parameters Temperature Humidity Actual pressure Small craft status Direction data Vessel speed components
PGN 127489 - Support engine alarms The following engine alarms are supported. Engine Error Check Engine Over Temperature Low Oil Pressure Low Oil Level Low Fuel Pressure Low System Voltage Low Coolant Level Water Flow Water in Fuel Charge Indicator High Boost Pressure Rev Limit Exceeded
452
Transmit
Receive
Bridged to NMEA 0183
a Series / c Series / e Series
EGR System Throttle Position Sensor Engine Emergency Stop Mode Warning Level 1 Warning Level 2 Power Reduction Maintenance Needed Engine Comm Error Sub or Secondary Throttle Neutral Start Protect Engine Shutting Down unknown error
NMEA 2000 sentences
453
Appendix E Switch panel application
Vessel control and monitoring systems When integrated with a vessel control and monitoring system your multifunction display can provide monitoring and controls for your power circuits, breakers, switches and equipment. The Switch Panel application can be used to: · Show the status of power circuits, breakers,
switches and other equipment. · Apply power to each circuit individually. · Reset tripped breakers. · Control power to individual equipment. · Alert users to a tripped circuit.
Vessel control and monitoring system connection The multifunction display can connect to and control an EmpirBus NXT vessel control and monitoring system.
1
Switch panel configuration
The switch panel application must be configured.
A Configuration file can be obtained from the system supplier.
Loading a configuration file
The switch panel application will only be available when a valid configuration file has been loaded. 1. Obtain the configuration file from the system
supplier. 2. Save the configuration file to the root directory of
your memory card. 3. Insert the memory card into the card reader on
your multifunction display. 4. From the homescreen select Set-up. 5. Select System Settings. 6. Select External Devices. 7. Select Switch Panel Set-up. 8. Select Install Config File. 9. If prompted select the memory card slot that
contains your configuration file. The file browser is opened. 10. Select the configuration file. 11. Select OK.
You can now add the Switch panel application from the Customize menu on the homescreen.
Note: If your multifunction display only has 1 card slot then step 9 is skipped.
2
Switch panel overview
The switch panel application is used to monitor and
3
control compatible vessel control and monitoring
systems. The pages and page layouts and vessel
schematics are configured at installation and are
4
unique for each vessel. The images below are
examples.
Example 1 -- Switch panel mode page
5
1 2 3 4 5
12 V dc
D12738-1
Raymarine multifunction display.
EmpirBus NXT DCM (dc module).
SeaTalkng to DeviceNet adaptor cable.
EmpirBus NXT MCU (Master control unit).
12 V dc supply into backbone.
Note: Ensure your vessel control and monitoring system has been installed in accordance with the instructions provided with the system.
454
If configured a Mode page provides controls to switch between pre-configured modes.
In the example above selecting a mode icon will place the system into the selected mode.
You can cycle through available pages to monitor or control switches and configured groups of switches.
Example 2 -- Vessel controls page
a Series / c Series / e Series
1
2
3
4
5
6
D12739-1
1
Toggle switch.
2
Rotary (multi-state) switch.
3
Position control switch.
4
Momentary switch.
5
Data item (dial gauge).
6
Data item (tank level).
Using the switches on a Touchscreen This only applies to HybridTouch displays.
From the switch panel application:
1. Toggle switch -- Select the switch to switch on or off.
2. Rotary control -- Selecting the rotary control will cycle through its available states.
3. Position Control -- Select and hold on a direction to move.
4. Momentary switch -- Select the switch to activate.
5. Dimmer switch -- Select and then drag the control to adjust the value.
Using the switches
From the switch panel application: 1. Use the Joystick to highlight the relevant switch. 2. Toggle switch -- Press Ok to switch on or off. 3. Rotary control -- Pressing Ok will cycle through
its available states. 4. Position Control -- Press Ok and use the
Joystick to move direction. 5. Momentary switch -- Press Ok to activate. 6. Dimmer switch -- Press Ok on the switch and
use the Rotary Control to adjust the value, then select back to exit adjust mode.
Resetting a tripped circuit
When a circuit is tripped a pop-up message will be displayed on-screen providing details of the tripped circuit and options, the circuit will also be identified as tripped in the switch panel pages.
1. With a tripped circuit pop-up message displayed select Reset. to reset the tripped circuit, or
2. Select the switch on a switch panel page to reset the tripped switch.
Note: Performing multiple resets risks causing damage to your system so if a trip persists check the main circuits.
Switch panel application
455
Appendix F Software releases
Raymarine regularly updates its multifunction display software to introduce improvements, additional hardware support and user interface features. The table below details some of the important enhancements and which software revision they were introduced with.
Software version
Applicable product Multifunction displays
manual
compatibility
Changes
LightHouse II -- V12.xx
8133712
a65 / a65 Wi-Fi / a67 / a67 Wi-Fi a68 / a68 Wi-Fi / a75 / a75 Wi-Fi / a77 / a77 Wi-Fi / a78 / a78 Wi-Fi / a95 / a97 / a98 / a125 / a127 / a128 / c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165
· Added support for up to 2 radar scanners on the same network.
· Added support for displaying up to 4 camera feeds using Quad View.
· Added support in the Radar application for extreme latitudes up to 82 degrees north.
· Added `Battery Charge' data item and changed `RPM & Speed' data item to `RPM & SOG' in the Data application.
· Increased support for number of batteries to 16.
LightHouse II -- V11.26
8133711
a65 / a65 Wi-Fi / a67 / a67 Wi-Fi a68 / a68 Wi-Fi / a75 / a75 Wi-Fi / a77 / a77 Wi-Fi / a78 / a78 Wi-Fi / a95 / a97 / a98 / a125 / a127 / a128 / c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165
· Added support for the CP200 SideVisionTM sonar module.
· New Alarm Manager with new NMEA 2000 alarm support (providing alarm history, a list of active alarms and ability to change alarm settings all from the alarm manager).
· Added Autorouting feature to assist when route building with compatible Navionics® cartography.
· Display preferences now shared with display products over SeaTalkng.
· Added ability to display Radar overlay using stable COG when Heading is not available.
· When acknowledged, the Limitations of Use screen now dismisses globally on all networked MFDs.
· Added support for Hebrew User Interface language.
· Added ability to switch off the Waypoint arrival alarm.
· Added Minimum Safe Depth setting under Boat Details and included in the Start-up wizard.
LightHouse II -- V10.41
8133710
a65 / a65 Wi-Fi / a67 / a67 Wi-Fi a68 / a68 Wi-Fi / a75 / a75 Wi-Fi / a77 / a77 Wi-Fi / a78 / a78 Wi-Fi / a95 / a97 / a98 / a125 / a127 / a128 / c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165
· Support for the GPS/GLONASS function for the built-in module and the external GA150 GPS/GLONASS antenna accessory for the new a Series a9x & a12x display products.
· Increase of the internal GPS refresh to 5 Hz for the existing a, c & e Series Multifunction display products.
· Add Multifunction display network compatibility with v3.xx software of CP300 & CP450C sounder modules
LightHouse II -- V10.34
8133710
456
a65 / a65 Wi-Fi / a67 / a67 Wi-Fi a68 / a68 Wi-Fi / a75 / a75 Wi-Fi / a77 / a77 Wi-Fi / a78 / a78 Wi-Fi / c95 / c97 / c125
New Fishfinder application
· Support for multiple active sonar modules on the network
· Ability to display multiple sonar channels simultaneously using spliatsScerreieesn/ pc aSgeeriess / e Series
Software version
LightHouse II -- V9.45
V8.52
Applicable product manual
Multifunction displays compatibility
/ c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165
Changes
· Ability to create custom sonar channel profiles
· New sonar module specific Fishfinder simulator
· Corrected (reversed) TVG control on CP450C to match all sonar modules
· Switch panel alarms can now be enabled/disabled globally across the network
· Added horizontal splitscreen template for 5.7 and 7 inch MFDs
· Added support for Navionics Sonar Log depth recording
· Added support for Navionics Plotter Sync mobile chart updates
· Updated SiriusXM NOAA Marine Zone Boundaries updates for April 1st 2014
· AIS dangerous target alarm defaults to Off in Simulator mode and cannot be enabled.
· Added additional language support for Czech and Slovenian
813379 813379
a65 / a65 Wi-Fi / a67 / a67 Wi-Fi a68 / a68 Wi-Fi / a75 / a75 Wi-Fi / a77 / a77 Wi-Fi / a78 / a78 Wi-Fi / c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165
· LightHouse II Graphics refresh · Added hide databar option · Added support for LightHouse charts · Waypoint management improvements · Chart and Radar application menu
improvements
· Added support for multiple sonars
· Added estimated time of arrival for Routes
· Added NM & m to distance units
· Added digital widget to Switch panel app
· Added support for DSC over NMEA 2000
· Added support for Navionics Gold chip encryption
· Updated Japanese limitations of use statement
· Added support for multi-touch gesture on a Series displays
a65 / a65 Wi-Fi / a67 / a67 Wi-Fi a68 / a68 Wi-Fi / a75 / a75 Wi-Fi / a77 / a77 Wi-Fi / a78 / a78 Wi-Fi / c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165
· Added support for ECI-100 (Engine Identification Wizard)
Software releases
457
Software version V7.43
V6.27 V5.27
458
Applicable product manual 813377
813376 813375
Multifunction displays compatibility a65 / a65 Wi-Fi / a67 / a67 Wi-Fi / c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165
a65 / a65 Wi-Fi / a67 / a67 Wi-Fi / c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165
a65 / a67 / c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127 / e165
Changes
· Added User manual shortcut to Homescreen.
· Added IP camera record, playback and image capture to Camera application.
· Added support for Evolution autopilots
· Added Pilot bar.
· Added support for T200 Series fixed mount thermal cameras.
· Added support for CP100 and CP300 sonar modules.
· Added additional data types to data application.
· Improved dial graphics in Data application.
· Improved menu layouts in Chart and Radar applications.
· Added support for RMK-9 remote keypad.
· Added feature to allow simultaneous software update of networked displays and keypads.
· Improved engine support for fuel manager.
· Add feature to allow choice of startup page.
· Moved Cartography menu to Homescreen Setup menu.
· Removed compatibility mode (for E-Wide and G Series compatibility).
· Added Pilot Standby function to power button for displays that do not have a pilot button.
· Addition of Sirius audio application.
· Addition of Fusion link application.
· Addition of Switch panel application.
· New homescreen application icons
· Changed Chart navigation to include vessel position to target WPT and original position to target WPT lines.
· Added Icelandic and Bulgarian language support.
· Addition of Fuel Manager including: Estimated fuel remaining, distance to empty and time to empty calculations, fuel used and fuel economy data, fuel range rings in the Chart application and low fuel alarm).
· Addition of Document (pdf) Viewer application.
· Addition of Slew to Cue (Auto slew thermal camera to AIS, MARPA or MOB targets).
· Support for multiple thermal camera JCUs.
· Thermal cameras OSD menu options now available directly from Thermal Camera application's menu.
· Video application now called Camera application.
· Support for networked IP cameras in the Camera application.
a Series / c Series / e Series
Software version V4.32 V3.15
Applicable product manual
813374 813373
Multifunction displays compatibility
c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127
c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127
Changes
· Ability to automatically cycle through available video / camera feeds in the Camera application.
· Support for up to 5 engines in the Data application.
· Improved engine data selection in the Data application.
· Support for detailed engine warning alarms.
· Addition of on-screen range controls to the Weather application
· Ability to view images saved to MicroSD card from the homescreen My Data menu.
· Addition of Demo Video mode for retail.
· Ability to record live bus messages (NMEA 0183 and SeaTalkng to MicroSD card.
· Addition of on-screen range controls to the Chart & Radar applications.
· Addition of on-screen Gain, Rain & Sea controls to Radar application.
· Addition of on-screen Gain & TVG controls to Sonar application.
· Addition of slider bar control adjustment.
· Addition of new numeric adjustment controls.
· Improved Power Key shortcuts to Brightness and Capture Screen image options
· Added support for Raymarine CP450C CHIRP Sonar Module.
· Added support for AIS feature support for STEDS EAIS integration & display of SAR aircraft & SART devices.
· Added limited support for Sirius Marine Weather Module.
· Added Standby / PowerSave Mode.
· Added support for RayRemote and RayControl Applications.
· Enhanced home screen customize option permitting 9 and 12 inch MFDs to view up to 4 applications on a single page.
· Default Fuel data page added.
· Added Arabic language support.
· Inclusion of Remote Upgrade Utility to permit the upload of software to peripheral Raymarine products using SeaTalkng / SeaTalkhs.
· Display of Aids To Navigation (AToNs) AIS targets when data received on either SeaTalkng or NMEA 0183.
· Added 1kW transducer support added to MFDs featuring internal ClearPulse Digital Sounder circuitry (i.e. c97/c127/e7D/e97/e127 MFDs) transducer output limited to 600W.
Software releases
459
Software version V2.10 V1.11
Applicable product manual
813371
813321
Multifunction displays compatibility
c95 / c97 / c125 / c127 / e7 / e7D / e95 / e97 / e125 / e127
e7 / e7D
Changes
· Corrected the ability to select Tide and/or Current Station using the Find Nearest feature.
· Added NMEA 0183 & SeaTalkng data monitors to the diagnostics features.
· Increased touch area for Alarm pop-ups and Back buttons.
· Cartography redraw performance has been improved when sharing cartography via the SeaTalkhs/RayNet network.
· Added support to display fuel flow rate.
· Addition of NMEA 0183 and SeaTalkng data buffer diagnostics.
· Improvements to databar customization.
· Ability to manually change the aspect ratio of the Video application.
· Initial software release.
460
a Series / c Series / e Series
Appendix G Multifunction display compatibility
The table below identifies the MFD software version required to support the listed Raymarine® hardware.
CP450C
V3.15
Raymarine mobile applications V3.15
1kW transducer support for sonar V3.15 variant displays
Multiple thermal camera JCU's V5.27
Sirius weather receiver
V6.27
Fusion entertainment
V6.27
Digital Switching
V6.27
Evolution autopilots
V7.43
T200 fixed mount thermal cameras
V7.43
CP100
V7.43
CP300
V7.43
RMK-9 remote keypad
V7.43
ECI-100
V8.52
LightHouse Charts
V9.45 -- LightHouse II
Multiple sonar support (1 active) V9.45 -- LightHouse II
CP100 software V10.06 support V10.41 -- LightHouse II
CP300 software V4.04 support V10.41 -- LightHouse II
CP450C software V4.04 support V10.41 -- LightHouse II
Multiple active sonar modules V10.41 -- LightHouse II
CP200 SideVisionTM
V11.26 -- LightHouse II
CAM200IP
V12.xx -- LightHouse II
Dual Radar scanner support
V12.xx -- LightHouse II
Multifunction display compatibility
461
462
a Series / c Series / e Series
www.raymarine.com
Arbortext 5.4 FILEminimizer PDF